Final Mechanical Specs

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Smart Square Real Estate Company
SMART SQUARE PROJECT
Volume 2
Mechanical Specifications
Part 3 of 4
September 2020 G
September 2020 Smart Square Project
Specifications
SMART SQUARE PROJECT

RIYADH – KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA
SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENT
Mechanical Specifications
Section 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties
Section 21 05 00 Common Work Results For Fire Suppression
Section 21 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loop for Fire Suppression
Section 21 05 19 Meters and Gauges for Fire Suppression
Section 21 05 23 General Duty Valves for Fire Suppression
Section 21 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression
Section 21 05 48 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control
Section 21 05 53 Identification for Fire Suppression System
Section 21 08 00 Testing and Commissioning
Section 21 11 00 Fire Suppression Piping
Section 21 12 26 Fire Suppression Valve and Hose Cabinet
Section 21 13 13 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System
Section 21 13 30 High Pressure Water Mist System
Section 22 05 00 General Mechanical Requirements for Plumbing
Section 22 05 23 General Duty Valves for Plumbing
Section 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
Section 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping
Section 22 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for Plumbing
Section 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation
Section 22 11 13 Facility Water Distribution Piping
Section 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping and Fittings
Section 22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps
Section 22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage
Section 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 22 14 00 Facility Storm Drainage
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami Table of Contents
i
Specifications
Section 22 14 29 Sump Pumps
Section 22 33 30 Domestic Water Heaters
Section 22 33 31 Solar Electrical Water Heaters
Section 22 40 00 Sanitary Fixtures
Section 22 51 00 Swimming Pool Plumbing System
Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC
Section 23 05 23 General Duty Valves for HVAC
Section 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping
Section 23 05 53 Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping
Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
Section 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation
Section 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC
Section 23 11 00 Facility Fuel Piping
Section 23 12 00 Facility Fuel Pumps
Section 23 13 00 Facility Fuel-Storage Tanks
Section 23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps
Section 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
Section 23 25 00 HVAC Water treatment
Section 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casing
Section 23 33 00 Air Ducts Accessories
Section 23 34 00 HVAC Fans
Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units
Section 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets
Section 23 38 00 Ventilation Hood
Section 23 40 00 Air Cleaning Devices
Section 23 51 00 Breeching, Chimneys and Stacks
Section 23 56 00 Solar Energy Heating Equipment
Section 23 64 26 Rotary Screw Water Chillers
Section 23 72 00 Air to Air Energy Recovery Equipment
Section 23 73 10 Air Handling Units
Section 23 81 00 Decentralized HVAC Equipment
Section 23 81 11 Precision AC Unit
Section 25 00 00 Building Management System
______________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami Table of Contents
ii
SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1GENERAL………………………………………………………………………….….1
1.01 APPROVALS…………………………………………………………............................1
1.02 REQUIREMENTS…………………………………………………………………….. . 1
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS…………………………………………………………... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 2
2.01 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS……………………………………………… ... 2
PART - 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 2
3.01 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES……………………………………………………..... 2
Khatib & alami FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 Approvals
A. No items shall be installed in breach of any of the existing local Fire Department
regulations. In all access, however, installation shall comply with National Fire Codes
(NFPA latest editions), or indicated otherwise.
1.02 Requirements
A. Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings all materials specified as per the
capacities and ratings indicated on the drawings.
B. All gaseous fire suppression systems shall have zero Ozone Depletion Potential
(ODP=0).
1.03 Codes and Standards

A. Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be the National Fire Protection
Association code (NFPA) in addition to the local fire department regulations, unless
otherwise specified. the performance/manufacturing standards of items mentioned in
this section shall conform to the applicable portions of the latest editions of the
following codes, standards and regulations.
Reference Code Abbreviation Applicable Title of Standard

Standard
1. Underwriters UL - -
Laboratories
2. National Fire NFPA 10 Standard for Potrable Fire
Protection Extinguishers
Association
3. National Fire NFPA 101 Life safety code
Protection
Association
Khatib & alami Fire Protection Specialities

10 44 00 - 1
Specifications
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Portable Fire Extinguishers

A. Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings portable fire extinguishers of the
B. Extinguisher shall be from ISO 9001, supplied from certified manufacturer,
rechargeable multipurpose ABC dry chemical type or CO2 type as shown on drawings.
C. Extinguisher shall be 6 kg rechargeable ABC multi-purpose dry chemical type or
carbon Dioxide
D. Heavy duty drawn steel cylinder with hard scratch resistant enamel finish with color as
per international fire regulations.
E. Unit shall be complete with a frame for hanging, to the wall, 36cm. long hose, discharge
valve and pressure gauge
F. Dry chemical unit cylinder shall be coated internally by electrostatic PVC risen, suction
tube of Aluminium.
G. CO2 extinguishers shall be seamless extruded of high grade steel. Extinguishers shall
have permanent leak proof shut-off safety disc and non-metallic horn.
Approved Manufacturers:
• Kidde ( USA )
• CHUBB ( USA )
• W.D. ALLEN ( USA )
• Or approved equal
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Maintenance Schedules

A. Maintenance schedules shall be provided with each type of extinguisher. The schedules
shall be in protective covers and shall detail all aspects of maintenance of extinguishers
including details of weight checks, pressure test, discharge tests, internal and external
visual checks, time periods for checks and action to be taken on finding a fault. The
schedules will also contain full details for repairing, recharging and resetting
extinguisher contents and re-ordering instructions.
END OF SECTION
Khatib & alami Fire Protection Specialities

10 44 00 - 2
SECTION 21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE
SUPRESSION
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANT
PART - 1GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 1
1.02 APPLICATION ................................................................................................................ 1
1.03 SCOPE OF WORKS ........................................................................................................ 1
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................... 2
1.05 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ........................................................... 2
1.06 APPROVALS ................................................................................................................... 2
1.07 ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 2
1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL ................ 2
1.09 APPROVED MATERIALS ............................................................................................. 3
1.10 ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................... 3
1.11 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................ 3
PART - 2EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 3
2.01 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ..................................................................................... 3
2.02 TESTS .............................................................................................................................. 3
2.03 COORDINATION OF TRADES..................................................................................... 4
2.04 PERMITS ......................................................................................................................... 4
Khatib & Alami Common Work Results For Fire Supression

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 General Requirements

A. The work of Division 21 shall be governed by general conditions of contract and
sections of Division – 21.
B. It is the Contractors responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the
requirements of the above documents, and further assure that all Subcontractors are
equally informed.
Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
Regulations & Specifications” for Volatile Organic Compounds, (VOCs) content limits.
1.02 Application
A. This section applies to and is part of all Sections of Division 21
1.03 Scope of Works

A. The works covered under this contract include the supply, installation, testing, adjusting
and putting into operation systems, components of systems, and individual items of
equipment, and work related thereto, in accordance with the project Tender Documents.
Products not mentioned but obviously necessary for the completion of those Works
shall be provided.
B. Any NFPA or Civil Defense requirement or approval shall be the Contractor
responsibility and shall be included in the Tender price and any future requirement
either shown on the drawings or specifications shall be done without any additional cost
implication to original contract.
C. All Firefighting works shall be carried out by Specialist approved by Civil Defense and
it is the Contractor responsibility to obtain Civil Defense drawings approval before the
work commence.
Piping shall be pitched to permit complete draining of the system.
D. Fire standpipe shall not be used in any way to provide water for other purposes.
E. All valves and risers shall be securely supported at each floor.
F. All valves and risers shall be located where readily accessible.
G. All local alarms shall be linked with the electrical fire control panel as shown on
drawings and or specified in such a way that whenever any local alarm is initiated, a
corresponding pilot and alarm shall be actuated on the main fire control panel to
indicate occurrence of fire in the particular zone.

21 05 00 - 1
Specifications
1.04 Quality Assurance
A. The manufacturers of all materials and equipment must have at least ten years of
experience in the design and manufacture of their products.
1.05 Related Works Specified Elsewhere

A. The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are included in
this Section in each applicable part, as if repeated herein verbatim.
Section 10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialists
Section 21 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and Loop for Fire Suppression Piping
Section 21 05 23 - General Duty Valves for Fire Suppression Piping
Section 21 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping
Section 21 05 48 - Sound, Vibration, Seismic Control for Fire Suppression Piping and
Equipment.
Section 21 05 53 - Identification for Fire Suppression System
Section 21 12 26 - Fire Suppression Valve and Hose Cabinet
Section 21 13 13 - Wet Pipe Sprinkler System
Section 21 22 00 - FM 200 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 21 30 00 - Fire Pumps
1.06 Approvals
A. No item shall be installed in breach of any of the existing local fire department
regulations. In all cases, however, installation shall comply with National Fire Codes
(NFPA Latest Edition) or indicated otherwise.
1.07 Engineer's Drawings

A. The Drawings are based on design and include general layouts and typical details of
various systems to be installed. The Contractor shall make the installations in a
workmanlike manner to conform to the structure, to avoid obstructions, to preserve head
room, and to keep openings and passage ways clear without additional instruction and
without additional cost to the owner.
1.08 Shop Drawings and Data to be submitted for Approval

A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings showing the exact routing and locations of
all the piping, ducting, equipment, etc., all in their respective locations and according to
the dimensions of the approved manufacturer. Shop Drawings scale shall be 1/10, 1/20,
1/50 and 1/100 as applicable and as approved by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall submit catalog cuts and brochures of products with reference to
proper paragraph in specifications. All submittals shall be bound in one Booklet.
C. The Contractor shall submit at the beginning of the project a schedule of submittals for
materials and shop drawings to the approval of the Engineer.

21 05 00 - 2
Specifications
1.09 Approved Materials
A. All materials shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements of the
Specifications.
B. The naming of manufacturers in the Specifications shall be strictly adhered to in all
circumstances.
C. Substitution of materials other than those named shall not be submitted.
D. Materials shall be delivered in unbroken packages bearing the brand and maker's name,
and shall be stored on platforms and properly covered to protect them from moisture,
heat and dust.
E. All materials shall be supplied from the main factories in the country of origin of the
manufacturer. Any deviation from this, like supplying equipment assembled in another
different country under a license or another name is not accepted unless approved by the
Engineer.
1.10 Abbreviations
A. The following abbreviations have been mentioned in the specifications.
ANSI American National Standard Institute.
ASA Acoustical Society of America, American Standards Association.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
AWWA American Water Work Association.
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.
BSI British Standards Institution.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
UL Under Writers Laboratories.
1.11 Workmanship
A. All workmanship required to accomplish the work mentioned in Mechanical
specification or shown on related Drawings, shall conform to the highest standards, and
as required by the Engineer.
B. The Engineer will be the sole judge of the standards required.
PART - 2 EXECUTION
2.01 Cleaning and Adjusting

A. All apparatus shall be thoroughly cleaned before being placed in operation. Finished
surfaces shall be restored if damaged and entire installation shall be delivered in perfect
condition, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.02 Tests
A. All piping and equipment shall be tested as specified under the corresponding section of

21 05 00 - 3
Specifications
the Specifications and to meet local and specified requirements. Labor, materials,
power, etc.., required for testing, shall be furnished by the Contractor, unless otherwise
indicated under the particular section of the Specifications.
B. Tests shall be performed in the presence of representatives of the Engineer and such
other parties that have legal jurisdiction and all results shall be recorded.
C. In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping systems only before connection of
fixtures, equipment and appliances. In no case shall any piping, fixtures, equipment or
appliances be subjected to pressures exceeding the ratings as prescribed by the
manufacturers of fixtures, equipment and appliances, or accepted engineering standards
for piping and fittings.
D. All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated
until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the approval of the
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction, and at no additional cost to the Employer.
E. Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and/or damaged materials replaced,
all to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and at no additional cost to the Employer.
F. The duration of tests shall be as determined by all parties having jurisdiction, but in no
case less than the time prescribed in each division of the Specifications.
G. The following tests should be furnished for but limited to the following Fire
Suppression System Test.
2.03 Coordination of Trades

A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work to ensure orderly, timely installations of the
work of applicable trades within the various spaces indicated.
2.04 Permits
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections and tests, for
the proper installation of his work, as may be required by the various administrative
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificates of inspections, tests etc., with the proper approval certified thereon, shall be
secured by the Contractor and these documents shall be delivered to the Engineer before
the work in question will be accepted.
C. After the pipe lines have been tested and approved, backfill shall be compacted
thoroughly by hand tampers below center lines of pipes and to at least 300mm above it.
No backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to cause damage or misalignment to the
pipes or protective coating if used. Backfill material under such conditions shall be
earth or gravel above the top of piping and hubs.
END OF SECTION

21 05 00 - 4
SECTION 21 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOP FOR FIRE
SUPPRESSION PIPING
Specifications
Table of Contents
PART - 1 GENERAL................................................................................................................... 1
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ............................................................. 1
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 2
2.01 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ............................................................................................ 2
Khatib & Alami Expansion Fittings And Loop For Fire Suppression Piping
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOP FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART - 1 GENERAL

A. Pipe bending shall not be resorted to except in extreme cases and only after the written
approval of the Engineer.
B. Piping shall be designed with Loops to take the thermal expansion. Wherever this is not
possible for physical reasons, expansion joints with guides shall be used.
C. Installation of pipes and fittings shall be complete with all cutting, patching and making
good of walls, slabs, partitions, etc., due to fixing, supporting and anchoring of pipes.
D. Pipes and fittings shall both be manufactured according to one single standard unit of
measurement, either both English or both metric.
1.02 Related Work Specified Elsewhere

Section 21 05 48 - Sound, Vibration, Seismic Control for Fire Suppression
Piping and Equipment.
Section 21 11 00 - Fire Suppression Piping
Section 21 13 13 - Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems
Section 21 22 00 - FM200 Fire Extinguishing Systems

21 05 16 - 1
Specifications
Reference Code Abbreviati Applicable Title of Standard
on Standard
Laboratories
2. National Fire NFPA 13 Standard for the installation of
Protection Association sprinkler system.
3. National Fire NFPA 14 Standard for the installation of

Protection Association standpipe and hose systems.
4. National Fire NFPA 101 Life safety code

Protection Association
5. American Water AWWA - -

Works Association
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Pipe Expansion Joints

A. Supply and install expansion joints wherever pipes cross structural expansion joints and
wherever required to prevent undue stresses caused by thermal expansion of the pipes.
B. Expansion joints shall be of the packless-bellow type with flanged or welded ends as
suitable for the pipe application.
C. Bellows shall be of stainless steel and suitable for a pressure of 125 psi (860 Kpa ) or
the design working pressure, whichever is greater. Expansion joints shall be provided
with guides to prevent any unnecessary misalignment of the pipe. Guides and anchor
arrangements shall be per the recommendations of the expansion joints manufacturers.
END OF SECTION
21 05 16 - 2
SECTION 21 05 19
METERS AND GAUGES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
SYSTEMS
Specifications
Table of Contents
PART - 1 GENERAL................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 APPROVALS ................................................................................................................... 1
1.02 REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCT................................................................................................................... 2
2.01 PRESSURE GAUGES ..................................................................................................... 2
2.02 FLOW METERS .............................................................................................................. 2
PART - 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) ..................................................................................... 2
Khatib & Alami Meters And Gauges For Fire Suppression Systems
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 05 19
METERS AND GAUGES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 Approvals
A. No items shall be installed in breach of any of the existing local Fire Department
regulations. In all access, however, installation shall comply with National Fire Codes
(NFPA latest editions).
1.02 Requirements
A. Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings all materials specified in the


A. Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards and
United States Codes, unless otherwise specified, the performance/manufacturing
standards of items mentioned in this section shall confirm to the applicable portions of
the latest editions of the following codes, standards and regulations.
Reference Code Abbreviation Applicable Title of

Standard Standard
1. Underwriters Laboratories UL - -
2. National Fire Protection NFPA - -

Association
21 05 19 - 1
Specifications
PART - 2 PRODUCT
2.01 Pressure Gauges

A. Bourdon-tube type with 120 mm. diameter cast aluminium case with moisture-proof
and dustproof blowout discs. Panel mounted gauges to have steel or aluminium hinged
rings; direct mounted gauges to have back flange, black numerals on a white
background face.
B. Pressure gauge shall be furnished with a lever-operated gauge cock, and shall have
snubbers installed between the gauge cock and the gauge to eliminate pulsations.
C. Bourdon Tube shall be Phosphor bronze, (beryllium copper bellows).
D. Socket shall be Stainless steel.
E. Accuracy shall be at least 1% of scale range, shall be equal to twice the rated working
pressure of the system, reading shall be in psi. and Kpa.
2.02 Flow Meters

A. Supply and install Factory Mutual approved flow meters at the pump test flow line, as
shown on drawings. The meter connections and cocks shall be carried well above the
line. Install the flow meters in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation, as
per Authority and Fire Department regulations. The water meter shall have data logging
capability and shall be connected to BMS.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
21 05 19 - 2
SECTION 21 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE
SUPPRESSION PIPING
Specifications
Table of Contents
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 2
2.01 FLOW SWITCH - ELECTRIC TYPE ............................................................................. 2
2.02 CHECK VALVE .............................................................................................................. 2
2.03 BRANCH ORIFICE ......................................................................................................... 2
Khatib & Alami General Duty Valves For Fire Suppression Piping
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART - 1 GENERAL

A. Drain valves shall be provided where necessary, where shown on the Drawings and at
all sectional valves to help draining the major part of the system. On all risers 4"
(100mm) or larger, drain valve shall be 2" (50 mm) size, on 2½" (65 mm) and 3"
(80mm) risers, 1¼" (32 mm) valves shall be used and on small risers, ¾" (20mm) drain
valves shall be provided.
B. All valves controlling the water supply shall be located where readily accessible.
C. Provision shall be made for test connections and valves.
D. Control power transformer as applicable to limit control voltage to 24 VDC maximum.



Standard
Laboratories
21 05 23 - 1
Specifications
2. National Fire Protection NFPA 13 Standard for the installation of

Association sprinkler system.
Association standpipe and hose systems.

Association stationary pumps for fire protection
5. American Water Works AWWA - -

Association
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Flow Switch - Electric Type

A. The water flow alarm device shall consist of an electrical switching device actuated by
means of a vane extending inside the pipe so designed that when water flows inside the
pipe the moving vane shall close the circuit in the motor switch which shall complete
the circuit and actuate an alarm.
B. Flow switch shall be microswitch type with DPST 15 Ampere 220 VAC, 50 Hz
contacts, adjustable retard mechanism, same size as pipe in which installed
2.02 Check Valve

A. Check valve shall be Ductile iron body to ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, and ASTM
A536, Grade 65-45-12, stainless steel spring and shaft, rated to 250 psi (1725 kPa) and
suitable for anti-water hammer service and horizontal or vertical installation.
B. Check valve size 2 1/2"-3" (DN65-DN80) PPS coated, aluminum bronze non-slam
tilting disc with EPDM seal, and Underwriters Laboratories Listed.
C. Check valve size 4"-12" (DN100-DN300) - Black enamel painted body with integrally
welded on nickel alloy seat, EPDM encapsulated ductile iron disc, Underwriters
Laboratories Listed and Factory Mutual Approved.
2.03 Branch Orifice

A. Branch Orifice Plate should be installed as required by NFPA.
B. Select orifice flange for circuit flow range and minimum pressure drop across the
orifice.
C. Orifice type of flow station to be inserted between flanges. Cast iron body suitable for
operating pressures to 2069 kPa at 121oC. Readout valves of brass construction with
integral EPT check valve. Calibration plate mounted on unit.
END OF SECTION
21 05 23 - 2
SECTION 21 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE
SUPPRESSION PIPING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1
1.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES - GENERAL .................... 1
1.03 HORIZONTAL PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE .......................................................... 2
1.04 VERTICAL PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE ................................................................ 2
Khatib & Alami Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART - 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and it’s
requirements.

Section 21 13 39 - Foam Fire Extinguishing System
1.02 Hangers and Supports, Anchors and Guides - General

A. Installation material used for supporting and fixing mechanical pipe systems should be
of a modern flexible type that gives a tested and reliable supporting solution without the
need for welding, drilling or subsequent galvanizing for corrosion protection.
B. Supporting system should provide easy access and disassembly for future maintenance,
and shall be product of well-known manufacturer.
C. Contractor should provide shop drawings and load calculations to verify the suitability
of the system for critical load applications as per the Engineer and the Owner’s
Representative’s requirement.
D. Support, anchor and guide all piping to preclude failure or deformation. Construct and
install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and accessories to the approval of the
Engineer. Do not use wire, tape or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to support
weight of pipe, weight of fluid and weight of pipe insulation.
E. Fasten piping securely to the structure without overstressing any portion of the supports
or the structure itself. Secure pipe supports, anchors and guides to concrete by means of
inserts or if greater load carrying capacity is required by means of steel fishplates
embedded in the concrete.
F. Arrange hanger to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building and
supports.
21 05 29 - 1
Specifications
G. Support piping and tubing at intervals indicated in the schedule hereinafter and at all
changes in direction. Maximum deflection shall not exceed 3 mm.
H. Furnish pipe hangers and supports complete with rods, bolts, lock nuts, swivels,
couplings, brackets and all other components and accessories, to allow installation to
freely expand and contract.
I. Hangers shall be formed steel clevis type, unless otherwise specified, with adjustable
attachment to hanger rod.
J. Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for clevis type hanger, provide
steel pipe clamps.
K. Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the same
level. Trapeze shall be of steel channel sized to support load and drilled for rod hanger
at each end. Provision should be made to keep the lines in their relative position to each
other by the use of either clamps or clips.
L. Use roller supports, where provision for expansion is required. Rollers shall have cast
iron adjustable bases.
M. For hanger rods on piping 3/8" (10 mm) thru 2" (50 mm) inclusive use 3/8" (10 mm)
rods, and for piping 2 ½" (65 mm) thru 5" (125 mm) use 5/8" (16 mm) rods, and for
piping 6"(150 mm) thru 12" (300 mm) use 7/8" (22 mm) rods.
N. Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with
special conditions, or where vertical or horizontal structural steel supports are required
other than those provided in the structure.
O. Provide lateral bracing for supporting rods over 450mm. long braced at every fourth
hanger with diagonal bracing attached to slab or beam.
P. For supporting horizontal piping from wall provide steel J-Hook for pipe located close
to wall and not larger than 3" (80 mm) pipe. For greater loads, up to 1500 lbs (680 Kg)
maximum loading provide welded steel bracket.
1.03 Horizontal Piping Support Schedule

A. The maximum spacing for horizontal pipe supports shall be as recommended by the
Pipe Manufacturer.
B. For fire protection piping:
.1” & 1¼” (25 & 32 mm) steel pipe ------------------------ 2.5 meter.
.1½” – 8” (40 – 200 mm) steel pipe ------------------------ 3 meter.
.1½” (40 mm) PVC pipe ------------------------------------- 1.2 meter.
.2” (50 mm) PVC pipe --------------------------------------- 1.5 meter.
.2½” (65 mm) PVC pipe ------------------------------------- 1.5 meter.
.3” (80 mm) PVC pipe --------------------------------------- 1.8 meter.
1.04 Vertical Piping Support Schedule

A. The maximum spacing for vertical pipe supports shall be as recommended by the Pipe
Manufacturer.
B. Vertical spacing of other pipes - at every floor level.
END OF SECTION
21 05 29 - 2
SECTION 21 05 48
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC
CONTROL FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART – 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 1
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................. 2
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .............................................. 2
1.06 GUARANTEE.................................................................................................................. 3
1.07 ACOUSTIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS AND SPECIFICATION .......................... 3
1.08 SPECIFIED NOISE LEVELS.......................................................................................... 3
1.09 NOISE ATTENUATION ................................................................................................. 4
1.10 VIBRATION CONTROL ................................................................................................ 4
1.11 VIBRATION ISOLATION, STRUCTURAL NOISE AND EQUIPMENT BASES ..... 4
1.12 PIPING SYSTEM VIBRATION ISOLATORS .............................................................. 5
PART – 2 PRODUCTS................................................................................................................. 5
2.01 ISOLATION HANGERS ................................................................................................. 5
2.02 ISOLATION MOUNTS ................................................................................................... 5
2.03 CONCRETE FOUNDATION BLOCKS ......................................................................... 6
2.04 INERTIA BASES............................................................................................................. 6
PART – 3 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................. 6
3.01 NOISE TESTS ................................................................................................................. 6
3.02 VIBRATION TESTS ....................................................................................................... 6
3.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PERFORMANCE TEST ............................................... 7
Khatib & Alami Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control

for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 05 48
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR Fire Suppression
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
[This part shall be read in conjunction with Acoustic Specialist Report Specifications in case
applicable. Any discrepancies between the contents of this section and the acoustic specialist report,
the report specifications shall take precedence].
PART - 1 GENERAL

A. The work shall include the supply, installation and testing of a complete system of noise
and vibration isolation to dampen and eliminate all structural borne vibration and air
noise produced by the electro-mechanical equipment as described herein below and as
detailed on the Drawings. Supporting reports and documents with a full noise/vibration
analysis study, recommendation and implementation plan from a recognized approved
acoustic specialist/subcontractor shall be submitted to the consultant for approval. Such
study shall be submitted at the time the equipment are submitted for approval. The cost
of the study, implementation, erection, and any rectification to the design shall be done
at the contractors own price and without additional cost to the contract value.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for Employment of noise and vibration treatment
specialist.
C. The Contractor shall supply and install all materials as required by the specialist for
noise and vibration treatment who will be responsible for the performance of these
materials.
D. The Noise & Vibration Control Specialist shall be responsible for collecting data from
both the builder and the MEP Contractor and also measuring and getting the reading for
the noise level in the spaces as specified in the presence of the Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall submit a detailed report showing all data, recommended material,
shop drawings and levels of treatment.

A. The Contractor shall consider all necessary measures to determine the actual surface
area to be acoustically treated. Acoustic calculations sheets along with the Contractor's
proposals shall be provided, clearly showing that the specified “Reverberation Time”
(RT) will be achieved by using the type of acoustic treatment, for the approval of the
Engineer.
B. The Acoustic Specialist/ Sub-Contractor should have successfully supplied, installed
and completed similar projects for a period of not less than 10 years.
1.03 Reference Standards

A. All systems and equipment shall be selected and installed to meet the required noise
criteria specified herein. Where items are not covered then ASHRAE Guide shall be
taken as the reference.
B. Reference Standards shall conform to the following performance criteria determined by

21 05 48 - 1
Specifications
testing full assemblies (component tests are unacceptable) of identical materials and
construction, using factory standard finishes in accordance with relevant codes and
standards.
C. Fire Performance Characteristics:
1. Provide panels with surface burning characteristics to UBC42-2 and ASTM
E-84 by a testing organization approved by the Engineer.
UBC42-2 Fire Hazard Classification Acceptable
ASTM E84 Fire Hazard Classification Class-A
Flame Spread 25 or less
Smoke development 450 or less
D. Acoustics Performance Characteristics
1. Provide acoustic materials with acoustical absorption characteristics as specified
elsewhere by a testing organization acceptable to Engineer. Approved testing
authority must be independent of the manufacturer.
E. Toxicity Characteristics
1. Acoustic materials used in the project should have toxicity characteristics in
accordance with article 15, Part 1120 of the New York state uniform fire
prevention and building code MEA classification ME 123-92-M
1.04 Submittals
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit to the Engineer, three (3) complete sets of shop drawings prepared on
CAD. (Hand produced drawings shall not be acceptable). The drawings shall show
all necessary details and dimensions required which will subsequently be field
verified and revised as required for the Engineer’s approval.
B. Samples
1. Submit two (2 sets) of the manufacturers samples, 2# samples per set. Each
individual panel (wall and ceiling) to be actual size with relevant fixing
components for the approval of the Engineer. Product shall be original production
material in fabric or vinyl finish as specified.
C. Certification
1. Submit a certificate of compliance to specify acoustical and fire performance
criteria as per this specification, signed by the manufacturer. Attach independent
laboratory test results, showing that the products supplied as complete assemblies
meeting or exceeding the specified requirements.
D. Manufacturers Approval
1. The acoustic sub-contractor supplying and installing the material shall be an
approved agent of the manufacturer. The manufacturer will certify that said
contractor is an officially appointed agent having sufficient experience and
expertise to complete the project in a satisfactory manner.
E. Single Source
1. All materials as for as possible shall be from a single supplier.
1.05 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Deliver fabricated units and related components to the site for installation to meet a

21 05 48 - 2
Specifications
reasonable schedule and to suit the approved project construction programme. On-site
storage shall be such as to ensure that all panels and associated materials are protected
from damage and the outside elements.
B. Prior to installation the site must be free of wet and dusty trades and the climatic
conditions stabilized to normal operational levels. Acoustic elements shall be allowed to
stabilize on site 24 hours prior to installation.
1.06 Guarantee
A. The sub-contractor shall furnish in the Client’s name, a written guarantee covering the
product supplied against defects in materials and workmanship under normal operating
conditions for a period of one year from the date of completion of acoustic works. The
Contractor shall pass on to the owner any and all guarantees provided by the
manufacturers and acoustic sub-contractor of individual members of the system before
the completion of the project.
B. Provide to the Engineer in the Client’s name, sound test results. Sound test results
should comply with this specification, which is to achieve the indicated Reverberation
Times (RT). The sound test is to form an integral part of the specialist acoustic sub-
contractors scope of work.
1.07 Acoustic Design Considerations and Specification

A. It will be the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the internal acoustic ambient
levels are in accordance with this specification.
B. Where the contractor fails to meet these specifications he will be expected at his own
cost, to carry out all remedial work necessary to remedy the situation.
C. The contractor shall supply and fit acoustic insulation and noise attenuator units
where necessary to achieve the following noise criteria as indicated in Table 1.
D. It will be the mechanical services sub-contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the noise
generated by the plant, including airborne noise through the structure and vibration do
not exceed the noise criteria levels for the various types of areas specified.
1.08 Specified Noise Levels

A. The optimum NC noise levels for the various spaces shall be as detailed below:-
Table 1 – Noise Criteria Levels
Internal Design Noise Level in dB

Room Description
Leq,T
Open Plan Offices NC 35 – 40
Cellular Offices NC 30 – 35
Office Corridors / Circulation Areas NC 35 – 40
Meeting Rooms, Boardrooms and Function
NC 30 – 35
Halls
Video/Tele Conferencing Rooms NC 25 – 30
Classrooms NC 30 – 35
Library NC 30 – 35

21 05 48 - 3
Specifications

Room Description
Leq,T
Prayer Rooms NC 30 – 35
Restaurants, F&B NC 35 – 40
Kitchen NC 45 – 50
Lobby / Reception Areas / Lounges NC 35 – 40
Public Toilets/Changing NC 40 – 45
Base Building (Core) Circulation/Corridor NC 35 – 40
Parking NC 55 – 60
70 dB LAmax @ 1m from all
Basement M&E rooms
equipment
B. The noise and vibration measurement time parameter (T) shall be representative of the
source being measured and at least 1 minute for steady-state noise and vibration
sources. If sources are intermittent or cyclic in nature, the noise and vibration
measurements shall be of sufficient duration to capture 10 cycles of the source.
C. During periodic testing of equipment, such as emergency generators, fire fighting
pumps, a temporary relaxation in the above-stated noise criteria of NC/NR 10 or 10
dBA shall be permitted.
D. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that the above levels are
achieved and to demonstrate and certify that the same have been achieved.
1.09 Noise Attenuation

A. The Contractor shall supply and fix acoustic insulation and sound attenuators where
necessary and as shown on drawings to reduce the noise generated by the firefighting
equipment so that the specified noise criteria levels are satisfied.
1.10 Vibration Control

A. All fire fighting equipment shall be analysed for vibration and for noise breakout to
areas adjacent and above or below to ensure that the specified noise criteria ratings are
net.
1.11 Vibration Isolation, Structural Noise and Equipment Bases

A. The contractor shall be responsible and include for the supply, installation and testing of
the complete system necessary for vibration isolation to dampen and eliminate all
structure borne vibration generated by the electro-mechanical equipment as described in
this specification and as detailed on the scheme drawings.
B. It is the Contractors responsibility to carry out a full vibration and structure borne noise
study as detailed in the mechanical specifications.
C. Vibration isolators shall be used where required to dampen and eliminate all structural
borne vibration
D. The vibration isolators shall be positioned in accordance with the manufacturer
recommendations for the equipment load distribution.
E. The equipment shall be loaded exactly over or between the mounts without any
overhang.

21 05 48 - 4
Specifications
F. The static deflection of the vibration isolators shall be determined by the specialist
acoustic engineer, but should not, be less than that recommended by CIBSE GUIDE or
ASHRAE handbook.
G. The vibration isolators shall be treated against corrosion. The steel components shall be
PVC coated. The nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc-electro plated.
1.12 Piping System Vibration Isolators

A. All piping connected to rotating machinery shall be supported by hangers and supports
including vibration isolators and shall be connected to the equipment by means of
acoustic flexible connectors.
B. The first three hangers from the equipment should provide the same deflection as the
equipment isolators; the remaining hangers should be spring or combination spring and
rubber incorporating a spring with at least 19 mm deflection.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Isolation Hangers

A. Isolation hangers shall be used for suspended pipes and equipment.
B. Isolation hangers are rubber or springs or a combination of both.
C. Rubber Hangers
Shall be of the rubber-in-shear type. It shall consist of:

a. A high grade rubber block with suspension rod and an outside steel housing.
b. The steel housing will be anchored to the ceiling slab and the suspension rod shall
support the equipment.
c. The rubber shall be protected against corrosion due to oil or other damaging agents.
D. Spring Hangers
1. Shall be of the open mounting type and shall consist of a steel spring between a top
and bottom plate with an adjustment bolt or leveling.
2. The spring should be designed to provide horizontal stiffness at least 75% of
vertical stiffness to assure stability, 50% travel beyond rated load and safe solid
stresses.
2.02 Isolation Mounts

A. Isolation mounts shall be used between equipment and concrete base and at the loading
points of the equipment as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Rubber Mounts
1. Shall be of the rubber-in-shear type with a cub shape or integrated ribbed rubber
pad.
2. The pad shall have two bolt holes for isolator anchorage to concrete base.
3. Rubber mounts shall not be used for deflection requirements larger than 8 mm.
C. Spring Mounts
1. Shall be of the restrained steel spring mountings and shall incorporate hold down
bolts to limit vertical movement.

21 05 48 - 5
Specifications
2. The isolator shall include an acoustical barrier of rubber pad bonded to the base
plate to prevent transmission of very high frequency vibration and noise and be
corrosion protected when installed outdoors.
2.03 Concrete Foundation Blocks

A. A reinforced concrete foundation block or concrete inertia base for each piece of
equipment shall be constructed of minimum thickness as shown on the Drawings, with a
minimum weight equal to at least two times that of the equipment and in accordance
with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer and/or vibration specialist.
Bases shown on drawings or included in these specifications represent the minimum
requirements of the Engineer.
2.04 Inertia Bases

A. Each water pump shall be supported on an Inertia base. Base shall be consist of pre-
engineered welded steel frames suitable for concrete pouring, welded-in-concrete
reinforcement, equipment mounting bolts and vibration isolator brackets. Base shall
mount on spring vibration isolators which shall be of high deflection, free standing, un-
housed large diameter, laterally stable steel springs assembled into an upper load plate
and leveling assembly and into a lower load plate and noise isolation pad assembly.
B. Other equipment which are found, by the Engineer, to require inertia bases, shall be of
the same specifications as above and shall be part of the Contractor's obligation without
additional cost.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Noise Tests

A. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to employ an independent Acoustic
Engineer to carry out proving tests and to prepare noise test certificates for all
acoustically important areas of the project.
B. The general basis for acceptability of the installation acoustically is (tolerance + or –
2db) at any point 1.2 metres above floor level and 1.5 metres from grilles, diffusers,
registers, terminal units etc. of the air-conditioning systems.
C. For items of plant the noise level shall be taken at a point equivalent distance to the
largest radiating surface of that equipment.
D. Tests shall be carried out to establish the required performance standards and shall
comply with the sound attenuation recommendations as detailed in the sections below.
3.02 Vibration Tests

A. All vibration isolation systems shall allow no more than 5% transmissibility to the
structure. All equipment provided shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from
excessive vibration. Any minor vibration, which may occur, shall not be transmitted
from equipment into or through the supporting or enclosing structure. Should the
engineer consider that excessive vibration is present, such as to warrant the need for
specialist testing apparatus and personnel, then the contractor shall engage and employ
such specialist services. The contractor shall bear the cost of rectification of the
installations as well as the cost of the specialist services in order to meet the design
requirements.

21 05 48 - 6
Specifications
3.03 Hangers and Supports Performance Test
A. Brackets and hangers shall be tested to sustain a load of eight times the actual operating
load.
END OF SECTION

21 05 48 - 7
SECTION 21 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
SYSTEM
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.01 Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.02 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................. 1
1.03 Related Works Specified Elsewhere ................................................................................ 1
1.04 Reference Standards ......................................................................................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 1
2.01 Valve Chart Locations ...................................................................................................... 1
2.02 Identification of Pipelines and Services ........................................................................... 2
2.03 Sign and Accessory Fastening .......................................................................................... 2
2.04 Nameplates ....................................................................................................................... 3
2.05 Painting............................................................................................................................. 3
2.06 Piping................................................................................................................................ 3
Khatib & Alami Identification For Fire Suppression System

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 Introduction
A. To be read and governed by general conditions of contract and its Sections. This section
includes the identification of all pipe works, equipment etc.
1.02 Scope of Work

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting complete above works based on
specifications and consultant’s approval of samples.


BS 1710 Identifications of Pipe Lines and Services
BS 4800 Paint Colours for Building Purposes
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Valve Chart Locations

A. Valve charts shall be provided for each piping system and shall consist of schematic
Drawings of piping layouts, showing and identifying each valve and describing its
function. Two copies of each chart, sealed to rigid backboard with clear lacquer placed
under glass and framed, shall be mounted in the building as directed by the Engineer.

21 05 53 - 1
Specifications
2.02 Identification of Pipelines and Services
A. General
1. Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green
Building Regulations & Specifications” for Volatile Organic Compounds, (VOCs)
content limits.
2. All methods of identification shall be compatible with the pipe and operating
conditions.
3. Identification shall be accomplished by using basic identification colours with code
indications.
4. Code indication shall include safety colours and service information. Information
shall be given regarding the nature of the contents of the pipe by using the
following systems, individually or in combination:-
a. Name in Full.
b. Abbreviation of Name
c. Chemical Symbol
B. Legend
1. The material in piping system shall be identified. Primary identification should be
by means of a lettered legend naming the material conveyed by the piping in full or
abbreviated form. Arrows shall be used to indicate the direction of flow.
2. The legend shall be brief, informative, pointed, and simple. Legends shall be
applied close to valves and adjacent to changes in direction, branches, where pipes
pass through walls or floors and as frequently as needed along straight runs to
provide clear and positive indication. Identification maybe applied by stencilling,
tape or markers.
3. Pipe marking should be highly visible.
The Type & Size of Letters
Outside diameter of Length of colour Height of letter
pipe or covering (mm) field (mm) (mm)
(13 to 32) mm 200 mm 13 mm
(40 to 50) mm 200 mm 19 mm
(65 to 150) mm 300 mm 32 mm
(200 to 250) mm 600 mm 63 mm
Over 250 800 mm 100 mm
4. Colour
a. The Colour should be shown on the piping, but in combination with a legend.
The application of colour bands shall be done by: Painting, Adhesive colour
bands or equivalent colour clips.
b. Colour reference shall be in accordance with BS 4800, Latest Edition.
2.03 Sign and Accessory Fastening

A. Warning and instruction signs, wherever specified or otherwise required, shall be
securely fastened where shown or directed with bolting anchors herein specified for

21 05 53 - 2
Specifications
masonry construction or round head chrome plated brass wood screws and washers for
wood construction. Signs shall not be hung loose on chains or by any other method
wherein the sign will be free to move. Sign shall be installed in a conspicuous well
lighted location adjacent to the equipment it refers to and shall be easily read by
occupants in standing position on floor.
B. All accessories such as wrenches specified to be hung on chain adjacent to the
equipment they serve, shall be arranged for stowing in a rigid manner and shall not be
hung loose, or otherwise, that may permit the chain or wrench to move or rattle.
2.04 Nameplates
A. Each unit of equipment shall be identified by a permanently attached nameplate made of
brass or other corrosion-resistant metal. Plates shall be not less than forty (40) by eighty
(80) mm. Plates shall bear information pertaining to the unit as follows:
1. System and unit designation from schedule of equipment.
2. Manufacturer's name and address.
3. Serial and model number.
4. Rated capacity.
5. Temperature, pressure or other limitations.
2.05 Painting
A. General Requirements
1. Surface requiring prime painting shall be cleaned thoroughly of all rust, loose
scale, oil, grease and dirt. Use wire brushes and solution for this purpose.
2. No painting shall be applied to damp or frosty surfaces in wet, foggy or freezing
weather.
3. Paint shall be evenly spread and well brushed out so that there shall be no drops,
runs or sagging.
4. Shop coated surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and retouched where necessary.
5. Care shall be taken not to paint controls, label plates, nameplates on all apparatus.
6. All items that have rusted or corroded in storage or in place shall be re-cleaned or
repainted upon request of the Engineer.
7. Finishing coats shall be made in accordance with a color code, based on BS 1710
and BS 4800 recommendations after being submitted to and approved by the
Engineer.
B. Machinery
1. All machinery installed under this contract such as motors, pumps, etc. shall have a
shop priming coat.
2.06 Piping
A. Ferrous piping (galvanized or non-galvanized) including flanges, bolts and valves in
trench, partitions, below tiles, or underground shall be painted with 2 coats of
emulsified asphalt.
B. Paint all exposed (in shafts, above and below false ceiling, on roof, etc.. ) ferrous

21 05 53 - 3
Specifications
piping system components including pipe, fittings, unions, flanges, hangers and
supports as follows before wrapping or insulating the pipes (if applicable):
1. Applicable to galvanized pipes :
a. Prime Coat: Zinc Chromate.
b. Finish Coat: Ironhide gray metal paint or as approved by the Engineer.
Applicable to all other ferrous pipes:
Prime Coat: Red lead Primer, 1.5 to 2.0 mils thick.
END OF SECTION

21 05 53 - 4
SECTION 21 08 00
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF FIRE
SUPPRESSION
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 General Requirements ................................................................................................... 1
1.02 Related Work Specified Elsewhere ............................................................................... 1
1.03 Specialized Parties for Testing Balancing and Commissioning ................................. 2
1.04 Controls ........................................................................................................................... 2
1.05 Maintenance During Defects Liability Period And Guarantees ................................ 2
1.06 Extended Defects Liability and Guarantees ................................................................ 2
1.07 Codes and Standards...................................................................................................... 3
Khatib & Alami Testing And Commissioning Of Fire Suppression

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 08 00
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART - 1 GENERAL
requirements.

A. All piping and equipment shall be tested as specified under the relevant subsection of
the specification.
B. Labour, materials, instruments, power etc., required for testing shall be furnished by the
Contractor unless otherwise indicated under the particular section of the Specification.
C. Test shall be performed in the presence of representatives of the Engineer and such
other parties as may have legal jurisdiction.
D. In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping system only, before connection of
appliances be subjected to pressure exceeding the ratings as prescribed by the
manufacturers of fixtures, equipment and appliances or accepted engineering standards
E. All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated
F. Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and/or damaged materials replaced,
G. The duration of tests shall be as determined by all parties having jurisdiction, but in no
case less than the time prescribed in each subsection of the specification.
H. In the event of any repair or any adjustment having to be made other than normal
running adjustment, the test shall be void and shall be repeated after the adjustment or
repairs have been made.
I. When pipes, valves, equipment etc., are to be covered or embedded; their specific tests
shall be carried out on them before any covering is applied. These tests shall not relieve
the contractor of any of his responsibilities and he shall take all necessary precautions to
insure the safety and protection of such tested items until the termination of the work.
J. Three copies of all test results shall be submitted to the Engineer.


21 08 00 - 1
Specifications
1.03 Specialized Parties for Testing Balancing and Commissioning

A. Unless indicated otherwise, major equipment such as Fire Pumps Sets shall be tested
and certified as UL listed/ FM approval and Civil Defence Regulations.
1.04 Controls
A. All controls shall be tested for proper functioning in accordance with the requirements
of the Specification.
1.05 Maintenance During Defects Liability Period And Guarantees

A. Starting from the date of issue of the Substantial/Provisional completion certificate the
contractor shall be responsible, for the duration of one year, to provide the following
services free of charge, at his own cost:
1. The training of operators assigned by the client for operation of all major
equipment and controls as decided by the Engineer. Training should be provided by
original suppliers of equipment for a period of at least one week and or when
requested by client through out the liability period.
2. The replacement of parts or whole equipment that show any manufacturing or
installation defects during operation.
3. Carry out routine preventive maintenance (fortnightly, monthly, quarterly, half
yearly and yearly as applicable to the approval of the Engineer) including provision
of labour, parts and supply of consumable materials such as Lubricants, required
for the safe operation of Fire Pumps and guarantee of performance of all the
systems.
4. Necessary staff to carryout the above shall be resident on the job site during the
said year.
5. Guarantee of every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or installation
defects for a period of one year.
B. At the end of defects liability period the contractor shall be responsible for final handing
over of all installed systems in a perfect condition to the satisfaction of both Engineer
and client.
1.06 Extended Defects Liability and Guarantees

A. The Contractor shall issue in favour of the client all original manufacturers extended
guarantees as required by specifications or by Engineers approval conditions or by

21 08 00 - 2
Specifications
manufacturers initial proposal prior to final handing over to the client.

END OF SECTION

21 08 00 - 3
SECTION 21 11 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.02 TESTS .............................................................................................................................. 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 3
2.01 FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPE ............................................................................................. 3
PART - 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 3
3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 3
3.02 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS............................................................................... 3
Khatib & Alami Fire Suppression Piping

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 11 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART - 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and it’s requirements.

C. Installation of pipes shall be complete with all cutting, patching and making good of
walls, slabs, partitions, etc., due to fixing, supporting and anchoring of pipes.
D. Automatic air vents shall be installed at all air pocket locations, and/or at the highest
points in the lines.
E. Pipes and fittings shall both be manufactured according to one single standard unit of
F. Provision shall be made for flushing the system.
G. All piping shall be installed so that the system may be thoroughly drained.
H. The piping shall be pitched in the direction of drainage.
I. Drain valves shall be provided where necessary, where shown on the Drawings and at
J. No direct interconnections shall be made between sewers and fire drain systems.
K. Fire piping shall not be used, in any way, for domestic water supply purposes.
L. All valves shall be located where readily accessible.
M. Provision shall be made for test connections and valves.
N. Control power transformer as applicable to limit control voltage to 24 VDC maximum.
1.02 Tests
A. The system shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test, to the satisfaction and in the
presence of the Engineer. Pressure shall not be less than 300 psi (2070 Kpa) or at 50 psi.
(345 Kpa) in excess of the maximum system working pressure whichever is greater, and
the test shall be maintained for two hours.
B. If leaks develop during the test, the contractor shall make all necessary repairs and shall
retest the system at no additional cost to the Employer.

21 11 00 - 1
Specifications
Section 21 08 00 - Testing & Commissioning of Fire Suppression


Standard
Laboratories
4. National Fire Protection NFPA 101 Life safety code

Association

Association

21 11 00 - 2
Specifications
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Fire Suppression Pipe

A. Shall be seamless black steel conforming to ASTM A-53, Schedule 40. All pipe fittings
elbows, tees, crosses, unions, reducers, etc. shall be of the same quality and weight as
the pipes.
B. Pipe fittings 2" (50 mm) and smaller shall be suitable for threaded connections, 2½" (65
mm) and larger shall be grooved fittings.
C. Unions and grooved fittings, flanges shall be installed at all valves inlets or outlets, on
all pipe branches.
D. Unions shall be used on all screwed pipes and shall be of the same quality and service.
Grooved fittings shall be used on all pipes above 2½” and shall be all steel construction
to ASTM or BS Standards.
E. Contractor shall rectify any damage to the pipes from the processes of grooving to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
F. Fire drain pipe to be Schedule 40 Galvanized Steel, seamless
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Pipe Installation

Piping shall be pitched to permit complete draining of the system.
A. Fire standpipe shall not be used in any way to provide water for other purposes.
B. Provide all pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs with sleeves having an
internal diameter at least 50mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe for un-
insulated lines or of the insulation for insulated pipes.
C. Install sleeves through interior walls and partitions flush with finished surfaces; sleeves
through outside walls to project 15mm. on each side of the finished wall; and floor
sleeves to project 25mm. above finished floors.
D. Set sleeves in place before pouring concrete or securely fasten and grout in with cement.
3.02 Cleaning of Piping Systems

A. Plug all opening ends of piping, valves and equipment except when actual work is being
performed to minimize accumulation of dirt and debris.
B. Prior to the performance of tests, flush out all piping that is to receive a hydrostatic test
with clean water.
C. Remove dirt and debris collected at screens, strainers and other points from the system.
END OF SECTION

21 11 00 - 3
SECTION 21 12 26
FIRE SUPPRESSION VALVE AND HOSE CABINET
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 2
2.01 FIRE HOSE CABINET (RECESSED CABINET TYPE)............................................... 2
2.02 FIRE HOSE CABINET (EXPOSED CABINET TYPE) ................................................ 2
2.03 HOSE CABINET EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES ................................................ 2
2.04 FIRE HOSE LANDING VALVE .................................................................................... 3
PART - 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 3
Khatib & Alami Fire Suppression Valve And Hose Cabinet

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 12 26
FIRE SUPPRESSION VALVE AND HOSE CABINET
PART - 1 GENERAL

A. To be read and governed by general Conditions of Contract and its Sections.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible to confirm and seek the approval of the fire
department or persons having jurisdiction and the approval of the Engineer before
ordering the materials.
C. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of industry standards, reference
specifications listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and
requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
D. Deliver materials and handle so as to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and the
damage of materials.
E. Store materials where designated and assume responsibility and security for materials
and equipment. Take precautions for protection from detrimental conditions.
F. All fire fighting equipment and accessories shall be UL listed, FM approved.



21 12 26 - 1
Specifications
Standard
Laboratories

Association stationary pumps for fire protection

Association
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Fire Hose Cabinet (Recessed Cabinet Type)

A. Cabinets are as detaield on Architectural drawings.
2.02 Fire Hose Cabinet (Exposed Cabinet Type)

A. Supply and install Fire Hose Cabinets wherever shown on drawings and to the details
indicated on the drawings.
B. Cabinet shall be constructed of steel 16 – Gauge for “Trim, 18 – Gauge for “Tub” and
20 – Gauge for “Door”. Cabinet size shall be in accordance with the details shown on
drawings. Cabinet door shall be flush, pull handle and tension latches and shall be
equipped with full length plan hinges on the right or the left as conditions requires.
C. Cabinets shall receive an approved shop coat of paint inside and outside.
2.03 Hose Cabinet Equipment and Accessories

A. Two type for Fire Hose Cabinet (refer to drawings) shall include the following:
B. Fire hose diameter 11/2" (40 mm), 30 m long, fire hose with a working pressure of
175psi, with brass hose coupling attached. UL certified with Kite mark.
C. Hose rack of the swinging type, up to 180o full swing complete with guide arm. UL
certified with Kite mark.
D. All brass, chromium plated diameter 11/2" (40 mm) fog nozzle capable of complete
shut off, straight stream or any degree of solid conical fog. UL certified with Kite mark..
E. Diameter 1½" (40 mm) bronze gate valve and 1/1/2” angle pressure regulating valve,
(UL/FM approved).
F. 6 kgs. ABC operated dry chemical fire extinguisher with spray hose and nozzle,UL
approved.

21 12 26 - 2
Specifications
G. Flow switch on fire pipe. UL approved
H. Cabinet shall have the following writing on its door: “FIRE HOSE CABINET” both in
English and Arabic.
2.04 Fire Hose Landing Valve

A. Fire hose landing valve shall be angle type, 300 psi (2070 Kpa) globe valve with
pressure reducing mechanism. Valve shall have polished, chrome-plated brass body and
trim, red cast iron wheel handle, bronze stem, renewable composition disc, flanged 2
1/2" (65mm) inlet and threaded outlet with quick coupling adapter, with polished brass
chrome plated cap and chain. Landing valve shall conform to local authorities
specifications
PART - 3 EXECUTION
A. Cabinets, valves & related accessories shall be installed in accordance with the
instructions outlined in the NFPA code & local auatorities requirement.
B. Cabinet shall be easily accessible and located close to the door of the emergency escape
staircase.
C. Cabinet shall be statigically located to keep all spaces within a maximum of 30 meters
from the cabinet valve.
END OF SECTION

21 12 26 - 3
SECTION 21 13 13
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANT
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.02 TESTS .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.03 SIGNS .............................................................................................................................. 2
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 3
2.01 FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPE ............................................................................................. 3
2.02 SPRINKLER HEAD-UPRIGHT ..................................................................................... 3
2.03 CONCEALED AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER .................................................................. 3
2.04 RECESSED EXTENDED COVERAGE HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL SPRINKLER .. 4
2.05 SIDE WALL SPRINKLER .............................................................................................. 4
2.06 SPRINKLER HEADS-PENDANT (RECESSED) .......................................................... 4
2.07 SPRINKLER ALARM TEST STATION ........................................................................ 4
2.08 SPRINKLER ZONE CONTROL VALVE ...................................................................... 6
PART - 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 7
3.01 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 7
Khatib & Alami Wet Pipe Sprinkler System

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 21 13 13
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART - 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and it’s requirements.

C. Installation of pipes shall be complete with all cutting, patching and making good of
D. Automatic air vents shall be installed at all air pocket locations, and/or at the highest
E. Pipes and fittings shall both be manufactured according to one single standard unit of
F. Sprinkler installations shall comply fully with the requirements of NFPA section 13
and/or the rules of the loss prevention council / BS 5306 Part 2 latest edition.
G. Provision shall be made for flushing the system.
H. All piping shall be installed so that the system may be thoroughly drained.
I. The piping shall be pitched in the direction of drainage.
J. Drain valves shall be provided where necessary, where shown on the Drawings and at
K. No direct interconnections shall be made between sewers and sprinkler drain systems.
L. Sprinkler piping shall not be used, in any way, for domestic water supply purposes.
M. All valves controlling the water supply shall be located where readily accessible.
N. Provision shall be made for test connections and valves.
O. Control power transformer as applicable to limit control voltage to 24 VDC maximum.
P. Protection areas and maximum spacing for fire sprinklers shall be strictly in accordance
with NFPA 13.
1.02 Tests
A. The system shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test, to the satisfaction and in the
presence of the Engineer. Pressure shall not be less than 300 psi (2070 Kpa) or at 50 psi
(345 Kpa) in excess of the maximum system working pressure whichever is greater, and

21 13 13 - 1
Specifications
the test shall be maintained for two hours.
B. If leaks develop during the test, the contractor shall make all necessary repairs and shall
retest the system at no additional cost to the Employer.
1.03 Signs
A. Provide at sprinkler test valve a metal sign 100 x 200 mm size with white letters on red
background, reading "SPRINKLER TEST VALVE". Letters shall not be less than 25
mm in height.

Section 21 08 00 - Testing & Commissioning of Fire Suppression
Section 21 22 00 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

Standard
Laboratories

21 13 13 - 2
Specifications
4. National Fire Protection NFPA 101 Life safety code

Association

Association
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Fire Suppression Pipe

A. Shall be seamless black steel conforming to ASTM A-53, Schedule 40. All pipe fittings
elbows, tees, crosses, unions, reducers, etc. shall be of the same quality and weight as
the pipes.
B. Pipe fittings 2" (50 mm) and smaller shall be suitable for threaded connections, 2½" (65
mm) and larger shall be grooved fittings.
C. Unions and grooved fittings, flanges shall be installed at all valves inlets or outlets, on
all pipe branches.
D. Unions shall be used on all screwed pipes and shall be of the same quality and service.
Grooved fittings shall be used on all pipes above 2½” and shall be all steel construction
to ASTM or BS Standards.
E. Contractor shall rectify any damage to the pipes from the processes of grooving to the
F. Drain fire pipe to be galvanized seamlesss pipe.
2.02 Sprinkler Head-Upright

A. Sprinkler heads shall be bronze or brass construction, spray type 135 ͦ F (57 ͦC) rating,
with thermosensitive glass bulb. Head located in finished areas shall be chrome-plated.
B. Not less than 12 spare sprinkler heads shall be provided together with sprinkler head
wrenches, all supported on steel clip in a suitable steel cabinet with hinged door and
latch. Cabinets shall be finished in red enamel with white letters on door reading:
"SPARE SPRINKLER PARTS". Cabinets shall be wall hung and in compliance with all
authorities having jurisdiction. Location of cabinet shall be as directed by the Engineer.
C. All sprinklers shall have a normal orifice 15 mm and rated for the intened hazard.
D. Sprinklers shall be rated for a working pressure of 175 PSI (1207 Kpa).
E. This type of sprinklers shall be installed in car parking and areas where false ceiling is
not provided.
F. Protection guard of chrome plated steel construction for sprinkler in parking floors,
mechanical and technical areas.
2.03 Concealed Automatic Sprinkler

A. The sprinkler head shall be of the quick response concealed type of brass string a 3 mm.
diameter glass bull of 135 ͦ F (57 ͦ C) rating. The sprinkler frame shall have drop-down
deflector. The assembly shall be recessed into the ceiling and concealed by a flat cover
plate.
21 13 13 - 3
Specifications
B. This type of sprinkler shall be installed in all floors.
C. Spare sprinkler heads with wrenches and cabinets to be provided as described above.
2.04 Recessed Extended Coverage Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler

A. The sprinkler head shall be of the quick response horizontal side wall chrome plated
recessed type with deflector and 3 mm frangible glass bulb. The glass bulb of the fast
thermal response shall consist of a controlled amount of special fluid hermetically
sealed inside a precisely manufactured glass capsule.
B. Spare sprinkler heads with wrenches and cabinets to be provided as described above.
2.05 Side Wall Sprinkler

A. The sprinkler head shall be of the quick response horizontal side wall chrome plated
type with deflector and 3 mm frangible glass bulb.
B. The glass bulb of fast thermal response shall consist of controlled amount of special
fluid hermetically sealed inside a precisely manufactured glass capsule.
C. Spare sprinkler heads with wrenches and cabinets to be provided as described above.
2.06 Sprinkler Heads-Pendant (Recessed)

A. Sprinkler head shall be bronze or brass construction, spray type 135oF (57oC) rating
with thermo sensitive glass bulb with maximum 3" (76 mm) diameter chromium-plated
escutcheon, adjustable for a minimum of ½" (13 mm) for ceiling variations. Sprinklers
shall be chromium-plated with maximum projection of ½" (13 mm) below ceiling.
B. Not less than 12 spare sprinkler heads shall be provided together with sprinkler head
wrenches all supported on steel clip in a suitable cabinet with hinged door and latch.
Cabinets shall be finished in red enamel with white letters on door reading; “SPARE
SPRINKLER PARTS”. Cabinets shall be wall hung and in compliance with all
authorities having, jurisdiction. Location of cabinet shall be as directed by the
Engineer.
C. All sprinklers shall have a normal orifice 15 mm and rated for the intended hazard.
D. Sprinklers shall be rated for a working pressure of 175 PSI (1207 Kpa).
E. Protection guard of chrome plated steel construction for sprinkler in parking floors,
mechanical and technical areas.
2.07 Sprinkler Alarm Test Station

A. Sprinkler alarm check valve with trim
1. This valve is a part of sprinkler alarm test station and servers a dual purpose of
preventing reverse flow of water (non-return) and provides a hydraulic fire alarm
independent of electric power supply.
2. Valve shall be UL listed and FM approved for a working pressure of 175 PSI (1207
Kpa). Valve shall have a ductile/cast iron body with internal pins, sprinkler and
nuts of stainless steel and brass seat. The valve clipper shall be of Teflon coated
steel with EPDM rubber clapper having stainless steel rubber faced retainer. The
clapper assembly shall be hinged to access cover for quick removal and easy

21 13 13 - 4
Specifications
servicing. Valve shall be available in flanges, grooved or combined connection
versions. Valve shall have necessary tappings for pressure gauges, alarm devices,
drains, etc., Valve shall be suitable for horizontal or vertical installation.
3. The alarm valve shall be complete with external by-pass trim to minimize clapper
movement and prevent false alarm. Trim shall include drain and test valve, retard
chamber for variable pressure systems, pressure gauges at inlet/outlet, strainer,
electric pressure switch, restricted drain orifice, water motor alarm and alarm motor
stop valve.
4. When water flows through the Alarm valve, the water will raise the clack disk, and
flows to the system with a small amount passing thru a special groove to the alarm
motor and gong and initiating the alarm.
5. The clack will remain in the raised position until there is no flow of water thru the
control valve then the stop valve will be closed.
6. When sprinklers are in operation during a fire, the alarm gong may be shut off by
closing alarm motor stop valve.
7. An electrical pressure switch connected in the flow of the alarm gong shall also
initiate an electric alarm in the main fire control panel.
8. The drain and test valve is to drain the sprinkler installation of water after a fire has
been extinguished and before replacing the sprinklers that have operated. It is also
used to test the running pressure of the water supplies.
B. Water motor alarm and gong
1. Water motor alarm and gong shall comprise a weather proof, hydraulically driven
mechanical bell that automatically sounds a continuous alarm when the sprinkler
system activates. It shall be installed not higher than 5 or 6 meters above the valve
and it shall be tested at least once a week.
C. Isolating Valves (OS & Y Resilient Wedge Gate Valves)
1. The valve shall be provided upstream and down stream of sprinkler monitoring
station and shall be located in such a place to be always readily visible and
accessible to authorized persons. Valves shall be secured open by a padlocked or
riveted strap.
2. The valve shall confirm to the latest revision of A.W.W.A Resilient Seated Gate
Valve Standard C-509 and be UL listed/ FM approved.
3. All internal parts shall be accessible without removing the body from the line.
4. The wedge shall be cast iron, complete encapsulated with resilient material. The
resilient sealing material shall be permanently bonded to the cast iron wedge with a
rubber tearing bond to meet ASTM D429.
5. NRS stems shall be cast bronze with integral collars in compliance with A.W.W.A.
OS & Y stems shall be bronze. The NRS stuffing box shall have two O-Ring seals
above the thrust collar. These rings shall be filed replaced without removing the
valve from service.
6. There shall be low friction thrust bearings above and below the steam collar. The
stem nut shall be independent of the wedge and of solid bronze. The waterway in
the seat areas shall be smooth, unobstructed, free of cavities and for valves 4”
(100mm) and larger at least 0.19” (4.8mm) greater in diameter than the nominal
valve size.
7. The body and bonnet shall be coated both interior and exterior with a fusion
21 13 13 - 5
Specifications
bonded heat cured thermo setting material meeting all the application and
performance requirements of A.W.W.A. C-550.
8. The gasket seal between two surfaces shall employ the use of composition ring
type gaskets retained to prevent the possibility of blow out.
9. Each valve shall be hydrostatically tested to the requirements of both A.W.W.A.
and UL/FM.
2.08 Sprinkler Zone Control Valve

A. Butterfly Valve (indicating type)
1. Butterfly valve shall be of the flangeless type, lug or wafer style, it shall be rated
1380 KPa bi-directional, with a 1380 KPa dead end service rating. The body
material shall be shock resistant ductile iron with extended neck. There should be
no exposed fasteners in the waterway to pin the disc to the stem. The liner shall be
molded in or captive boot design. Top and bottom stem bushings of dissimilar
material are required with a positive retention mechanism for the stem.
2. Butterfly valve shall be gear operated and shall be secured open with a padlock. It
shall be provided with supervisory tamper switch to give signal to BMS (if
specified) and to the fire alarm station.
B. Waterflow Alarm Switch
1. The water flow alarm devices consist of a vane type water flow switch for use on
wet sprinkler systems, it shall be UL listed and FM approved. The unit shall
contain two single poles, double throw, snap action switches and adjustable,
instantly recycling pneumatic retard that delays actuation of electrical switches to
reduce possibility of false alarms.
2. The unit shall be enclosed in a die-cast housing, the cover shall be held in place
with two tamper resistant screws.
3. Unit shall be installed on sprinkler branch line to detect water flow exceeding 38
Liters/min downstream of the device. When activated, the snap action switches
shall operate a local electrical alarm bell (under electrical specification) and
indicate signal to fire alarm panel and BMS.
C. Combined Drain and Test Valve
1. Drain and test valve shall have a body of brass, bronze filled Teflon seal, stainless
steel stem, and zinc plated steel handle, it shall include an orifice plate signed for a
flow of one sprinkler and a sight glass. Test and drain valve shall be tested once a
week and it shall be connected to a separate drain riser.
Approved Manufacturers
• Kidde ( USA )
• Globe (USA)
• Grinnell (USA)
• W.D. ALLEN (USA)
• Elkart Brass Mfg. Co. (USA)
• Viking (USA)
• Central Sprinkler Company (USA)
• Automatic Sprinkler Corporation of America ( USA )
• Marcon Fire ( England )
• Larsen’s Mfg. Co. ( USA )

21 13 13 - 6
Specifications
Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:
• Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
• Victaulic Company of America.
• Shurjoint- MALASYA
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 General
A. Piping shall be pitched to permit complete draining of the system.
B. Fire standpipe shall not be used in any way to provide water for other purposes.
C. Provide all pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs with sleeves having an
D. Install sleeves through interior walls and partitions flush with finished surfaces; sleeves
E. Set sleeves in place before pouring concrete or securely fasten and grout in with cement.

B. Prior to the performance of tests, flush out all piping that is to receive a hydrostatic test
with clean water.
C. Remove dirt and debris collected at screens, strainers and other points from the system.
END OF SECTION

21 13 13 - 7
SECTION 211330
HIGH PRESSURE WATER MIST SYSTEM
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 3
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................... 3
1.02 SYSTEM DESIGN ........................................................................................................... 3
1.03 SUMMARY ...................................................................................................................... 3
1.04 APPLICABLE STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 3
1.05 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................. 4
1.06 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................. 4
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................ 7
1.08 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................... 7
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .................................................................. 8
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 8
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ....................................................................................................... 8
2.02 WATER MIST SYSTEMS: .............................................................................................. 8
2.03 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ............................................................................................... 9
PART - 3 - INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 15
3.01 PIPE WORK SPECIFICATION ..................................................................................... 15
3.02 TUBE FITTING AND CLAMPS ................................................................................... 15
3.03 HANGER SUPPORT ..................................................................................................... 15
PART - 4 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................ 16
4.01 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................ 16
4.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR 15-MPA (2175-PSIG) CHARGING PRESSURE A.

PIPING BETWEEN STORAGE CONTAINERS AND ORIFICE UNION: .................. 16
4.03 WATER MIST SYSTEM PIPING INSTALLATION .................................................... 16
4.04 CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................................ 16
4.05 LABELING ..................................................................................................................... 17
4.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ....................................................................................... 17
Khatib & Alami High Pressure Water Mist System

21 13 30 - 2
Specifications
SECTION 21 13 30
HIGH PRESSURE WATER MIST SYSTEM
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Drawings
The contract drawings shall indicate the general arrangements of the areas to receive
detection and high pressure water mist protection. The Contractor is to review all
drawings so that all items affecting the operation of the fire detection/high pressure
water mist system (such a s e q u i p m e n t l o c a t i o n , a i r d i f f u s e r , d a m p e r
c l o s u r e s a n d d o o r o p e n i n g s ) a r e considered in the design of the engineered
system.
1.02 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. The design of the water mist system is strictly to NFPA 750.
B. The water mist system will be capable of producing fine water droplets as
stipulated in NFPA 750.
C. The high pressure water mist system will consist of a number of nozzles connected
by stainless steel piping to a high pressure water source either stored pressure
(cylinder units) or continuous pressure (pump units).
D. All Equipment used in the procurement and installation of Water Mist System
shall be listed water mist equipment or systems that have demonstrated
performance in fire tests performed by an approved authority similar to FM, VDS
or equal and approved as part of the listing process.
E. Water mist systems must be listed for specific hazards and protection objectives. It
is the intent of NFPA750 that such listings be obtained through full-scale fire tests
and system component evaluations conducted by internationally recognized
Laboratories to demonstrate that performance objectives can be met.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes all engineering design and materials for a complete fire
detection/high pressure water mist extinguishing system, including storage
cylinders, pump units, nozzles, pump control panel, detectors, wiring, alarm
panels, and all other equipment necessary for a complete operational system.
B. All system components shall be provided by an approved manufacture.
1.04 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. The following publications of the issues listed below form a part of this

21 13 30 - 3
Specifications
specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto (latest edition)

1. NFPA 750 - Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection Systems.
2. FM Approvals – 5560: Approval Standard for water mist systems
3. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
4. CEA 4001: Sprinkler Systems Planning and Installation
5. NFPA 22: Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
6. AWWA D120 – Thermosetting Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Tanks.
7. ASME B31.1: ASME Code for Pressure Piping
8. EN 13480-3: Metallic industrial piping – Part 3
9. EN 10217-7: Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes - Part 7: Stainless steel
tubes
10. ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals – Chapter 22 – Pipe sizing.
11. BS EN ISO 8434-1: Metallic tube connections for fluid power and general use.
12. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
13. BS EN 54-2: Fire detection and fire alarm systems - Part 2: Control and
indicating equipment.
14. EN 54-20: Fire detection and fire alarm systems - Part 20: Aspirating smoke
detectors.
15. FIA: Code of practice for design, installation, commissioning & maintenance of
ASD systems
16. BS.5839 Part 1 Fire Detection and Alarm System for Buildings.
17. LPS 1276: requirements for the LPCB certification and listing of above
ground suction tanks for sprinkler system
18. CEN/TS 14972 – Fixed Fire fighting Systems – Water Mist Systems –
Design and Installation.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. FAT: Factory Acceptance Test.
B. HPWM: High Pressure Water Mist
C. PDU: Power Distribution Unit.
D. VOP: Valve Operation Panel.
E. LPS: Loss Prevention Standard.
F. LPCB: Loss Prevention Certification Board
G. FIA: Fire Industry Association.
H. ASD: Aspirating Smoke Detector
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: the following will be submitted for approval prior to the
delivery of materials, Material and equipment information will include data
sheets for each component or device used in the system. This will include, but not
21 13 30 - 4
Specifications
be limited to the following:

1. Pump unit and its diagram and the arts list.
2. Feed water pumps.
3. Water tank circulating pumps
4. Water storage tanks.
5. Pipes and fittings
6. Air compressor
7. Inhibitors.
8. Filtering units.
9. Valves
10. Extinguishing control panel.
11. Detectors.
12. Release devices.
13. Alarm devices.
14. High pressure water mist storage cylinders.
15. Mounting brackets.
16. Discharge nozzles.
17. Isometrics for Distribution pipe work.
18. Computer flow calculation.
19. Electrical pump control panel.
B. Provide information outlining the operation and maintenance procedures
that will be required of the owner. This information will explain any special
knowledge or tools the owner will be required to employ, and all spare parts that
should be readily available
C. Certification: The completed systems have been installed, tested, purged and
analyzed in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
D. Shop D r a w i n g s will i n c l u d e l o cat i o n d et ai l s an d o p e r a t i o n d et ai l s o f
a l l e q u i p m e n t associated with the high pressure water mist system. Plans
will be provided with a 1/50 scale showing equipment locations, piping and
layout drawings for the pump unit and main equipments showing dimensions with
scale of 1/20, point-to-point wiring and other details as required, Elevations,
cross sections and other details will be drawn to scale as required. Isometric pipe
work layouts will be provided. In addition, point-to-point electrical layout
drawing will be provided.
E. Inspection and Test Reports.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Schedules of protected areas, their sizes and the protection system design
including flow rates calculation, nozzle pressures, pipe size, area or volume
protected by each nozzle, water mist discharge density, the number and the types
of nozzles, the calculation shall determine the Pressure drop through the
network, all above calculation must be carried by an electronic calculation

21 13 30 - 5
Specifications
according to NFPA-750 and applicable standards.

H. Sequence of operation, electrical schematics and connection diagrams will be
provided to completely describe the operation of the system.
I. The layouts parameters specifying the following
1. Nozzle types with respective K-factor.
2. Droplet size distributions.
3. Range of working pressures (Min. and Max. pressure).
4. Nozzle positioning (include distance to walls, ceiling, angles …., etc).
5. Distance between nozzles (longitudinal and transversal).
6. Min. and max. height of installation of nozzles.
7. Max. Fire size at time of activation.
8. Time to full operation after activation (shall not be more than 90 seconds).
9. Min. and max. Sectional lengths.
10. Min. and max. number of sections activated simultaneously (Two fire hazards in
two different zones in the same time).
J. Pressure drop calculations shall be carried out using the Darcy-Weisbach
calculation method for high-pressure systems. The pressure drop calculations shall
be done using a computer program. The hydraulic calculation sheets shall
include the following in accordance with NFPA750 requirements:
1. Summary sheet
2. Detailed work sheets
3. Graph sheet.
K. Pipe Wall thickness calculations according to ASME or equivalent.
L. The following System documentations shall be submitted for approval:
1. Hydraulic pressure drop calculations for mist water network according to
Darcy- Weisbach equation using a computer program.
2. Pump flow and sizing Calculations
3. Tank Calculations
4. Power consumption calculation + Electrical starting current calculations
5. Flux density calculations
6. Pressure drop calculation
7. Pump suction head calculation (Low pressure side)
8. Valve selection sheet
9. Feed water pump selection sheet
10. Fixation calculations and methods of installations.
11. Aspirating Fire Alarm Pipe Flow Calculations
12. Pumps unit (P&ID) diagram and the parts list.
13. Operation and maintenance manual
14. The pump unit starter cabinet and the control panel electric diagram.

21 13 30 - 6
Specifications
15. System testing & commissioning procedures.

16. Pipe supports calculations.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The water mist system must be engineering, manufacturing, testing, Supply and
installation supervision of the equipment together with field testing on site and
commissioning and maintenance staff training of the entire system by the
manufacturer directly or his authorized distributor.
B. Welding and brazing alloys shall have a melting point above 538°C (1000°F).
C. Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D10.9, Specification for
Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level
AR-3.
D. Welding and brazing shall be performed in accordance with Section IX of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
E. All components shall be reviewed for conformance to the design parameters
required by ANSI/ASME B31.3 code, latest edition.
F. The system shall be analyzed to insure thermal flexibility. This includes
analysis of individual spool sections as well as the total system, while
considering allowable stress levels of materials of fabrication as well as
consideration for site conditions, anchors, supports, and interface connections.
G. All components including valves, relief valves, cryogenic couplings, and seal-
off valves shall be reviewed for system location while considering supports,
anchors, site, safety, accessibility, and interference with other services and
obstructions as requested by the engineer and according to standards.
H. Perform all required acceptance tests.
I. The manufacturing plant should be approved from VdS, FM or UL.
J. The contractor shall be certified from any recognized society as an approved
installer, capable of operation and maintenance of fire extinguishing equipment
and water mist systems.
K. The system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer approved
design, installation, operation and maintenance manual.
L. Company must submit documents to verify its experience in installing similar
system size.
Records of such projects shall be included in the submittals.
M. Contractor must have qualified staff certified by manufacturer to carry out
the design, installation, testing commissioning, maintenance and operation of
water mist system.
N. The contractor shall arrange for necessary site co-ordination with other trades.
O. Proper tools shall be used to fulfill the NFPA750 requirements (e.g. bending,
flaring, compression)
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s warranty: Provide 5 y e a r s w r i t t e n w a r r a n t y, s i gn ed b y
m a n u f a c t u r e r agreeing to repair or replace any of the high pressure water mist

21 13 30 - 7
Specifications
system components, warranty shall cover failure due to normal conditions of use.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store system components on shipping skids, small specialties in
containers, and piping with end protection.
B. Label all assemblies, sub-assemblies, and components to facilitate site
inspection and assembly.
C. All elements shipped to the site shall be protected from the environment during
shipment and storage on site, including but not limited to heat, dust, salt spray, and
moisture.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: The water mist system must be supplied by only
one single manufacturer for all the system equipment/ components. (i.e. pumps,
pipes, fitting, section valves, nozzles and the control panel, ……etc.)
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, the following are the approved
manufacturers:
1. FOGTEC. (Germany)
2. Marioff. (Finland)
3. Danfoss Semco. (Denmark)
4. Phirex ( Austrilia)
5. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 WATER MIST SYSTEMS:

A. Wet System
1. The system shall consist of normally open section valve with sprinklers.
2. The water shall be pressurized till the sprinklers.
3. The sprinklers shall contain a heat sensitive bulb, which shall break in the
57ºC/68 ºC degrees. (In accordance to the design drawings).
4. The system shall start to discharge if One or several heat sensitive sprinkler
bulbs break, opening the access of water through the activated sprinkler(s).
B. Deluge System
1. The system shall consist of normally close section valve with spray head.
2. The water shall be pressurized till the section valve
3. The pipes should be wet till the section valve, while the network is dry after
the section valve.
4. The system shall start to discharge if:
a. The detection system gives a signal to the system control & release panel,
which then activates the right section valve. Opening the access of water

21 13 30 - 8
Specifications
through the spray heads.

b. The detection system gives a signal to the system control & release panel,
which then activates the right section valve. Opening the access of water
through the spray heads.
c. When opening the appropriate normally closed section valve manually through
the lever of the section valve.
C. Pre-action System
1. The system shall consist of normally close section valve with sprinklers.
2. The water shall be pressurized till the section valve while the network after
the section valve contains air that might or might not be under pressure.
3. The pipe shall be wet till the section valve.
4. The system shall start activation and discharge upon receiving signal from the
related smoke detection AND the heat sensitive bulb is broken.
2.03 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Gas-Driven System with Stored Water (Pre-Engineered System)
1. The configuration of the system will be provided based upon detailed
design complying with the requirements and Schematic Representations for Gas-
Driven System with Stored Water (Pre-Engineered System) and Gas-Driven
System with Multiple Accumulator Units for Extended Duration as stated in NFPA
750.
2. The system contains water cylinders fully interconnected and powered by
pressurized nitrogen cylinders at pressure of 200 bars.
3. The output to the system will be regulated as per the manufacturer
recommendations.
4. The cylinder unit will be activated by a valve which will only be placed on
one master cylinder. This master cylinder will then activate different
configurations of slave cylinder assemblies.
5. The system activation can be done remotely or manually depending on the
actuator valve.
B. Gas Pump Unit (GPU)
Twin fluid, single pipe type employing clean high pressure water as extinguishing
medium and air or nitrogen as the atomizing medium as per NFPA 750 and FM
approvals (5560) requirements. The s ys t em shall b e s u p p l i e d and i n s t al l ed in
a c c o r d a n c e NFPA 750 (A.11.1.6)
C. Pump Systems
The pump unit should be submitted following the NFPA requirements A.11.1.6 (e&f).
Pump systems will operate with single pump flow rates will calculated as per system
requirments. Pump systems can utilize one or more pump units connected through a
manifold to the water mist system to meet the system design requirements. The pump
system can feed either automatic frangible glass bulb nozzles or open nozzles in both
"wet" and “Deluge" applications, when the system is activated, only one pump will be
started. For systems incorporating more than one pump, the pumps will be started -

21 13 30 - 9
Specifications
automatically or manually -sequentially, the flow should increase due to the opening
of more nozzles (automatic wet systems only); the additional pump(s) will
automatically start. Only as many pumps as are necessary to keep the flow and
operating pressure constant with the system design will operate. The high pressure
water mist system remains activated until qualified staff shut off the system.
The pump unit is a single combined skid mounted package of the following
assemblies:
1. Tank equipped with inlet and return pipe, filter on the inlet pipe with overflow
to protect tank against overfilling and level measurement, drain point and suction
manifold line.
2. HP pump unit(s) with controller and electrical panels.
3. Jockey pump (Pneumatic standby pressure pump).
4. Air compressor (for Pneumatic standby pressure pump).
5. Redundant pumps
a. Water Storage Tank
(1) Independent water storage tanks shall be used for the mist system. The
capacity of the water storage tanks is determined based on 120 minutes’
operation for the maximum system demand;
(2) The external water will be supplied through a 75µ filter, via a solenoid
valve into the storage tank. The water level in the tank to be controlled by
means of a water level control system mounted in the tank. The water inlet
solenoid valve opens at low level and closes at high level, in the tank. The
water supply to the tank should have a minimum pressure of 3 bars, with a
maximum of 6 bars.
(3) The water quality as per manufacturer recommendations and NFPA 750
requirements shall be achieved. Water treatment system to be provided if
required.
(4) Glass Reinforced Polyester Tanks / Un-insulated water storage tanks are to
be used for the water mist fire protection system in accordance with NFPA
22 requirements.
(5) The tanks shall be LPCB Labelled.
(6) All nozzles shall be St. St. 316 L. b. HP Pump Unit
(7) The pump unit shall be complete with pump(s), base frame, electric
motors, a protected coupling, safety valves, strainers, complete with fittings,
flexible hoses, electrical Panel with Automatic Transfer Switch, ..etc
(8) Pump material shall be as below:
: Special Brass (NP25/21 and 25/25 Cast
Valve Casing
Bronze)
Plunger : Ceramic
Valves : High Grade Stainless Steel Sleeves
: Nitrile with Fabric Reinforcing
Support Rings : Teflon with graphite, run dry proof

21 13 30 - 10
Specifications
Crank Shaft : Drop-Forged and Case Hardened

D. Pressure Manifold
The pressure manifold will principally consist of the following Pressure manifold with
non-return valve per each pump, connecting hoses, pressure sensors (2 pieces for
systems with more than one pump), flow sensor (automatic systems only), pressure
gauge with test device, ball valve, connecting hose (hose between pressure manifold
and pipe work), pressure relief valve to set the pump pressure and is dimensioned to be
able to return the full pump capacity to the water storage tank, when the high pressure
pump is started against a closed system
E. Air compressor (for Pneumatic standby pressure pump).

Fully Automatic complete with:
1. Direct Drive (Oil Less Piston Compressor).
2. Air Intake Filter(s).
3. UL Listed Pressure Switch.
4. Bubble Tight Air Check Valve.
5. Permanently Lubricated Bearings.
6. A.S.M.E. Coded Tank with 1/2” Outlet Connections.
7. Thermal Overload Protection.
8. Fills System to 40 PSI in 30 Minutes (NFPA 13)
F. Distribution network.
1. Distribution network must include: stainless steel pipes, distribution
blocks, flash Normally Open & Normally Closed valves, flush vlaves, ball
valves, flow switches, pipe clamps, fittings, bolts and nuts
2. The pipes must be corrosion resistance AISI 316L stainless steel according
to DIN standard or equal, ensuring a long lifetime and clean water.
3. The connections must ferrule type DIN 2353 joints or SAE 518J flange joint.
4. Fittings shall have a minimum-rated working pressure of 1 ½ greater than the
maximum operating pressure of the water mist systems at 54°C (130°F).
5. All threads used in joints and fittings shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1
6. The couplings must be AISI 316 or of brass Ms 62.
7. The distribution network must be manufactured with a minimum safety factor of
8. Pipe clamps must be equipped with steel bottom and cover plates complete
with neoprene gaskets to avoid corrosion.
9. Pressure drop hydraulic calculation must be submitted in the tender stage.
10. A Flush valve must be installed for each zone.
11. All Pipes shall be marked by low stress stamp; Marking Shall clearly indicates the
specified standard with the manufacturer’s name, logo, pipe schedule or wall
thickness and material identification of related standard of fabrication.
12. Low pressure pipes (from water storage tanks up to break tanks) shall be st.st. 316L

21 13 30 - 11
Specifications
withstand 16 bars maximum operating pressure. The pipes shall be VDS or FM

approved.
G. Nozzles
The nozzles in the high pressure water mist system will be modular. The nozzles will
both be automatic or open, and consist of a socket and a nozzle body into which a
number of micro nozzles are fitted. Automatic nozzles will use a frangible glass
bulb with a piston valve as a built in detection/activation device
The nozzle part and the housing part are made in AISI 316 with an outer thread of
M13x1. The nozzle type must achieve the minimum requirement of droplet size,
water mist is a water spray for which the 90% of the flow weighted cumulative
volumetric distribution of water droplets, Dv0.90 is less than 1000 microns, this value
is found at the minimum design operating and is measured in a plane 1 m from the
nozzle
Individual strainers or filters for water mist nozzles, where required by the
manufacturer, shall be listed as a part of a nozzle.
The spray nozzles shall be arranged in such a way that the fine water spray discharge
from the nozzle covers the potential burning surface.
In case of obstructions additional nozzles could be needed to provide the protected area
with a sufficient amount of fine water spray.
The test nozzle will include the following
tests:
1. K-factor test.
2. Test of the spray angle.
3. 3. Water distribution tests.
4. 4. Strength testing.
5. 5. Different corrosion test.
6. 6. Heat resistance test.
7. 7. Vibration test.
H. High Pressure Hose Reel
The system shall include a water mist hydrant - hose reels and water mist discharge
lances with adjustable flow nozzles. The hose reel must be provided in robust open
rack, and must be installed to the wall by swivel bracket. The hose reel must have
automatic spring return for the hose. The size of hose shall be ½” with a length of 38 m
I. Normally closed Section Valve
The Machinery Space valve (in spray head network) must be with brass body materials
and contains the following parts:
1. Manual Release valve handle.
2. Flow monitor
3. Solenoid Valve
The flow through the machinery valve is detected by the flow indicator which shall
send a signal to the control panel, identifying the opened Machinery valve / pinpoint

21 13 30 - 12
Specifications
the fire zone.
A test arrangement set shall be included for each normally closed section valve
including two numbers of supervisory stainless steel ball valves.
J. Normally Open Section Valve
The normally open section valve (in sprinkler network) must be with brass body
material and contains the following parts:
1. Pressure gauge
2. Flow monitor
3. Micro switch
4. Manual shut off valve
5. Test hose connection
The section valve in sprinkler system shall always be locked in open position except
when the section is being serviced, or after operation to close down the system.
The signal from the normally opened section valves are to be verified by testing.
Attaching a discharge hose to the section valve shall open the test valve. This shall allow
a discharge
flow equal to that developed when one sprinkler is activated at the stand by pressure.
K. Water inhibitor
1. Inhibitor feed unit shall be used to feed anti-corrosive inhibitor chemical to pump
unit water tank. The inhibitor feed shall start and stop automatically by a signal
from auxiliary contact from the system activation
L. Filters and strainers
1. Water filters shall be provided at each outlet of the water supply tank(s).
2. Water filters shall be manufactured for the use with high pressure water mist
system.
3. Water filters shall be sized for continuous operation at the required minimum
flow and pressure, as verified by hydraulic calculations; for the minimum water
supply duration.
M. Pump Control Panel
The control cabinet serves to control the electrical system and monitor all
measurements of the pump unit. The operation of the unit is realized via the control
cabinet (for automatic as well as for manual operation), cabinet to have auxiliary
contacts for BMS connection
Alarm indications are given for electric motor thermo failure, emergency stop
activated, low and low water level in the water storage tank. These alarms show as a
common alarm in the control panel.
Alarm indications shall be available for remote monitoring via potential free contacts
for the following:
1. Pump Running.
2. Common Fault.
3. Fire.
Stop of high pressure pump(s) at low level in the water storage tank is also controlled, in
order to secure that the pump is not operated without water.
The pump starter cabinet must be part of the water mist system approval

21 13 30 - 13
Specifications
N. Detection Equipment
1. Fire Detection Control Panel (deluge systems only)
a. A 2 zone high pressure water mist fire control panel will be located adjacent to
the main entrance/ exit to the protected space, the panel will be of rigid
construction, and capable of being either surface mounted or semi-recessed as
indicated.
b. The panel fascia will be equipped with light emitting diodes to indicate fire,
fault and operational status, together with push action switches to control
functions, the operation of the switches will be accessed via a key operated
security key switch.
c. The following components will be provided on the control panel fascia:
− Silence Alarm Switch. − Test Evacuate Alarm Switch
− Alarm Silenced Lamp − Isolate Remote Signal – Switch and Lamp
− Buzzer Silence − System General Fault – Lamp and Buzzer
− Power on Lamp − System Automatic Mode – Lamp
− Lamp Test Switch − System Manual Mode – Lamp
− Key Operated − Security Switch
− Manual/Automatic Mode – − Isolate Release Circuit – Switch and Lamp
Push Switch
− Manual Release Unit
d. A sealed lead acid battery will be provided within the control panel to provide
24 hours of panel operation, and a half hour under alarm condition.
2. Detectors
Air sampling and optical type detectors will be located as per code
recommendations; Detectors will be connected together within each space to
provide two zones of protection. Both zones will additionally connect to detectors
in both ceiling and floor voids, where applicable
3. Remote Status Indication Panels
Remote status indication panels will be located as per code recommendations,
and will display lamps indicating system manual, automatic or discharged
condition.
4. Manual Release Units
a. Manual release units will be located as as per code recommendations.
b. Manual release unit casings will be colored YELLOW, and inscribed with the
lettering “HPWM MANUAL RELEASE POINT”.
c. Mounting heights for manual release units will be agreed on site
5. Shutdown Relay
a. An air conditioning shutdown relay will be provided to shutdown air
conditioning on receipt of a first stage fire signal.
b. A PDU shutdown relay will be provided to shut down the PDU within the
protected space on receipt of a second stage fire signal.
6. Sounders
Fire alarm sounders will be located as per code and manufacture

21 13 30 - 14
Specifications
recommendations, first stage alarm bells will be colored RED. Second stage
alarm will be a combined electronic sounder and xenon beacon unit, mounting
heights for sounders units will be agreed on site.
7. Remote Lamp Unit
Remote lamp units will be provided to give indication of an activated detector
within a ceiling or floor void.
PART - 3 - INSTALLATION.
3.01 PIPE WORK SPECIFICATION

Piping and tubing for water mist systems shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's installation manual, the surface of the tubing must be clean,
smooth and free
from scratches, die marks and other visible blemishes. To ensure compatibility
between tube and fittings, all tubing supplied will conform to the tube
manufacturer's recommendation for the following manufacturing variables (within the
requirements of the previously mentioned codes and standards):
1. Materials, method of manufacture
2. Wall thickness and outside diameter
3. Surface finish
4. Hardness
5. Concentricity
6. Cavity
3.02 TUBE FITTING AND CLAMPS

A. Pipe sizes from Ø 60.3 mm and down to Ø 30.0 mm are typically joined by press
fittings or TIG welding, using butt welding fittings.
B. Pipe sizes below Ø 30.0 mm are joined by stainless steel (AISI 316) grooved
ring fittings according DIN 2353.
C. Fittings will generally be manufactured from materials best suited to the service
and process conditions. All fittings will have a minimum working pressure
as specified for their respective service. Liquid thread sealants will be used rather
than PTFE tape.
D. Pipe clamps shall be installed in accordance with the system design spacing’s
relevant to the tube sizes.
3.03 HANGER SUPPORT

A. Hangers shall be designed to support five times the weight of the pipe or tube
when filled with gas or water, based on the system's use of the pipe or tube, plus
114 kg (250 lb) at each point of piping support.
B. Documentation shall be submitted to show that the hangers and hanging
method are recognized as good industry practice for the piping system.
C. Hangers and supports shall be located in accordance with the code requirements.

21 13 30 - 15
Specifications
PART - 4 EXECUTION
4.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
hazard-area leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting work performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
4.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR 15-MPA (2175-PSIG) CHARGING PRESSURE A.

PIPING BETWEEN STORAGE CONTAINERS AND ORIFICE UNION:
1. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties
and accessories and where required for maintenance.
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 1.5 the system working pressure minimum.
3. Flanged Joints: Class 600 minimum.
4. All Sizes: Stainless steel 316L, Schedule 80.
4.03 WATER MIST SYSTEM PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install water mist system extinguishing piping and other components level and
plumb and according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic
pipe installation and joint construction.
C. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606 dimensions.
Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end fittings with steel, keyed
couplings and lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install water mist containers/cylinders anchored to substrate.
E. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements
listed in NFPA 750, Section "Distribution," and related Appendix A paragraphs;
and ASME B31.1.
1. Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid or install pressure-relief
devices in valved sections of piping systems.
2. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13.
3. Install seismic restraints for extinguishing containers/cylinders and piping systems.
4. Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and accessories,
complying with requirements of NFPA 750, Section “Detection, Actuation, and
Control Systems," as required for supervised system application.
4.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The
following are specific connection requirements:
B. Install piping adjacent to extinguishing-agent containers/cylinders and pumps to
allow service and maintenance.

21 13 30 - 16
Specifications
C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm system.
Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in electrical specifications.
D. Ground electrical components.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
4.05 LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers/cylinder, other
equipment, and panels according to NFPA 750.
B. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning of
the horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.
4.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Professional Engineer: Inspect installed water misting systems, prepare
installation report, and certify that installation complies with the Contract
Documents and calculations, and comments of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 750, Section
"Approval of Installations." Include the following inspections and tests to
demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1. Check mechanical items.
2. Inspect extinguishing-agent containers/cylinders and extinguishing agent, and
check mountings for adequate anchoring to substrate.
3. Check electrical systems.
4. Check enclosure integrity.
5. Perform functional pre-discharge test.
6. Perform system functional operational test.
7. rations.
8. Check control-panel primary power source.
9. Perform "hydrostatic" test on wet piping system.
C. Perform field-acceptance tests for each water misting system when installation is
complete.
Perform system testing only after hazard-area enclosure construction has been
completed and openings sealed. Comply with operating instructions and procedures
of NFPA 750, Section "Approval of Installations." Include the following to
demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1. Perform functional pre-discharge test.
2. Perform system functional operational test.
3. Check remote monitoring operations.
4. Check control-panel primary power source.
5. Perform "hydrostatic" test on wet piping system.

21 13 30 - 17
Specifications
D. Correct malfunctioning equipment, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.

Replace equipment that cannot be corrected or does not perform as specified
and indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until
satisfactory results are obtained.
1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities
having jurisdiction.
E. Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. After installing water mist piping system and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7, "Inspection and Test Procedures," and Section 8, "System
Function Tests." Certify compliance with test parameters.
F. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or
replacements are made.
G. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative
to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
H. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service
and report results in writing.
I. Verify that extinguishing system is installed and connected according to the
Contract Documents.
J. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with the Contract Documents.
K. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions and do the following:
1. Verify that tests of piping system are complete.
2. Check for complete enclosure integrity.
3. Check operation of ventilation and exhaust systems.
L. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer’s written procedures. If no

procedures are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1. Fill water piping to the indicated pressure.
2. Energize circuits.
3. Adjust operating c o n t r o l s .
END OF SECTION

21 13 30 - 18
SECTION 22 05 00
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
PLUMBING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.02 APPLICATION .................................................................................................................. 1
1.03 SCOPE OF WORKS .......................................................................................................... 1
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................. 2
1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................................................................ 2
1.07 ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS .............................................................................................. 3
1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL .................. 3
1.09 APPROVED MATERIALS ............................................................................................... 3
1.10 INSTRUCTION PERIOD .................................................................................................. 3
1.11 INSTRUCTION MANUAL AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ........................................... 3
1.12 WORKMANSHIP .............................................................................................................. 4
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 4
PART - 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 4
3.01 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ....................................................................................... 4
3.02 TESTS ........................................................................................................................... 4
3.03 COORDINATION OF TRADES....................................................................................... 5
3.04 ACCESS DOORS .............................................................................................................. 5
3.05 PERMITS ........................................................................................................................... 5
3.06 OPENINGS IN EXTERIOR WALLS ............................................................................... 5
3.07 TRENCH BOTTOM GRADING ....................................................................................... 6
Khatib & Alami General Mechanical Requirements for Plumbing

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 05 00
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING
PART - 1 GENERAL

A. The work of Division 22 shall be governed by general conditions of contract and
sections of Division -22.
B. It is the Contractors responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the
requirements of the above documents, and further assure that all Subcontractors are
equally informed.
1.02 Application
A. This section applies to and is part of all Sections of Division 22.
1.03 Scope of Works

A. The works covered under this contract include the supply, installation, testing,
adjusting and putting into operation systems, components of systems, and individual
items of equipment, and work related thereto, in accordance with the project Tender
Documents. Products not mentioned but obviously necessary for the completion of
those Works shall be provided.
B. Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, the following electrical works and materials
for the Mechanical equipment shall be supplied and installed under Division 22 of the
specification but in all respect to the requirements of the Electrical Specifications.
1. All control panels including doorlock disconnected switches, push buttons, starters,
contractors, circuit breakers, time delays, selector switches, relays, transformers,
timers, controllers, pilot lights, setpoints, alarms and all other electrical equipment
which are necessary for the satisfactory operation, control and protection of all
plant supplied under this section of the specifications.
2. Whenever a number of starters controllers, instruments, indicating lights and the
like occur or are shown on the Mechanical and/or electrical Drawings, they shall be
arranged in a central position in a neat, easily cleaned, factory-built panel, or motor
control center assembly. The assembly shall include isolators and all necessary
fuses, busbars, starters, instruments, relays, push-buttons, indicating lights and the
like. Components shall be mounted in a logical order based on the sequence of
operation.
3. All control equipment including sensors, detectors, actuators, controllers, pressure
level and flow switches, annunciation alarms, remote control stations and all such
equipment needed for the proper system operation.
4. All control wiring for the above mentioned equipment.
5. Final connection, between disconnect switches, power outlets, flex outlet and
mechanical equipment.

22 05 00 - 1
Specifications
6. Power cables between submersible pumps and control panel.
C. The following electrical works and materials for the mechanical equipment shall be
supplied and installed under the electrical part of this contract.
1. All power supply upto and including the following:
- Disconnect switches when specified to be installed separate from the control panel.
- Flex outlet for electric water heater.
2. Power supply upto control panels when specified with an integral disconnect
switch.
3. Power supply to disconnect switches when the switches are built-in the equipment.
4. Empty conduits with pull wires for all cables and wires classified under the
mechanical scope of works.
5. Control outlet boxes for all control equipment classified under the mechanical
scope of works.
6. Power cables and conduits or fixing arrangement between water pumps, and their
control panel.

A. Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. The manufacturers of all materials and equipment must have at least ten years of

A. The plumbing works including all related systems shall comply with the latest
applicable codes and standards of the following:
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code.
NPC National Plumbing Code.
IPC International Plumbing Code.
AWWA American Water Works Association.
ASME American Society of Engineer.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials.
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
AWS American welding Society.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
BS British Standards.
FM Factory Mutual.
IRR Institute of Boiler and radiator Manufacturers.
ISO International Standardization Organization.
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers.

A. In addition to the sections mentioned above, and unless specifically called in the
specification the following works shall be referred with the other related divisions.

22 05 00 - 2
Specifications
A. The Drawings are based on design and include general layouts and typical details of
workmanlike manner to conform to the structure, to avoid obstructions, to preserve
head room, and to keep openings and passage ways clear without additional
instruction and without additional cost to the owner.
1.08 Shop Drawings and Data to be Submitted for Approval

A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings showing the exact routing and locations
of all the piping, equipment, etc., all in their respective locations and according to the
dimensions of the approved manufacturer. Shop Drawings scale shall be 1/10, 1/20,
1/50 and 1/100 as applicable and as approved by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall submit catalog cuts and brochures of products with reference to
proper paragraph in specifications. All submittals shall be bound in one Booklet.
C. The Contractor shall submit adequate Engineering data on each piece of equipment
together with all characteristic curves, capacity selection charts and all data for testing
and balancing of the systems. In addition the Contractor shall submit manufacturer's
printed installation instructions.
D. The Contractor shall submit at the beginning of the project a schedule of submittals for
materials and shop drawings to the approval of the Engineer.

A. All materials shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements of the
Specifications.
B. Materials shall be delivered in unbroken packages bearing the brand and maker's
name, and shall be stored on platforms and properly covered to protect them from
moisture, heat and dust.
C. All materials shall be supplied from the main factories in the country of origin of the
manufacturer. Any deviation from this, like supplying equipment assembled in another
different country under a license or another name is not accepted unless approved by
the Engineer.
1.10 Instruction Period

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the training and familiarization of the
Employer’s Maintenance Staff for a period of at least six weeks on all equipment and
plants he has supplied or installed.
1.11 Instruction Manual and As-built Drawings

A. The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in electronic and hard copy
triplicate bound, A4 size, Instruction Manuals containing the following material;
B. Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features.
C. Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional components of the
systems listed on the Drawings, control diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers.
List shall give system No., unit no., Manufacturer's Model No., and Manufacture's

22 05 00 - 3
Specifications
Drawing no. Parts list shall include manufacturer's recommended spare parts for one
year operation.
D. Chart of the tag numbers, location and function of each valve.
E. Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
F. Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
G. List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
H. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control diagrams and
wiring diagrams of controllers.
I. Complete, as installed, color coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
connections and interlock connections of other mechanical equipment.
J. The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to the
fulfillment of the specified requirements.
K. All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion date.
1.12 Workmanship
A. All workmanship required to accomplish the work mentioned in Mechanical
specification or shown on related Drawings, shall conform to the highest standards,
and as required by the Engineer.
B. The Engineer will be the sole judge of the standards required.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART - 3 EXECUTION

A. All apparatus shall be thoroughly cleaned before being placed in operation. Finished
surfaces shall be restored if damaged and entire installation shall be delivered in
perfect condition, subject to the approval of the Engineer. Systems shall be adjusted
and balanced to operate as shown in the Drawings and herein specified.
3.02 Tests
A. All piping and equipment shall be tested as specified under the corresponding section
of the Specifications and to meet local and specified requirements. Provide
anemometers, thermometers, gauges, voltmeters, ammeters, and similar instruments,
not part of the permanent installation, but required to record the performance of the
equipment and systems. Labor, materials, power, etc.., required for testing, shall be
furnished by the Contractor, unless otherwise indicated under the particular section of
the Specifications.
B. Tests shall be performed in the presence of representatives of the Engineer and such
C. In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping systems only before connection of

22 05 00 - 4
Specifications
manufacturers of fixtures, equipment and appliances, or accepted engineering
standards for piping and fittings.
D. All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be
repeated until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the approval
of the Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction, and at no additional cost to the
Employer.
E. Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and/or damaged materials replaced,
F. The duration of tests shall be as determined by all parties having jurisdiction, but in no
case less than the time prescribed in each division of the Specifications.
G. The following tests should be furnished for but limited to the following:
1. Noise and vibration isolation test
2. Insulation test
3. Sanitary drainage test
4. Pump tests
5. Noise and vibration measurement
6. Water heaters
7. Area storm drainage
8. Domestic water supply test

A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work to ensure orderly, timely installations of the
3.04 Access Doors

A. Access doors shall provide ready access to concealed control valves, traps, cleanouts,
motors and other items requiring operation, adjustment, or maintenance.
3.05 Permits
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections and tests, for
the proper installation of his work, as may be required by the various administrative
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificates of inspections, tests etc., with the proper approval certified thereon, shall
be secured by the Contractor and these documents shall be delivered to the Engineer
before the work in question will be accepted.
3.06 Openings in Exterior Walls

A. Openings in exterior walls, particularly at or below grade shall be kept properly
plugged and caulked at all times, (except when being worked on) to preclude the
possibility of flooding due to storms or other causes. After completion of work,
openings shall be permanently sealed and caulked in the manner herein specified.

22 05 00 - 5
Specifications
3.07 Trench Bottom Grading
A. All trench bottom grading required for plumbing work shall be done under the
requirements of this section of the Specifications. The bottom of all trenches shall be
trimmed by hand method to receive pipes at their respective finish levels. Trenches
shall not be excavated below grade by machine.
B. After the pipe lines have been tested and approved, backfill shall be compacted
thoroughly by hand tampers below center lines of pipes and to at least 300mm above
it. No backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to cause damage or misalignment to
the pipes or protective coating if used. Backfill material under such conditions shall be
earth or gravel above the top of piping and hubs.
END OF SECTION

22 05 00 - 6
SECTION 22 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 1
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 1
1.02 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .................................................. 1
1.03 VALVES PRESSURE RATING ............................................................................ 1
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL ......................................................... 2
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................... 2
2.01 GATE VALVES...................................................................................................... 2
2.02 GLOBE VALVES ................................................................................................... 2
2.03 CHECK VALVES ................................................................................................... 3
2.04 AUTOMATIC AIR VENT ..................................................................................... 3
2.05 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ................................................................................... 3
2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES ......................................................................................... 3
2.07 BALANCING VALVES ......................................................................................... 4
2.08 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (ASSEMBLED SET OF TWO

WATER PRV) ................................................................................................................................. 4
2.09 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE ........................................ 4
2.10 STRAINERS ........................................................................................................... 5
2.11 AUTOMATIC, DYNAMIC BALANCING VALVES........................................... 5
2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS .................................................................................. 5
2.13 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR .......................................................................... 6
2.14 BACK FLOW PREVENTER ................................................................................. 6
PART - 3 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 6
3.01 INSTALLATION OF VALVES ............................................................................. 6
Khatib & Alami General Duty Valves for Plumbing

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING
PART - 1 GENERAL
A. Valves shall be installed only in vertical or horizontal positions unless otherwise

required by the Drawings.
B. All valves shall be installed in accessible locations to facilitate easy removal for
maintenance.
C. Valves shall be full-line size.
D. Valves 21/2" (65mm) dia. and smaller shall have threaded ends, valves 3" (75) dia.
and larger shall have flanged ends.
E. All threaded end valves shall be installed with unions to facilitate the removal of
the valve from the pipeline.
F. Gate valves shall be installed on both sides of every piece of equipment for all
pipe-system connections, and where shown on the Drawings.
A. The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are
included in this Section in each applicable part, as if repeated herein verbatim.
Section 22 05 00 - General Mechanical Requirements for Plumbing
Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation
Section 22 11 13 - Facility Water Distribution Piping
Section 22 11 16 - Domestic Water Piping and Fittings
Section 22 11 23 - Domestic Water Pumps
Section 22 12 00 - Facility Potable Water Storage Tanks
Section 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage
Section 22 13 16 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 22 14 00 - Facility Storm Drainage
Section 22 14 29 - Sump Pumps
Section 22 33 30 - Domestic Water Heater
Section 22 40 00 - Sanitary Fixtures
1.03 Valves Pressure Rating
A. Unless specified otherwise all valves, strainers, flexible connections, etc. shall be
selected for pressure rating at least 1.5 times the operating pressure.
B. Contractor shall submit a schedule of all valves, strainers, etc., showing the
required pressure rating for each fitting and shall indicate its location and service.

22 05 23 - 1
Specifications
1.04 Quality Assurance and Control
A. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications,
industry standards listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and
requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
B. Tests: Test valves in accordance with the appropriate section of the specification
describing each system
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Gate Valves
A. Valves up to 50 mm size shall have ASTM B62 bronze bodies with PN20 pressure
rating. They shall have threaded inlet and outlet connection and shall have the
capability of being repacked while under pressure.
B. Valves for 65 mm size and larger shall be non-rising stem, inside screw and yoke
type with cast iron body and bronze trim. Cast iron shall conform to ASTM A126,
Class B. Valve shall have solid wedge bronze disc, steel hand wheel, and flanged
inlet and outlet. Valve shall be rated at PN 16 water working pressure and have the
capability of being repacked while under pressure
C. The rubber on wedges and in sealing rings etc. shall be of a synthetic quality which
can withstand storage for at least five years and shall be suitable for the water
qualities specified PN16
D. alves installed on pressure UPVC & CPVC pipes shall be of PVC
E. One gate valve shall be supplied and installed:
At the supply and return from each equipment.

At the discharge and suction of each pump.
At all points shown on the Drawings and/or specified.
2.02 Globe Valves
A. Valves for 50 mm size and smaller shall be of the screwed in bonnet type with a
renewable disc and threaded ANSI B2.1. The body and bonnet shall be bronze to
ASTM B62. The disk shall be a composition plug type.The gland to be capable of
being repacked while under normal pressure.
B. Valves for 65 mm size and larger shall be outside screw with integral yoke, bolted
bonnet, rising stem with plug type disc, and flanged to ANSI B16.5. The body and
bonnet shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A126 Class B. The fully guided disc
shall be of bronze. The replaceable seat shall be of bronze. The stem shall be of
manganese bronze and the packing in the gland shall be renewable and suitable for
the application.

22 05 23 - 2
Specifications
2.03 Check Valves
A. Valves for 50 mm size and smaller shall be horizontal swing check, Y - pattern
with a bronze body and trim. Valve shall have bronze disc, threaded inlet and
outlet, and shall be rated for PN20 water working pressure
B. Valves for 65 mm size and larger shall be horizontal swing check type, non-slam
design having iron body and bronze for brass trim. Valve shall have bronze or brass
disc, and flanged inlet and outlet and shall be rated for PN16 water working
pressure
C. One check valve shall be installed:
At the discharge of each pump.
At all points shown on the Drawings and/or where specified.
2.04 Automatic Air Vent

Automatic air vents shall be installed in accessible positions and shall be of
aluminium bronze construction with brass spindle nickel alloy valve and seat,
brass float and integral lock-shield isolating valve. Operating pressure PN16
and temperature up to 120° in all cases the air vent shall be preceded by a lock-
shield pattern stop valve and the discharge from the air vent shall be 10 mm
copper pipe. Automatic air vents shall be provided on each service with the
exception of HTHW and MTHW ,at the highest point of the service within
each plant area and on each vertical distribution riser.
Discharge pipe shall be collected over a covered tundish and the outlet piped to
the nearest drain gully. Discharge pipes shall be labelled according to the
service
2.05 Pipe Expansion Joints
A. Expansion joints shall be provided wherever pipes cross structural expansion joints
and wherever required to prevent undue stresses caused by thermal expansion of
the pipes.
B. Expansion joints shall be of the packless-bellow type with flanged or welded ends
as suitable for the pipe application.
C. Bellows shall be of stainless steel and suitable for a pressure of 125 psi (860 Kpa)
or the design working pressure, whichever is greater. Expansion joints shall be
provided with guides to prevent any unnecessary misalignment of the pipe. Guides
and anchor arrangements shall be per the recommendations of the expansion joints
manufacturers.
2.06 Butterfly Valves
A. Valves shall be designed for minimum of 0.68 MPa differential pressure with the
downstream flange removed through 300 mm size. Factory test data of differential
pressure rating is required. Valves shall have cast iron body, conforming to ASTM
A126 Class B body, tin bronze disc, in accordance with ASTM B30 copper alloy
and EPDM seals. Shafts design shall be 416 stainless steel. All valves shall have

22 05 23 - 3
Specifications
extended necks for a minimum of 50 mm insulation. Valves 63 mm through 150
mm shall be provided with lever operators and memory stop. Valves 200 mm and
larger shall be driven by a worm gear operator or screw driven operator with
position indicator. Operators shall be fully enclosed in cast iron housing, be
watertight, and require no more than 150 N rim pull. Operators shall be designed to
withstand, without damage, an input torque of 1.3 KN. Valves shall be rated for
PN16 .
2.07 Balancing Valves
A. Double regulating valve shall be of the Y-pattern bronze globe valves for 50 mm
and below and cast iron for 65 mm and above. It shall have a characterized
throttling disk with sufficient authority to regulate flow in a circuit incorporating a
Flow Measurement Valve. The valves shall have a unique device which enables
the disk to be locked in position to control flow at a pre-determined rate. An Allen
key (3mm) shall be supplied for lock adjustment. Tight closure of the valve shall
be assured by use of a PTFE disc insert. The valves shall be rendered 'tamper
proof'. An in-built drain valve shall be used for draining, back filling or air
venting. Valves up to 50 mm diameter shall be PN20 and for valves 65 mm and
above to be PN16.
2.08 Water Pressure Reducing Valves (assembled set of two Water PRV)
A. Pressure reducing and regulating valves shall be of the self-contained, direct acting,
spring loaded, diaphragm bars type, suitable for inlet pressure of up to 21 bars for
pressure reducing station. PRV shall be capable of maintaining same outgoing
pressure irrespective of fluctuation of inlet pressure. PRV shall be fitted with 2
pressure gauges.
B. The valves shall be of a design which permits the complete replacement or
inspection of any part without removal of the valve body from the pipe.
C. The valve body shall be of bronze, with threaded ends. The valve trim shall be of
bronze and all trim in direct contact with water shall be of bronze or stainless steel.
The valve seat shall be of the removable type and shall be of stainless steel. The
diaphragm shall be of synthetic rubber. The valve shall be provided from the
factory with the correct spring for the outlet pressure range specified. The valve
shall be provided with a means for adjusting the outlet pressure within the range of
the spring.
D. The valve shall be suitable for installation in any position.
E. Pressure reducing and regulating valves shall be as Manufactured by
HONEYWELL, WILKINGS, BRAUKMANN, WATTS or any approved equal.
2.09 Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve
A. This valve shall be used on domestic hot water lines wherever applicable.
B. Temperature and pressure relief valve shall be self-closing type with test lever and
screwed connections.
C. Valve shall be suitable for a pressure of 75 to 150 psi (520 to 1030 Kpa ) service
and shall be supplied with temperature relief set at 210 deg.F (100 Deg.C).

22 05 23 - 4
Specifications
D. Valve shall be AGA and ASME rated.
2.10 Strainers
A. Water strainer shall be supplied and installed at the suction connection of all
pumps, and ahead of all automatic flow control valves.
B. Strainers 2 1/2" (65mm) and smaller shall be Y-pattern type with bronze body,
screwed cover, brass basket and screwed ends.
C. Strainers 3" (75 mm) and larger shall be of cast iron body, brass basket and flanged
ends.
D. Basket shall have 1/32" (0.8 mm.) perforations for water service.
2.11 AUTOMATIC, DYNAMIC BALANCING VALVES
A. An automatic dynamic balancing valve shall be installed on all AHUs and FCUs
shall be capable to maintain a specific flow rate independent of pressure
fluctuations within the hydronic system. The valve shall utilize a specific flow rate
cartridge below its pressure differential range and shall act as a fixed orifice.
B. Once in the operating pressure differential range, the effective open orifice area of
the cartridge shall automatically adjusted to the point where the specified flow rate
will be delivered (as the pressure differential increase the open area closes and as it
decrease the area opens).
C. When the pressure differential is exceeded, the valve again becomes a fixed orifice
device, it shall prevents from actually closing the ports located at the top of the cup.
This ensures that no part of the system is starved or shutdown.
D. Automatic dynamic balancing shall be of bronze body (CuZn39PbZ) with stainless
internal parts with a working pressure of 1600 KPA and with standing up to 120°C,
similar to FLOWCON(K) or approved equal.
2.12 Flexible Connectors
On pipework connections to heating (excluding pipeline pumps here natural
attenuation of noise and vibration is adequate) and hot water pumps , E.P.D.M.
synthetic rubber connectors shall be installed. The connectors shall be corrosion
protected steel wire reinforced with mild steel backing flanges behind rubber
raised faces.
On chilled water, cold water services and pump chillers E.P.D.M. synthetic
rubber connectors shall be installed. The connectors shall be nylon cord
reinforced with mild steel backing flanges behind raised faces.
All synthetic rubber connectors shall be restrained with tie bars.
The pipework installations shall be electrically continuous up to and including

the plant and equipment. The contractor shall provide and install earth bonding
across all flexible joints including those on plant and equipment.

22 05 23 - 5
Specifications
The Contractor shall fit these items so that they are readily accessible. They
shall not be concealed.
2.13 Water Hammer Arrestor
A. Each water hammer arrestor shall be complete as specified herein:

1. Stainless steel shell and adapter.
2. Elastomer bellow.
3. Hydraulic displacement fluid.
4. Pressurized insert gas pneumatic displacement chamber.
5. 15 mm NPT threaded connection
6. Isolating ball valve.
2.14 Back Flow Preventer
A. Provide backflow preventers as indicated, of the reduced pressure principle type,

consisting of assembly including shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on
inlet.
B. Backflow preventers to include test cocks and pressure- differential relief valve
located between two positive seating check valves.
C. Construct backflow preventers in accordance with ASSE Standard 1013.
D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide backflow preventers of one of
the following manufacturers, or approved equal:
• JOSAM ( USA )
• ZURN ( USA )
• Watts Regulator Co. ( USA )
• Crane Co. ( USA or UK)
• Newman – Hattersly ( UK)
• Nibco ( USA )
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation of Valves

maintenance.
D. Valves 2" (50 mm) dia. and smaller shall have threaded ends, valves 2 ½" (65 mm)
dia. and larger shall have flanged ends.

22 05 23 - 6
Specifications
E. All threaded end valves shall be installed with unions to facilitate the removal of
the valve from the pipeline.
F. Gate valves shall be installed on both sides of every piece of equipment for all
pipe-system connections, and where shown on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION

22 05 23 - 7
SECTION 22 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART - 1 GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES - GENERAL ................ 1
1.02 SUPPORTING SYSTEM MATERIAL & STANDARDS ............................................ 2
1.03 HORIZONTAL & VERTICAL PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE .............................. 2
Khatib & Alami Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART - 1 GENERAL

requirements.
1.1.1 Support, anchor and guide all piping to preclude failure or deformation. Construct and
1.1.2 Fasten piping securely to the structure without overstressing any portion of the supports
or the structure itself. Secure pipe support, anchors and guides to concrete by means of
inserts or if greater load carrying capacity is required by means of steel fishplates
embedded in the concrete.
1.1.3 Arrange hanger to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building and
supports.
1.1.4 Un-insulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers
or supports
1.1.5 Support piping and tubing at intervals indicated in the schedule hereinafter and at all
1.1.6 Clearance for application of specified Vapour sealed insulation without cutting pipeline
covering or fitting covering in installation of pipe hangers and fittings shall be provided.
1.1.7 Furnish pipe hangers and supports complete with rods, bolts, lock nuts, swivels,
1.1.8 Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the same
at each end. Provision should be made to keep the lines in their relative position to each
other by the use of either clamps or clips.
1.1.9 For hanger rods on piping 3/8" (10 mm) thru 2" (50 mm) inclusive use 3/8" (10 mm)
1.1.10 Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with

22 05 29 - 1
Specifications
1.1.11 Provide lateral bracing for supporting rods over 450mm. long braced at every fourth
1.1.12 Floor supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from floors with cast-iron
rests, with pipe nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. Where provision for expansion is
required, provide pipe roll stands, without vertical adjustment. Provide concrete or steel
pipe piers, fasten stands to piers.
1.1.13 Wall supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from wall with steel J-Hook for
pipe located close to wall and not larger than 3" (80 mm) pipe. For greater loads, up to
1500 lbs (680 Kg) maximum loading provide welded steel bracket.
1.1.14 Provide oversize hangers with blocking the same thickness as the insulation to pitch
vapor sealed insulated pipes accurately at time of insulation.
1.1.15 Hangers on PVC pipes shall be of design which does not clamp the pipe tightly but
permits axial movement.
1.1.16 Support but do not rigidly restrain PVC pipes at end of branches and at change of
direction or elevation. Vertical piping shall be maintained in the straight alignment.
Support trap arms in excess of 900mm in length as close as possible to the trap.
1.1.17 The Contractor should provide shop drawings and load calculations to verify the
suitability of the system for critical load applications as per the Engineer and the
Owner’s Representative’s requirement.
1.02 Supporting System Material & Standards
1.2.1 Supply and install pipe supporting system in accordance with MSS SP58, MSS SP69,
and MSS SP89.
1.2.2 Where possible, pipe supports and accessories (Channel, threaded rod, nuts, fisher,
bolts,…etc) shall be supplied from one manufacturer.
1.2.3 Pipe supports and related accessoeies shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel.
1.03 Horizontal & Vertical Piping Support Schedule
1.3.1 Steel and PVC Pipes

. ¾" and 1" (20 and 25 mm) steel pipe-----2.5 meter
. 1 ¼"-2" (32 and 50 mm) steel pipe-------3.0 meter
. 2 ½"-4" (65 and 100 mm)steel pipe ------3.5 meter
. 5"-6" (125 and 150 mm) steel pipe---------4.0 meter
. 2 ½" (65 mm) and smaller PVC pipe-------1.2 meter
. 3" (80 mm) and over PVC pipe-------------1.8 meter
1.3.2 Vertical spacing of PVC pipes shall be twice as those of horizontal spacing.
1.3.3 Vertical spacing of other pipes - at every floor level.
• WALRAVEN ( Holland )
22 05 29 - 2
Specifications
• SIKLA ( Germany )
• HILTI ( USA )
END OF SECTION

22 05 29 - 3
SECTION 22 05 48
CONTROL FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 1
1.03 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................. 1
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .............................................. 2
1.05 GUARANTEE.................................................................................................................. 2
1.06 ACOUSTIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS AND SPECIFICATION .......................... 2
1.07 SPECIFIED NOISE LEVELS.......................................................................................... 3
1.08 VIBRATION CONTROL ................................................................................................ 3
1.09 VIBRATION ISOLATION, STRUCTURAL NOISE AND EQUIPMENT BASES ..... 3
1.10 PIPING SYSTEM VIBRATION ISOLATORS .............................................................. 3
1.11 DRAINAGE PIPE NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL........................................... 4
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................... 4
2.01 ISOLATION HANGERS ................................................................................................. 4
2.02 ISOLATION MOUNTS ................................................................................................... 4
2.03 CONCRETE FOUNDATION BLOCKS ......................................................................... 5
2.04 INERTIA BASES............................................................................................................. 5
PART - 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................. 5
3.01 NOISE TESTS ................................................................................................................. 5
3.02 VIBRATION TESTS ....................................................................................................... 5
3.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PERFORMANCE TEST ............................................... 6

for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 05 48
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
[This part shall be read in conjunction with Acoustic Specialist Report Specifications. Any
discrepancies between the contents of this part and the Acoustic Specialist report, the report
specifications shall take presidence].
PART - 1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall consider all necessary acoustic data to determine the actual surface
area to be acoustically treated. Acoustic calculation sheets along with the Contractor's
proposals shall be provided, clearly showing that the specified “Reverberation Time”
(RT) will be achieved by using the type of acoustic treatment, for the approval of the
Engineer.
B. The Specialist Sub-Contractor should have successfully supplied, installed and
completed similar projects for a period of not less than 10 years.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Unless more stringent requirements specified elsewhere, buildings should have ambient
internal noise levels from external sources do not exceed the criteria prescribed in Green
Buildings regulations.
B. Reference Standards shall conform to the following performance criteria determined by
testing full assemblies (component tests are unacceptable) of identical materials and
construction, using factory standard finishes in accordance with relevant codes and
standards:
C. Acoustics Performance Characteristics:
1. Provide acoustic materials with acoustical absorption characteristics as specified
elsewhere by a testing organisation acceptable to Engineer. Approved testing
D. Toxicity Characteristics
1. Acoustic materials used in the project should have toxicity characteristics in
accordance with article 15, Part 1120 of the New York state uniform fire
prevention and building code MEA classification ME 123-92-M
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit to the Engineer, three (3) complete sets of shop drawings prepared on
CAD. (Hand produced drawings shall not be acceptable). The drawings shall show
all necessary details and dimensions required which will subsequently be field
verified and revised as required for the Engineer’s approval.
B. Samples
1. Submit two (2 sets) of the manufacturers samples, 2# samples per set. Each
individual panel (wall and ceiling) to be actual size with relevant fixing
components for the approval of the Engineer. Product shall be original production

22 05 48 - 1
Specifications
material in fabric or vinyl finish as specified.
C. Certification
1. Submit a certificate of compliance to specify acoustical and fire performance
criteria as per this specification, signed by the manufacturer. Attach independent
laboratory test results, showing that the products supplied as complete assemblies
meeting or exceeding the specified requirements.
D. Manufacturers Approval
1. The Acoustic Specialist supplying and installing the material shall be an approved
agent of the manufacturer. The manufacturer will certify that said contractor is an
officially appointed agent having sufficient experience and expertise to complete
the project in a satisfactory manner.
E. Single Source
1. All materials as far as possible shall be from a single manufacturer/supplier.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fabricated units and related components to the site for installation to meet a
reasonable schedule and to suit the approved project construction programme. On-site
storage shall be such as to ensure that all panels and associated materials are protected
from damage and the outside elements.
B. Prior to installation the site must be free of wet and dusty trades and the climatic
conditions stabilized to normal operational levels. Acoustic elements shall be allowed to
stabilize on site 24 hours prior to installation.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. The Specialist shall furnish in the Client’s name, a written guarantee covering the
product supplied against defects in materials and workmanship under normal operating
conditions for a period of one year from the date of completion of acoustic works. The
Contractor shall pass on to the owner any and all guarantees provided by the
manufacturers and acoustic sub-contractor of individual members of the system before
the completion of the project.
B. Provide to the Engineer in the Client’s name, sound test results. Sound test results
should comply with this specification, which is to achieve the indicated Reverberation
Times (RT). The sound test is to form an integral part of the specialist acoustic sub-
contractors scope of work.
1.06 ACOUSTIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS AND SPECIFICATION

A. It will be the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the internal acoustic ambient
B. Where the contractor fails to meet these specifications he will be expected at his own
C. It will be the mechanical services sub-contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the noise
generated by the plant, do not exceed the noise criteria levels for the various types of
areas specified.

22 05 48 - 2
Specifications
1.07 SPECIFIED NOISE LEVELS
A. The optimum NC/NR noise levels for the various spaces (Refer to Table 1 in Section 23
05 48)
1.08 VIBRATION CONTROL

A. All mechanical, machinery shall be analysed for vibration and for noise breakout to
areas adjacent and above or below to ensure that the specified noise criteria ratings are
met.
1.09 VIBRATION ISOLATION, STRUCTURAL NOISE AND EQUIPMENT BASES

A. The contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation and testing of the
complete system necessary for vibration isolation to dampen and eliminate all structure
borne vibration generated by the electro-mechanical equipment as described in this
specification and as detailed on the scheme drawings.
B. It is the Contractors responsibility to carry out a full vibration and structure borne noise
study as detailed in the mechanical specifications.
C. Where Plumbing equipment units are located at roof level or inside a room the selection
of vibration isolation systems shall take into account the effect of the unsupported span
between building columns and the subsequent deflection of the slab under the point
loads. The spring type isolators shall have a static deflection of not less than 50mm
under the load of the units supported. This static deflection is to provide an isolation
efficiency of at least 95% and higher deflections are to be used if the calculations so
indicate. The Contractor shall also check the installation for airborne noise through the
structure that could affect accommodation areas immediately below or adjacent and if
necessary recommend the use of acoustic floating floors to contain the noise. A report
of the study and recommendations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior
to proceeding with the installation. The cost of the study, implementation, erection and
any rectification of the original design shall be carried out at the Contractors own cost.
D. The vibration isolators shall be positioned in accordance with the manufacturer
E. The equipment shall be loaded exactly over or between the mounts without any
overhang.
F. The static deflection of the vibration isolators shall be determined by the specialist
acoustic engineer, but should not, be less than that recommended by CIBSE GUIDE or
ASHRAE handbook.
G. The vibration isolators shall be treated against corrosion. The steel components shall be
PVC coated. The nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc-electro plated.
1.10 PIPING SYSTEM VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. All piping connected to rotating machinery shall be supported by hangers and supports
including vibration isolators and shall be connected to the equipment by means of
acoustic flexible connectors.
B. The first three hangers from the equipment should provide the same deflection as the
equipment isolators; the remaining hangers should be spring or combination spring and
rubber incorporating a spring with at least 19 mm deflection.

22 05 48 - 3
Specifications
1.11 DRAINAGE PIPE NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
A. Where noise level is not achievable due to the noise generated by the drainage pipes, an
acoustical pipe lagging should be provided to reduce the radiated noise.
B. Alternatively, "acoustical" or "sound proof' or "silent pipes" system can be used to
achieve the same noise level required in the space.
C. The acoustical specialist shall study and give recommendations if any (or both)
option(s) could be used in order to achieve the noise level required.
D. The lagging shall be either fiberglass or acoustic foam with aluminum faced of 1”
(25mm) thick and of minimum 10d B (A) insertion loss.
E. 1The sound proof pipes system shall be in accordance with DIN 4109 and VDI guide
4100, DIN 4102, B2.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ISOLATION HANGERS

A. Isolation hangers shall be used for suspended pipes and equipment.
B. Isolation hangers are rubber or springs or a combination of both.
C. Rubber Hangers
1. Shall be of the rubber-in-shear type. It shall consist of:
a. A high grade rubber block with suspension rod and an outside steel housing.
b. The steel housing will be anchored to the ceiling slab and the suspension rod
shall support the equipment.
c. The rubber shall be protected against corrosion due to oil or other damaging
agents.
D. Spring Hangers
1. Shall be of the open mounting type and shall consist of a steel spring between a top
and bottom plate with an adjustment bolt or levelling.
2. The spring should be designed to provide horizontal stiffness at least 75% of
vertical stiffness to assure stability, 50% travel beyond rated load and safe solid
stresses.
2.02 ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Isolation mounts shall be used between equipment and concrete base and at the loading
points of the equipment as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Rubber Mounts
1. Shall be of the rubber-in-shear type with a cub shape or integrated ribbed rubber
pad.
2. The pad shall have two bolt holes for isolator anchorage to concrete base.
3. Rubber mounts shall not be used for deflection requirements larger than 8 mm.
C. Spring Mounts
1. Shall be of the restrained steel spring mountings and shall incorporate hold down
2. The isolator shall include an acoustical barrier of rubber pad bonded to the base
plate to prevent transmission of very high frequency vibration and noise and be
corrosion protected when installed outdoors.
22 05 48 - 4
Specifications
3. The spring should be designed to provide horizontal stiffness at least 75 % of
vertical stiffness to assure stability, 50% travel beyond rated load, and safe solid
stresses.
2.03 CONCRETE FOUNDATION BLOCKS

A. A reinforced concrete foundation block or concrete inertia base for each piece of
equipment shall be constructed of minimum thickness as shown on the Drawings, with a
minimum weight equal to at least two times that of the equipment and in accordance
with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer and/or vibration specialist.
Bases shown on drawings or included in these specifications represent the minimum
requirements of the Engineer.
2.04 INERTIA BASES

A. Each water pump shall be supported on an Inertia base. Base shall be consist of pre-
engineered welded steel frames suitable for concrete pouring, welded-in-concrete
reinforcement, equipment mounting bolts and vibration isolator brackets. Base shall
mount on spring vibration isolators which shall be of high deflection, free standing, un-
housed large diameter, laterally stable steel springs assembled into an upper load plate
and leveling assembly and into a lower load plate and noise isolation pad assembly.
B. Other equipment which are found, by the Engineer, to require inertia bases, shall be of
the same specifications as above and shall be part of the Contractor's obligation without
additional cost.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 NOISE TESTS

A. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to employ an independent acoustic
engineer to carry out proving tests and to prepare noise test certificates for all
B. The general basis for acceptability of the installation acoustically is (tolerance + or -
2db) at any point 1.2 meters above floor level and 1.5 meters from equipment or noise
sources.
C. For items of plant the noise level shall be taken at a point equivalent distance to the
3.02 VIBRATION TESTS

A. All vibration isolation systems shall allow no more than 5% transmissibility to the
specialist testing apparatus and personnel, then the contractor shall engage and employ
such specialist services. The contractor shall bear the cost of rectification of the
installations as well as the cost of the specialist services in order to meet the design
requirements.

22 05 48 - 5
Specifications
3.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PERFORMANCE TEST
A. Brackets and hangers shall be tested to sustain a load of eight times the actual operating
load.
Approved Manufacturers (ATTENUATORS)
• Mysm (UK)
• Trox Brothers (UK)
• Woods pf Colchester (UK)
• Fläkt Woods (UK)
• Getzner (AUSTRIA)
Available manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
• GMT International Corp. (USA)
• Green Rubber Co. ( USA )
• Mason Industries, Inc. ( USA )
• Rubatex Corp. ( USA )
• Mupro (Germany)
• Walraven ( Holland )
• Hilti ( USA )
END OF SECTION

22 05 48 - 6
SECTION 22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.01 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 1
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 1
2.01 VALVE CHART LOCATIONS ...................................................................................... 1
2.02 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPELINES AND SERVICES .................................................. 2
2.03 SIGN AND ACCESSORY FASTENING ....................................................................... 3
2.04 NAMEPLATES................................................................................................................ 3
2.05 PAINTING ....................................................................................................................... 3
Khatib & Alami Identification for Plumbing Piping

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 INTRODUCTION
Work of this Section to be read and governed by General Conditions of Contract. This
Section includes Painting and Identification of all pipe works, equipment etc.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting complete above works based on
1.03 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are included
in this Section in each applicable part, as if repeated herein verbatim.
Section 22 05 00 General Mechanical Requirements for Plumbing
Section 22 11 13 Facility Water Distribution Piping
Section 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping and Fittings
Section 22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps
Section 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 22 14 00 Facility Storm Drainage
Section 22 14 29 Sump Pumps
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVE CHART LOCATIONS

A. Valve charts shall be provided for each piping system and shall consist of schematic
Drawings of piping layouts, showing and identifying each valve and describing its
function. Two copies of each chart, sealed to rigid backboard with clear lacquer placed
under glass and framed, shall be mounted in the building as directed by the Engineer.

22 05 53 - 1
Specifications
2.02 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPELINES AND SERVICES
A. General
1. Any pipe which transport condensate water must be color-coded
differently from pipes that are used for potable water and be labeled ‘Not
Suitable for Drinking.’
2. Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet
“Green Building Regulations & Specifications” for Volatile Organic
Compounds, (VOCs) content limits.
3. All methods of identification shall be compatible with the pipe and
operating conditions.
4. Identification shall be accomplished by using basic identification colours
with code indications.
5. Code indication shall include safety colours and service information.
Information shall be given regarding the nature of the contents of the pipe
by using the following systems, individually or in combination:-
a. ing and Fittings
c. Chemical Symbol
d. Appropriate Code Indication Colour bands.
B. Legend
1. The material in piping system shall be identified. Primary identification
should be by means of a lettered legend naming the material conveyed by
the piping in full or abbreviated form. Arrows shall be used to indicate the
direction of flow.
2. The legend shall be brief, informative, pointed, and simple. Legends shall
be applied close to valves and adjacent to changes in direction, branches,
where pipes pass through walls or floors and as frequently as needed along
straight runs to provide clear and positive indication. Identification maybe
applied by stencilling, tape or markers.
3. Pipe marking should be highly visible.
C. The Type & Size of Letters
(13 to 32) mm 200 mm 13 mm
(40 to 50) mm 200 mm 19 mm
(65 to 150) mm 300 mm 32 mm
(200 to 250) mm 600 mm 63 mm
over 250 800 mm 100 mm
D. Colour
1. The Colour should be shown on the piping, but in combination with a
legend. The application of colour bands shall be done by: Painting,

22 05 53 - 2
Specifications
Adhesive colour bands or equivalent colour clips.
2. Colour reference shall be in accordance with BS 4800, Latest Edition.
E. Color Code Indication for Building Services and Pipelines should be as follows:
Colour Code
Basic colour Identification
- Cold Water Green Blue
- Hot Water Red Green/White
- Drainage - Black
2.03 SIGN AND ACCESSORY FASTENING

A. Warning and instruction signs, wherever specified or otherwise required, shall be
securely fastened where shown or directed with bolting anchors herein specified for
masonry construction or round head chrome plated brass wood screws and washers for
wood construction. Signs shall not be hung loose on chains or by any other method
wherein the sign will be free to move. Sign shall be installed in a conspicuous well
lighted location adjacent to the equipment it refers to and shall be easily read by
occupants in standing position on floor.
B. All accessories such as wrenches specified to be hung on chain adjacent to the
equipment they serve, shall be arranged for stowing in a rigid manner and shall not be
hung loose, or otherwise, that may permit the chain or wrench to move or rattle.
2.04 NAMEPLATES
A. Each unit of equipment shall be identified by a permanently attached nameplate made
of brass or other corrosion-resistant metal. Plates shall be not less than forty (40) by
eighty (80) mm. Plates shall bear information pertaining to the unit as follows:
1. System and unit designation from schedule of equipment.
2. Manufacturer's name and address.
3. Serial and model number.
4. Rated capacity.
5. Temperature, pressure or other limitations.
2.05 PAINTING
A. General Requirements
1. Surface requiring prime painting shall be cleaned thoroughly of all rust,
loose scale, oil, grease and dirt. Use wire brushes and solution for this
purpose.
2. No painting shall be applied to damp or frosty surfaces in wet, foggy or
freezing weather.
3. int shall be evenly spread and well brushed out so that there shall be no
drops, runs or sagging.
4. Shop coated surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and retouched where
necessary.

22 05 53 - 3
Specifications
5. Care shall be taken not to paint controls, label plates, nameplates on all
apparatus and non-ferrous refrigerant piping.
6. All items that have rusted or corroded in storage or in place shall be re-
cleaned or repainted upon request of the Engineer.
7. Finishing coats shall be made in accordance with a color code, based on
ASHRAE or BS recommendations after being submitted to and approved
by the Engineer.
B. Machinery
1. All machinery installed under this contract such as motors, pumps, etc.
shall have a shop priming coat.
C. Iron Work
1. All iron work within the building, not otherwise specified such as pipe and
duct hangers and supports, and supports for apparatus, shall be prime
painted with one coat of red lead.
END OF SECTION

22 05 53 - 4
SECTION 22 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR
PLUMBING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL..................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 1
1.02 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................... 1
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................... 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................... 2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 2
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS .............................................................................................. 2
1.07 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................. 3
1.08 COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING SERVICES ......................................................... 3
PART - 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 3
PART - 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 3
3.01 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................ 3
3.02 PREPARATION ............................................................................................................. 4
3.03 TESTING AND BALANCING PRODUCERS ............................................................. 4
3.04 MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD AND GUARANTEES7
Khatib & Alami Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for Plumbing

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING
PART - 1 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The testing and balancing shall be conducted by a third party specialist agency assigned
by the contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer and Owner’s Representative,
professional in balancing and testing such systems as herein specified
B. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide during installation all necessary
provisions to carry out the above works as required by the third party.
C. All costs shall be paid by the Contractor.
D. The contractor shall submit system verification check list for each type of system and
equipment being commissioned.
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All piping and equipment shall be tested as specified under the relevant subsection of
the specification, and the requirement for commissioning method statement and test
sheets shall be review by Engineer and independent commissioning agency prior to
commencement of commissioning.
B. Labour, materials, instruments, power etc., required for testing shall be furnished by the
Contractor unless otherwise indicated under the particular section of the Specification.
C. Test shall be performed in the presence of representatives of the Engineer and such
D. In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping system only, before connection of
manufacturers of fixtures, equipment and appliances or accepted engineering standards
E. All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated
F. Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and/or damaged materials replaced,
G. The duration of tests shall be as determined by all parties having jurisdiction, but in no
case less than the time prescribed in each subsection of the specification.

22 05 93 - 1
Specifications
H. In the event of any repair or any adjustment having to be made other than normal
I. When pipes, valves, equipment etc., are to be covered or embedded or insulated; their
specific tests shall be carried out on them before any covering is applied. These tests
shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities and he shall take all
necessary precautions to insure the safety and protection of such tested items until the
termination of the work, and flow measurement devices shall have sufficient pipe length
around them.
J. Three copies of all test results shall be submitted to the Engineer.
K. Contractor shall provide access for commissioning and maintenance, including access to
valves, test points and for any plant maintenance /setup.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Two copies of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing strategies plans to be submitted. Plans
should show step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3. Include also a complete set
of report forms intended for use on this Project.
B. Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms
certified by Testing, Adjusting and Balancing firm.
C. Warranties if specified in this Section.

A. Ensure the participation of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing team members, equipment
manufacturers' authorized service representatives, Plumbing controls installers, and
other support personnel. Provide notice in advance of scheduled meeting time and
location.
B. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, Plumbing controls installers, and other mechanics to operate Plumbing
systems and equipment to support and assist Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
activities.
C. Certify Testing, Adjusting and Balancing field data reports by reviewing field data
reports to validate accuracy of data, and certify that Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
team complied with approved Testing, Adjusting and Balancing plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
D. Use approved standard forms.
E. Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently as required by
instrument manufacturer.
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration
and the name of party performing instrument calibration.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Completed areas of the project might be occupied during Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing or before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing operations to minimize conflicts with Client’s operations.

22 05 93 - 2
Specifications
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide a guarantee on National Standards for Testing and Balancing Plumbing,
Systems forms stating that:
1. The certified Testing, Adjusting and Balancing firm has tested and balanced
systems according to the Contract Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
1.08 COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING SERVICES

A. The commissioning of Plumbing System shall be carried out before issuing the
completion certificate
B. Commissioning must be carried out in accordance with the NEBB, CIBSE, ASHRAE,
Authority having the jurisdiction.
C. Commissioning must be carried out by a company approved by Authority having the
jurisdiction to conduct commissioning of buildings.
D. Commissioning results must be recorded and available for inspection by Authority
having the jurisdiction
E. A systems manual, documenting the information required to allow future operations
staff to understand and optimally operate the commissioned services, must be developed
and provided to the building owner or facilities operator following commissioning.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to
address conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow control devices, balancing valves and fittings are required by the Contract
Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of Plumbing System and equipment.
C. Examine design data, including Plumbing System descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about Plumbing System and equipment controls.
D. Examine equipment performance data including pump curves. Relate performance data
to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create
22 05 93 - 3
Specifications
undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a
system.
E. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have
been performed.
F. Examine system and equipment test reports.
G. Examine Plumbing system and equipment installations to verify that indicated
balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control
devices, balancing valves and fittings are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
H. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
I. Pump alignment to ensure that has been installed properly.
J. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
K. Examine motorized valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting
or mixing fluid flows.
L. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
M. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a Testing, Adjusting and Balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-
step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
3.03 TESTING AND BALANCING PRODUCERS

A. Testing and Hydronic General Procedure
1. Perform testing and balancing procedure on each system according to procedures
shown hereinafter.
2. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at
pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved
pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
3. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
4. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
5. Check pump rotation.
6. Check pump-motor load.

22 05 93 - 4
Specifications
7. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually
operated.
8. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive
displacement pumps:
9. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero
flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
10. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve.
11. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for
the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated
brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions
where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
12. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
13. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
B. Procedures for Motors
1. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the
following data:
a. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
b. Motor horsepower rating.
c. Motor rpm.
d. Efficiency rating.
e. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
f. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
g. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
2. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at
speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the
controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller
manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.
C. Procedures for Water Pipes
1. Test all piping systems, including valves, fittings and joints under a pressure equal
to 180 psig (1200 Kpa) or 1 ½ times the working pressure, whichever is greater.
2. Blank off or remove all elements such as traps, instruments, automatic valves,
diaphragm valve, relief valves, pumps or any other equipment which may be
damaged by test pressure. Open, but do not back seat, all valves.
3. Fill the system with water and vent the system at high points to remove air.
Maintain the required test pressure for a sufficient length of time to enable
complete inspection to be made of all joints and connections and for a minimum of
six hours, unless specified otherwise.
4. Repair all leaks or defects uncovered by the tests and retest the system.
5. After tests have been completed, drain the system and blow out and clean it of all
dust and/or foreign matters. Clean all strainers, valves and fittings of all dirt,
fillings and debris.

22 05 93 - 5
Specifications
D. Procedures for Drainage and Sewer Pipes
1. Drains and sewers should generally be subjected to an internal pressure test of 3 m
head of water above the crown of the pipe at the high end but not more than 6 m at
the low end Inspection and tests should be made during the installation and as the
work proceeds, to ensure the pipework is properly secured and clear of obstructing
debris and superfluous matter.
2. When the roughing-in work is completed and before connection of fixtures, the
entire system shall be subjected to thorough flushing and then to a water test by
plugging up all openings and filling all of the lines as per tests sections. Any
defects shall be corrected, at the expense of the contractor.
3. After all fixtures are connected; the entire system shall be subjected to a smoke
test. For PVC piping, the correct grade of cartridge should be selected so that it is
not harmful to the pipe work or joint materials or an air test shall be performed in
accordance with BS 8005 Part 1.
4. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the parties having jurisdiction and the
Engineer, and all results shall be recorded.
E. Procedures for Vibration Measurements
1. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:
a. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.
b. Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second (2.5 to 254 mm/s).
c. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils (0.0254 to 2.54 mm).
d. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.
e. apable of filtering unwanted frequencies.
2. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.
a. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
b. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
3. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration
sources are at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment
being tested.
a. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.
b. Clear the space of people.
4. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment
testing is complete.
5. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.
6. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions
and to avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.
7. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp (2.2 kW).
8. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base
vibration, and building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement
readings in the horizontal, vertical, and axial planes.
F. Pumps:
1. Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
2. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

22 05 93 - 6
Specifications
3. Pump Base: Top and side.
4. Building: Floor.
5. Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections.
(1) For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the
vibration isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation
floating. Calculate and report the differences.
(2) Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.
(3) Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
(4) Verify that installation is level and plumb.
(5) Verify that isolators are properly anchored.
(6) For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD,
and the travel to-solid distance.
(7) Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or
concrete base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the
bottom of the inertia base and the floor.
3.04 MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD AND GUARANTEES

A. Starting from the date of issue of the Substantial/Provisional completion certificate the
contractor shall be responsible, for the duration of one year, to provide the following
services free of charge, at his own cost:
B. The training of operators assigned by the client for operation of all major equipment and
controls as decided by the Engineer.
C. Training should be provided by original suppliers of equipment for a period of at least
one week and or when requested by client through out the liability period.
D. The replacement of parts or whole equipment that shows any manufacturing or
E. Carry out routine preventive maintenance (fortnightly, monthly, quarterly, half yearly
and yearly as applicable to the approval of the Engineer) including provision of labour,
parts and supply of consumable materials, required for the safe operation and guarantee
of performance of all the systems but not limited to;
1. Pumps
2. Water Heaters
3. Diaphragm Pressure Tanks
4. Water Filters
F. Necessary staff to carryout the above shall be provided to the job site during the said
year.
G. On call emergency services (24 hours). Particularly for essential system such as fire
alarm system.
H. Guarantee of every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or installation defects
for a period of one year.

22 05 93 - 7
Specifications
I. At the end of defects liability period the contractor shall be responsible for final handing
over of all installed systems in a perfect condition to the satisfaction of both Engineer
and client.
END OF SECTION

22 05 93 - 8
SECTION 22 07 00
PLUMBING INSULATION
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL..................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................................ 1
1.02 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ................................................................... 1
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS ......................................................................................................... 1
1.04 REFERENCES: .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ............................................................................ 2
1.06 SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................................... 2
1.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................. 2
PART - 2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 3
2.01 CROSSLINKED POLYOLEFIN FOAM WITH FACTORY APPLIED REINFORCED

ALUMINIUM FOIL. ........................................................................................................................ 3
2.02 PIPE INSULATION (INDOOR) ................................................................................................... 3
2.03 PIPE INSULATION (OUTDOOR) .............................................................................................. 3
2.04 ADHESIVE:......................................................................................................................................... 4
2.05 VAPOUR BARRIER OR COATINGS ....................................................................................... 4
2.06 THICKNESSES .................................................................................................................................. 4
PART - 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 4
3.02 PIPE INSULATION – TYPE C ..................................................................................................... 4
3.03 PROTECTIVE COATING & WRAPPING (FUEL OIL PIPING) ..................................... 5
3.04 PIPE-COVERING (INSULATION) PROTECTION SADDLES. ...................................... 5
3.05 PIPE SLEEVES .................................................................................................................................. 6
3.06 EQUIPMENT INSULATION ........................................................................................................ 6
PART - 4 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 6
4.01 PROTECTION AND CLEANING ............................................................................................... 6
4.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION ......................................................................... 7
4.03 FINISHES ............................................................................................................................................. 7
Khatib & Alami Plumbing Insulation

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 07 00
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART - 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and SECTION 22 05
00, requirements.
1.01 Scope of Work

A. Supply and install all insulation and lagging on piping, vessels as indicated on the
drawings or specified to be insulated.
B. All insulation material shall have Zero Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) and less than
Five Global Warming Potential (GWP < 5).
C. Canvas jacket and all insulating materials shall be non-combustible, or self-
extinguishing non-flame spread grade.
D. Insulation in exposed areas, i.e. permanently visible, shall be protected with aluminium
cladding as specified herein after.
E. Sustainability requirements to be followed and adopted as per the project requirements
(if those requirements are more stringent)

脈⨾ 䌁Ɋ尀脈尀 ᔘ ⨾ ‫ݒ‬ᘀ 륨䬓䬓ᙊ 开ň愌ᙊ Domestic Water Piping and Fittings

A. The supply, installations, and testing of the pipes and equipment insulation shall refer to
the codes and standards called in the General Mechanical Requirements for Plumbing.
1.04 References:
A. BS 476 pt 6: Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures , Method of Test for Fire
Propagation for Products ( British Standards)
B. BS 476 pt 7 : Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures , Method of Test for Fire
Propagation for Products

22 07 00 - 1
Specifications
C. AS 1530 pt 3: Simultaneous Determination of Ignability, Flame Propagation, Heat
Release and Smoke Release ( Building Code of Australia 1979)
D. ASTM E84-05 ( UL 723, NFPA 255) : Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
E. ISO5659 (1994): Smoke Density and Toxicity with additional Gas Analysis.
F. ASTM E96: Vapour Permeability of Materials
G. ASTM C518 – Thermal Conductivity of materials
H. UL 723 PIPE- AND EQUIPMENT-COVERING MATERIALS done by the UL
I. FM Approval- Pipe Chase Test and Flammability Characterization
1. All pipe insulation shall be tested in accordance with test methods BS476 pt 6 “Fire
Test on Building Materials and Structures, Method of Test for Fire Propagation for
Products”.
2. All pipe insulation shall be tested in accordance with test methods ISO 5659-Smoke
Density and Toxicity with Additional Gas Analysis. The insulation must comply to
the Standard in terms of smoke density ( Dm<200) and combustion gas
concentrations must not exceed those specified in the Standard.
3. Test certificates form an independent testing authority shall be submitted.
4. All pipe insulation should be accompanied by Manufacturer’s Test Certificate.
5. Product shall be resistant to attack of algae, bacteria, vermin and the growth of
moulds and fungi.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, protect and handle products with care to avoid damage.
B. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic
C. Store material in original packaging. Follow manufacturer’s recommended storage
instructions.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product
1. All Technical literature, brochures, specifications,
2. Fire and smoke test certificates , Thermal characteristics
B. Samples
1. Submit samples of material for approval
1.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

Sekisui Foam International (Australia) ot approved equal.

22 07 00 - 2
Specifications
PART - 2 MATERIALS
2.01 Crosslinked Polyolefin Foam with factory applied reinforced aluminium foil.
A. PIPE INSULATION (Indoor)
- Physically crosslinked, closed cell Polyolefin foam with factory applied, reinforced
aluminium foil in preformed, pre-slit tubes.
- Density: 25 Kg / m3 (foam core only)
- Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518) : Maximum 0.032 W/mK at mean temperature
23oC
- Moisture absorption : Non hygroscopic
- Water Vapour permeability (ASTM E96) : Better than 8.19 X 10-15 Kg/Pa.s.m
- Minimum Service Temperature : - 80o C
- Maximum Service Temperature : 1000 C
- Fire Rating:
- Class 0 to BS476
- Complies with ASTM E84 ( 25/50)
- UL 723 certificate from the UL , Company name must be listed in the UL database
available online.
- Smoke Density and Toxicity
- Meets ISO 5659 ( 1994) - Smoke Density and Toxicity
Dm <200
Combustion gases CO, HCL,HF, NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the
maximium allowable concentrations of the Standard.
2.02 PIPE INSULATION (Outdoor)

- Physically crosslinked, closed cell Polyolefin foam with factory applied, heavy duty
multilayer composite with a specially developed UV and weather durable coating
- Density: 25 Kg / m3 (foam core only)
- Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.032 W/mK at mean temperature
23oC
- Puncture Resistance >400 N (ASTM D4833)
- Tear Testing (ASTM D751) > 60 N Machine Direction , > 50 N Cross Direction
- Tensile Testing (ASTM D751) > 1000 N Machine Direction, > 900 N Cross
Direction
- UV & Weathering (3000 hr QUV exposure) Excellent No change in performance or
appearance
- Salt Resistance (Internal test) (2 week immersion in 5 % salt solution: No visible
change in appearance
- Water Vapour Permeability (ISO 1663) < 4.1 x 10-15 kg/Pa.s.m (25 mm thickness)
(0.015mg.m/N.h)
- Water Vapour Permeance: < 1.7 x 10-4 g/MN.s
- Permeability Resistance Factor: µ > 40,000 (basis 25 mm thickness)
- Water Absorption by Volume: 0.03% (0.00038g/cm²) (JIS K6767)
- Resistance to Fungi: Zero Growth (ASTM G21)
- Ozone Resistance : Excellent
- Minimum Service Temperature : - 80o C
- Maximum Service Temperature : 1000 C
- Fire Rating:
- Class 0 to BS476
22 07 00 - 3
Specifications
- Complies with ASTM E84 ( 25/50)
- Smoke Density and Toxicity
- Meets ISO 5659 ( 1994) - Smoke Density and Toxicity
- Dm <200
- Combustion gases CO, HCL,HF, NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the
maximium allowable concentrations of the Standard.
2.03 ADHESIVE:
- Seal all longitudinal and end to end joints with suitable contact neoprene (rubber) based
contact adhesive.
- Seal all joints with 75mm aluminium foil tape.
- Refer to manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2.04 VAPOUR BARRIER or Coatings

- No additional vapour barriers or coatings are required or to be used.
2.05 THICKNESSES
- Hot water piping (indoor concealed, up to 3 inches): 15 mm
- Hot water piping (indoor concealed, above 3 inches): 20 mm
- Hot water piping(outdoor and indoor in shafts and exposed, up to 3 inches): 20 mm
- Hot water piping (outdoor and indoor in shafts and exposed, above 3 inches): 25
mm
- Heating water piping (indoor concealed, up to 3 inches): 20 mm
- Heating water piping (indoor concealed, above 3 inches): 25 mm
- Heating water piping (outdoor and indoor in shafts and exposed, up to 3 inches): 25
mm
- Heating water piping (indoor and indoor in shafts and exposed, above 3 inches): 30
mm
PART - 3 EXECUTION
A. EXAMINATION
- Verify that all pipe surfaces are clean and dry.
B. INSTALLATION
- Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.(see Information Kit)
- All longitudinal and ends should be joined with suitable neoprene (rubber) contact
adhesive.
- Apply glue to both surfaces to be glued. Wait until glue is tack dry and press the
surfaces together. Ensure a proper joint is achieved.
- Seal joins with 75 mm reinforced aluminium foil tape.
- Any minor surface cuts should be covered with aluminium foil.
3.02 Pipe Insulation – Type C

A. This type of insulation shall be applied to generator and diesel engine flue pipes
B. Pipe insulation shall be performed from resin bonded rock wool fibers molded in
cylindrical form to fit snugly , sectional one piece construction, having a density of not
less than 8 lbs/ft3 (130 kg/m3)and max. K-factor of 0.27 Btu.in/Ft2 hr. °F ( 0.039

22 07 00 - 4
Specifications
W/Mk) at a mean temperature of 250 °F (121 °C) side and end laps of jacket shall be
pasted down with lapping cement and secured with aluminium bands using a minimum
of three bands per block.
3.03 Aluminium Cladding

A. Aluminium cladding shall be of 20 gauge, it shall be used as protection against weather
and mechanical damage.
B. Aluminium cladding shall be applied on top of insulation above the canvas jacket and
vapour barrier coating. It shall be held in place by means of self tapping screws and by
using 38 mm wide aluminium straps at 300 mm centers with aluminium or stainless
steel angle rib clips, all joints shall be sealed with grey coloured suitable sealant. Rivets
and screws shall not be used for cladding unless approved by the Engineer for use on
elbows and fittings. Cladding shall be overlapping at joints, horizontal seams shall be at
the bottom. Cladding on ducts shall be formed in such a way to allow for rain/dew
drain off.
C. Fabricated 20 gauge aluminium covers shall be used for valves and fittings. The covers
shall be in two sections hinged together and held in place by suitable stainless
steel/aluminium clasps.
D. Aluminium cladding shall be applied to all insulated pipes (Galvanized and Pre-
insulated) running exposed on roof, outside building, inside parking floors and in plant
rooms.
3.04 Protective Coating & Wrapping (Fuel Oil Piping)

A. Surfaces of pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove rust, millscale, direct and other
loose matter. After the surface is clean and dry, one continuous coat of primer (quick
drying) shall be applied and allowed to dry completely. After the surface is fully dry,
wrap the pipes with pipeline corrosion tape with backing of black colour or other
similar approved wrapping material. Longitudinal overlap should be 25 mm or greater
according to the specification and end laps a minimum of 150 mm. Prior to wrap over
the fittings, approved moulding putty shall be applied.
3.05 Pipe-covering (insulation) protection saddles.

A. Provide hanger shields to protect vapor sealed pipe insulation within mechanical
equipment rooms at each support point by a 360 degree insert of high density, 100 psi,
waterproofed calcium sili-cate encased in a 120 degree sheet metal shield. Insert
thickness shall be same as insulation. Shield length shall equal nominal pipe dia.,
minimum but shall not be shorter than 100mm and need not be longer than 300mm if 6
bearing load causes no discernable deformation. Insert shall extend 25mm beyond sheet
metal shield. 100mm shields shall be 24 gauge minimum. Shields 130 to 230mm long
shall be 20 gauge minimum. Shields longer than 230mm shall be 16 gauge.
B. Provide penetration shields to encase insulated pipes penetrating fire walls or floors in a
360 degree, 24 gauge minimum sheet metal hanger shield with insert of high density,
100 psi. waterproofed calcium silicate the same thickness as insulation and further
enclosed within the sleeve, sized for maximum 25mm. spacing between sleeve and
insulation shield, pack annular space between sleeve and shield on both ends with
double neoprene coated asbestos rope. Install an escutcheon plate to completely cover
the wall penetration opening and fit snugly over the pipe insulation shield. Insert shall
22 07 00 - 5
Specifications
extend at least 25mm. beyond penetrated surface and escutcheon.
C. Provide oversize hangers with blocking of the same thickness as the insulation to pitch
3.06 Pipe Sleeves

A. Sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls, floors and partitions and be
of similar material to pipe except for plastic pipes where sleeves shall be copper or steel.
B. Sleeves shall be generally one or two sizes larger than pipe as necessary and positioned
true with pipe to provide adequate clearance and also allow for lateral movements of
pipeline if required.
C. Sleeves shall be finished flush with finishes face of wall, floor and ceilings, but project
75 mm above floors in wet areas with the cap sealed with waterproof mastic.
D. Sleeves shall be firs-stopped in gap between pipe and sleeve in all fire rated structures
to Building Regulation E14 using asbestos-free fire proof material and without
restricting pipework movement (with any thermal insulation sections stopped short each
side).
E. Sleeves shall be caulked in gap between pipe and sleeve in external walls using
asbestos-free, weather and vermin proof material.
3.07 Equipment Insulation

A. This type of insulation shall apply to circulators, pumps, heat exchangers hot water
expansion tanks and domestic hot water tanks.
B. Insulation shall be semi-rigid fibrous glass with organic binder up in board form with a
minimum density of 3 lbs/ft3 (50 kg/m3) and a maximum K-factor of 0.42 Btu-
in/ft2.hr.°F (0.06 W/m.°K) at a mean temperature of 200 °F (94 °C). Insulation shall be
applied over pins welded to the vessel on 300 mm centers. All joints shall be staggered
and tightly butted. The insulation shall be covered with gauge 18 aluminium jacket.
PART - 4 EXECUTION
4.01 Protection and Cleaning

A. All insulation shall have a smooth, homogenous and lineable finished surface. All rigid
sections shall be concentric and be accurately matched for thickness.
B. All surface to be insulated shall be dry and free from loose scale, dirt, oil or water when
insulation is applied.
C. No surface imperfections in the insulation such as damaged edges, or ends, cracks and
small voids or holes shall be accepted.
D. Insulation materials shall be stored and protected from weather moisture, accumulations
of foreign matter, or possible damage in a dry and clean store.
E. Surface finishes and lagging adhesives shall not be diluted and shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
F. Apply insulation to permit expansion or contraction of metal without causing damage to
insulation or surface finish.

22 07 00 - 6
Specifications
4.02 Installation of Piping Insulation
A. Pipe insulation shall fit snugly on the pipe to which it is applied. Inside circumference
of pipe covering when applied shall not vary from the outside circumference of the pipe.
B. Pipe insulation shall have factory applied jackets and secured with plastic bands at each
joint at center of each section and where sections abut upon fittings, except where
otherwise specified.
C. Insulation shall only be applied to piping after all testing has been accomplished and
after all the coats of paint have been applied.
D. Pipe covering shall be terminated at a sufficient distance from all flanges to permit easy
removal of bolts.
E. Screwed, soldered, and welded fittings and valves (up to the bonnet) on 4”(100mm)
pipe and larger, shall be insulated with block insulation or pipe covering and shall be
given a trowelled coat of finish cement to present a smooth surface. Valves shall be
covered to the gland.
F. Screwed, soldered, and welded fittings and valves (up to the bonnet) up to 4”(100mm)
in size shall be covered with field fabricated metered segments of pipe insulation equal
in thickness to the adjoining insulated pipe and finished with standard weight canvas
jacket. Where hangers are installed on the pipe covered with insulation the entire hanger
up to the rod shall be insulated.
G. Where insulated piping is subject to movement and supported on roller hangers, steel
protection saddles shall be provided and welded to the pipe. Saddles shall be filled with
asbestos cement.
H. All insulated piping not supported on roller hangers and subject to movement, shall be
provided with protection shields at all hanger locations. Shields shall be of 3mm.
galvanized iron extending on each side of the hanger for a distance equal to the diameter
of the insulation and shall extend up the sides of the insulation to the center of the pipe
and shall be provided with cork pad support.
I. Where standard insulation shapes are not available, cut, score or meter segmental or flat
block to fit contour of pipe, stagger joints of adjoining segments. Fit insulation carefully
and secure with wire. Smooth with insulating cement.
J. Insulate valves, strainers, fittings and flanges with identical material, density, thickness
and finish as the piping insulation. Use pre-molded insulation material where available,
otherwise use shaped block segments wire on with all edges filled with insulation
cement or filler.
K. Insulate strainers to permit removal of the basket without disturbing the insulation of the
strainer body.
4.03 Finishes
A. All pipes running in concealed spaces shall have canvas cover, securely fixed, overlaps
firmly pasted down, secured with aluminium bands at intervals and painted with two
coats of fire retardant emulsion paint.
B. All non-cladded pipes running inside building but exposed to view shall have same
treatment as for those in concealed spaces but with one coat of gloss paint, to an
approved colour, in addition.

22 07 00 - 7
Specifications
C. Insulation in exposed areas, i.e. permanently visible, shall be protected with aluminium
cladding as specified.
D. Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
• Johns - Manville (USA )
• Armstrong Cork Co. ( France )
• Fiber Glass Limited ( UK )
• Kimmco ( Kuwait)
• Isotoprack ( Turkey )
• ST Gobain ( France )
• Sekisui Foam International (Australia)
END OF SECTION

22 07 00 - 8
SECTION 22 11 13
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART - 1 GENERAL........................................................................................................................ 1
1.01 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM - GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................... 1
1.02 Water Service Main ............................................................................................................... 1
1.03 Codes and Standards ............................................................................................................. 1
1.04 Related Work Specified Elsewhere ....................................................................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................... 2
2.01 Hose Bibs .............................................................................................................................. 2
2.02 Vacuum Breaker .................................................................................................................... 2
2.03 Shock Arrestor (Water Hammer) .......................................................................................... 2
2.04 Water Meter ........................................................................................................................... 2
2.05 Balancing Valves (Double Regulating) ................................................................................. 2
2.06 Automatic Air Vent (AAV)................................................................................................... 3
2.07 Flexible Pump Connectors .................................................................................................... 3
PART - 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................... 3
3.01 Water Supply System Installation Requirements .................................................................. 3
3.02 Testing of Water Supply........................................................................................................ 4
3.03 Stress Analysis and Water Hammer ...................................................................................... 4
Khatib & Alami Facility Water Distribution Piping

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 11 13
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART - 1 GENERAL
requirements.
1.01 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM - GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Domestic cold water is supplied from the main network directly to the building as
indicated on the Drawings.
B. Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
1.02 WATER SERVICE MAIN

A. The Contractor shall connect the water service line from the main network, in the
vicinity of the building.
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Codes and standards applicable to this section shall confirm to the applicable portions of
Reference Code Abbreviation Applicable Standard Title of Standard
Saudi Building Code SBC - -
National Plumbing Code NPC - -
Uniform Plumbing Code UPC - -
International Plumbing IPC - -

code
1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

22 11 13 - 1
Specifications
Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HOSE BIBS

A. Hose bibs shall be finished ¾" (20 mm) chrome plated brass, compression type with
chrome plated handle and standard ¾" (20 mm) male hose connection or otherwise
2.02 VACUUM BREAKER

A. Where indicated or otherwise required, vacuum breakers shall be installed and set at
least 100 mm above the floor level of equipment or fixture rims to prevent
contamination of water supply.
2.03 SHOCK ARRESTOR (WATER HAMMER)

A. Shock arrestor shall be mechanical pneumatic type, stainless steel construction with
hermetically sealed bellows and threaded connection.
B. Arrestors shall be located adjacent to all quick closing valves, solenoid valves, where
required and as indicated on Drawings.
C. Proper sizes shall be determined by the individual application.
2.04 WATER METER

A. Supply and install metering devices with analogue indicating instruments complete as
per Authority Regulations. Meters should be interconnected with Building Management
System (BMS) for monitoring and evaluating the water consumption and have data
logging capability.
2.05 BALANCING VALVES (DOUBLE REGULATING)

A. Balancing valves shall be complete with provision for connecting a portable differential
pressure meter. Each meter connection shall have pressure temperature read out ports.
Valves shall be of the Y-pattern style design, valves shall be suitable for installation in
any direction without affecting flow measurements.
B. All valves upto 2" (50 mm) shall be of copper alloy with NPT connection. Valves of 2
½" (65 mm) and above shall have flanged type cast iron body with all other metal parts
of nonferrous copper alloy.
C. Each valve shall provide precise flow measurement, precision flow balancing and
positive shut-off with no drip seat and teflon disc and drain connection with protection
cap.
D. Each valve shall have multi-adjustment turns of hand wheel for maximum setting with
hidden memory feature to program the valve with precision tamper proof balancing

22 11 13 - 2
Specifications
setting. Number of turns shall be 4 for valve up to 2" (50mm), 8 between 2 ½" (62mm)
and 6” (150mm), 12 for 8" (200mm) and 10" (250mm) and 16 for 12" (300mm).
E. Valves shall be supplied with polyurethane container that doubles the insulation after
valve is installed.
F. One set of computerized balancing instrument shall be supplied with the valves. The
instruments shall be a read out meter, programmed with the valve curves and with a
conversion formula for Cv to read the flow in gpm directly. The instrument shall also
be provided with temperature measurement probe.
G. A chucking device shall hold the valve disconnect firmly and a built-in flat seal shall
give it maximum tightness.
H. Balancing valve shall conform to BS 7350.
2.06 AUTOMATIC AIR VENT (AAV)

Automatic air vents shall be installed in accessible positions and shall be of aluminum
bronze construction with brass spindle nickel alloy valve and seat, brass float and integral
lock-shield isolating valve. In all cases the air vent shall be preceded by a lock-shield pattern
stop valve and the discharge from the air vent shall be 10 mm copper pipe. Automatic air
vents shall be provided on each service, at the highest point of the service within each plant
area and on each vertical distribution riser.
Discharge pipe shall be collected over conform to tundish and the outlet piped to the nearest
drain gully. Discharge pipes shall be labeled according to the service
2.07 FLEXIBLE PUMP CONNECTORS
A. Flexible pump connectors shall be easy flexing, long cyclic life connectors, to protect
mechanical equipment by relieving piping stresses, caused by piping misalignment,
sagging pipe hangers, and thermal expansion.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Automatic air vents shall be installed at all air pocket locations, and at the highest points
in the lines (when specified).
B. Gate valves shall be installed at the base of each riser line, each branch main and on
each lateral branch to fixtures or equipment and where shown on the Drawings.
C. Drain valves with threaded hose connections shall be provided at all low points of the
piping system.
D. Water hammer arrestors shall be provided in upright position in the hot and cold water
lines at quick closing valves and at water supply branch to flush valve-operated water
closets.
E. All electrically operated equipment, specified under this section, (like electric water,
etc.) shall be provided with the necessary length of electrical cord (including ground
conductor), with appropriate plug suitable for connection to the electrical outlet.

22 11 13 - 3
Specifications
3.02 TESTING OF WATER SUPPLY
A. Test all piping systems, including valves, fittings and joints under a pressure equal to
100 psig (690 kpa) or 1 ½ times the working pressure, whichever is greater.
B. Blank off or remove all elements such as traps, instruments, automatic valves,
diaphragm valve, relief valves, pumps or any other equipment which may be damaged
by test pressure. Open, but do not back seat, all valves.
C. Fill the system with water and vent the system at high points to remove air. Maintain
the required test pressure for a sufficient length of time to enable complete inspection to
be made of all joints and connections and for a minimum of six hours, unless specified
otherwise.
D. Repair all leaks or defects uncovered by the tests and retest the system.
E. After test have been completed, drain the system and blow out and clean it of all dust
and/or foreign matters. Clean all strainers, valves and fittings of all dirt, fillings and
debris.
F. The hot water system shall be tested for satisfactory circulation to assure water within
the required temperature limits at all points.
G. Additional tests shall be made as may be required by local authorities, or as directed by
the Engineer.
3.03 STRESS ANALYSIS AND WATER HAMMER

A. Contractor shall carry a stress analysis on the water supply system and shall consider all
necessary measures to ensure that the system is water hammer free. Any additional
valves, surge tanks, bellows, required to achieve this requirement shall be absorbed by
the Contractor at no additional cost to the Client.
• JOSAM ( USA )
• ZURN ( USA)
END OF SECTION

22 11 13 - 4
SECTION 22 11 16
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND FITTINGS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART - 1 GENERAL................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 1
1.03 STORAGE OF PIPES ...................................................................................................... 1
1.04 PIPE IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................................. 1
1.05 ARRANGEMENT AND ALIGNMENT ......................................................................... 2
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 3
2.01 POLYPROPYLENE PIPES (PP-R) ................................................................................. 3
2.02 FLANGED PIPE JOINTS ................................................................................................ 5
2.03 JOINTS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS (DIELECTRIC ISOLATORS).............. 5
2.04 FIRE STOP COLLAR...................................................................................................... 5
2.05 PIPING SCHEDULE ....................................................................................................... 6
PART - 3 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................. 6
3.01 ARRANGEMENT AND ALIGNMENT OF PIPES ....................................................... 6
3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING INSTALLATION................................... 6
3.03 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL VALVES ................................... 6
3.04 PIPE SLEEVES ................................................................................................................ 7
3.06 PIPEWORK CLEARANCES AND SEGREGATION.................................................... 7
3.07 MATERIAL TESTS AND IDENTIFICATION .............................................................. 8
3.08 TESTING ......................................................................................................................... 8
3.09 INSTALLATION OF UNIONS AND FLANGES .......................................................... 8
Khatib & Alami Domestic Water Piping And Fittings

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 11 16
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND FITTINGS
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 INTRODUCTION
A. Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and Section 22 05 00.
B. This section describes basic materials and requirements for Pipework services
installations for building.
C. Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building

Section 22 05 29 - Hanger and Supports for Plumping Piping
Section 22 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for Plumbing
Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
1.03 STORAGE OF PIPES

A. Pipes and fittings shall be stored under cover at all times. Sun light shall not be permitted
to come into contact with the PVC materials at any time, except during installation in
trench. The pipes shall be stored on flat level ground free from large or sharp edged
stones or objects, and shall be stacked to a maximum height of 1.5 m. (or as
recommended by the manufacturer) with sockets at alternate ends, and in such a manner
as to prevent sagging or bending.
1.04 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. All pipes shall be indelibly marked at intervals of not greater than 3m. The marking shall
show the manufacturer's identification, the standard name and number, and the nominal
size and class. Adhesive labels alone shall not suffice. All pipes complying with British
Standards shall be kite marked.
Khatib & Alami Domestic Water Piping and Fittings

22 11 16 - 1
Specifications
1.05 ARRANGEMENT AND ALIGNMENT
A. Install piping in a neat, workmanlike manner and the various lines shall be parallel to
building walls wherever possible.
B. Install pipe groups for plumbing parallel with pipes of other trades.
C. Space pipe supports, arrange reducers and Pitch piping to allow air to be vented to system
high points and to allow the system to be drained at the low points. However, where
obstructions exist, automatic air vents shall be installed at all air pocket points and 1/2"
(15 mm) drain gate valves shall be supplied and installed at all low points and riser legs.
Standard
American Water C601-68

Works AWWA C501-67 FIBERGLASS PIPE DESIGN
Association M45 MANUAL
American Society for ASTM ASTM A53-88a Specification for pipe, steel, black and
Testing and Materials Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded
and Seamless
ASTM D1785 Specification for poly (vinyl chloride)

(PVC) plastic pipe, schedules 40, 80,
and 120.
American Standard ASA - -

Association
British Standards BS BS 4514 Specification for unplasticized PVC

soil and venting pipes, fittings and
accessories.
BS 5255 Specification for thermoplastics waste

pipe and fittings.

22 11 16 - 2
Specifications
BS 3505 Specification for unplasticized

polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pressure
pipes for cold potable water.
American Society for ASHRAE - -

Heating, Refrigeration and
Air Conditioning
Engineers
Deutsches Institute for DIN DIN 19534 -

Normung
American National ANSI - -

Standards Institute
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 POLYPROPYLENE PIPES (PP-R)

A. This specification covers requirements for polypropylene random (PP-r) piping system
(pipe and fittings) for domestic water pipes of size 90 mm and lower. Approved
Manufacturer: The pipe and fitting manufacturer shall have an established quality control
program responsible for inspecting incoming and outgoing materials. The manufacturer
shall have a document control procedure, which allows for traceability of manufactured
products… It is mandatory for the manufacturer to be operating and producing under
ISO9001:2000 quality requirements.
B. PP-r pipe shall be manufactured from approved Raw materials in accordance with DIN
8078 and/or prEN 12202-Part 1 and Part 2.All domestic cold and hot water pipes shall be
triple layer type with aluminum alloy coating inserted in the surface layer and over
lapping the pipe.
C. PP-r pipe shall be rated PN20 or PN25 Wall thickness. Mechanical Characteristics, Mean
outside diameter and out of roundness together with their tolerances must comply with
DIN 8077 and /or prEN 12202-Part 2.
D. Pipe Packaging – All pipe sizes will be supplied in straight lengths of 4 m each.
Packaging of pipes will differ according to size.
E. Marking of Pipe - All pipes shall bear permanent identification markings that will remain
legible during the service life of the product. Marking on pipe shall include the following
and shall be applied at intervals of not more than 1.5 meters:
1. Trademark and Nominal diameter and thickness (i.e. APITHERM 32 x 5.4)
2. Standard PPr designation (i.e. PPr80 or PPr-type3)
3. The Standard Dimension Ratio (i.e. SDR 5 or SDR 6) and Nominal Pressure (i.e.
PN20)

22 11 16 - 3
Specifications
4. Marking the product with the applicable standards designation (i.e. DIN
8077/8078)
5. Quality System used ((i.e. ISO 900X)
6. Date and time of manufacture reference
7. Manufacturer's name and country of manufacture.
F. Polypropylene Fittings
All fittings supplied under this scope of work must be pressure rated (PN20) and
manufactured from the same material used to manufacture pipes and shall pass all tests
required under DIN 16962/5 and/or PrEN 12202- Part 3.
Fitting Inserts - All inserts used in the manufacturing of threaded fittings must be made
of Nickel Plated Brass. All male threads must be serrated to ease the application of
sealing tape. Male threaded fittings must have PP-r coverage extending to the outer tip
of the insert (on inner surface)
Marking of Fittings- All fittings shall have permanent identification markings
indicating the following:
1. Trademark, size and pressure rating of fitting (PN20)
2. Standard PP-r designation (i.e. PPr80 or PPr-type3)
3. Day and Year stamp indicating period of manufacturing
4. Manufacturer’s Quality Control
G. Joining Polypropylene Pipes and Fittings
Socket Fusion Joining: This procedure shall be the predominant process to be used to
join PP-r pipes to PP-r accessories. In this form of joining, which requires heating
tools, a pipe end and fitting socket are heated simultaneously to fusion temperature
(260 °C) using a heating bush and a heating spigot, and are then pushed together. Thus
resulting in a homogeneous joint.
Electrofusion Joining: This technique shall be used strictly for repair and emergency
work only. In electrofusion, the pipe and electrofusion fitting are heated by means of
resistance wires and fused together. Power is supplied through an automatic fusion
control unit supplied by the manufacturer of fittings.
H. System Inspection and Testing
Upon completion of a section of or the entire piping system, the system completed,
shall be inspected and proved tight under water pressure. The inspection must take
place before embedding or concealing the system under concrete or in walls.
For PP-r pipes, the inspection process is broken down in two sections: visual and
operational.
Visual inspection: A visual inspection should cover, but not limited to the following
basic steps:
1. No pipe shall be secured to another pipe or used as a support for other pipes.
2. Pipes shall be laid as to prevent the formation of air locks or pockets. Where
pipes are laid above one another, cold water pipes shall be installed under

22 11 16 - 4
Specifications
hot water pipes to prevent condensation.
3. The supply pipes for each floor and those in individual flats shall be capable
of being shut separately.
4. All inlets and outlets of completed pipe work shall be tightly closed with
stoppers or caps to prepare for operational phase of the system inspection.
Operational inspection: The visually inspected pipe work shall be filled with
fresh water and completely vented. The presence of air pockets in the
system will lead to premature explosive failure of the system with dangerous
consequences to human life near the failure point.
The operational phase of the inspection shall be carried out in two stages:
5. First stage: a test pressure equal to the permissible working pressure plus 10 bars
shall be produced twice within 30 minutes at 10-minute interval. Then it shall be
checked whether, over an additional period of 30 minutes, the pressure has dropped
by more than 2.0 bars and leakage has occurred (ambient and testing medium
temperatures must be taken in consideration when performing this test, consult
with manufacturer for correction factors).
6. Second stage: It shall follow the first stage without interval and shall last 24 hours
at a pressure of 15 bars. The system should hold a stable pressure with no
variation. An overall drop of 2.0 bars is acceptable if a stable pressure is achieved.
Any other behavior indicates a leak.
2.02 FLANGED PIPE JOINTS
A. All flanged joints shall be made up with compressed ring type asbestos gaskets. Gaskets
shall be 1.5 mm. thick.
B. Bolts for flanges shall be of low carbon steel with hexagonal heads and hard pressed steel
hexagon nuts. Bolts shall be to ASTM specifications A 307 or SAE grade 2, with tensile
strength of 64000 psi (441.3 Mpa) minimum.
C. All bolt holes shall be spot faced.
2.03 JOINTS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS (DIELECTRIC ISOLATORS)

A. Make joints between ferrous and non-ferrous screwed piping and equipment by using
Teflon or nylon isolating materials in the form of screwed unions.
B. Make joints between ferrous and non-ferrous flanged piping and equipment with
insulating gaskets and "Teflon sleeves and washers between flanges, bolts and nuts.
C. The entire insulating joint including the dielectric material shall be suitable to withstand
the temperature, pressure and other operating characteristics for the service for which
they are used.
2.04 FIRE STOP COLLAR

A. Supply and install factory manufactured fire stop collar for all the plastic pipes
penetrating fire rated walls and floors. The Collar should be of heavy gauge galvanized
metal to house the intumescent insert. The intumescent shall provide a minimum of 15
times the free expansion and shall contain no water soluble expansion ingredients and
approved to be used in combination with the smoke sealant from the same manufacturer.

22 11 16 - 5
Specifications
The collar should be UL classified and FM systems approved to the requirements of
ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
B. The fire sealant should be of non hardening compound, non water soluble ingredients,
capable of expanding a minimum of 5 times when subjected to 230 degree F to 100o F.
The sealant should be UL classified and FM system approved to the requirements of
ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
2.05 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Service Piping Class
Cold and hot Water Supply PP-R
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ARRANGEMENT AND ALIGNMENT OF PIPES

A. Install piping in a neat, workmanlike manner and the various lines shall be parallel to
B. Install pipe groups for plumbing parallel with pipes of other trades.
C. Space pipe supports, arrange reducers and Pitch piping to allow air to be vented to system
high points and to allow the system to be drained at the low points. However, where
obstructions exist, automatic air vents shall be installed at all air pocket points and ½" (15
mm) drain gate valves shall be supplied and installed at all low points and riser legs.
3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Make all changes in size and direction of piping with standard fittings.
B. Make all branch connections with tees.
C. Use eccentric reducing fittings or eccentric reducing couplings where required by the
contract documents or where required to prevent pocketing of liquid or non-condensable.
D. Pipe bending shall not be resorted to except in extreme cases and only after the written
E. Piping shall be designed with Loops to take the thermal expansion. Wherever this is not
F. Installation of pipes shall be complete with all cutting, patching and making good of
G. Automatic air vents shall be installed at all air pocket locations, and/or at the highest
H. Pipes and fittings shall both be manufactured according to one single standard unit of
measurement either both English and metric.
3.03 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL VALVES
A. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment and control valves to
facilitate dismantling. Arrange connections so that the equipment being served may be
removed without disturbing the piping.
B. Install all supply piping, pumps and other equipment including gate valves and strainers
therein, at line size with the reduction in size being made only at the outlet piping from

22 11 16 - 6
Specifications
the control valve at the full size of the tapping in the equipment served.
3.04 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Provide all pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs with sleeves having an
B. Install sleeves through interior walls and partitions flush with finished surfaces; sleeves
C. Set sleeves in place before pouring concrete or securely fasten and grout in with cement.
D. Sleeve construction:
. Interior Partitions - galvanized sheet iron 1.2 mm thick.
. Interior & Exterior Masonry Walls and Floors-galvanized steel pipe.
E. Fill the space between outside of pipe or insulation and the inside of the sleeve or framed
opening with fibrous asbestos in interior walls and floors and pack with oakum, seal with
watertight mastic or asphalt in exterior walls.
3.05 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
B. After installation is complete, place temporary screens at connections to all equipment
and at automatic control valves where permanent strainers are not provided.
C. Prior to the performance of tests, flush out all piping that is to receive a hydrostatic test
with clean water.
D. Remove dirt and debris collected at screens, strainers and other points from the system.
E. The Contractor shall disinfect water piping before it is placed in service. The Contractor
shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary to do the work of disinfecting and
shall perform the work in accordance with the procedure outlined in AWWA Standard for
Disinfecting Water Mains Designation C 601-68. The dosage shall be such as to produce
a chlorine residual for not less than 10 ppm after a contact period of not less than 24
hours. After treatment, the piping shall be flushed with clean water until the residual
chlorine content does not exceed 0.2 ppm.
3.06 PIPEWORK CLEARANCES AND SEGREGATION
A. Minimum clearance between uninsulated pipes, finished face of insulation on pipes and
adjacent surfaces shall be as follows:
- Walls 25 mm
- Ceilings 100 mm
- Finished Floors 100 mm
- Adjacent pipes, both insulated 25 mm
- Adjacent pipes, both uninsulated 25 mm
- Insulated pipes adjacent to conduit trunking 100 mm

22 11 16 - 7
Specifications
- Uninsulated pipes adjacent to conduit trunking 150 mm
- Uninsulated pipes adjacent to electrical
cables not in conduit or trunking 150 mm
- Insulated pipes adjacent to electrical
cables not in conduit or trunking 100 mm
B. The spacing of services shall provide for the application of thermal insulation and valves
and flange boxes and increased spacing to accommodate pipeline fittings.
C. The spacing of services shall provide for access to pipes and electrical services for ease of
installation and maintenance.
D. The spacing shall be provided for cold water pipes to be away from hot pipes to minimise
heat gains.
3.07 MATERIAL TESTS AND IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to the tests required for specific piping systems, the manufacturer shall test all
materials as specified prior to delivery.
B. Check all materials for defects. Identify all materials with factory applied permanent
stampings or markings designating their conformance to specified requirements.
3.08 TESTING
A. Water Test
1. Test all domestic water piping system, including valves, fittings and joints under a
pressure equal to 100 psig (690 Kpa) or 1 ½ times the working pressure, whichever
is greater.
2. Blank off or remove all elements such as traps, instruments, automatic valves,
diaphragm valve, relief valves, pumps or any other equipment which may be
damage by test pressure. Open, but do not back seat, all valves.
3. Fill the system with water and vent the system at high points to remove air.
Maintain the required test pressure for sufficient length of time to enable complete
inspection to be made of all joints and connections and for a minimum of six hours,
unless specified otherwise.
4. Repair all leaks or defects uncovered by the tests and retest the system.
5. After test have been completed, drain the system and blow out and clean it of all
dust and/ or foreign matters. Clean all strainers, valves and fittings of all dirt,
fillings and debris.
3.09 INSTALLATION OF UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Unions and flanges shall be installed at all equipment inlets and outlets, at all valves
inlets or outlets, on all pipe branches and in general, every 15 metres of pipe run.
B. Unions shall be used on all screwed pipes and shall be of the same quality and service.
Flanges, suitable for welding, shall be used on all welded pipes, and shall be all steel
construction to ASTM or BS Standards.
C. Threaded flanges shall be used on all threaded pipes; when flanged valves and equipment

22 11 16 - 8
Specifications
are connected to the pipes, flanges shall be of the same quality and service as the pipe
served, and shall conform to ASTM or BS Standards.
Approved Manufacturer for Black and galvanized steel pipe:
• CHELL PIPE ( Russia)
• DALMIN (ITALY)
• INTERPIPE (UKRAIN)
Approved PP-r Manufacturers
• Aquatherm ( Germany)
• POLOPLAST (Germany)
• WEFATherm ( NETHERLAND)
Approved Manufacturer for UPVC:
• REDI (ITALY)
• FLOWGARD (USA)
• WAVIN ( GERMANY)
END OF SECTION

22 11 16 - 9
SECTION 22 11 23
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.01 PUMP SELECTION & DESIGN REQUIREMENTS..................................................... 1
1.03 PUMPING EQUIPMENT OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS ................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 2
2.01 HOT WATER CIRCULATORS ...................................................................................... 2
PART - 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 2
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS......................................................................................... 2
3.02 PUMP SETTINGS ........................................................................................................... 3
3.03 PUMPS TESTING ........................................................................................................... 3
3.04 SPARE PARTS ................................................................................................................ 3
3.05 SPECIAL TOOLS ............................................................................................................ 3
3.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ...................................................... 3
3.07 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTEED PERIOD ........................................................... 4
Khatib & Alami Domestic Water Pumps

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 11 23
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART - 1 GENERAL
requirements.
1.01 PUMP SELECTION & DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The designed pump head indicated on the drawings is only approximate and the
Contractor shall confirm the exact head of the pumps after all the pump selections and
the shop drawings are approved.
B. The Contractor shall submit for approval and prior to shipment all detailed construction
drawings showing exactly in place all pumps with their concrete bases, vibration
isolators, pipe connection and power connections.
C. Construct all apparatus of materials and pressure ratings suitable for the conditions
encountered during continuous operation.
D. Provide shaft packing or seals compatible with the pump design, and in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Pump manufacturers should take particular note of the suction head pressure required
for each pump so as to provide casings, seals, and overall pump construction to
withstand the high pressure required for some pumps.
F. All pumps shall be designed to operate with non-overloading characteristics at
manufacturer's specified RPM.
G. All pumps shall be as much as possible selected from one pump manufacturer.
Section 22 05 00 - General Mechanical Requirements for Plumbing.
1.03 PUMPING EQUIPMENT OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
A. Pump operating characteristics shall be in such a way when operating at the speed
specified the pump motor will not be overloaded no matter what the variation in
pumping head.

22 11 23 - 1
Specifications
B. Pumps must operate without any pulsation, vibration, or internal recirculation. Pump
characteristics shall be such that a variation of 10% in the head will result in no more
than a 15% variation in water pumping rate.
C. Pump shall be selected so that the operating flow rate is just below, and to the left of,
the flow rate corresponding to the peak horsepower for the pump operating at design
speed.
D. Performance curve data sheets shall be provided with Shop Drawings for each type and
size of pump submitted for approval.
E. The closed discharge head for all pumps shall not exceed the working head by more
than 25%.
F. The pump motor shall be sized so that it operates continuously throughout the
performance range of the pump without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
G. Motor should be sized to have minimum 20% extra as safety margin on the total power
requirements.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HOT WATER CIRCULATORS
A. Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings hot water circulators of the
centrifugal in-line type directly coupled to an electric motor suitable for handling hot
water at 200 deg. F (93 deg. C).
B. Circulators shall be horizontal or vertical all bronze with stainless steel shaft and water
tight mechanical seals. Motors shall be sleeve type bearing, drip proof, with built-in
automatic thermal overload protection.
C. Circulators shall be complete with switch, pilot light and electrical wiring. Adjustable
immersion type thermostats shall be furnished and installed for each pump to start and
stop the pump motor and maintain its thermostat setting.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS
A. Pumps shall be mounted on bases with isolating pads as specified in the specification.
B. Pumps and motors shall be aligned and leveled throughout the length and width, and
wherever necessary, suitable shims shall be provided to facilitate pipe connections and
leveling.
C. Pumps shall be secured to bases with proper size anchor bolts.
D. Drains for packing glands and base shall be piped to nearest drain outlet.
E. Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion-resistant materials and assembly
methods must be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against galvanic
interaction.
F. Provide casing connections for vents, drains, suction and discharge pressure gauges.
G. Balance impellers and all other moving components statically and dynamically.
H. Grout base plates completely to provide a rigid non-deflecting support.

22 11 23 - 2
Specifications
I. Install packing rings with alternate layers staggered 90 degrees. Tighten packing for seal
while permitting prescribed amount of leakage.
J. Install and align mechanical seals in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
K. Each pump shall be provided with pressure gauges at suction and discharge sides.
L. Coupling guards shall be provided to all pumps.
3.02 PUMP SETTINGS

A. All pumps and motors shall be properly set, leveled, and aligned on bases and
foundation pads in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instruction and their
recommended tolerances. This shall be done before any piping or electrical connections
are made.
B. After all connections have been made, and just prior to putting each pump into
operation it shall be checked again for levels and alignment.
C. All necessary adjustments shall be made to assure that the thrust is balanced, that shaft
rotates freely when turned by hand and that pump is quiet in operation.
3.03 PUMPS TESTING

A. Pumping equipment shall be tested for operating characteristics, and duration of test
shall be set by the Engineer. Apparent defective equipment shall be repaired or replaced
and adjustment made to the equipment as may be necessary, all to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
B. Before shipment, the manufacturer shall test all components hydraulically at 150% of
rated working pressure for ability to withstand maximum design pressure and for
tightness.
C. Upon completion of the installation, test all equipment under field operating conditions
to demonstrate capability of the equipment to meet specified requirements. Compile and
certify the following data.
1. Water flow, GPM (l/s) at rated head.
2. Shut-off head.
3. Operating Kilowatts from measured voltage, amperes and power factor.
3.04 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall provide as part of his contract a list of spare parts for all the
equipment supplied sufficient for three years of oerpation all in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturers of the equipment.
3.05 SPECIAL TOOLS
A. A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipmetn supplied,
adequate for 12 months operation shall be supplied by the Contractor at the compeltion
date of the project.
3.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in triplicate bound, A4 size,
instruction and maintenance manuals and schedule based on the instructions for

22 11 23 - 3
Specifications
preventative maintenance or service from the manufactures or suppliers or as approved
by Authority containing the following material:-
1. Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features. The
manual shall be developed, updated as necessary, and maintained on site or in
centrally accessible location for the working life of the system equipment and
component
2. Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional components of the
systems listed on the Drawings, control diagrams and wiring diagrams of
controllers. List shall give system No., unit no., Manufacturer's Model No., and
Manufacture's Drawing no. Parts list shall include manufacturer's recommended
spare parts for one year operation.
3. Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
4. Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
5. List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
6. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control diagrams and
7. Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor
controller connections and interlock connections of other mechanical equipment.
8. The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to
the fulfilment of the specified requirements.
9. All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion
date.
3.07 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTEED PERIOD
A. All equipment and accessories supplied by the nominated Sub-Contractor under this
contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year from the date of final
completion certificate.
B. All guarantee shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor shall
immediately provide and install a replacement unit of equal or superior performance
until such time as the original unit is repaired. Failure by the Contractor to comply
within 6 hours of notification, will entitle the Employer to purchase or hire a
replacement and seek reimbursement from the Contractor for all related disbursements.
C. The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or
installation defects for a period of one year, starting from the date of issue of the
substantial completion certificate.
• AURORA Pumps (USA)
• PEERLESS Pumps (USA)
• WORTHINGTON (USA)
• RITZ Pumps (Germany)
• KSB Pumps (Germany)
• BELL & GOSSETTE (USA)
• FLYGT Pumps (Sweden)
• GRUNDFOS (USA-Europe)

22 11 23 - 4
Specifications
• Lowara-Xylem (Europe)
END OF SECTION

22 11 23 - 5
SECTION 22 13 00
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART - 1 GENERAL................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 SANITARY DRAINAGE ................................................................................................ 1
1.02 SITE DRAINAGE ............................................................................................................ 1
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARD ............................................................................................ 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 2
2.01 GULLY TRAPS ............................................................................................................... 2
2.02 PVC FLOOR DRAINS WITH STAINLESS STEEL COVER ....................................... 2
2.03 CAST IRON FLOOR DRAINS ....................................................................................... 3
2.04 FLOWER BED DRAINS................................................................................................. 3
2.05 CLEANOUTS .................................................................................................................. 3
2.06 TRENCH GRATE & FRAME ......................................................................................... 3
2.07 MANHOLES FRAMES, COVERS & GRATINGS........................................................ 3
2.08 GREASE INTERCEPTOR .............................................................................................. 4
2.09 PVC ROOF VENT CAPS ................................................................................................ 4
PART - 3 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................. 4
3.01 DRAINAGE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ....................................................... 4
3.02 MANHOLES INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 5
3.03 TRENCH BOTTOM GRADING ..................................................................................... 5
3.04 FRAMES, COVERS & GRATINGS ............................................................................... 6
Khatib & Alami Facility Sanitary Sewerage

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 13 00
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART - 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and its requirements.
1.01 SANITARY DRAINAGE

A. The Sanitary Drainage Systems consist of sanitary drainage, fixtures, fittings, piping
and equipment as hereinafter specified and as shown on the Drawings. The sanitary
drains shall be carried to appropriate manholes shown on the Drawings.
B. Pipe installations shall not be concealed within the building structure until satisfactory
completion of the inspection and testing procedure.
C. For sinks, showers, baths, bidets and bowl urinals, traps shall be a two-piece tubular
trap, and bottle trap for lavatory basin.
D. Floor drains subject to evaporation shall have a water seal of 125mm.
E. All floor drains shall be set 3 mm. below the normal finished floor, with a gradual pitch
extending away from the drain, unless otherwise noted on Architectural Drawings.
F. Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
1.02 SITE DRAINAGE

A. The Site Drainage shall consist of site sanitary drainage complete with piping,
manholes, submersible pumps, keep and all ancillaries as deemed necessary and as
shown on the Drawings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARD

A. All work under this section shall conform to the requirements of the National Plumbing
Code Handbook and Uniform Plumbing Code, unless otherwise specified hereinafter.


Standard

22 13 00 - 1
Specifications

code
British Standards BS BS497 Specification for manhole covers,

road gully gratings and frames for
drainage purposes
BS4164 Specification for coaltar-based

hot-applied coating materials for
protecting iron and steel, including
a suitable primer.
BS8005 Part 1 Guide to new sewerage

construction.

PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GULLY TRAPS

A. Each gully trap shall be of heavy duty UPVC construction and of the P or S-trap type.
B. Gully trap shall have either cast iron open grating cover or solid recessed cover with
cast iron frame as shown on the Drawings and/or as need be.
2.02 PVC FLOOR DRAINS WITH STAINLESS STEEL COVER

A. Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings floor drains of sizes and shapes as
B. Each floor drain shall be of the UPVC construction with 70 mm water seal.
C. Drain shall have stainless steel AISI 304 removable square tile with circular grid
strainer and stainless steel cover. The open area of the strainer shall be at least two-
thirds of the cross-section area of the drain line to which it connects.
D. Stainless steel covers shall have minimum 15 years warranty.
E. Tile shall fit, as practical as possible, one floor tile of the space.

22 13 00 - 2
Specifications
F. Drain shall be fitted with 1" (25mm) access plug for cleaning purposes.
G. This floor drain is applicable to bathrooms, toilets, kitchenettes and pantries.
2.03 CAST IRON FLOOR DRAINS

A. Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings floor drains of sizes and shapes as
B. Each floor drain shall be of cast iron with 'S' or 'P' traps complete with chrome plated
heavy duty bronze strainer fixed by screwing into the drain body. Drain shall receive
two coats of asphaltic paint before installation or shall be asphalt painted at factory.
C. The open area of the strainer shall be at least two-thirds of the cross-section area of the
drain line to which it connects.
D. Each floor drain shall have a minimum water seal of 70 mm.
E. This floor drain is applicable to technical spaces and car parks.
F. Floor drain in Air-handling unit rooms shall have funnel fixed on top of its strainer.
2.04 FLOWER BED DRAINS

A. Each flower bed drain shall be of cast iron with dome type strainer.
B. Flower bed drains shall be supplied complete with stainless steel mesh enclosing the
strainer and surrounded by gravels as detailed on drawings.
2.05 CLEANOUTS
A. Each cleanout shall be of the same material and dimensions as the pipe to be cleaned,
unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, and shall be placed at ceiling level, in walls,
or slabs, as need be, for ease of maintenance.
B. Floor pipe cleanouts on PVC pipes shall have stainless steel cover.
C. Floor pipe cleanouts in basements, kitchens and technical areas shall be heavy duty cast
iron with heavy duty bronze cover.
2.06 TRENCH GRATE & FRAME

A. Ductile or Cast Iron
1. Grate shall be ductile or cast iron, heavy rectangular, sectional bar pattern, suitable
for heavy traffic. Grate openings shall be laid in wide dimensions in a steel frame
with flat bar anchors and nailing clips.
2. Stainless Steel (For Kitchen Areas)
3. The grating should have an anti-slip surface. It should be manufactured from Grade
304 stainless steel. The frames shall be supplied ready for installation with all
corners and angles already built-in. All frames shall have fixing ties to ensure a
secure seating arrangement.
2.07 MANHOLES FRAMES, COVERS & GRATINGS

A. All covers and frames shall be manufactured either from Cast iron to BS 497 Part I or
Ductile iron manufactured to BSEN 124 as approved by Local Authority.

22 13 00 - 3
Specifications
B. All castings for frames, covers, and gratings shall be made accurately to dimensions and
shall be machined to provide even bearing surfaces. Covers and gratings must fit the
frames in any position and if found to rattle under traffic, shall be replaced. Filling to
obtain tight covers will not be permitted. No plugging, burning-in or filling will be
allowed. All castings shall be carefully coated inside and out with epoxy coating
complying with the requirements specified in BS 4164. Coating surfaces shall be clean,
dry and free from rust before applying the coatings.
C. Covers of manholes located inside buildings shall be of double seal and those located
outside shall be of single seal.
2.08 GREASE INTERCEPTOR

A. Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings grease trap of size and capacity as
B. Grease interceptor shall be of made of cast iron with interior acid resistance epoxy
coating.
C. Grease interceptor shall be complete with inlet, outlet and vent pipe connections.
D. Covers shall be non-skid heavy-duty type, well-sealed.
2.09 PVC ROOF VENT CAPS

A. Supply and install vent caps on all vent stacks at the highest level of the stack and
wherever shown on the Drawings.
B. Each vent cap shall be of PVC with galvanized wire mesh and shall be installed on top
of the stack pipe.
C. Area Drains (In car-parks)
D. Supply and install where shown on drawings extra-heavy duty area drains of sizes as
E. Each drain shall have squared top, dura-coated cast iron body and brass screwed access
cap, cast iron raising piece (if need be), heavy duty grating and suspended sediment
bucket.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DRAINAGE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. All horizontal soil and waste piping shall be installed with a slope of not less than one
percent (1%) unless otherwise specified and/or noted on the Drawings.
B. All plumbing fixtures shall be individually trapped and vented. Rough in and install
fixtures at height as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. Sinks
directly connected to grease traps shall not be trapped.
C. Vent piping shall not be trapped and shall be graded to drip back to waste or soil line.
D. Changes in direction of piping shall be generally made with long radius fittings.
E. Floor drains subject to evaporation shall have a water seal of 125mm.

22 13 00 - 4
Specifications
F. Floor drains shall be clamped to flashing or to water proofing membrane. Clamping
collars shall be supplied with drains only where flashing is required.
G. All floor drains shall be set 3 mm. below the normal finished floor, with a gradual pitch
extending away from the drain, unless otherwise noted on Architectural Drawings.
H. All pipes and fittings shall be kept clean, with the exposed ends of in-completed or
unconnected work to be plugged.
I. Cleanouts shall be placed at all changes in directions, at bends, at ends of soil, waste,
sewer and as shown on drawings with a maximum spacing of 15 m. on straight runs
inside building.
J. All pipes running under building or under streets shall be encased in concrete of
minimum 100 mm thickness.
K. All work done under this section shall be in accordance with the National Plumbing
Code Handbook and Uniform Plumbing Code unless otherwise specified.
3.02 MANHOLES INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Manholes shall have the minimum inside dimensions shown on the Drawings.
B. Manhole walls shall be of poured-in-place reinforced concrete. Top section must be cast
such as to suit elevation and accommodate size of manhole frame and cover.
C. Manhole floor shall be of reinforced concrete and inverts stream lined with cement and
mortar into a semi-circular path with sanitary turns and have their corners filled and
sloped towards the water path to prevent any settlements of solids as detailed on the
Drawings.
D. Concrete foundation mats for manholes shall be constructed in accordance with details
as shown on the Drawings.
E. All pipes or castings to be embedded in the manhole walls shall be accurately set, and if
so required, headers shall be laid round the casting so embedded.
F. All work must be carried out in a manner to ensure watertight work, and any leaks shall
be caulked, repaired, or the entire work shall be removed and rebuilt. Attention is
particularly called to the necessity of keeping the water level below all parts of the
foundation and walls until the cement has obtained adequate setting.
3.03 TRENCH BOTTOM GRADING

A. All Trench Bottom Grading Required For Plumbing Work Shall Be Done Under The
Requirements Of This Section Of The Specification. The Bottom Of All Trenches Shall
Be Trimmed By Hand Method To Receive Pipes At Their Respective Finish Levels.
Trenches Shall Not Be Excavated By Machine Below Levels As Above Specified.
B. After The Pipe Lines Have Been Tested And Approved, Backfill Shall Be Compacted
Thoroughly By Hand Tampers Below Center Lines Of Pipes And To At Least 300mm
Above It. No Backfill Shall Be Placed In Such A Manner As To Cause Damage Or
Misalignment To The Pipes Or Protective Coating If Used. Backfill Material Under
Such Conditions Shall Be Earth, 20mm Crushed Stone Or Gravel Above The Top Of
Piping And Hubs.

22 13 00 - 5
Specifications
3.04 FRAMES, COVERS & GRATINGS
A. The Contractor shall furnish and set level and to the proper grade, a cast iron frame and
cover or frame and grating of the form and dimensions shown on the Drawings. The
concrete masonry shall be neatly and accurately brought to the dimensions of the base
of the frame. The frames shall be thoroughly embedded in mortar. All covers and
frames shall be heavy-duty quality.
B. All castings for frames, covers, and gratings shall be of tough gray iron. All castings
shall be made accurately to dimensions and shall be machined to provide even bearing
surfaces. Covers and gratings must fit the frames in any position and if found to rattle
under traffic, shall be replaced. Filling to obtain tight covers will not be permitted. No
plugging, burning-in or filling will be allowed. All castings shall be carefully coated
inside and out with coal tar pitch varnish of approved quality.
C. All covers and gratings shall be suitable to the loads to be subjected to and shall be
labeled, as applicable.
• Dalmin
• Gressintex
• Reddi
• Hepworth
• Gulf Plastic
• Terrain
• Osma-Wavin
• ZURN
• WATTS
END OF SECTION

22 13 00 - 6
SECTION 22 13 16
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART - 1 GENERAL..................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................... 1
1.02 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ......................................................... 1
1.03 STORAGE OF UPVC PIPES......................................................................................... 1
1.04 PIPE IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................... 1
1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS ........................................................................................ 2
PART - 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 2
2.01 UPVC PIPES-TYPE 1 ....................................................................................................................... 2
2.02 UPVC PIPES - TYPE 3 .................................................................................................................... 3
2.03 UPVC PIPES - TYPE 2 .................................................................................................................... 3
2.04 ACCOUSTIC POLY PROPYLENE DRAINAGE PIPES ..................................................... 3
2.05 PIPING SCHEDULE ......................................................................................................................... 4
PART - 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 4
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING INSTALLATION ....................................... 4
3.02 PIPE SLEEVES ................................................................................................................................... 5
3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LAYING.............................................. 5
3.04 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS ........................................................................................... 6
3.05 MATERIAL TESTS AND IDENTIFICATION ....................................................................... 6
3.06 TESTING .............................................................................................................................................. 6
Khatib & Alami Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 13 16
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART - 1 GENERAL

requirements.
1.01 Introduction
1.1.1 Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and requirements.
1.1.2 Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
Regulations & Specifications” for Volatile Organic Compounds, (VOCs) content limits
1.1.3 This section describes basic materials and requirements for Pipework services
installations for building.
1.2.1 The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are included in

1.03 Storage of UPVC Pipes
1.3.1 UPVC pipe and fittings shall be stored under cover at all times. Sun light shall not be
permitted to come into contact with the PVC materials at any time, except during
installation in trench. The pipes shall be stored on flat level ground free from large or
sharp edged stones or objects, and shall be stacked to a maximum height of 1.5 m. (or as
recommended by the manufacturer) with sockets at alternate ends, and in such a manner
as to prevent sagging or bending.
1.04 Pipe Identification
1.4.1 All pipes shall be indelibly marked at intervals of not greater than 3m. The marking
shall show the manufacturer's identification, the standard name and number, and the
nominal size and class. Adhesive labels alone shall not suffice. All pipes complying
with British Standards shall be kitemarked.

22 13 16 - 1
Specifications
1.5.1 Codes and standards applicable to this section shall confirm to the applicable portions of

Standard

code
British Standards BS BS497 Specification for manhole covers,

road gully gratings and frames for
drainage purposes
BS4164 Specification for coaltar-based

hot-applied coating materials for
protecting iron and steel, including
a suitable primer.
BS8005 Part 1 Guide to new sewerage

construction.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 UPVC Pipes-TYPE 1
A. Polyvinyl chloride pipes (PVC) shall be of the unplasticized rigid type and of high
density and complete homogeneity material
B. PVC Pipes - Type 1 shall comply with BS EN 1329-1 - 2000 specification for
pipes, fittings and the system.
C. UPVC Pipes - Type 1 piping systems shall be used in the field of:
D. Soil and waste discharge systems inside buildings.
1. Soil and waste discharge systems for both inside buildings and buried in ground
within the building structure.
2. Ventilation pipe work.
2.2.4 UPVC Pipes Type 1 piping system sockets and spigots shall be either for solvent
cement joints or ring seal joints.

22 13 16 - 2
Specifications
2.02 UPVC Pipes - Type 3
2.3.1 Polyvinyl chloride pipes (PVC) shall be of the un-plasticized rigid type and of high
density and complete homogeneity material.
2.3.2 UPVC Pipes - Type 3 shall comply with BS EN 1401-1 : 1998 specifications for pipes,
fittings and the system.
2.3.3 UPVC Pipes - Type 3 shall be used in the field of non-pressure under ground drainage
and sewerage:
2.3.3.1 Outside the building structure.
2.3.3.2 Both buried in ground within the building structure and outside the buildings.
2.03 UPVC Pipes - Type 2
2.4.1 The pipework and fittings shall be U.P.V.C. in accordance with EN 1452, suitable for
pressure pipes (16 bars).
2.4.2 Fittings shall be in accordance with EN 1452.
2.4.3 The pipework and fittings shall be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations, copies, of technical instructions on the laying of
U.P.V.C. pipework shall be obtained from the manufacturer’s Technical Service
Department before work proceeds.
2.4.4 When jointing pipework the spigot and socket ends shall be supported clear of the
ground to prevent dirt deposits on the joint, solvent or lubricant. Only solvent and
lubricant made by the manufacturer of the pipe shall be used.
2.04 Accoustic poly propylene drainage pipes
A. Wherever shown on drawings, waste pipes shall be installed in high density

Polypropylene pipes (HDPP) and fittings. Pipes and fittings shall be European
make to DIN 4102, B. Joints shall be mechanical types incorporating a moulded
low density polythene olive located in a groove cut in the external surface of the
pipe and forming a compression joint when the pipe fitting nut is tightened.
Grooves shall only be cut with the purpose designed tool supplied for this
operation.
B. Accoustic drainage pipes shall also be wrapped with 9mm rubber foam insulation
especially when insulated embedded in concrete or walls.
C. The manufacturer's instructions shall be adhered to closely for either of the above
described jointing methods.
D. Chemically bonded jointing systems shall not be used for jointing the waste

22 13 16 - 3
Specifications
system.
E. Mechanical type joints must be tightened as the work progressed to avoid stresses
between joints being set up.
F. Pipe ends must be square, free from burrs, smooth and clean before jointing takes
place.
2.05 Piping Schedule
A. Piping classes are specified for each service in the following schedule:
Service Piping Class
Drainage outside building and UPVC Type 1

below 7 meters depth.
Sanitary sewer under building structure UPVC Type 2- PN10
Rain water, Drainage and vent pipes Sound proof PPR

(Everywhere unless noted Otherwise) drainage pipes
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 General Requirements for Piping Installation
3.1.1 Install piping in a neat, workmanlike manner and the various lines shall be parallel to
3.1.2 All horizontal soil and waste piping shall be installed with a slope of not less than one
percent (1%) unless otherwise specified and/or noted on the Drawings.
3.1.3 Vent piping shall not be trapped and shall be graded to drip back to waste or soil line.
3.1.4 Changes in direction of piping shall be generally made with long radius fittings.
3.1.5 All pipes and fittings shall be kept clean, with the exposed ends of in-completed or
3.1.6 Cleanouts shall be placed at all changes in directions, at bends, at ends of soil, waste,
sewer and as shown on drawings with a maximum spacing of 15 m. on straight runs
inside building.
3.1.7 All pipes running under building or under streets shall be encased in concrete of

22 13 16 - 4
Specifications
3.1.8 All pipes running within raised floor or false ceiling plenums of occupied space shall be
wrapped with sound insulation material.
3.1.9 All work done under this section shall be in accordance with the National Plumbing
3.02 Pipe Sleeves

3.2.1 Provide all pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs with sleeves having an
3.2.2 Install sleeves through interior walls and partitions flush with finished surfaces; sleeves
3.2.3 Set sleeves in place before pouring concrete or securely fasten and grout in with cement.
3.2.4 Sleeve construction:
Interior Partitions - galvanized sheet iron 1.2 mm thick.

Interior & Exterior Masonry Walls and Floors-galvanized steel pipe.
3.2.5 Fill the space between outside of pipe or insulation and the inside of the sleeve or
framed opening with fibrous asbestos in interior walls and floors and pack with oakum,
seal with watertight mastic or asphalt in exterior walls.
3.03 Excavation and Backfilling for Pipe Laying
3.3.1 The laying of pipe underground will require trimming and grading of trench bottoms for
pipes and will require backfilling with approved materials and tamping around all pipes
to center line of pipes as the pipe laying progresses to provide protection and stability for
the piping. Pipe laying work shall be conducted so that trenching operations are not
advanced too far ahead of pipe laying operations resulting in excessive lengths of open
trenches.
3.3.2 The pipe shall not be laid in water or when the trench or weather conditions are
unsuitable for such work.
3.3.3 The Contractor shall trim the bottom of all trenches to receive pipes and shall provide
grade finish by hand methods. The bottoms of all trenches shall be rounded so that, in so
far as practical at least one-third of the circumference of the pipe will rest firmly on 200
mm. of undisturbed sand at proper line and grade. Bell holes, where required, shall be
dug to ensure pipe resting for its entire length upon the bottom of the trench. Trenches
shall not be excavated below grade by machine.
3.3.4 After pipes have been tested and approved, trenches shall be backfilled with approved
materials carefully deposited in layers not to exceed 150 mm. in thickness on both sides,
and thoroughly and carefully tamped. Backfilling and tamping in layers of 150 mm.

22 13 16 - 5
Specifications
shall be continued until a depth of 300 mm. has been placed over the pipe. Backfill
around the pipes to a depth of 150 mm. shall be clean sand. No backfill shall be placed
in a manner such as to cause injury to the pipe. Where pipe crossings occur, the lower
pipe shall be laid first and the backfill thoroughly compacted to the level of laying the
higher pipe. Backfill materials under such conditions shall be earth, approved gravel or
concrete as directed.
3.3.5 Care should be taken to provide adequate cover before using power compactors or heavy
rollers.
3.3.6 All pipes running under roads and all pipes with a cover of less than one meter, should
be protected by laying concrete or precast concrete slab over the bedding.

3.4.1 Plug all opening ends of piping, valves and equipment except when actual work is being
performed to avoid accumulation of dirt and debris.
3.4.3 Prior to the performance of tests, flush out all piping that is to receive a hydrostatic test
with clean water.
3.4.4 Remove dirt and debris collected at screens and other points from the system.
3.05 Material Tests and Identification
3.5.1 In addition to the tests required for specific piping systems, the manufacturer shall test
all materials as specified prior to delivery.
3.5.2 Check all materials for defects. Identify all materials with factory applied permanent
stampings or markings designating their conformance to specified requirements.
3.06 Testing
3.6.1 Apply water tests to every part of each drainage system. Test each system entirety or in
sections. Tightly close openings in the piping.
3.6.2 Test every section with a head of water equivalent to the greatest floor-to-floor distance
between floors with a minimum of at least a 3 meters head of water
3.6.3 Keep the water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before
inspection starts.
3.6.4 There shall be no leakage.
3.6.5 Correct defects detected by any test and retest.
• Dalmin
• Gressintex
• Reddi

22 13 16 - 6
Specifications
• Hepworth
• Gulf Plastic
• Terrain
• Osma-Wavin
END OF SECTION

22 13 16 - 7
SECTION 22 14 00
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART - 1 GENERAL..................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 STORM DRAINAGE .................................................................................................... 1
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS ........................................................................................ 1
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS ........................................................................................ 1
1.04 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ......................................................... 2
PART - 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 2
2.01 UPVC PIPES-TYPE 1....................................................................................................................... 2
2.02 UPVC PIPES-TYPE 3....................................................................................................................... 2
2.03 PIPE SERVICE SCHEDULE ......................................................................................................... 3
2.04 CLEANOUTS...................................................................................................................................... 3
PART - 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 3
3.01 STORM WATER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS...................................................... 3
3.02 TESTING .............................................................................................................................................. 4
Khatib & Alami Facility Storm Drainage

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 14 00
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 Storm Drainage
1.1.1 Storm water shall be drained by means of roof drains and leaders and free discharged
around the building at convenient locations shown on the Drawings.
1.1.2 Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
1.2.1 All work under this section shall conform to the requirements of the National Plumbing
Code Handbook and Uniform Plumbing Code, unless otherwise specified hereinafter.
1.3.1 Codes and standards applicable to this section shall confirm to the applicable portions of

Standard
International Plumbing code IPC - -
British Standards BS BS497 Specification for manhole covers, road

gully gratings and frames for drainage
purposes

22 14 00 - 1
Specifications
BS4164 Specification for coaltar-based hot-
applied coating materials for protecting
iron and steel, including a suitable
primer.
BS8005 Part 1 Guide to new sewerage construction.
1.4.1 The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are included in

PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 UPVC Pipes-Type 1
2.1.1 Polyvinyl chloride pipes (PVC) shall be of the unplasticized rigid type and of high
2.1.2 UPVC Pipes - Type 1 shall comply with BS EN 1329-1:2000 specification for pipes,
2.1.3 UPVC Pipes - Type 1 piping systems shall be used in the field of above ground
rainwater pipework.
2.1.4 UPVC Pipes Type 1 piping system sockets and spigots shall be either for solvent
2.02 UPVC Pipes-Type 3
density and complete homogeneity material.
2.2.2 UPVC Pipes - Type 3 shall comply with BS EN 1401-1:1998 specifications for pipes,
2.2.3 UPVC Pipes-Type 3 shall be used in the field of non-pressure under ground storm.

22 14 00 - 2
Specifications
2.2.4 Both buried in ground within the building structure and outside the building to be
marked “D”.
2.03 Pipe Service schedule
2.4.2 Pipes in the under building shall be UPVC type2 unless otherwise indicated on
drawings. (Refer to SECTION 22 13 16 paragraph 2.4.)
2.4.3 Pipes pass through occupied space ceiling plenum shall be acoustic type. (Refer to
SECTION 22 13 16 paragraph 2.5.)
2.04 Cleanouts
2.5.1 Cleanouts shall be of the same material and dimensions as the pipe to be cleaned or as
shown on drawings. Cleanouts shall be placed at ceiling level, in walls, or slabs, as need
be, for ease of operation.
2.5.2 Floor type cleanouts shall have stainless steel cover.
2.5.3 Floor type cleanouts in technical areas & car-park shall be heavy duty cast iron.
2.6 Cast Iron Roof and Balcony Drains
2.6.1 Supply and install roof and balcony drains wherever shown on the Drawings and as
specified in these specifications.
2.6.2 Drains shall be constructed of high quality material and designed to meet the
requirement of ASME standard A112.6.4.
2.6.3 Drain shall be of cast iron with no trap, having large sump, integral flange and dome
type brass strainer fixed by screwing onto the drain body. Balcony drains shall have flat
type strainer.
2.6.4 Drains shall receive two coats of asphalt paint at the factory.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Storm Water Installation Requirements
3.1.1 All storm drainage piping above grade shall have a slope of two percent (2%) where
possible. the minimum acceptable is one percent (1%).
3.1.2 Changes in direction of piping shall be generally made with long radius fittings.
3.1.3 All pipes and fittings shall be kept clean, with the exposed ends of in-completed or

22 14 00 - 3
Specifications
3.1.4 Cleanouts shall be placed at all changes in directions, at bends, at ends of pipes and as
shown on drawings with a maximum spacing of 15 m. on straight runs inside building.
3.1.5 All pipes running under building or under streets shall be encased in concrete of
3.1.6 All work done under this section shall be in accordance with the National Plumbing
3.02 Testing
3.2.1 Apply water tests to every part of each drainage system. Test each system entirety or in
sections. Tightly close openings in the piping.
3.2.2 Test every section with a head of water equivalent to the greatest floor-to-floor distance
between floors with a minimum of at least a 3 meters head of water
3.2.3 Keep the water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before
inspection starts.
3.2.4 There shall be no leakage.
3.2.5 Correct defects detected by any test and retest.
• Dalmin
• Gressintex
• Reddi
• Hepworth
• Gulf Plastic
• Terrain
• Osma-Wavin
END OF SECTION

22 14 00 - 4
SECTION 22 14 29
SUMP PUMPS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANT
PART - 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 PUMP SELECTION & DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 1
1.02 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ............................................................ 1
1.03 PUMPING EQUIPMENT OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS .................................... 2
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................... 2
2.01 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS ...................................................................................... 2
PART - 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................... 3
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS .......................................................................................... 3
3.02 PUMP SETTINGS ............................................................................................................ 4
3.03 PUMPS TESTING ............................................................................................................ 4
3.04 SPARE PARTS ................................................................................................................. 5
3.05 SPECIAL TOOLS ............................................................................................................. 5
3.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ........................................................ 5
3.07 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTEE PERIOD................................................................ 6
Khatib & Alami Sump Pumps

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 14 29
SUMP PUMPS
PART - 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and its

requirements.
1.01 Pump Selection & Design Requirements
A. The designed pump head indicated on the drawings is only approximate and the
Contractor shall confirm the exact head of the pumps after all the pump selections and
the shop drawings are approved.
B. The Contractor shall submit for approval and prior to shipment all detailed
construction drawings showing exactly in place all pumps with their concrete bases,
vibration isolators, pipe connection and power connections.
C. Construct all apparatus of materials and pressure ratings suitable for the conditions
D. Provide shaft packing or seals compatible with the pump design, and in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Pump manufacturers should take particular note of the suction head pressure required
for each pump so as to provide casings, seals, and overall pump construction to
withstand the high pressure required for some pumps.
F. All pumps shall be designed to operate with non-overloading characteristics at
G. All pumps shall be as much as possible selected from one pump manufacturer.

22 14 29 - 1
Specifications
1.03 Pumping Equipment Operating Characteristics
A. Pump operating characteristics shall be in such a way when operating at the speed
pumping head.
B. Pumps must operate without any pulsation, vibration, or internal recirculation. Pump
characteristics shall be such that a variation of 10% in the head will result in no more
than a 15% variation in water pumping rate.
C. Pump shall be selected so that the operating flow rate is just below, and to the left of,
the flow rate corresponding to the peak horsepower for the pump operating at design
speed.
D. Performance curve data sheets shall be provided with Shop Drawings for each type
and size of pump submitted for approval.
E. The closed discharge head for all pumps shall not exceed the working head by more
than 25%.
F. The pump motor shall be sized so that it operates continuously throughout the
performance range of the pump without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
Motor should be sized to have minimum 20% extra as safety margin on the total
power requirements.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Submersible Sump Pumps
2.1.1 The pump and motor housing form a compact integral unit and shall be of the
completely submersible type. The motor shall be water cooled, totally enclosed, and
rated for continuous duty.
2.1.2 Pumps shall have duty/assist function and there shall be a level switches for this
function which is additional to duty/standby function.
2.1.3 The pump/motor housing shall be complete with:
2.1.3.1 Lifting Yoke.
2.1.3.2 Electrical terminal board, and submersible electric flexible cable between pump motor
and control unit.
2.1.3.3 Heavy duty ball bearings, permanently lubricated and sealed, and guaranteed for a
minimum of 100,000 hours continuous operation.
2.1.3.4 Stainless steel shaft with precision ground finish.

22 14 29 - 2
Specifications
2.1.3.5 Statically and dynamically balanced non-clog impeller with a flow passage cross-
section of (75mm) for sewage application.
2.1.3.6 Stainless-steel pump housing for the dewatering system & Cast-iron pump housing for
normal sewage system.
2.1.3.7 Base (and Strainer for waste water application.)
2.1.3.8 Tungsten carbide shaft seals to withstand heavily contaminated liquid.
2.1.3.9 Gate valve and check valve at pump discharge.
2.1.4 The wet well housing the pump/motor assembly shall be complete with the following
accessories:
2.1.4.1 Grouting-in cast iron frame with cast iron cover plate and upper guide rail bracket.
2.1.4.2 Cable holder to collect power cables and permit adjustment of height of level
regulators.
2.1.4.3 Air tight cast iron access cover and frame.
2.1.4.4 Guide rail with stainless steel chain.
2.1.4.5 Automatic control unit with level regulators to start and stop the pumps automatically.
The control unit shall also alternate the operation of the pumps to equalize their
operating time. In case of failure of one pump; the control unit shall initiate an alarm
and automatically start the other pump.
2.1.5 A high level float switch, when reached shall automatically initiate an alarm.
2.1.6 The level regulators (float switches) shall be of polypropylene housing with
eccentrically positioned lead weight, mercury switch and 13 meters water proof cable.
2.1.7 The control unit shall be complete with circuit breakers, earth leakage sensor with
alarm annunciation, starters, automatic electric alternator, indicating lights and
lockable type hand-off-auto selector switches and volt free contacts for connection to
BMS.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation of Pumps
A. Pumps shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturer’s written

instructions.
B. Pumps shall be secured to bases with proper size anchor bolts.

22 14 29 - 3
Specifications
C. Grout base plates completely to provide a rigid non-deflecting support.
D. Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion-resistant materials and assembly
interaction.
E. Provide casing connections for vents, drains, and discharge pressure gauges.
F. Balance impellers and all other moving components statically and dynamically.
G. Each pump shall be provided with pressure gauges at discharge side.
H. Pumps shall be connected to building control system as indicated under electrical
section
3.02 Pump Settings
A. All pumps and motors shall be properly set, levelled, and aligned on bases and
recommended tolerances. This shall be done before any piping or electrical
connections are made.
B. After all connections have been made, and just prior to putting each pump into
C. All necessary adjustments shall be made to assure that the thrust is balanced, that shaft
rotates freely when turned by hand and that pump is quiet in operation.
3.03 Pumps Testing
A. Pumping equipment shall be tested for operating characteristics, and duration of test
shall be set by the Engineer. Apparent defective equipment shall be repaired or
replaced and adjustment made to the equipment as may be necessary, all to the
B. Before shipment, the manufacturer shall test all components hydraulically at 150% of
rated working pressure for ability to withstand maximum design pressure and for
tightness.
C. Upon completion of the installation, test all equipment under field operating
conditions to demonstrate capability of the equipment to meet specified requirements.
Compile and certify the following data.
D. Water flow, GPM (l/s) at rated head.
E. Shut-off head.
F. Operating Kilowatts from measured voltage, amperes and power factor.

22 14 29 - 4
Specifications
3.04 Spare Parts
equipment supplied sufficient for three years of operation all in accordance with the
3.05 Special Tools
A. A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipments
supplied, adequate for 12 months operation shall be supplied by the Contractor at the
completion date of the project.
3.06 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
preventative maintenance or service from the manufactures or suppliers or as
approved by the Engineer containing the following material:
B. Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features. The
component.
drawing no. Parts list shall include manufacturer's recommended spare parts for one
year operation.
D. Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
E. Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
F. List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
G. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control diagrams and
H. Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
I. The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to the
fulfilment of the specified requirements.
J. All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion
date.

22 14 29 - 5
Specifications
3.07 Guarantee and Warrantee Period
B. All guarantees shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor shall
replacement and seek reimbursement from the Contractor for all related
disbursements.
• Flygt ( germany)
• Grundfoss ( Denmark)
End of Section

22 14 29 - 6
SECTION 22 33 30
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANT
PART - 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 1
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................... 1
1.03 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ................................................................ 1
1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................................................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 1
2.01 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS.......................................................................................... 1
2.02 STORAGE DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS ..................................................................... 2
2.03 SPARE PARTS ..................................................................................................................... 3
2.04 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTED PERIOD ................................................................... 3
Khatib & Alami Domestic Water Heaters

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 33 30
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 INTRODUCTION
A. This section includes all water heating installations as part of the domestic water
distribution system inside the building
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The contractor shall be responsible to complete above works based on
CONSULTANT’S approval of submitted samples, documents etc as per specifications
and applicable standards

A. The supply, installations, and testing & commissioning of the water heaters shall refer
to the codes and standards called in the General Mechanical Requirements for
Plumbing. (Section 7.4,7.8 and 10.4 ASHRAE 90.1……. etc).
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Each electric water heater shall be of the cylindrical storage type constructed of heavy
gauge steel with white enamel finish externally and glass lining from inside. Cylinders
shall be factory tested at a pressure of 16 bars.
B. Heater shall have polyurethane foam insulation (minimum thickness of 25 mm) wall
between the outer casing and the glass lining all around top and bottom of cylinder.
Heater shall be suitable for a working pressure of 100 psi (690 Kpa).

22 33 30 - 1
Specifications
C. Each electric water heater shall be complete with the following:
1. Fast acting surface mounted thermostat for automatic temperature control.
2. Factory installed sensitive high limit energy cut-off (for safety to prevent
overheating)
3. Electric element of capacity as indicated on the drawings. Element shall be
constructed of highest quality resistance wire sheathed in mineral filling and the
whole encased in a copper tube and subjected to a high voltage test.
4. Replaceable magnesium anode.
5. A non-return valve at the cold water inlet to the heater.
6. Removable access panel to the heating element and thermostat.
7. Automatic air vent.
8. Drain Valve.
9. Factory installed nipples/flanges.
10. Fixing brackets and support.
11. All water heaters shall have a 5 year guarantee (for cylinder) and 2 years for
electrical parts against manufacturers default.
2.02 STORAGE DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

A. Storage Tank Construction: Steel with minimum 1000-kPa working-pressure rating.
1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping
connections, relief valve, drain, anode rod, and controls as required. Attach
tappings to tank before testing and labeling. Include BS , pipe thread.
2. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials
for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and
outlets. Finishing to be glass lined inner tank.
3. Insulation: 10 cm Polurethane. Comply with ASHRAE 90.2. Surround entire
storage tank except connections and controls.
4. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.
a. Shape: Cylindrical.
b. Color: White, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Anode Rods: Factory installed, titanium, removable type, or Magnesium.
C. Dip Tube: Stainless steel, Factory installed. Not required if cold-water inlet is near
bottom of storage tank.
D. Drain Valve: corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.
E. Thermometers dial type in double setting: operation and security.
F. Security Valve: protection for overheat and overpressure.

22 33 30 - 2
Specifications
G. Heat Trap: Factory-installed, integral piping arrangement or cold-type inlet and hot-type
outlet fittings complying with ASHRAE 90.2.
H. Heat Exchanger: coil Copper or enameled steel coil, rated at 12 bars.
I. Horizontal type or vertical type(refer to drawings).
2.03 SPARE PARTS

2.04 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTED PERIOD

B. All guarantees shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor shall
• Rycroft
• Thermor
• De-edtrich
• Ariston
• Atlantic
END OF SECTION

22 33 30 - 3
SECTION 22 33 31
SOLAR-ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART - 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ................................................................ 1

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENT ............................................................................................... 1
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS ............................................................................................... 2
1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA ............................................................................................................. 2
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................... 3
2.01 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 3

2.02 SOLAR PANEL .................................................................................................................... 3
2.03 SUPPORT STRUCTURE ..................................................................................................... 4
2.04 SOLAR COLLECTOR CIRCULATION DUPLEX PUMPS (PUMPS SPECIFIED
ELSEWHERE) ................................................................................................................................. 4
2.05 PUMPS, FITTINGS .............................................................................................................. 4
2.06 DOMESTIC HOT WATER TANKS (DHW)....................................................................... 4
2.07 QUICK ACTING AIR-VENT VALVE ................................................................................ 5
2.08 MASTER CONTROL PANEL ............................................................................................. 5
PART - 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................... 6
3.01 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................. 6

3.02 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING: .................................................................................. 6
3.03 SPARE PARTS ..................................................................................................................... 6
3.04 SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................................................. 6
3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ............................................................ 6
3.06 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTEE PERIOD ................................................................... 7
Khatib & Alami Solar-Electrical Water Heaters

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 33 31
SOLAR-ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS
PART - 1 GENERAL

requirements.
A. The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are

Section 22 10 00 - Plumbing Piping and Pumps
Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment
1.02 General Requirement
A. The Supplier of the equipment must be a subsidiary/agent of the manufacturer in

golf area and should have already executed similar size projects in golf area.
B. The proposed manufacturer(s) must hold a quality system certificate such as ISO,
Key Mark or equivalent, for his manufacturing assembly process and quality
control.
C. Performance and quality test EN12975 or equivalent American Standard.
D. Certified solar glass U1 nGL > 0.900 (Institut für Solartechnik SPF or Fraunhofer
Institute ISE or equivalent).
E. Certified and solar approved insulation. Produced without any gas-emitting
binding agent (Institut für Solartechnik SPF or equivalent) High temperature,
humidity and UV resistant
F. Certified chromium steel compensator connection (Institut für Solartechnik SPF or
equivalent) with easy-install connectors
G. The flat plate collectors should have a life expectancy of 20 years as per German
VDI 2067 Blatt 1 / Part 1, or equivalent.
H. Storage tanks should have a life expectancy of 15 years as per German VDI 2067
Blatt 1 / Part 1, or equivalent.
22 33 31 - 1
Specifications
I. All the main equipment such as Flat plate collectors, support structure for
collectors, Domestic hot water tanks, and Control system shall be manufactured by
same manufacturer and certification from the country of origin needs to produced.
J. Warranty period for the solar panels, tanks, and controls shall be 2 years from the
date of delivery.
K. The Supplier must be capable of providing and supporting any maintenance
activities associated with the equipment by trained personnel.
L. The Supplier must carry a stock of critical parts in the event of breakdown and must
be able to supply consumables under any planned maintenance schedules within a
maximum agreed time.
M. The Supplier must be able to provide training to any nominated third party
operators using the equipment.
N. The solar simulation is to be done with the related software and it is to be submitted
as a part of the submittal.
O. The country of origin of the solar panels, tanks, and control systems should be of
Western European or American origin.
1.03 Description of works
A. The system shall consist of the following:-

B. Solar collector.
C. Domestic Hot Water Tanks with Electric Back-up Coil.
D. Duplex pump sets.
E. Digital Display control (DDC) control system integrated into the DDC control
panel.
1.04 Design Criteria
A. Daily hot water consumption to be calculated at 60°C (140° F) temperature.

B. Water incoming temperature at Winter (February) 10°C (50° F) at Summer
(August) 26°C (79° F).
C. Backup for the Solar to be provided with electric coil.
D. Angle of inclination to be advised and justified by the supplier and software
simulations.
E. Installed collector power to be (-Kw) and the collector surface area annual
irradiation to be (- -Mwh.), and the system output and area to collectively achieve
the 75% requirement, site conditions and space requirements to be achievable.
F. Domestic hot water Solar fraction should be not less than 75% (i.e. the solar energy
should cover at least 75% of the annual total energy consumption).
22 33 31 - 2
Specifications
G. Total System efficiency should not be less than 50%

H. The above mentioned figures for Hot water consumption are only indicative
therefore Supplier must carryout his own evaluation and design for the required
system performance for the project.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 General
A. Solar panels shall be of horizontal type with Absorber area as shown herein after.
B. Solar collectors shall have a high efficient Sol-Titanium coating. High efficiency
through a highly selective coated absorber, internal piping and extremely effective
insulation. The casing shall consists of all-rounded aluminium frame. The pane seal
shall be endless, resilient, weather and UV resistant.
C. Frame shall be eloxal coated for high resistance against seawater. Flat plate
Collectors shall ensures high absorption of solar radiation and low emission of
thermal radiation.
D. Copper absorbers shall have a meander pattern with integral headers so that up to
maximum 12 collectors can be connected in array.
E. The heat transfer medium channels the absorber heat through the copper pipe. The
absorber shall be encased in a highly insulated collector housing, which minimizes
collector heat losses. The high quality thermal insulation shall provide temperature
stability and be free from gas emissions. Collector piping is to be laser welded.
F. Collectors shall be CE designated in accordance with EN12975 or equal American
certification to Solar Key mark.
2.02 Solar Panel
A. Solar panel should have the following as minimum:-
Positioning: Horizontal
- Approx. Gross area (sq.m): 2.51
- Approx. Absorber surface area (sq.m): 2.32
- Aperture area (sq.m): 2.33
- Optical efficiency (relative to the absorber

surface area) 79.3
- Minimum working pressure (bar) 1.5
- Permissible operating pressure (bar) 6
- Liquid content (Liters) 2.48

22 33 31 - 3
Specifications
- Max. Idle temp that occurs at the hottest part

of the collector at 1000W global radiation
strength if no heat is drawn off 221
- Connection (mm) 22
- Requirement of base structure and Fixing Roof construction with sufficient load
bearing capacity for prevailing wind
forces.
- Solar panels to be tested according to ASHRAE 93 or equivalent.
2.03 Support Structure
A. Easy to assemble fixing system with load tested and corrosion resistant components
made from stainless steel and aluminium.
B. All collector array connections through quick and reliable flexible corrugated
stainless steel pipe plug-in connectors. Screw -in systems will not be allowed.
2.04 Solar Collector Circulation Duplex Pumps (Pumps Specified Elsewhere)
A. To simplify the installation and selection of the pumps and safety equipment, the
equipment supplier have to supply the Solar collector circulation pump –
comprising of:-
B. Pre assembled and sealed valves and safety assembly,
C. Flow regulating valve to control the solar heating system during commissioning and
operation,
D. Integral check valves.
2.05 Pumps, Fittings
A. Certified high quality with temperature resistance for solar circuit. Copper piping
for temperature upto 120° C
2.06 Domestic Hot Water Tanks (DHW)
2.6.1 Type: Vertical storage type, factory assembled.

A. DHW shall have hot water coil and back up immersion electric heating element.
B. Corrosion resistant cylinder made from steel with ceraprotect enamel coating with
indirect coils stretching right to the cylinder floor.
C. Low thermal loss through highly effective all-round CFC -free with 100 mm thick
made from flexible polyurethane foam.
22 33 31 - 4
Specifications
D. The Cylinders shall be provided with drain, inspection & cleaning aperture
E. DHW cylinders shall be certified with TUV certificates, CE marked and these
cylinders are manufactured in accordance and comply with, DIN 475 standards and
conformance to PED 97/23/EG or equivalent European or American Standard.
F. The permissible operating pressure of the cylinder should be not less than 10 bar.
G. Operating pressure on the heating water side up to 25 bar.
H. Additional cathodic protection via an external titanium currency anode to be
provided with LED display.
I. Electrical control panel shall house and include the thermostat, circuit breakers and
Contactors.
2.07 Quick Acting Air-Vent Valve
A. For installation at the highest point of the system. With shut-off valve and locking
ring connection.
2.08 Master Control Panel
A. The master control panel shall be subordinated to all eventually supplied sub-
control panels. It shall be connected to all electrically parts, collecting all data from
the system and evaluating the most efficient energy control in each situation and
shall assure that the solar energy always has priority over electric back up energy.
Only in case of low temperature in the DHW tanks and insufficient solar energy the
electric back up shall have priority to the solar energy. It shall be equipped with
“auto / off / manual” switches for all items, such as pumps and motorised valves.
B. The Master Control Unit shall offer terminals for the connection of a mains power
supply, solar circuit pump, circulation pump for heating up the pre-heat stage,
switched output for suppressing reheating by the electric coil or thermal function.
C. The Master Control Unit will start the solar circuit pump for DHW as soon as the
set differential temperature has been reached.
D. The temperature inside the DHW tank will be limited by an electronic temperature
limiter. This device switches the solar circuit pump off when the set temperature is
exceeded.
E. An energy statement can be created by measuring the temperature differential and
entering the volume flow.
F. Display of the hours run by the solar circuit pump.
G. The Master Control Unit shall incorporate the controls for circulation pump,
collectors and DHW Tank with temperature difference control. Optimized for high
solar performance.
H. The Master Control Unit shall be capable to interface with building management
22 33 31 - 5
Specifications
system. Data logging should be added to the solar controller, to measure the
temperature in/out, flow rates etc...
I. The master control panel shall automatically control all these functions, including
the backup electric coil operation. Moreover it shall automatically change over all
pumps weekly and also in case of failures. It shall be equipped with a main power
switch and a main control switch.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
A. The installer shall have sufficient experience and already carried out similar size
project in the golf area the installer shall be authorised and trained by the original
equipment manufacturer. All the requirements of Authority (if any) that is
applicable at site, to be followed. The installation shall be done with very high
quality material and workmanship of international standards. The installer shall
provide all the technical documents, shop drawings etc.
3.02 Testing and Commissioning:
A. The installer shall follow and maintain proper documentation on the job that will be
executed. All the method of statement shall be prepared and submitted for approval
prior to commissioning of the system.
3.03 Spare Parts
3.04 Special Tools
A. A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipments
supplied, adequate for 12 months operation shall be supplied by the Contractor at
the completion date of the project.
A. The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in triplicate bound, A4
size, Instruction Manuals containing the following material:-
B. Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features.

22 33 31 - 6
Specifications

D. Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
E. Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
F. List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
G. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control diagrams and
H. Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor
I. The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to
J. All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion
date.
A. All equipment and accessories supplied by the nominated Sub-Contractor under

this contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year from the date of
final completion certificate.
B. All guarantee shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor
shall immediately provide and install a replacement unit of equal or superior
performance until such time as the original unit is repaired. Failure by the
Contractor to comply within 6 hours of notification, will entitle the Employer to
purchase or hire a replacement and seek reimbursement from the Contractor for all
related disbursements.
C. The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any manufacturing
or installation defects for a period of one year, starting from the date of issue of the
End of Section

22 33 31 - 7
SECTION 22 40 00
SANITARY FIXTURES
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANT
PART - 1 GENERAL........................................................................................................................ 1
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK............................................................................................................ 1
1.02 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ............................................................ 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................... 2
2.01 SANITARY FIXTURES ................................................................................................... 2
2.02 WESTERN WATER CLOSET ......................................................................................... 2
2.03 LAVATORIES .................................................................................................................. 3
2.04 SHOWER TRAY............................................................................................................... 3
2.05 JANITORS SINK .............................................................................................................. 4
2.06 KITCHEN SINK ............................................................................................................... 4
PART - 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................... 4
3.01 FIXTURES SETTING....................................................................................................... 4
3.02 CLEANING ....................................................................................................................... 6
Khatib & Alami Sanitary Fixtures

TOC - 2
Specifications
SECTION 22 40 00
SANITARY FIXTURES
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope of Work
A. Works in this section of the specification describes the various plumbing fixtures and
their installation
B. The Sanitary Fixtures along with accessories, pipe fittings shall be installed and put in
operation as hereinafter specified and as shown on drawings.
C. All fixtures and trimmings, insofar as practicable, shall be of one manufacture.
D. All fixtures shall be set straight and true.
E. Concealed brackets, hangers and plates shall have a shop coat of paint.
F. All exposed piping and trim shall be chrome plated and fully protected during
installation. Strap or padded wrenches shall be used on chrome plated pipe fittings and
valves.
G. Contractor shall supply and install sanitary fixtures comply with the project’s
sustainability requirements or local authority’s requirements whichever is more
stringent.


22 40 00 - 1
Specifications
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Sanitary Fixtures
A. Sanitary fittings throughout the buildings shall be in accordance with the selection
performed by the Architect.
B. Vitreous china fixtures shall be of first quality with smooth glazed surfaces, free from
warp, cracks, checks, discolorations or other imperfections
C. Sanitary fixtures shall be complete with all required trimming, including mixers, waste
plugs, traps, supplies, stop valves, escutcheons, casings and all necessary hangers,
plates, brackets, anchors and supports.
D. All taps, valves and sprays shall be made of good quality cast brass and chromium
plated. All hand held sprays in whatever location shall be fitted with backflow (anti-
vacuum) Preventers.
E. Low-consumption sanitary fittings shall be used.
F. Enameled cast iron fixtures shall be of acid-resisting type.
G. Handicapped toilets fixtures & accessories shall be ADA approved.
H. In the selection of sanitary fixtures and their accessories, model numbers of certain
manufacturers catalogues are given to describe the type, shape and qualities of the items
requested and do not in any way limit the supply to the model listed. Any item of
different make judged by the Engineer to be similar in quality and manufacture will be
approved.
I. All fixtures and fittings types and models shall be as detailed in the schedule of fixtures,
2.02 Western Water Closet
A. Western water closets shall be made of vitreous china, siphon jet.

B. Western water closets shall be provided with built-in trap, plastic seat, brass holding
bolts, washers, nuts, china caps.
C. Spray assembly unit shall consist of a flexible hose, nozzle with aerator, mounting
bracket, exposed vacuum breaker and self-closing push-button valve.
D. Water closets type EWC-1 in private toilets shall be provided with flush tank.
E. Water closets type EWC-2 in handicap toilets shall be ADA approved.
F. Water closet shall be provided with dual function flushing mechanisms, using 3 liters
per flushing of liquid waste and no more than 4.5 liters per flushing solid waste.
G. The closets shall be provided with seats of smooth non- absorbent material.
H. Western water closet shall be provided with vitreous china semi recessed toilet paper
holder.
I. All water closets shall be solid back to wall white vitreous china and shall have a
22 40 00 - 2
Specifications
connection for the flush valve in all public toilets and flush tank in all other toilets with
heavy duty seat and cover.
J. Stainless steel toilet paper holder, with hood and plastic roller exposed surface mounted
type, polished finish.
K. Spray assembly unit where shown on drawings with flexible hose, nozzle with aerator,
mounting bracket, exposed vacuum breaker and self-closing push button valve with
flow 3.8 lpm.
L. The flushing of the water closet shall be achieved by a chromium plated push button
wall plate.
M. Each WC shall be fitted with stainless steel toilet paper holder with hood and plastic
roller exposed surface mounted type.
N. Each WC shall be fitted with stainless steel flushing hose, with hand trigger, angle valve
and vacuum breaker.
2.03 Lavatories
A. Lavatory type, color and models shall be as detailed in the schedule of sanitary fixtures.
B. Lavatory basins shall be supplied with fixtures with handle stops, and "P" traps made of
chrome-plated cast brass or approved equal material with cleanout plug. Strainer shall
be made of copper alloy or corrosion-resistant steel. Taps shall have replaceable seats
and the stem of valve disc shall rotate onto the seat.
C. Lavatory accessories such as vitreous china shelf, vitreous china pedestal, semi recessed
soap holder, crystal glass mirror and towel holder shall be as detailed in the schedule of
sanitary fixtures.
D. Lavatories shall have 500 mm vitreous china shelf and European make mirror on full
length of shelf.
E. Soap dispenser.
F. Wall mounted lavatory basins shall be complete with all necessary accessories.
G. Wall mounted lavatory basin type shall be as indicated on the drawings
H. Lavatories flow rate shall be 1.5 lpm for public usage and 3.75 lpm for private usage.
2.04 Shower Tray
A. Shower tray type, color and models shall be as detailed in the schedule of sanitary
fixtures.
B. Shower Tray shall be made of enameled fireclay with nonskid bottom and provided
with chrome plated waste strainer.
C. Shower Tray shall be provided with a shower head fitting. Shower head shall be
complete with spray, escutcheon and arm. All exposed parts shall be polished chrome-
plated
22 40 00 - 3
Specifications
D. Shower head shall be provided with mixing valve with integral check stops. Valve
body made of bronze with brass wall plate with flow 6.8 lpm.
E. Shower Tray shall be provided with vitreous china semi recessed soap and sponge
holder and double robe hook.
2.05 Janitors Sink
A. Sink shall be of enameled fire clay complete with:
P Trap.
Two 15mm diameter taps (chrome plated)
40mm diameter grid waste
Stainless steel hinged bucket grating
305mm high legs with supports to wall
2.06 Kitchen Sink
A. Sinks shall be single or double compartment, made of stainless steel, enameled cast
iron, enameled steel or of stoneware. Sinks shall be provided with the following:
Mounting flange
Combination sink tap center-set with swing spout with vacuum breaker. All
parts shall be chrome-plated.
Strainer with brass body and rubber stoppers or open strainer, basket and tail
piece, and a cast brass P- trap. All parts shall be chrome plated.
B. Kitchen sinks shall be provided with drain boards. Underside of compartment and drain
board shall be undercoated when made of cast iron or steel.
C. Stainless steel sinks shall be of satin finish with undersides undercoated for sound
dampening. Compartments and tap deck shall be recessed below outside edge of sink.
The mixer shall be provided with a gooseneck swing spout and aerator mounted on
common deck base. The waste fitting shall be of the duo strainer type complete with a
conical basket. Sinks shall be provided with vitreous china semi recessed soap and
sponge holder.
D. Kitchen sinks flow rate shall be 5.5 lpm for public usage and 5.1 lpm for private usage.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Fixtures Setting
A. Set plumbing fixtures tight, level, and rigid on proper grounds. Use setting compound
under all settings surfaces.

22 40 00 - 4
Specifications
B. Provide required trim including supplies, loose-keyed stops, wastes, traps, floor and
wall escutcheon plates.
C. Protect fixtures after they are set. Thoroughly clean them at the completion of the
project.
D. General Plumbing Criteria:
Headers supplying flush valve fixtures shall run full size to last fixture.
Shut off valves shall be supplied in the furring for each fixture or to banks of
two or more fixtures, where required for proper system control, entrances of
buildings and to all equipment and controls.
Concealed valves shall be provided with access plates.
Install unions on one side of all valves, equipment connections and elsewhere
as shown or required for ease of service and / or installation, unless flanged
are indicated.
E. Caulk around all plumbing fixtures with white silicone epoxy type, non-hardening
compound, where fixtures meet floor or wall as required to present a finish appearance.
See Section on Sealants and Caulking.
F. Set shower receptors and janitor receptors in a leveling bed of cement grout and lead
pan.
G. The installation and connection of all sanitary fixtures shown on the drawings shall
satisfy the following specifications:
Concealed brackets, hangers and plates shall have a shop coat of paint.
All exposed piping and trim shall be chrome plated and fully protected during
installation. Strap or padded wrenches shall be used on chrome pipe fittings
and valves.
All exposed metal parts in the sanitary blocks shall be chrome plated.
All exposed valves in the sanitary blocks shall be chrome plated of the
recessed type.
All fixtures shall be individually trapped.
All fixtures shall be equipped with chrome plated angle valves, whether
specified, shown on drawings or not.

22 40 00 - 5
Specifications
Fixtures shall be set in a neat, finished and uniform manner making the
connection to all fixtures at right angles with the walls, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer and Owner’s Representative.
Roughing for this work must be accurately laid out so as to conform with the
finished wall material.
Fixtures are not to be set until so directed by the Engineer and Owner’s
Representative.
The location and disposition of all items shall be as indicated on the relevant
drawings.
3.02 Cleaning
A. On a daily basis as the Works of this Section proceed, remove and dispose of all debris
resulting from the Works of this Section.
B. Leave work areas of the Works of this Section broom clean at the end of each work day.
• Duravit (Germany)
• Armtrage Shanks (UK)
• Ideal standard (France)
• Velroy & Boch (Germany)
• Kohler (USA)
• Grohe (Germany)
• Hanse Grohe (Germany)
• Schell (Austria)
• ROCA
End of Section

22 40 00 - 6
SECTION 22 51 00
SWIMMING POOL & FOUNTAINS WORKS
September 2020 STC Smart Square Aqalat; Riyadh - KSA
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................. 1
1.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS ................................................................... 1
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................................................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................... 2
2.01 FILTER (FIBER GLASS) ..................................................................................................... 2
2.02 SAND FILTER (METALLIC) .............................................................................................. 3
2.03 OZONE PLANT.................................................................................................................... 4
2.04 PUMPS (CAST IRON CASING) ......................................................................................... 5
2.05 PUMPS (THERMOPLASTIC CASING) ............................................................................. 5
2.06 POOL ACCESSORIES (METALLIC) ................................................................................. 6
2.07 POOL ACCESSORIES (PLASTICS) ................................................................................... 8
2.08 DOSING UNIT ..................................................................................................................... 9
2.09 POOL HEAT PUMP CHILLER ......................................................................................... 10
PART - 3 EXECUTIONS ............................................................................................................... 10
3.01 GUARANTEE, PERFORMANCE TEST AND MAINTENANCE PERIOD ................... 10
3.02 SPARE PARTS ................................................................................................................... 11
3.03 SPECIAL TOOLS ............................................................................................................... 11
3.04 APPROVED LIST OF MANUFACTURERS .................................................................... 11
Khatib & Alami Swimming Pool & Fountains Works Screed

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 22 51 00
SWIMMING POOL & FOUNTAINS WORKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 All filtration, sterilization and chemical treatment equipment together with all the accessories
of the swimming pool such as inlet fittings, vacuum fittings, and skimmers, main drains, etc.
Shall be of a well known brand and of the best make.
1.1.2 All equipment must be installed according to the instructions and recommendations of the
manufacturer and in accordance with the design drawings.
1.1.3 All equipment must be approved by the Engineer. The contractor must provide all the necessary
Shop Drawings.
1.1.4 All equipment shall be installed where shown on Drawings and comply with the following
Specifications.
1.02 General Description of the Works
1.2.1 The swimming pool works consist of two completely independent systems, one for the large pool and the
other for the small pool.
1.2.2 Each pool system shall consist of its own filters, recirculating pumps, chemical feeders and all
interconnecting piping and accessories needed for satisfactory operation.
1.2.3 All equipment is installed in the filter room.
1.3.1 Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards and United
States Codes, unless otherwise specified, the performance/manufacturing standards of items
mentioned in this section shall confirm to the applicable portions of the latest editions of the

Standard
1. American ASME ASME section VIII Div-1

Society of
Mechanical
Engineers
Khatib & Alami Swimming Pool & Fountains Works

22 51 00 - 1
Specifications
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Filter (Fiber Glass)
2.1.1 The filter shall be of the pressure high flow rate, super sand filter type.
2.1.2 Each filter shall have the capacity indicated on the Drawings and/or specified in the schedule
of Equipment at a filter and backwash rate of 15 gpm/ft2 (10.2 lps/m2) of filter area.
2.1.3 Tank shall be made of heavy duty fibre glass of seamless composite construction having a
vertical cylindrical shape with dished and flanged heads suitable for a working pressure of 50
psi. (345 Kpa) and tested at 75 psi. (520 Kpa). All pipe connections to the tank shall be flanged
except for pipe sizes 1 1/2" (40 mm) and smaller which shall be screwed. Tank shall have a
manhole complete with cover, gasket, bolt and yoke located on the top.
2.1.4 Tank shall have a baffle to promote even distribution of the effluent over the filter bed, and
shall be equipped with a suitable underdrain.
2.1.5 The effluent header and laterals shall be of corrosion-resistant pipe with orifices directed
downwards.
2.1.6 Tank supports shall be of the non-corrosion material.
2.1.7 Filter media shall consist of sand, gravel and rocks layers. Sand shall be of hard durable grains
of uniformly graded silica sand free from foreign materials, limestone or clay. Sand shall be of
0.39mm. effective size with uniformity co-efficient of 1.2 to 1.4 Gravel and rock shall consist
of clean, hard, rounded stones with an average specific gravity of not less than 2.5 and should
be free from shale, mica, clay and other impurities.
2.1.8 Valves shall be suitable for 150 psi. (1035 Kpa) complete with companion flanges, gaskets and
bolts. A multiport valve can be used for backwashing.
2.1.9 The filter shall have the following accessories:
2.1.9.1 One chemical feeder of the diaphragm drive system.
2.1.9.2 The feeder shall be complete with two translucent polyethylene chemical storage tanks each
having a minimum capacity as specified on the Drawings. Tank shall have a molded fiberglass
cover of recesses for the mounting and installation of pump, agitator, motor and liquid level
switch assemblies. Tank shall have clearly marked 5 gallon (20 lit) graduations.
2.1.10 The Filter shall have a set of hypochlorinator consisting of:
2.1.10.1 Diaphragm drive type feeder of teflon construction.
2.1.10.2 Two translucent polyethylene storage tanks, one for chlorine granules injecting solution, with a
minimum capacity of 200 lts. and another one of 100 lts. capacity for solution preperationd of
acid granules.

22 51 00 - 2
Specifications
2.1.10.3 Tank shall have a molded fiberglass cover of recesses for the mounting and installation of
feeder, agitator, motor and liquid level switch assemblies.
2.1.10.4 Tank shall have clearly marked 5 gallons (20 lit) graduations.
2.1.10.5 Connecting PVC valves and fittings and polyethylene tubing.
2.1.10.6 The capacity of the feeders shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall maintain
the specified chlorine residue.
2.02 Sand Filter (Metallic)
2.2.1 The filter shall be of the pressure high flow rate, super sand filter type.
2.2.2 Each filter shall have the capacity indicated on the Drawings and/or specified in the schedule of
Equipment at a filter and backwash rate of 15 gpm/ft2 (10.2 lps/m2) of filter area.
2.2.3 Tank shall be made of heavy gauge at least 2.5 mm thick welded steel construction having a
vertical cylindrical shape with dished and flanged heads suitable for a working pressure of 50
psi. (345 Kpa) and tested at 75 psi. (520 Kpa). All pipe connections to the tank shall be flanged
except for pipe sizes 1 ½" (40 mm) and smaller which shall be screwed. Tank shall have a
manhole complete with cover, gasket, bolt and yoke located on the top.
2.2.4 Tank shall be designed in accordance with ASME Section VIII DIV-1 Tank shall have a steel
baffle to promote even distribution of the effluent over the filter bed, and shall be equipped
with a suitable underdrain.
2.2.5 The effluent laterals shall be 150 mm apart and shall have 27/64" (11mm) diameter orifices
every 150 mm.
2.2.6 The effluent laterals shall be of corrosion-resistant pipe with orifices directed downwards. The
effluent header shall be of schedule 80 steel.
2.2.7 Tank supports shall be of the adjustable jacklegs.
2.2.8 Tank shall be internally coated with two coats of coal tar bitumastic tank coating having a total
thickness not less than 10 mils. Finished lining shall be smooth, dust free, without pin holes or
voids and completely nontoxic.
2.2.9 Tank shall be externally painted with two coats of red lead primer and two coats of finishing
paint.
2.2.10 Filter media shall consist of sand, gravel and rocks layers. Sand shall be of hard durable grains
of uniformly graded silica sand free from foreign materials, limestone or clay. Sand shall be of
0.39mm. effective size with uniformity co-efficient of 1.2 to 1.4 Gravel and rock shall consist
of clean, hard, rounded stones with an average specific gravity of not less than 2.5 and should
be free from shale, mica, clay and other impurities.
2.2.11 Valves shall be of the butterfly type suitable for 150 psi. (1035 Kpa) complete with companion
flanges, gaskets and bolts. A multiport valve can be used for backwashing.

22 51 00 - 3
Specifications
2.2.12 The Filter shall have the following accessories:
2.2.12.1 One chemical feeder of the diaphragm drive system. The feeder shall be complete with two
translucent polyethylene chemical storage tanks each having a minimum capacity as specified
on the Drawings. Tank shall have a molded fiberglass cover of recesses for the mounting and
installation of pump, agitator and liquid level switch assemblies. Tank shall have clearly
marked 5 gallon (20 lit) graduations.
2.2.12.2 One gas chlorinator of the direct cylinder mounted type complete with booster pump, metering
tube, rate valve and chlorine diffuser ejector unit. The ejector shall be preceded by one water
gate valve, strainer, pressure gauge and flexible pipe connection.
2.2.12.3 Chlorine flow rate and vacuum shall be controlled by a spring opposed diaphragm regulator
which shall close tight on loss of vacuum.
2.2.12.4 Maximum meter capacity shall be 32 g/s and minimum meter capacity shall be 0.03 g/s.
2.2.12.5 The pump shall be capable of delivering not less than 8 gpm. (0.5 l/s). It should be capable of
creating enough vacuum in the chlorinator's ejector to operate continuously the meter at
maximum capacity.
2.2.12.6 Chlorinator and accessories shall be as manufactured by Capital Controls CO.(Advance).gas

chlorinator or equivalent.
2.2.12.7 In addition, the filter shall be equipped with two pressure gauges mounted on a special panel
with bronze valves and copper tubing.
2.2.12.8 If hypochlorinator is used, it should consist of
2.2.12.8.1 Diaphragm drive type feeder of teflon construction.
2.2.12.8.2 Two translucent polyethylene storage tanks, one for calcium hypo-chlorite solution, with a
minimum capacity of 200 lts. and another one of 500 lts. capacity for solution preperation.
2.2.12.8.3 Tank shall have a molded fiberglass cover of recesses for the mounting and installation of
feeder, agitator, and liquid level switch assemblies.
2.2.12.8.4 Tank shall have clearly marked 5 gallons (20 lit) graduations.
2.2.12.8.5 Connecting PVC valves and fittings and polyethylene tubing.
2.2.12.9 The capacity of the feeders shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall maintain
the specified chlorine residue.
2.03 Ozone Plant
2.3.1 Ozone plant shall consist of the following components:
2.3.1.1 Ozone Generator rated capacity of 140 gm Oz/hr and cooling water flow 450 lit. /hr.
2.3.1.2 Generator shall be supplied complete with the following safety features and indicators:

22 51 00 - 4
Specifications
2.3.1.3 Dew point monitoring system, high current protection, high module temperature protection, low
air flow protection, anti-flood protection service required indication and air dryer chiller system
(rated output 6.3 cu.m./hr.)
2.3.1.4 Injector.
2.3.1.5 Water/air type injector with 13 cu.m./hr. water flow and 6.3 m3/hr ozone/air flow.
2.3.1.6 Two automatic level control float valves.
2.3.1.7 Active carbon filter/water trap.

I2.3.1.8 n-line mixing device.
2.3.1.9 Injector booster pump. multistage centrifugal type cast iron casing stainless steel impeller and
shaft 13 m3/hr rating.
2.04 Pumps (Cast Iron Casing)
2.4.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings pool recirculation pumps of capacities as indicated on
the Drawings.
2.4.2 Each pump shall be of the centrifugal end suction type, directly coupled to a drip proof electric induction
motor, and both mounted on a common steel base plate.
2.4.3 The casing of the pump shall be of good quality cast iron with renewable wear rings , bronze impeller,
high tensile stainless steel shaft , and flanged suction and discharge connections.
2.4.4 Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal for continuous operation.
2.4.5 Each pump shall be complete with basket type strainer and gate valve at inlet, check valve and globe valve
at outlet and pipe flexible connection at inlet and outlet.
2.4.5 This pump shall be used for vacuum cleaning of the pool also.
2.05 Pumps (Thermoplastic Casing)
2.5.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings pool recirculation pumps of capacities as
2.5.2 Each pump shall be of the centrifugal self priming end suction type, directly coupled to a drip
proof electric induction motor, and both mounted on a common base plate.
2.5.3 The casing of the pump shall be of high grade thermoplastic/bronze with renewable wear rings,
Noryl/bronze impeller, high tensile stainless steel shaft , and flanged suction and discharge
connections.
2.5.4 Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal for continuous operation.
2.5.5 Each pump shall be complete with basket type strainer and gate valve at inlet, check valve and
globe valve at outlet and pipe flexible connection at inlet and outlet.
2.5.6 This pump shall be used for vacuum cleaning of the pool also.

22 51 00 - 5
Specifications
2.06 Pool Accessories (Metallic)
2.6.1 Diving Boards
2.6.1.1 Diving Boards shall be 3 meters long 450 mm. wide, polyester, with slip proof surface. The
diving board core shall be completely encased in fiberglass, double wrapped on the ends. Extra
laminations of fiberglass shall be applied to the fulcrum area on the underside of the board.
2.6.1.2 Supports and fittings shall be chrome nickel stainless steel alloy.
2.6.2 Diving Tower (Falcrum Type)
2.6.2.1 Diving tower shall consist of stainless steel ladder with handrails, concrete column, diving
board with side and handrails.
2.6.2.2 Board shall be 4.9 meters long 450 mm wide, polyester, with slip proof surface. The diving
board core shall be completely encased in fibreglass, double wrapped on the ends. Extra
laminations of fibreglass shall be applied to the fulcrum area on the underside of the board.
2.6.2.3 Supports and fittings shall be chrome nickel stainless steel alloy.
2.6.3 Ladders
2.6.3.1 Each ladder shall be heavy duty type made of corrosion resistant stainless steel with slip proof
treads and stainless steel escutcheons and wedge anchors. Dimensions of ladder shall be as
shown on the Drawings.
2.6.4 Gutter Drains
2.6.4.1 Each gutter drain shall be bronze rectangular angle with 45 degree outlet and removable
rectangular polished chromium strainer. Pipe connection shall be 1½" (40 mm).
2.6.5 Inlet Fittings
2.6.5.1 Each fitting shall be of chromium plated cast brass with adjustable chrome plated spreader.
2.6.6 Vacuum Fittings
2.6.6.1 Each vacuum fitting shall be 1½" (40 mm) diameter, made of cast chromium plated cast brass.
Each fitting shall be complete with its chromium plated plug and shall have female threads to
receive vacuum hose connector.
2.6.7 Over Flow Channel (ABS)
1. Over flow drain channel of ABS as shown in drawing
2.6.8 Main Floor Drain
2.6.8.1 Main Drain shall be pressure molded of tough, durable ABS plastic. Main body shall have extra
heavy sidewalls, bottom and ribs.

22 51 00 - 6
Specifications
2.6.9 Main Floor Drain
2.6.9.1 Main drain shall be constructed at bottom of pool in the form of concrete box 60 x 60 cm. with
heavy cast bronze, chrome plated square shaped grating on top.
2.6.9.2 Main drain shall incorporate inside it a hydrostatic valve at its bottom of durable ABS plastic.
2.6.10 Main Floor Drain Grating
2.6.10.1 Each drain grating shall be heavy cast bronze, chromium plated 24"(610 mm) square shape.
2.6.11 Rope Hook and Rope
2.6.11.1 Each rope hook shall be of chromium plated construction of the recessed mounted type with
square polished face and extra strong vandal proof eye bolt for attaching lane marker line. Rope
shall be strong, multi-strand twisted polyethylene, unbreakable and water proof. Rope shall be
¾"(20 mm) diameter with plastic floats.
2.6.12 Vacuum Hose
2.6.12.1 Each hose shall be diameter 1 ½" (40 mm), deluxe heavy duty, made of light weight floating
plastic without wire, 40 ft (12 m) long. It shall be complete with hose-to-wall fitting of solid
aluminum construction to connect hose to vacuum outlet. Hose shall have moulded rubber cuff
at each end.
2.6.13 Vacuum Cleaner
2.6.13.1 Vacuum cleaner shall be white anodized aluminum construction with 18" (460 mm) curved
head suitable for diameter 1 ½" (40 mm) hose complete with hose adaptor and anodized
telescoping aluminum handle 15ft (4.5 m) long.
2.6.14 Wall Brush
2.6.14.1 Wall brush shall be 18" (460 mm) wide high quality with curved ends and nylon bristles,
complete with handle holder to be used with the same handle of the vacuum cleaner.
2.6.15 Leaf Skimmer
2.6.15.1 Leaf skimmer shall be of extra tough, lightweight plastic frame and a deep basket (replaceable)
fiberglass screen.
2.6.16 Test Kit
2.6.16.1 One kit for testing the following:

- Total chlorine residue
- PH,
- Alkalinity,
- Calcium hardness

22 51 00 - 7
Specifications
2.6.17 Underwater Wet Niche Light
2.6.17.1 Underwater light shall be 12 volts, 300 watts. Housing (niche) shall be of copper construction.
Lamp base shall be porcelain. The lens shall be secured to the housing by means of a chrome
plated brass face ring and a brass back up ring, the seal shall be affected by means of a
neoprene gasket. An approved submersible flexible cord of adequate length shall be provided
between light and deck box.
2.6.17.2 Deck electric boxes shall be made of chrome plated cast bronze with grounding lugs. Electric
conduits between deck boxes and light housing shall be PVC. Deck box shall be filled with an
approved potting compound to prevent collection of moisture in the box.
2.6.18 Underwater Wet Niche Light
2.6.18.1 Underwater light shall be rated as shown on the drawings. Housing (niche) shall be of stainless
steel construction. The lens shall be secured to the housing by means of a chrome plated brass
face ring and a brass back up ring, the seal shall be affected by means of a neoprene gasket. An
approved submersible flexible cord of adequate length shall be provided between light and deck
box.
2.6.18.2 Deck electric boxes shall be made of chrome plated cast bronze with grounding lugs. Electric
conduits between deck boxes and light housing shall be PVC. Deck box shall be filled with an
approved potting compound to prevent collection of moisture in the box.
2.6.20 Electrical Control Panel
2.6.20.1 Electrical control panel shall be of sheet steel degressed and phosphate coated, semi-matt
epoxy/polyester powder coated and cured. Panel shall be factory built and prewired with IP 55
degree of protection.
2.6.20.2 Panel shall be complete with main isolating switch, circuit breakers, contactors, thermal
overloads, start/stop buttons, run and trip lights, safety interlocked circuits, identification
labels, integral alarm unit and remote alarm output.
2.07 Pool Accessories (Plastics)
2.7.1 Inlet Fittings
2.7.1.1 Each fitting shall be of ABS construction with adjustable chrome valve disc and 2" (50 mm)
threaded inlet.
2.7.2 Vacuum Fittings
2.7.2.1 Each vacuum fitting shall be 1 1/2"(40 mm) diameter, made of ABS Construction. Each fitting
shall be complete with its plug and shall have female threads to receive vaccum hose connector.
2.7.3 Over Flow Channel (ABS)
2.7.3.1 Over flow drain channel of ABS as shown in drawing

22 51 00 - 8
Specifications
2.7.4 Main Floor Drain.
2.7.4.1.1 Main Drain shall be pressure molded of tough, durable ABS plastic. Anti-vortex cover, bottom
connection and plug.
2.7.5 Vacuum Hose
2.7.5.1.1 Each hose shall be diameter 1 1/2" (40 mm), deluxe heavy duty, made of light weight floating
plastic without wire, 40 ft (12 m) long. It shall be complete with hose-to-wall fitting of solid
aluminum construction to connect hose to vacuum outlet. Hose shall have moulded rubber cuff
at each end.
2.7.6 Vacuum Cleaner
2.7.6.1.1 Vacuum cleaner shall be white anodized aluminum construction with 18" (460 mm)
curved head suitable for diameter 1 1/2" (40 mm) hose complete with hose adaptor and
anodized telescoping aluminum handle 15ft (4.5 m) long.
2.7.7 Wall Brush
2.7.7.1.1 Wall brush shall be 18" (460 mm) wide high quality with curved ends and nylon bristles,
complete with handle holder to be used with the same handle of the vacuum cleaner.
2.7.8 Flow Indicator
2.7.8.1.1 Mercury type with orifice plate assembly to be installed in the backwash line.
2.7.8.1.2 Automatic chlorine & PH sensor and controller this shall be designed for continuous
monitoring and control of PH and sanitizer. The controller shall include the following:-
a. Acid/base feed selector switch analog meters for PH, PPM, and ORP.
b. Direct dial PH and PPM control set point.
c. Out of range safety feed lockouts.
d. Visual and audible alarm.
e. Fiber glass cabinet with front panel adjustable.
2.7.9 Test Kit
2.7.9.1 One kit for testing the following:

a. Total chlorine residue
b. PH,
c. Alkalinity,
d. Calcium hardness
2.08 Dosing Unit
2.8.1 Dosing unit shall be made from inalterable plastic. The unit shall include a double safety
closing system and an easy to use regulating valve. The unit shall operate by venture effect or
pressure differential. In case of pressure differential type unit is used, a check valve shall be
provided.
2.8.2 The unit capacity shall be as indicated on the drawings.

22 51 00 - 9
Specifications
2.09 Pool Heat Pump Chiller
2.9.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings pool heat pump chiller of capacities
indicated thereon.
2.9.2 Chiller shall be electrically operated, suitable for operating at an ambient temperature of 115
degree F summer and 35 degree F winter.
2.9.3 The pump shall operate on the high efficiency heat pump principle and shall be complete with:
2.9.3.1 Fully automatic reversing valve.
2.9.3.2 Two stage thermostat.
2.9.3.3 Refrigerate system completed with leed requirements for Green Buildings.
2.9.3.4 Cabinet with vinyl coated hot dip 20 gauge galvanized sheet, suitable for outdoor application.
2.9.3.5 Heat exchange, on the pool water side to be cupronickel and on the air side to be polyster
coated aluminum fins.
2.9.3.6 High efficiency compressors, suitable for heat pump application.
2.9.3.7 Electronic controls for automatic operation to maintain the pool water temperature.
2.9.3.8 Limit & overload devices.
PART - 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 Guarantee, Performance Test and Maintenance Period
3.1.1 The Contractor shall submit a written certificate, which guarantees the physical and chemical
quality of the water.
3.1.2 At all times the water of the Pool should be crystal clear free from harmful bacteria, pale blue
in color and of sparkling appearance and shall meet the authority requirement interim off
“Bacteriological Analysis and /or any other analysis required by Authorities.
3.1.3 At any moment, the residual free chlorine content shall be between 0.7 and 1.5 ppm. The water
PH value shall be maintained between 7.2 and 7.6. The total alkalinity should be from 80 to 100
ppm.
3.1.4 The Contractor shall maintain, repair, or replace, free of charge, any equipment which would be
defective or badly installed, during a period of twelve months after the final or partial reception
by the Engineer.
3.1.5 A manufacturer's guarantee shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor. This
guarantee shall not release, in any case, the Contractor from his direct responsibility.

22 51 00 - 10
Specifications
3.02 Spare Parts
3.2.1 The Contractor shall provide as part of his contract a list of spare parts for all the equipment supplied
sufficient for three (3) years of operation all in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturers of the equipment.
3.03 Special Tools
3.3.1 A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipment supplied, adequate for 12
months operation shall be supplied by the Contractor at the completion date of the project.
3.04 Approved List of Manufacturers
• Astral Pool
• Hayward pool
• Jacuzzi
• Pentair
End of Section

22 51 00 - 11
SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL………………………………….. ……………………………………….2
1.1 General Requirements .... ……………………………………………………………………2
1.2Application………………………………………………………………………………… 2
1.3 Scope of Works………………………………………………………................................... 2
1.4 Quality Assurance………………………………………………........................................... 3
1.5 Related Work Specified Elsewhere………………………………………. ........................... 3
1.6 Engineer's Drawings…………………………………………………………… ................... 4
1.7 Shop Drawings and Data to be submitted for Approval……………………………. ............ 4
1.8 Approved Materials…………………………………………………………………………. 4
1.9 Instruction Period…………………………………………………………………................ 5
1.10 Machinery Guards ………………………………………………………………………… 5
1.11 Instruction Manual and As-built Drawings………………………………………………. . 5
1.12 Abbreviations……………………………………………………………………................ 6
1.13 Workmanship………………………………………………………………………………6
PART 2 EXECUTION…………………………………………………… ............................... 6
2.1 Cleaning and Adjusting…………………………………………………………… .............. 6
2.2 Tests……………………………………… ............................................................................ 6
2.3 Coordination of Trades………………………………………………………………. .......... 8
2.4 Access Doors…………………………………………………………… .............................. 8
2.5 Permits………………………………………………………………………………………. 8
2.6 Openings in Exterior Walls………………………………………………………………. ... 8
______________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami Common Work Results for HVAC
TOC- 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The work of this Section shall be governed by General Conditions of Contract.
1.1.2 It is the Contractors responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the
requirements of the above listed documents, and further assure that all Subcontractors
are equally informed.
1.1.3 Adhesives, sealants, vapor barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
Regulations & Specifications” requirements for Volatile Organic Compounds,
(VOCs) content limits.
1.1.4 It is the Contractor’s responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the
requirements of the district cooling provider.
1.2 Application
1.2.1 This section applies to and is part of all Sections of Division 23.
1.3 Scope of Works
1.3.1 The works covered under this contract include supply, installation, testing, adjusting
and putting into operation systems, components of systems, and individual items of
equipment, and work related thereto, in accordance with the project Tender
Documents. Products not mentioned but obviously necessary for the completion of
those works shall be provided such as, but are not limited to the following:
a. Requirements of fire dampers wherever duct crossing fire wall.
b. System air balancing and associated requirements to do the balancing
c. Insulation of valves and valve boxes.
d. Maintaining the noise levels as specified
e. Steel platforms (fly over) above services in plant rooms and roof.
1.3.2 Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, the following electrical works and materials
for the Mechanical equipment shall be supplied and installed under Division 23 of the
specification but in all respect to the requirements of the Electrical Specifications.
1.3.2.1 All control panels including door lock disconnected switches, push buttons, starters,
contractors, circuit breakers, time delays, selector switches, relays, transformers,
timers, controllers, pilot lights, set points, alarms and all other electrical equipment
which are necessary for the satisfactory operation, control and protection of all plant
supplied under this section of the specifications.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 00 - 2
Specifications
1.3.2.2 Whenever a number of starters controllers, instruments, indicating lights and the like
occur or are shown on the Mechanical and/or electrical Drawings, they shall be
arranged in a central position in a neat, easily cleaned, factory-built panel, or motor
control centre assembly. The assembly shall include isolators and all necessary
fuses, bus bars, starters, instruments, relays, push-buttons, indicating lights and the
like. Components shall be mounted in a logical order based on the sequence of
operation.
1.3.2.3 All control equipment including thermostats, sensors, detectors, actuators,
controllers, pressure level and flow switches, annunciation alarms, remote control
stations and all such equipment needed for the proper system operation.
1.3.2.4 All control wiring for the above mentioned equipment.
1.3.2.5 Final connection, between disconnect switches, power outlets, flex outlet and
1.3.2.6 The following electrical works and materials for the mechanical equipment shall be
supplied and installed under the electrical part of this contract.
1.3.2.7 All power supply up to and including the following:
a. Power outlets for fan coil units.
b. Disconnect switches when specified to be installed separate from the control
panel.
c. Flex outlet for exhaust fans.
1.3.2.8 Power supply up to control panels when specified with an integral disconnect switch.
1.3.2.9 Power supply to disconnect switches when the switches are built-in the equipment.
1.3.2.10 Empty conduits with pull wires for all cables and wires classified under the
mechanical scope of works.
1.3.2.11 Control outlet boxes for all control equipment classified under the mechanical scope
of works.
1.3.2.12 Power cables and conduits or fixing arrangement between chilled water pumps, air
handling units, etc.. and their control panel.
1.3.2.13 Power cables and conduits from central control panel to the various equipment
controlled from the same panel, such as exhaust fans, supply air fans, etc..
1.4.1 The manufacturers of all materials and equipment must have at least ten years of
1.5.1 In addition to the mentioned above, the works shown herein after shall be applicable
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 00 - 3
Specifications
along with the requirements of the related divisions and sections.
1.6.1 The Drawings are based on design and include general layouts and typical details of
workmanlike manner to conform to the structure, to avoid obstructions, to preserve
head room, and to keep openings and passage ways clear without additional
instruction and without additional cost to the owner.
1.7 Shop Drawings and Data to be submitted for Approval
1.7.1 The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings showing the exact routing and locations
of all the piping, ducting, equipment, etc., all in their respective locations and
according to the dimensions of the approved manufacturer. Shop Drawings scale shall
be 1/10, 1/20, 1/50 and 1/100 as applicable and as approved by the Engineer.
1.7.2 The Contractor shall submit catalogue cuts and brochures of products with reference
to proper paragraph in specifications. All submittals shall be binded in one Booklet.
1.7.3 The Contractor shall submit adequate Engineering data on each piece of equipment
together with all characteristic curves, capacity selection charts and all data for testing
and balancing of the systems. In addition, the Contractor shall submit manufacturer's
printed installation instructions.
1.7.4 The Contractor shall submit at the beginning of the project a schedule of submittals
for materials and shop drawings to the approval of the Engineer.
1.8.1 All materials shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements of the
Specifications.
1.8.2 The naming of manufacturers in the Specifications shall be strictly adhered to in all
circumstances.
1.8.3 Substitution of materials other than those named shall not be submitted.
1.8.4 Materials shall be delivered in unbroken packages bearing the brand and maker's
name, and shall be stored on platforms and properly covered to protect them from
moisture, heat and dust.
1.8.5 All materials shall be supplied from the main factories in the country of origin of the
manufacturer. Any deviation from this, like supplying equipment assembled in
another different country under a license or another name is not accepted unless
approved by the Engineer.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 00 - 4
Specifications
1.9 Instruction Period
1.9.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the training and familiarization of the
Employer’s maintenance staff for a period of at least six weeks on all equipment and
plants he has supplied or installed.
1.10 Machinery Guards
1.10.1 All moving parts of machinery shall be protected by strong guards to adequately
protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment.
1.10.2 Wherever possible, moving parts should be protected by guards supplied by the
equipment manufacturer. All guards must be strongly attached to equipment and
should be designed to be easily removed for access, servicing, adjustment and
maintenance.
1.11 Instruction Manual and As-built Drawings
1.11.1 The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in electronic and hard copy
triplicate bound, A4 size, Instruction Manuals containing the following material:
1.11.2 Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features.
1.11.3 Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional components of the
year operation.
1.11.4 Chart of the tag numbers, location and function of each valve.
1.11.5 Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
1.11.6 Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
1.11.7 List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
1.11.8 Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control diagrams and
1.11.9 Complete, as installed, color coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
1.11.10 The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to the
1.11.11 All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion
date.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 00 - 5
Specifications
1.12 Abbreviations
1.12.1 The following abbreviations have been mentioned in the specifications.
1.12.1.1 AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Associations.

1.12.1.2 ANSI - American National Standard Institute.
1.12.1.3 ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
1.12.1.4 ASA - Acoustical Society of America, American Standards Association.
1.12.1.5 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers.
1.12.1.6 ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
1.12.1.7 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
1.12.1.8 BSI - British Standards Institution.
1.12.1.9 SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
1.12.1.10 UL - Under Writers Laboratories.
1.12.1.11 BTU - British Thermal Units.
1.13 Workmanship
1.13.1 All workmanship required to accomplish the work mentioned in Mechanical

specification or shown on related Drawings, shall conform to the highest standards,
and as required by the Engineer.
1.13.2 The Engineer will be the sole judge of the standards required.
PART 2 EXECUTION
2.1.1 All apparatus shall be thoroughly cleaned before being placed in operation. Finished
surfaces shall be restored if damaged and entire installation shall be delivered in
perfect condition, subject to the approval of the Engineer. Systems shall be adjusted
and balanced to operate as shown in the Drawings and herein specified.
2.2 Tests
2.2.1 All piping and equipment shall be tested as specified under the corresponding section
of the Specifications and to meet local and specified requirements. Provide
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 00 - 6
Specifications
anemometers, thermometers, gauges, voltmeters, ammeters, and similar instruments,
not part of the permanent installation, but required to record the performance of the
equipment and systems, labour, materials, power, etc.., required for testing, shall be
furnished by the Contractor, unless otherwise indicated under the particular section of
the Specifications.
2.2.2 Tests shall be performed in the presence of representatives of the Engineer and such
2.2.3 In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping systems only before connection of
manufacturers of fixtures, equipment and appliances, or accepted engineering
2.2.4 All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be
Employer.
2.2.5 Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and/or damaged materials
replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and at no additional cost to the
Employer.
2.2.6 The duration of tests shall be as determined by all parties having jurisdiction, but in
no case less than the time prescribed in each division of the Specifications.
2.2.7 The following tests should be furnished for but limited to the following:
a Vibration isolation test

b Sound attenuator test
c Insulation test
e. Heat Exchangers Test

f. Pump tests
g. Air handling unit tests
h. Fan coil unit tests
i. DX systems tests
j. Air and water balancing
k. Exhaust systems tests
l. Noise and vibration measurement
m. Room condition tests
n. Controls and building management test
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 00 - 7
Specifications
2.3.1 The Contractor shall coordinate the work to ensure orderly, timely installations of the
2.4 Access Doors
2.4.1 Access doors shall provide ready access to concealed control valves, traps, cleanouts,
motors, fire dampers, and other items requiring operation, adjustment, or
maintenance.
2.4.2 Doors and frames shall be of 12-gauge galvanized steel with invisible hinges, and
cam lock fastenings. For plaster walls or ceiling, frames shall have a 50 mm. wide
lath plaster bond. For masonry walls, the frame shall be set flush with masonry with
provisions in the jamb for anchoring. Doors shall be solid flush steel with grey metal
primer. Location of access doors shall be coordinated with and shall have the
approval of the Engineer before the mechanical work is installed.
2.5 Permits
2.5.1 The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections and tests,
for the proper installation of his work, as may be required by the various
administrative authorities having jurisdiction.
2.5.2 Certificates of inspections, tests etc., with the proper approval certified thereon, shall
be secured by the Contractor and these documents shall be delivered to the Engineer
before the work in question will be accepted.
2.6 Openings in Exterior Walls
2.6.1 Openings in exterior walls, particularly at or below grade shall be kept properly
plugged and caulked at all times, (except when being worked on) to preclude the
possibility of flooding due to storms or other causes. After completion of work,
openings shall be permanently sealed and caulked in the manner herein specified.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 00 - 8
SECTION 23 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.01 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 1
1.03 VALVES PRESSURE RATING ..................................................................................... 1
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL .................................................................. 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 1
2.01 GATE VALVES............................................................................................................... 1
2.02 GLOBE VALVES ............................................................................................................ 2
2.03 CHECK VALVES (SPRING LOADED TYPE) ............................................................. 2
2.04 BALANCING VALVES (DOUBLE REGULATOR)..................................................... 2
2.05 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS ............................................................................................ 3
2.06 FLEXIBLE PUMP CONNECTORS ............................................................................... 3
2.07 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ............................................................................................ 3
2.08 STRAINERS .................................................................................................................... 3
2.09 PRESSURE INDEPENDENT BALANCING AND CONTROL VALVE (PIBCV) ..... 3
PART - 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 4
3.01 INSTALLATION OF VALVES ...................................................................................... 4
Khatib & Alami General Duty Valves for HVAC

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 INTRODUCTION
A. This section describes all HVAC valves within the building.
B. Works of this Section shall be governed by contract general conditions.

Section 23 05 00 - Common Works Results for HVAC
Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC
Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping
Section 23 21 23 - Hydronic Pumps
Section 23 73 10 - Air Handling Units
Section 23 82 00 - Convection Heating and Cooling Units
Division 25 00 00 - Building Automation System
1.03 VALVES PRESSURE RATING

A. Unless specified otherwise all valves, strainers, flexible connections, etc. shall be
selected for pressure rating at least 1.5 times the operating pressure.
B. Contractor shall submit a schedule of all valves, strainers, etc., showing the required
pressure rating for each fitting and shall indicate its location and service.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. All valves shall be kite marked to the applicable B.S. standard.
B. All valves shall be full line size.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GATE VALVES

A. Gate valves shall be cast iron for sizes 2 ½” (65mm) and above, and bronze with, non
rising stem, flanged ends, bolted bonnet and bronze wedge disc faces and seats for sizes
less than 2 ½” (65mm).

23 05 23 - 1
Specifications
B. One gate valve shall be supplied and installed:
1. At the supply and return from each equipment.
2. At the discharge and suction of each pump.
3. At the bottom of each riser and all low points to be drained.
4. In general at all points shown on the Drawings and/or specified.
C. Copper alloy gate valves shall conform to BS 5154.
2.02 GLOBE VALVES

A. Globe valves shall be cast iron for sizes 2 ½” (65mm) and above, and bronze with,
flanged ends rising stem, bolted bonnet, renewable composite disc and seat for sizes less
than 2 ½” (65mm).
B. Copper alloy globe valves shall conform to BS 5154.
2.03 CHECK VALVES (SPRING LOADED TYPE)

A. Check valves shall be of the non-slam spring loaded, globe type with the capability to
absorb and dampen the shock wave from the piping system water hammer. Check
valves 2" (50 mm) and smaller, shall be all bronze, screwed ends. Valves 2½" (65 mm)
and larger, shall be cast iron, flanged ends.
B. One check valve shall be installed:
1. At the discharge of each pump.
2. At all points shown on the Drawings and/or where specified.
C. Copper alloy check valves shall conform to BS 5154.
D. Cast iron check valves shall conform to BS 5152.
2.04 BALANCING VALVES (DOUBLE REGULATOR)

A. Balancing valves shall be complete with provision for connecting a portable differential
pressure meter. Each meter connection shall have pressure temperature read out ports.
Valves shall be of the Y-pattern style design, valves shall be suitable for installation in
any direction without affecting flow measurements.
B. All valves up to 2" (50 mm) shall be of copper alloy with NPT connection. Valves of
2 ½" (65 mm) and above shall have flanged type cast iron body with all other metal
parts of nonferrous copper alloy.
C. Each valve shall provide precise flow measurement, precision flow balancing and
positive shut-off with no drip seat and teflon disc and drain connection with protection
cap.
D. Each valve shall have multi-adjustment turns of hand wheel for maximum setting with
hidden memory feature to program the valve with precision tamper proof balancing
setting. Number of turns shall be 4 for valve up to 2" (50mm), 8 between 2 ½" (62mm)
and 6” (150mm), 12 for 8" (200mm) and 10" (250mm) and 16 for 12" (300mm).
E. Valves shall be supplied with polyurethane container that doubles the insulation after
valve is installed.

23 05 23 - 2
Specifications
F. One set of computerized balancing instrument shall be supplied with the valves. The
instruments shall be a read out meter, programmed with the valve curves and with a
conversion formula for valve flow coefficient Cv to read the flow in gpm directly. The
instrument shall also be provided with temperature measurement probe.
G. A chucking device shall hold the valve disconnect firmly and a built-in flat seal shall
give it maximum tightness.
H. Balancing valve shall conform to BS 7350.
2.05 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS

A. Supply and install all automatic air vents as shown on the Drawings and wherever
specified in this book of specifications.
B. Automatic air vents of the spherical float type shall be installed at all high points in the
piping. Vents shall have cast iron housing and bolted cover with gasket. Float shall be
constructed of stainless steel. Vents shall be suitable for a maximum operating pressure
of 150 psi (1030 Kpa). A ½" (15 mm) lock shield valve shall be directly installed ahead
of each automatic air vent, and a ½" (15 mm) drain line shall be provided to discharge at
a convenient point.
2.06 FLEXIBLE PUMP CONNECTORS

A. Flexible pump connectors shall be easy flexing, long cyclic life connectors, to protect
mechanical equipment by relieving piping stresses, caused by piping misalignment,
sagging pipe hangers, and thermal expansion.
2.07 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Expansion joints shall be provided wherever pipes cross structural expansion joints and
wherever required to prevent undue stresses caused by thermal expansion of the pipes.
B. Expansion joints shall be of the packless-bellow type with flanged or welded ends as
suitable for the pipe application.
C. Bellows shall be of stainless steel and suitable for a pressure of 125 psi (860 Kpa ) or
the design working pressure, whichever is greater. Expansion joints shall be provided
with guides to prevent any unnecessary misalignment of the pipe. Guides and anchor
arrangements shall be per the recommendations of the expansion joints manufacturers.
2.08 STRAINERS
A. Water strainer shall be provided at the suction connection of all pumps, and ahead of all
automatic flow control valves.
B. Strainers shall be all bronze, brass basket and flanged ends.
C. Basket shall have 1/32" (0.8 mm.) perforations for water service.
2.09 PRESSURE INDEPENDENT BALANCING AND CONTROL VALVE (PIBCV)

A. Pressure Independent Balancing & Control Valves (PIBCV) for modulation of the
chilled water flow in the return pipeline shall consist of control valve and modulating
actuator.

23 05 23 - 3
Specifications
B. The Pressure Independent Balancing & Control valve shall be an automatic flow limiter,
resulting in optimum maintenance of delta T across the Chillers/ Heat Exchangers.
C. The Pressure Independent Balancing & Control Valve and the Modulating Actuator
shall be from the same manufacturer.
D. The smaller valves up to sizes 32mm shall be of brass/bronze body and more than
32mm should be a robust design Grey / ductile Iron body.
E. The minimum differential pressure required across the valve, shall not exceed 16kPa for
sizes lesser than 32mm and 30kPa for sizes 40mm and higher.
F. The valve flow charecteistics shall be equal percentage and linear improved controls
between Input Signal vs. Heat Output.
G. The leakage rate of the valves shall be less than 0.05% of the maximum flow.
H. Valve shall have a shut-off function, lockable, visible features for full flow balancing
from 100% to 0%
I. The valves shall be rated for 16bar (unless required,or specified elswher) with 6bar
serviceable and operating differential pressure across the valve.
J. Supplier of the valve should provide lab test results reflecting verification by
independent lab to compare control and flow limitation function of different PIBCVs at
the same basis.
K. Control valve actuators shall be modulating type and must auto-calibrate on power
supply of 24VAC.
L. Actuator shall be motor driven type and shall operate in numerous steps, with respect to
available valve stroke length for applicable modulation.
M. Actuators shall incorporate a manual override facility for services purposes.
N. The actuator should work with 24 VAC supply voltage and control range shall be (0-10
Vdc)/ (4-20 mA).
O. The actuator shall be sized to meet the valve shut-off requirements and close-off against
a maximum differential pressure of 600 kPa.
P. The actuator shall operate the valve from the fully closed to the fully open position and
vice versa in less than two minutes.
Q. Actuator and valve shall be mounted and installed as per the location/orientation
approved by the manufacturer. Installation drawings shall clearly indicate the valve
location.
R. Actuators shall have indicator showing actuator functioning, auto-calibration and error
status.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF VALVES


23 05 23 - 4
Specifications
maintenance.
D. Valves 2" (50 mm) dia. and smaller shall have threaded ends, valves 2 ½" (65 mm) dia.
and larger shall have flanged ends.
E. All threaded end valves shall be installed with unions to facilitate the removal of the
valve from the pipeline.
F. Gate valves shall be installed on both sides of every piece of equipment for all pipe-
system connections, and where shown on the Drawings.
• Crane Co. ( USA or UK)
• Newman – Hattersly ( UK)
• Nibco ( USA )
• Peglers
• Heimeir
• Honeywell Braukmann.
END OF SECTION

23 05 23 - 5
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Hangers and Supports, Anchors and Guides – General……………………… ............... 2
1.2 Horizontal Piping Support Schedule……………………………… ................................ 4
Khatib & Alami Hangers and Support for HVAC Piping

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract.
1.1.1 Support, anchor and guide all piping to preclude failure or deformation. Construct and
1.1.2 Fasten piping securely to the structure without overstressing any portion of the
supports or the structure itself. Secure pipe supports, anchors and guides to concrete by
means of inserts or if greater load carrying capacity is required by means of steel
fishplates embedded in the concrete.
1.1.3 Arrange hanger to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building and
supports.
1.1.4 Un-insulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers
or supports
1.1.6 Clearance for application of specified Vapour sealed insulation without cutting
pipeline covering or fitting covering in installation of pipe hangers and fittings shall be
provided.
1.1.8 Hangers shall be formed steel clevis type, unless otherwise specified, with adjustable
attachment to hanger rod. For copper or brass pipe, use plastic sheathed hangers. Pipe
hangers shall fit over vapour sealed insulated piping.

23 05 29 - 2
Specifications
1.1.9 Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for clevis type hanger, provide
steel pipe clamps.
at each end. Provision should be made to keep the lines in their relative position to
each other by the use of either clamps or clips.
1.1.11 For hanger rods on piping 3/8" (10 mm) thru 2" (50 mm) inclusive use 3/8" (10 mm)
1.1.12 Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with
1.1.13 Provide lateral bracing for supporting rods over 450mm. long braced at every fourth
1.1.14 Floor supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from floors with cast-iron
rests, with pipe nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. Where provision for expansion is
required, provide pipe roll stands, without vertical adjustment. Provide concrete or
steel pipe piers, fasten stands to piers.
1.1.15 Wall supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from wall with steel J-Hook
for pipe located close to wall and not larger than 3" (80 mm) pipe. For greater loads,
up to 1500 lbs (680 Kg) maximum loading provide welded steel bracket.
1.1.16 Pipe-covering (insulation) protection saddles.
1.1.17 Provide hanger shields to protect vapor sealed pipe insulation within mechanical
equipment rooms at each support point by a 360 degree insert of high density, 100 psi,
waterproofed calcium silicate encased in a 120 ° sheet metal shield. Insert thickness
shall be same as insulation. Shield length shall equal nominal pipe diameter, minimum
but shall not be shorter than 100mm. and need not be longer than 300mm. if bearing
load causes no discernable deformation. Insert shall extend 25mm. beyond sheet metal
shield. 100mm. shields shall be 26 gauge minimum. Shields 130 to 230mm. long shall
be 20 gauge minimum. Shields longer than 230mm. shall be 16 gauge.
1.1.18 Provide penetration shields to encase insulated pipes penetrating fire walls or floors in
a 360 °, 24 gauge minimum sheet metal hanger shield with insert of high density, 100
psi. waterproofed calcium silicate the same thickness as insulation and further
enclosed within the sleeve, sized for maximum 25mm. spacing between sleeve and
23 05 29 - 3
Specifications
1.1.19 Provide oversize hangers with blocking the same thickness as the insulation to pitch
1.2 Horizontal Piping Support Schedule
1.2.1 Steel, Copper and PVC Pipes
. ¾" and 1" (20 and 25 mm) steel pipe-----2 meter

. 1 ¼"-2" (32 and 50 mm) steel pipe-------2.5 meter
. 2 ½"-4" (65 and 100 mm)steel pipe ------3.0 meter
. 5"-6" (125 and 150 mm) steel pipe---------3.0 meter
. 8" (200 mm) and above steel pipe ---------3.5 meter
. Up to 1 ¼" (32 mm) copper pipe----------2.0 meter
. 1 ½" (40 mm) and over copper pipe-------3.0 meter
. 2 ½" (65 mm) and smaller PVC pipe-------1.2 meter
. 3" (80 mm) and over PVC pipe-------------1.8 meter
END OF SECTION

23 05 29 - 4
SECTION 23 05 48
CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 1

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 1
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE........................................................................................ 1
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .................................................................................. 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................... 2
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ...................................... 3
1.6 GUARANTEE .......................................................................................................... 3
1.7 ACOUSTIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS AND SPECIFICATION ................... 4
1.8 SPECIFIED NOISE LEVELS .................................................................................. 4
1.9 NOISE ATTENUATION ......................................................................................... 5
1.10 EXTERNAL AREA NOISE .................................................................................... 5
1.11 ACOUSTIC ANALYSIS ......................................................................................... 5
1.12 VIBRATION CONTROL ........................................................................................ 5
1.13 VIBRATION ISOLATION, STRUCTURAL NOISE AND EQUIPMENT BASES6
1.14 EMERGENCY GENERATORS .............................................................................. 6
1.15 PIPING SYSTEM VIBRATION ISOLATORS....................................................... 7
PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 7
2.1 ATTENUATOR UNITS........................................................................................... 7
2.2 INTERNAL ACOUSTIC LINING OF DUCTS ...................................................... 8
2.3 ISOLATION HANGERS ......................................................................................... 9
2.4 ISOLATION MOUNTS ......................................................................................... 10
2.5 CONCRETE FOUNDATION BLOCKS ............................................................... 10
PART 3 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................ 10
3.1 TESTING GENERAL ............................................................................................ 10
3.2 NOISE TESTS ........................................................................................................ 11
3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PERFORMANCE TEST ...................................... 11
Khatib & Alami Section 23 05 48 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, Seismic Control

For HVAC Piping and Equipment
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 05 48
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The work shall include the supply, installation and testing of a complete system of
noise and vibration isolation to dampen and eliminate all structural borne vibration
and air noise produced by the electro-mechanical equipment as described herein
below and as detailed on the Drawings. Supporting reports and documents with a full
vibration analysis study, recommendation and implementation plan from a
recognized approved acoustic specialist/ subcontractor shall be submitted to the
consultant for approval. Such study shall be submitted at the time the equipment are
submitted for approval. The cost of the study, implementation, erection, and any
rectification to the design shall be done at the contractors own price and without
additional cost to the contract value.
1.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for Employment of noise and vibration treatment
specialist.
1.1.3 The Contractor shall supply and install all materials as required by the specialist for
noise and vibration treatment who will be responsible for the performance of these
materials.
1.1.4 The Noise & Vibration Control Specialist shall be responsible for collecting data
from both the builder and the MEP Contractor and also measuring and getting the
reading for the noise level in the spaces as specified in the presence of the Engineer.
1.1.5 The Contractor shall submit a detailed report showing all data, recommended
material, shop drawings and levels of treatment.
1.1.6 Materials specified for Noise & Vibration Treatment covered under Architectural
Section shall be supplied & installed by the Civil Contractor.
1.1.7 Materials specified under this section shall be supplied and installed by the MEP
Contractor.
1.2.1 The Contractor shall consider all necessary acoustic data to determine the actual
surface area to be acoustically treated. Acoustic calculation sheets along with the
Contractor's proposals shall be provided, clearly showing that the specified
“Reverberation Time” (RT) will be achieved by using the type of acoustic treatment,
23 05 48 - 1
Specifications
for the approval of the Engineer.
1.2.2 The Acoustic Specialist/ Sub-Contractor should have successfully supplied, installed
and completed similar projects for a period of not less than 10 years.
1.3.1 Unless more stringent requirements specified elsewhere, buildings should have
ambient internal noise levels from external sources do not exceed the criteria
prescribed in Green Buildings regulations.
1.3.2 Reference Standards shall conform to the following performance criteria determined
by testing full assemblies (component tests are unacceptable) of identical materials
and construction, using factory standard finishes in accordance with relevant codes
and standards.
1.3.3 Fire Performance Characteristics:
1.3.3.1 Provide panels with surface burning characteristics to UBC42-2 and ASTM E-84 by a
testing organization approved by the Engineer.
UBC42-2 Fire Hazard Classification Acceptable

ASTM E84 Fire Hazard Classification Class-A
Flame Spread 25 or less
Smoke development 450 or less
1.3.4 Acoustics Performance Characteristics

1.3.4.1 Provide acoustic materials with acoustical absorption characteristics as specified
elsewhere by a testing organization acceptable to Engineer. Approved testing
1.3.5 Toxicity Characteristics

1.3.5.1 Acoustic materials used in the project should have toxicity characteristics in
accordance with article 15, Part 1120 of the New York state uniform fire prevention
and building code MEA classification ME 123-92-M
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Shop Drawings
1.4.1.1 Submit to the Engineer, three (3) complete sets of shop drawings prepared on CAD.
(Hand produced drawings shall not be acceptable). The drawings shall show all
necessary details and dimensions required which will subsequently be field verified
and revised as required for the Engineer’s approval.

23 05 48 - 2
Specifications
1.4.2 Samples
1.4.2.1 Submit two (2 sets) of the manufacturers samples, 2# samples per set. Each
individual panel (wall and ceiling) to be actual size with relevant fixing components
for the approval of the Engineer. Product shall be original production material in
fabric or vinyl finish as specified.
1.4.3 Certification
1.4.3.1 Submit a certificate of compliance to specify acoustical and fire performance criteria
as per this specification, signed by the manufacturer. Attach independent laboratory
test results, showing that the products supplied as complete assemblies meeting or
exceeding the specified requirements.
1.4.4 Manufacturers Approval

1.4.4.1 The acoustic sub-contractor supplying and installing the material shall be an
approved agent of the manufacturer. The manufacturer will certify that said contractor
is an officially appointed agent having sufficient experience and expertise to complete
the project in a satisfactory manner.
1.4.5 Single Source

1.4.5.1 All materials as for as possible shall be from a single supplier.
1.5 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
1.5.1 Deliver fabricated units and related components to the site for installation to meet a
reasonable schedule and to suit the approved project construction programme. On-
site storage shall be such as to ensure that all panels and associated materials are
protected from damage and the outside elements.
1.5.2 Prior to installation the site must be free of wet and dusty trades and the climatic
conditions stabilized to normal operational levels. Acoustic elements shall be allowed
to stabilize on site 24 hours prior to installation.
1.6 Guarantee
1.6.1 The sub-contractor shall furnish in the Client’s name, a written guarantee covering
the product supplied against defects in materials and workmanship under normal
operating conditions for a period of one year from the date of completion of acoustic
works. The Contractor shall pass on to the owner any and all guarantees provided by
the manufacturers and acoustic sub-contractor of individual members of the system
before the completion of the project.

23 05 48 - 3
Specifications
1.6.2 Provide to the Engineer in the Client’s name, sound test results. Sound test results
should comply with this specification, which is to achieve the indicated
Reverberation Times (RT). The sound test is to form an integral part of the specialist
acoustic sub-contractors scope of work.
1.7 Acoustic Design Considerations and Specification
1.7.1 It will be the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the internal acoustic ambient
1.7.1.1 Where the contractor fails to meet these specifications he will be expected at his own
1.7.1.2 The contractor shall supply and fit acoustic insulation and noise attenuator units
where necessary to achieve the following noise criteria as indicated in Table 1.
1.7.2 It will be the mechanical services sub-contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the
noise generated by the plant, including airborne noise through the structure, duct
borne noise from the ducted air-conditioning or fan systems and vibration do not
exceed the noise criteria levels for the various types of areas specified.
1.8 Specified Noise Levels
1.8.1 The optimum NC noise levels for the various spaces shall be as detailed below:-
Table 1 – Noise Criteria Levels
Room Description
Leq,T
Open Plan Offices NC 35 – 40
Cellular Offices NC 30 – 35
Office Corridors / Circulation Areas NC 35 – 40
Meeting Rooms, and Function Halls NC 30 – 35
Video/Tele Conferencing Rooms NC 25 – 30
Training Rooms NC 30 – 35
Library NC 30 – 35
Prayer Rooms NC 30 – 35
Restaurants, F&B NC 35 – 40
Kitchen NC 45 – 50
Lobby / Reception Areas / Lounges NC 35 – 40
Public Toilets/Changing NC 40 – 45

23 05 48 - 4
Specifications

Room Description
Leq,T
Base Building (Core) Circulation/Corridor NC 35 – 40
Parking NC 55 – 60
80 dB LAmax(5min) @ 1m from all
Basement M&E rooms
equipment
1.8.2 The noise and vibration measurement time parameter (T) shall be representative of
the source being measured and at least 1 minute for steady-state noise and vibration
sources. If sources are intermittent or cyclic in nature, the noise and vibration
measurements shall be of sufficient duration to capture 10 cycles of the source.
During periodic testing of equipment, such as emergency generators, a temporary
relaxation in the above-stated noise criteria of NC/NR 10 or 10 dBA shall be
permitted.
1.8.3 It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that the above levels are
achieved and to demonstrate and certify that the same have been achieved.
1.9.1 The Contractor shall supply and fix acoustic insulation and sound attenuators where
necessary and as shown on drawings to reduce the airborne noise transmission
through the duct distribution systems so that the specified noise criteria levels are
satisfied.
1.10 External Area Noise
1.10.1 The external noise levels of any installation located on the roof shall not exceed NR
55 when measured at the site boundary or building parapet.
1.10.2 The external noise emanating from air inlets and exhaust louvres of air handling unit
plant rooms or standby generators shall not exceed NR 55 at a distance of 5 metres or
the site boundary whichever is the more stringent requirement.
1.11 Acoustic Analysis
1.11.1 Moreover, the contractor shall submit at the design stage, prior to commencement of
the work, a detailed noise analysis of all ducted air-conditioning and extract air
systems. This analysis should clearly indicate the required static and dynamic
insertion losses of the attenuators and the aerodynamic pressure loss charts of the
attenuators when handling the design volume of air.
1.12 Vibration Control
1.12.1 All mechanical, reciprocating machinery shall be analysed for vibration and for noise
breakout to areas adjacent and above or below to ensure that the specified noise
criteria ratings are net.

23 05 48 - 5
Specifications
1.13 Vibration Isolation, Structural Noise and Equipment Bases
1.13.1 The contractor shall be responsible and include for the supply, installation and testing
of the complete system necessary for vibration isolation to dampen and eliminate all
structure borne vibration generated by the electro-mechanical equipment as described
in this specification and as detailed on the scheme drawings.
1.13.2 It is the Contractors responsibility to carry out a full vibration and structure borne
noise study as detailed in the mechanical specifications.
1.13.3 Where air handling units are located at roof level or inside a room the selection of
vibration isolation systems shall take into account the effect of the unsupported span
between building columns and the subsequent deflection of the slab under the point
loads. The spring type isolators shall have a static deflection of not less than 50 mm
under the load of the units supported. This static deflection is to provide an isolation
efficiency of at least 95% and higher deflections are to be used if the calculations so
indicate. The Contractor shall also check the installation for airborne noise through
the structure that could affect accommodation areas immediately below or adjacent
and if necessary recommend the use of acoustic floating floors to contain the noise.
A report of the study and recommendations shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to proceeding with the installation. The cost of the study,
implementation, erection and any rectification of the original design shall be carried
out at the Contractors own cost.
1.13.4 The vibration isolators shall be positioned in accordance with the manufacturer
1.13.5 The equipment shall be loaded exactly over or between the mounts without any
overhang.
1.13.6 The static deflection of the vibration isolators shall be determined by the specialist
acoustic engineer, but should not, be less than that recommended by CIBSE GUIDE
or ASHRAE handbook.
1.13.7 The vibration isolators shall be treated against corrosion. The steel components shall
be PVC coated. The nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc-electro plated.
1.14 Emergency Generators
1.14.1 Emergency diesel generator and its installation of these machines must be carried out
with careful regard to the acoustic and aerodynamic factors.
1.14.2 Because of the noise generated by the machines, it will be essential to install air inlet
attenuators that are selected to reduce the noise below NR45 at 3 metres from the air
louvres. The exhaust air from the engine radiator will also require attenuating down
to a level of NR45 at 3 metres, and both inlet and exhaust air attenuators must be
selected and sized such that the aerodynamic pressure loss across the system is below
that recommended by the generator manufacturer.
1.14.3 The engine exhaust muffler should be selected for NR 45 at 3 meter.
23 05 48 - 6
Specifications
1.14.4 The plant room containing each generator should be acoustically treated to prevent
the engine and exhaust noise from breaking out through the structure to critical areas
above, below and adjacent.
1.14.5 To contain this noise, it will be necessary to increase the sound transmission losses of
the walls to RW 50dB and fit acoustic doors that have an STC rating of at least 38dB
STC.
1.15 Piping System Vibration Isolators
1.15.1 All piping connected to rotating machinery shall be supported by hangers and
supports including vibration isolators and shall be connected to the equipment by
means of acoustic flexible connectors.
1.15.2 The first three hangers from the equipment should provide the same deflection as the
equipment isolators; the remaining hangers should be spring or combination spring
and rubber incorporating a spring with at least 19 mm deflection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Attenuator Units
2.1.1 The primary attenuator should be located in the plant room as close to the plant room
wall as possible. The attenuators shall be inserted in the ducts where they pass
through the plant room wall if fire dampers are not required at this point. However
where this not possible, the attenuator shall be installed between the fan and the
mechanical room wall with the duct between the silencer and the wall acoustically
lagged using an appropriate noise barrier material to prevent noise re-entry.
2.1.2 The aperture in the wall through which the ducts pass must be made good by being
packed with wax impregnated open cell polythene “Acoustic foam” to form an
airtight seal between the duct and the structure.
2.1.3 The sound attenuators should be supplied complete by a specialist manufacturer, the
supply of acoustic splitters for insertion in the contractors own ducting will not be
permitted.
2.1.4 The attenuators shall consist of attenuating splitters arranged with two half width side
splitters and full width central splitters with equal width airways throughout
assembled in the attenuator casing.
2.1.5 The attenuator casings shall be of galvanized sheet steel and the material thickness
shall be in accordance with DW 142 recommendations and shall be supplied with a
23 05 48 - 7
Specifications
galvanized sheet angle, joint system, slide on flange conforming to UK HVCA
specification. DW 142+ HVCA test procedure DW 1 + m1.
2.1.6 The splitter perimeter tray shall be manufactured from 22 gauge galvanized sheet
steel with galvanized sheet steel bull nosed section at entry and exit. The splitter
absorption material shall be abrasion proof for velocities up to 18 m/sec. air velocity.
The acoustic infix for the attenuator shall be either mineral wool having a density of
48 kg/m3 or open cell flame resistant acoustic foam. Where mineral wool is
employed the materials shall be faced with woven glass fiber protective scrim with
22 gauge galvanized perforated sheet steel fascia.
2.1.7 The lock formed joint for the attenuator casing shall be factory sealed with
elastomeric mastic to prevent air leakage.
2.1.8 Attenuators of large cross section or length can be manufactured as multi-section

units with loose end flanges for ease of transportation and site handling.
2.2 Internal Acoustic Lining of Ducts
2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 Furnish and install duct lining complete as specified hereinafter and to the approval
of the Engineer.
2.2.1.2 Where it is possible to achieve the required attenuation by lining the interior of duct
runs, this may be accomplished by applying one inch thick lining to the inside of the
ducts.
2.2.2 Product
2.2.2.1 Lining for ducts shall be flexible elastomeric acoustical insulation that meets the
following:
2.2.2.1.1 A 3-6 PCF density, closed-cell, non-porous, fiber-free, CFC- and HCFC-free,
2.2.2.1.2 Resists mold growth and effectively retards the flow of moisture vapour, Water
Vapor Permeability shall be <0.06 as per ASTM E 96 and Water Absorption %
(Volume Change) shall be <0.20 as per ASTM C 209
2.2.2.1.3 Low VOC material, meeting the requirements for the “Indoor Air Quality”
classifications.
2.2.2.1.4 Acceptable for use in square, rectangular, round or oval duct or plenum
applications and air handling equipment

23 05 48 - 8
Specifications
2.2.2.1.5 Meeting the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
2.2.2.1.6 Its flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less as
tested by ASTM E 84, “Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”.
2.2.2.1.7 Liner could be with or without a factory-applied scrim-reinforced acrylic adhesive on
one side
2.2.3 Installation
2.2.3.1 Should be applied to clean, dry ductwork and equipment. Adhesive should be applied
to all compression joints and used on all butt edges.
2.2.3.2 Duct liners shall be applied with both mechanical fasteners and an adhesive
2.2.3.3 Apply mechanical fasteners in accordance with SMACNA guidelines. Mechanical

fasteners could be either of the welded pin or impact pin types. The length of each pin
shall be enough to accommodate the specified liner thickness. Washers on top of the
pins shall retain the liner
2.2.3.4 Duct liners shall be applied for both supply and return air ducts with a minimum of 3
meters length away from each air handling unit or fan coil unit.
2.2.3.5 Provide metal noising to every leading edge in case air stream velocities exceed 4,000
FPM. Nosing may be formed, channelled or zee-attached on duct by screws, rivets or
welds.
2.2.3.6 Adhesives must be both water and fire resistant
2.3 Isolation Hangers
2.3.1 Isolation hangers shall be used for suspended pipes and equipment.
2.3.2 Isolation hangers are rubber or springs or a combination of both.
2.3.3 Rubber Hangers shall be of the rubber-in-shear type. It shall consist of:
2.3.3.1 A high grade rubber block with suspension rod and an outside steel housing.
2.3.3.2 The steel housing will be anchored to the ceiling slab and the suspension rod shall
support the equipment.
2.3.3.3 The rubber shall be protected against corrosion due to oil or other damaging agents.
2.3.4 Spring Hangers
2.3.3.4 Shall be of the open mounting type and shall consist of a steel spring between a top

23 05 48 - 9
Specifications
and bottom plate with an adjustment bolt or leveling.
2.3.3.5 The spring should be designed to provide horizontal stiffness at least 75% of vertical
stiffness to assure stability, 50% travel beyond rated load and safe solid stresses.
2.4 Isolation Mounts
2.4.1 Isolation mounts shall be used between equipment and concrete base and at the
loading points of the equipment as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.4.2 Rubber Mounts
2.4.2.1 Shall be of the rubber-in-shear type with a cub shape or integrated ribbed rubber pad.
2.4.2.2 The pad shall have two bolt holes for isolator anchorage to concrete base.
2.4.2.3 Rubber mounts shall not be used for deflection requirements larger than 8 mm.
2.4.3 Spring Mounts

2.4.3.1 Shall be of the restrained steel spring mountings and shall incorporate hold down
2.4.3.2 The isolator shall include an acoustical barrier of rubber pad bonded to the base plate
to prevent transmission of very high frequency vibration and noise and be corrosion
protected when installed outdoors.
2.5 Concrete Foundation Blocks
A reinforced concrete foundation block or concrete inertia base for each piece of
equipment shall be constructed of minimum thickness as shown on the Drawings,
with a minimum weight equal to at least two times that of the equipment and in
accordance with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer and/or
vibration specialist. Bases shown on drawings or included in these specifications
represent the minimum requirements of the Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Testing General
3.1.1 The test of the airborne noise in each area shall be in accordance with BS 7445
Acoustics Guide to ISO Measurement of Airborne Acoustical Noise” (BS 7458-1991,
also refers).
3.1.2 The tests of the reverberation time in the areas specified shall be in accordance with
(BS 5363-1993) “Measurement of Reverberation Time in Building Space and
Auditoria”.

23 05 48 - 10
Specifications
3.2 Noise Tests
3.2.1 It will be the responsibility of the contractor to employ an independent Acoustic

Engineer to carry out proving tests and to prepare noise test certificates for all
3.2.2 The general basis for acceptability of the installation acoustically is (tolerance + or –
2db) at any point 1.2 metres above floor level and 1.5 metres from grilles, diffusers,
registers, terminal units etc. of the air-conditioning systems.
3.2.3 For items of plant the noise level shall be taken at a point equivalent distance to the
3.2.4 Tests shall be carried out to establish the required performance standards and shall
comply with the sound attenuation recommendations as detailed in the sections
below.
3.2.5 Vibration Tests
3.2.5.1 All vibration isolation systems shall allow no more than 5% transmissibility to the
specialist testing apparatus and personnel, then the contractor shall engage and
employ such specialist services. The contractor shall bear the cost of rectification of
the installations as well as the cost of the specialist services in order to meet the
design requirements.
3.3 Hangers and Supports Performance Test
3.3.1 Brackets and hangers shall be tested to sustain a load of eight times the actual
operating load.
END OF SECTION

23 05 48 - 11
SECTION 23 05 53
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC
PIPING, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK....................................................................................................... 1
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS ...................................................................................... 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 2
2.1 VALVE CHART LOCATIONS................................................................................... 2
2.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPELINES AND SERVICES .............................................. 2
2.3 SIGN AND ACCESSORY FASTENING.................................................................... 4
2.4 NAMEPLATES ............................................................................................................ 4
2.5 PAINTING ................................................................................................................... 4
Khatib & Alami Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping, Duct & Equipment
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 05 53
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 To be read and governed by general contract conditions. This section includes
painting and identification of all pipe works, duct works, equipment etc.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting complete above works based on
1.2.2 The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are

Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings
Section 23 34 00 - HVAC Fans
Section 23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units
Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets
Section 23 40 00 - Air Cleaning Devices
Section 23 72 00 - Air to Air Energy Recovery Equipment
Section 23 81 00 - Decentralized HVAC Equipment
Section 25 00 00 - Building Automation System

DW 144 Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork
Khatib & Alami Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping, Duct

& Equipment
23 05 53 - 1
Specifications
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Valve Chart Locations
2.1.1 Valve charts shall be provided for each piping system and shall consist of
schematic Drawings of piping layouts, showing and identifying each valve and
describing its function. Two copies of each chart, sealed to rigid backboard with
clear lacquer placed under glass and framed, shall be mounted in the building as
directed by the Engineer.
2.2 Identification of Pipelines and Services
2.2.1 GENERAL
2.2.1.1 All Building Services including piping, ducting, electrical conduits and their
covering shall be properly identified in accordance with BS 1710, Latest Edition.
2.2.1.2 All methods of identification shall be compatible with the pipe and operating
conditions.
2.2.1.3 All material used shall be of low emission as per GREEN /LEED Guidlines.
2.2.1.4 Identification shall be accomplished by using basic identification colours with

code indications.
2.2.1.5 Code indication shall include safety colours and service information. Information
shall be given regarding the nature of the contents of the pipe by using the
following systems, individually or in combination:-
a. Name in Full.
c. Chemical Symbol
d. Refrigerant Number as Specified in BS 4580
e. Appropriate Code Indication Colour bands.
2.2.1.6 Air Conditioning and ventilation ducts shall be identified in accordance with)
DW/142, latest Edition.
2.2.2 Legend
2.2.2.1 The material in piping system shall be identified. Primary identification should be
by means of a lettered legend naming the material conveyed by the piping in full
& Equipment
23 05 53 - 2
Specifications
or abbreviated form. Arrows shall be used to indicate the direction of flow.
2.2.2.2 The legend shall be brief, informative, pointed, and simple. Legends shall be
applied close to valves and adjacent to changes in direction, branches, where
pipes pass through walls or floors and as frequently as needed along straight runs
to provide clear and positive indication. Identification maybe applied by
stencilling, tape or markers.
2.2.2.3 Pipe marking should be highly visible.
2.2.3 The Type & Size of Letters

(13 to 32) mm 200 mm 13 mm

(40 to 50) mm 200 mm 19 mm
(65 to 150) mm 300 mm 32 mm
(200 to 250) mm 600 mm 63 mm
over 250 800 mm 100 mm
2.2.4 Colour
2.2.4.1 The Colour should be shown on the piping, but in combination with a legend.
The application of colour bands shall be done by: Painting, Adhesive colour
bands or equivalent colour clips.
2.2.4.2 Colour reference shall be in accordance with BS 4800, Latest Edition.
2.2.5 Color Code Indication for Building Services and Pipelines should be as follows:
2.2.5.1 Colour Code
Basic colour Identification
- Refrigerant pipe White/EM. Green/White

- Electrical conduits - Orange
- Cold air supply duct - Blue
- Fresh air duct - Green
- Extract/Exhaust/Re-circulated Air duct - Grey

& Equipment
23 05 53 - 3
Specifications
2.3 Sign and Accessory Fastening
2.3.1 Warning and instruction signs, wherever specified or otherwise required, shall be
securely fastened where shown or directed with bolting anchors herein specified
for masonry construction or round head chrome plated brass wood screws and
washers for wood construction. Signs shall not be hung loose on chains or by any
other method wherein the sign will be free to move. Sign shall be installed in a
conspicuous well lighted location adjacent to the equipment it refers to and shall
be easily read by occupants in standing position on floor.
2.3.2 All accessories such as wrenches specified to be hung on chain adjacent to the
equipment they serve, shall be arranged for stowing in a rigid manner and shall not
be hung loose, or otherwise, that may permit the chain or wrench to move or rattle.
2.4 Nameplates
2.4.1 Each unit of equipment shall be identified by a permanently attached nameplate

made of brass or other corrosion-resistant metal. Plates shall be not less than forty
(40) by eighty (80) mm. Plates shall bear information pertaining to the unit as
follows:
a. System and unit designation from schedule of equipment.

b. Manufacturer's name and address.
c. Serial and model number.
d. Rated capacity.
e. Temperature, pressure or other limitations.
2.5 Painting
2.5.1 General Requirements
2.5.1.1 Surface requiring prime painting shall be cleaned thoroughly of all rust, loose
scale, oil, grease and dirt. Use wire brushes and solution for this purpose.
2.5.1.2 No painting shall be applied to damp or frosty surfaces in wet, foggy or freezing
weather.
2.5.1.3 Paint shall be evenly spread and well brushed out so that there shall be no drops,
runs or sagging.

& Equipment
23 05 53 - 4
Specifications
2.5.1.4 Shop coated surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and retouched where necessary.
2.5.1.5 Care shall be taken not to paint controls, label plates, nameplates on all apparatus
and non-ferrous refrigerant piping.
2.5.1.6 All items that have rusted or corroded in storage or in place shall be re-cleaned or
repainted upon request of the Engineer.
2.5.1.7 Finishing coats shall be made in accordance with a color code, based on ASHRAE
or BS recommendations after being submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
2.5.2 Machinery
2.5.2.1 All machinery installed under this contract such as motors, pumps, etc. shall have
a shop priming coat of gray lead and oil.
2.5.3 Piping
2.5.3.1 All un-insulated copper pipes shall be wrapped with black colour PVC denso tape
of the self adhesive water proof type.
2.5.4 Ductwork
2.5.4.1 The inside portions of all ductwork which are visible through registers and grills
shall be painted with one coat of dull black, heat resistant paint.
2.5.4.2 Un-insulated ductwork including support and hangers exposed to view: One coat
of zinc chromate primer, 1.5 mils thick and finished with iron hide grey metal
paint or with color approved by the Engineer.
2.5.4.3 All metal surfaces such as fresh air dampers located within, or directly adjacent to,
fresh air intake louvers: Two coats of gray galvanized steel primer, 1.5 mils
thick.
2.5.5 Iron Work
2.5.5.1 All iron work within the building, not otherwise specified such as pipe and duct
hangers and supports, and supports for apparatus, shall be prime painted with one
coat of red lead.
END OF SECTION

& Equipment
23 05 53 - 5
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR
HVAC
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................ 1
1.2 SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ................................................................................................. 3
1.7 WARRANTY ..................................................................................................................... 3
1.8 COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING SERVICES ............................................................. 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 4
PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 4
3.1 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................... 4
3.2 PREPARATION ................................................................................................................ 6
3.3 TESTING AND BALANCING PRODUCERS ................................................................ 7
3.4 TESTING AND HYDRONIC GENERAL PROCEDURE ............................................... 8
3.5 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTED PERIOD .............................................................. 24
3.6 MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD AND GUARANTEES 24
3.7 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE ......................................................................... 25
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Related Documents
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 Summary
1.2.1 A qualified and approved third party shall carry out and certify the testing and
commissioning. Testing and commissioning must be carried out by a company
approved by Authority having the jurisdiction. Testing, adjusting and balancing of the
installed systems should be as per the relevant commissioning code of the British
Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers(CIBSE) or ASHRAE Standards.
Commissioning results must be recorded and made available for inspection by
Authority
1.2.2 Major equipment such as heat exchangers, fresh air units, shall be tested and
commissioned at factory and contractor shall arrange for the witness of this test if
required by the Client Representative and consultant.
1.2.3 Testing, adjusting and balancing for all the installed systems shall include chilled
water distribution, air distribution, noise and vibration measurement, automatic
controls as per the procedure herein after.
1.2.4 The Contractor shall be responsible to provide during installation all necessary
provisions to carry out the above works as required by the third party.
1.2.5 All costs shall be paid by the Contractor.
1.3.1 All piping and equipment shall be tested as specified under the relevant subsection of
the specification. Authority regulations and Sustainability requirements shall also be
considered and more stringent specifications to be adopted. Ventilation system start
up should be in accordance with ASHRAE 62.1-2007, section7.2
1.3.2 Labour, materials, instruments, power etc., required for testing shall be furnished by
the Contractor unless otherwise indicated under the particular section of the
Specification.
1.3.3 Test shall be performed in the presence of representatives of the Engineer and such
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 1
Specifications
1.3.4 In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping system only, before connection of
manufacturers of fixtures, equipment and appliances or accepted engineering
1.3.5 All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be
Employer.
1.3.6 Ductwork, connected to equipment, with an external static pressure exceeding two
hundred and fifty (250) Pascal (Pa) and all ductwork exposed to external ambient
conditions or within unconditioned spaces must be pressure tested prior to occupancy
in accordance with a method approved by the Authority having jurisdiction and a
compliant amount of air leakage achieved.
1.3.7 Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and/or damaged materials
replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and at no additional cost to the
Employer.
1.3.8 The duration of tests shall be as determined by all parties having jurisdiction, but in
no case less than the time prescribed in each subsection of the specification.
1.3.9 In the event of any repair or any adjustment having to be made other than normal
1.3.10 When pipes, valves, equipment etc., are to be covered or embedded or insulated; their
specific tests shall be carried out on them before any covering is applied. These tests
shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities and he shall take all
necessary precautions to insure the safety and protection of such tested items until the
termination of the work.
1.3.11 Three copies of all test results shall be submitted to the Engineer.
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Two copies of Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing strategies plans to be submitted.
Plans should show step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3. Include also a
complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
1.4.2 Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved
forms certified by Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing firm.
1.4.3 Warranties if specified in this Section.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 2
Specifications
1.5.1 Ensure the participation of Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing team members,
equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls
installers, and other support personnel. Provide notice in advance of scheduled
meeting time and location.
1.5.2 Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems
and equipment to support and assist Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing activities.
1.5.3 Certify Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing field data reports by reviewing field
data reports to validate accuracy of data, and certify that Testing, Adjusting and Air
Balancing team complied with approved Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing plan
and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
1.5.4 Use approved standard forms.
1.5.5 Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently as required by
instrument manufacturer.
1.5.5.1 Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and
the name of party performing instrument calibration.
1.6 Project Conditions
1.6.1 Completed areas of the project might be occupied during Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing or before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing operations to minimize conflicts with Client’s operations.
1.7 Warranty
1.7.1 Provide a guarantee on National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that: -
1.7.1.1 The certified Testing, Adjusting and Balancing firm has tested and balanced systems
according to the Contract Documents.
1.7.1.2 Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
1.8 Commissioning of Building Services
1.8.1 The commissioning of HVAC system, building management shall be carried out
before issuing the completion certificate
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 3
Specifications
1.8.2 Commissioning must be carried out in accordance with the CIBSE Codes listed below
or any other equivalent commissioning standard approved by Authority having the
jurisdiction.
- The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE)
Commissioning Code, Air Distribution Systems, Code A-2006’
- CIBSE Commissioning Code, Automatic Controls, Code C-2001’ for central

control and Building Management System (BMS)
- CIBSE Commissioning Code R: 2002 Refrigeration Systems
1.8.3 Commissioning must be carried out by a company approved by Authority having the
jurisdiction to conduct commissioning of buildings.
1.8.4 Commissioning results must be recorded and available for inspection by Authority
having the jurisdiction
1.8.5 A systems manual, documenting the information required to allow future operations
staff to understand and optimally operate the commissioned services, must be
developed and provided to the building owner or facilities operator following
commissioning
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
3.1.1 Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and
to address conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper Testing, Adjusting
and Balancing of systems and equipment.
3.1.1.1 Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
Contract.
3.1.1.2 Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are
required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these
balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 4
Specifications
3.1.2 Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
3.1.3 Examine Project Record Documents.
3.1.4 Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
3.1.5 Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all
or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of
HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented
when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system
effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and
Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
3.1.6 Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have
been performed.
3.1.7 Examine system and equipment test reports.
3.1.8 Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and
that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.
3.1.9 Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
3.1.10 Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings
are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is
ready for operation.
3.1.11 Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are
accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
3.1.12 Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify
that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
3.1.13 Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
3.1.14 Examine motorized valves for proper installation for their intended function of
diverting or mixing fluid flows.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 5
Specifications
3.1.15 Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight
fins.
3.1.16 Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
3.1.17 Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
3.1.18 Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
3.1.18.1 Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
3.1.18.2 Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3.1.18.3 Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing
boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
3.1.18.4 Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way
mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
3.1.18.5 Thermostats and humidistats are located without adverse effects of sunlight, drafts,
and cold walls.
3.1.18.6 Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
3.1.18.7 Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
3.1.18.8 Controller set points are set at indicated values.
3.1.18.9 Interlocked systems are operating.
3.1.19 Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of Testing, Adjusting
and Balancing procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in
conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2 Preparation
3.2.1 Prepare a Testing, Adjusting and Balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-
step procedures.
3.2.2 Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
3.2.2.1 Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 6
Specifications
3.2.2.2 Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3.2.2.3 Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3.2.2.4 Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
3.2.2.5 Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
3.2.2.6 Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
3.2.2.7 Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
3.2.2.8 Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can
be met.
3.3 Testing and Balancing Producers
3.3.1 Testing Air Balancing General Procedure

3.3.2 Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
shown herein after.
3.3.3 Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to
the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After
testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials
identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation
Specifications for this Project.
3.3.4 Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators,
fan-speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.3.5 Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) and metric
(SI) units.
3.3.6 Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet
volumes with required fan volumes.
3.3.7 Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
3.3.8 Develop a plan to simulate diversity for variable-air-volume systems.
3.3.1.8 Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
3.3.9 Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 7
Specifications
3.3.10 Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
3.3.11 Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
3.3.12 Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
3.3.13 Check for airflow blockages.
3.3.14 Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
3.3.15 Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
3.3.16 Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.3.17 Crosscheck the test sheet’s equipment details with the actual Nameplate of the unit.
3.3.18 A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipment
supplied, adequate for 12 months’ operation shall be supplied by the Contractor at the
Testing and balancing equipment tools
• Rotating Vane Anemometer

• Micro manometer
• Indoor Air Quality Probe
• Balometer™ Capture Hood
• tachometer
• AC Clamp-On Ammeter
All instruments should have a valid calibration certificate

Refer to section 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC for more details
3.4 Testing and Hydronic General Procedure
Perform testing and balancing procedure on each system according to procedures

shown hereinafter.
3.4.1 Procedures for Constant-Volume Air Systems

3.4.1.1 Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan
speed listed by fan manufacturer.
3.4.1.2 Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:-
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 8
Specifications
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan
as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
3.4.1.3 Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3.4.1.4 Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
3.4.1.5 Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
3.4.1.6 Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and
electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
3.4.1.7 Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full
cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the
maximum required brake horsepower.
3.4.2 Adjust volume dampers for main duct, sub main ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
3.4.2.1 Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. Where sufficient space
in sub main and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements,
measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that
zone.
3.4.2.2 Remeasure each sub main and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust sub main and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 9
Specifications
3.4.2.3 Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
3.4.2.3.1 Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
3.4.2.4 Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
3.4.2.4.1 Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
3.4.2.4.2 Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.4.3 Procedures for Variable-Air-Volume Systems

3.4.3.1 Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than
the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a
maximum set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units
equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so
they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
3.4.3.2 Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have

been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
3.4.3.2.1 Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that
simulates full-cooling load.
3.4.3.2.2 Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure
for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to
overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.
3.4.3.2.3 Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
3.4.3.2.4 Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 10
Specifications
make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.4.3.2.5 Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow
as described for constant-volume air systems. If air outlets are out of balance at
minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum
airflow.
3.4.3.2.6 Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets
as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.4.3.2.7 Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static
pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.
3.4.3.2.8 Record the final fan performance data.
3.4.4 Procedures for Motors

3.4.4.1 Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
3.4.4.1.1 Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
3.4.4.1.2 Motor horsepower rating.
3.4.4.1.3 Motor rpm.
3.4.4.1.4 Efficiency rating.
3.4.4.1.5 Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
3.4.4.1.6 Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
3.4.4.1.7 Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
3.4.4.2 Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at

speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 11
Specifications
controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller
manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.4.5 Procedures for Condensing Units
3.4.5.1 Verify proper rotation of fans.
3.4.5.2 Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
3.4.5.3 Record compressor data.
3.4.6 Procedures for Temperature Measurements
3.4.6.1 During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the
automatic temperature-control system.
3.4.6.2 Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two
successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness
of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
3.4.6.3 Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.4.7 Procedures for Commercial Kitchen Hoods

3.4.7.1 Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each kitchen hood. For kitchen hoods
designed with integral makeup air, measure and adjust the exhaust and makeup
airflow. Measure airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is
not possible, provide an explanation in the report of the reason(s) why and also the
reason why the method used was chosen.
3.4.7.1.1 traverse. Install each test port with a threaded cap that is liquid tight.
3.4.7.2 After balancing is complete, do the following:
3.4.7.2.1 Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection.
3.4.7.2.2 Measure and record the hood face velocity. Make measurements at multiple points across
the face of the hood. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 inches (300 mm)
between points and between any point and the perimeter. Calculate the average of
the measurements recorded. Verify that the hood average face velocity complies with
the Contract Documents and governing codes.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 12
Specifications
3.4.7.2.3 Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device.
Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to room airflow patterns to achieve
optimum results.
3.4.7.3 Visually inspect the hood exhaust duct throughout its entire length in compliance
with authorities having jurisdiction. Begin at the hood connection and end at the
point it discharges outdoors. Report findings.
3.4.7.3.1 Check duct slopes as required.
3.4.7.3.2 Verify that duct access is installed as required.
3.4.7.3.3 Verify that point of termination is as required.
3.4.7.3.4 Verify that duct air velocity is within the range required.
3.4.7.3.5 Verify that duct is within a fire-rated enclosure.
3.4.7.4 Report deficiencies.
3.4.8 Procedures for Exhaust Hoods

3.4.8.1 Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each exhaust hood. Measure airflow by
duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, explain why, in
the report, and explain the test method used.
3.4.8.2 After balancing is complete, do the following:
3.4.8.2.1 and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection.
3.4.8.2.2 Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device.
Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to achieve optimum results.
3.4.9 Procedures for Space Pressurization Measurements and Adjustments

3.4.9.1 Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the
space boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable, gaskets,
and sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the
reported deficiencies are corrected.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 13
Specifications
3.4.9.2 Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each
building by adjusting the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated
conditions.
3.4.9.3 Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and
measure airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria
for space pressurization.
3.4.9.3.1 For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference between the
intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed. Record the high-
pressure side, low-pressure side, and pressure difference between each adjacent
space.
3.4.9.3.2 For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most critical
space and work to the least critical space.
3.4.9.3.3 Test room pressurization first, then zones, and finish with building pressurization.
3.4.9.4 To achieve indicated pressurization, set the supply airflow to the indicated conditions
and adjust the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the indicated pressure or airflow
difference.
3.4.9.5 In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and
emergency mode or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and
record data for each operating mode.
3.4.9.6 Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report
deficiencies.
3.4.10 Procedures for Vibration Measurements
3.4.10.1 Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:
3.4.10.1.1 Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.
3.4.10.1.2 Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second (2.5 to 254 mm/s).
3.4.10.1.3 Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils (0.0254 to 2.54 mm).
3.4.10.1.4 Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 14
Specifications
3.4.10.1.5 Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.
3.4.10.2 Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.
3.4.10.2.1 Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
3.4.10.2.2 Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
3.4.10.3 Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources
are at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being
tested.
3.4.10.3.1 Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.
3.4.10.3.2 Clear the space of people.
3.4.10.4 Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing
is complete.
3.4.10.5 Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.
3.4.10.6 Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and
to avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.
3.4.10.7 Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp (2.2 kW).
3.4.10.8 Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base
vibration, and building structure vibration. Record velocity , displacement readings
and & acceleration readings in the horizontal, vertical, and axial planes.
3.4.10.8.1 Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:
a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Equipment Casing: Top and side.
d. Equipment Base: Top and side.
e. Building: Floor.
f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
3.4.10.8.2 Compressor
a. Compressor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 15
Specifications
c. Equipment Casing: Top and side.
d. Equipment Base: Top and side.
e. Building: Floor.
f. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
3.4.10.8.3 For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration
isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate
and report the differences.
3.4.10.9 Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.
3.4.10.9.1 Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
3.4.10.9.2 Verify that installation is level and plumb.
3.4.10.9.3 Verify that isolators are properly anchored.
3.4.10.9.4 For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the
travel to-solid distance.
3.4.10.9.5 Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete
base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the
inertia base and the floor.
3.4.11 Procedures for Sound-Level Measurements

3.4.11.1 Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying
with ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band
filters. Comply with requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4.11.2 Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the
sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.
3.4.11.3 Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas
where air velocities exceed 100 fpm (0.51 m/s), use a windscreen on the microphone.
3.4.11.4 Perform sound-level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are
complete.
3.4.11.5 Close windows and doors to the space.
3.4.11.6 Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 16
Specifications
level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.
3.4.11.7 Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be
measured. Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-
sight between the sound source and the sound-level meter.
3.4.11.8 Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) above the
floor and at least 36 inches (900 mm) from a wall, column, and other large surface
capable of altering the measurements.
3.4.11.9 Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 un weighted octave bands in
the frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.
3.4.11.10 Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background
sound levels and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating.
3.4.11.10.1 Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor depending
on the difference and adjust measurements.
3.4.12 Procedures for Stair-Case Pressurization System Measurements and Adjustments

3.4.12.1 Before testing, observe the stair tower to verify that construction is complete. Verify
the following:
3.4.12.1.1 Walls and ceiling are free of unintended openings and are capable of achieving a
pressure boundary.
3.4.12.1.2 Fire stopping and sealants are installed.
3.4.12.1.3 Doors, door closers, and door gaskets are installed and adjusted.
3.4.12.1.4 If applicable, window installation is complete.
3.4.12.2 Measure and record wind speed and direction, outside-air temperature, and relative
humidity on each test day.
3.4.12.3 Test each stair tower as a single system. If multiple fans serve a single stair tower,
operate the fans together.
3.4.12.4 Air Balance:
3.4.12.4.1 Open the doors indicated to be open and measure, adjust, and record the airflow of
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 17
Specifications
each:
a. Stair-tower fan.
b. Air outlet supplying the stair tower.
3.4.12.4.2 For ducted systems, measure the fan airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse.
3.4.12.5 Pressurization Test
3.4.12.5.1 After air balancing is complete, perform stair-tower pressurization tests.
3.4.12.5.2 Establish a consistent procedure for recording data throughout the entire test. Set the
stair-tower side of the doors as the reference point and the floor side of the doors
with positive pressure when higher than the stair tower, and negative pressure when
lower than the stair tower.
3.4.12.5.3 With the HVAC systems operating in their normal mode of operation and the stair-
tower pressurization systems off, measure and record the following:
a. Pressure difference across each stair-tower door with all doors in the stairwell
closed.
b. . Force necessary to open each door, using a spring-type scale.
3.4.12.5.4 With the HVAC systems operating and the stair-tower pressurization system
activated, perform the following:
a. Place building HVAC systems in their normal operating mode including

equipment not used to implement smoke control, such as air-handling units,
toilet exhaust fans, fan coil units, and similar equipment.
b. Measure and record the pressure difference across each stair-tower door with all
doors in the stair tower closed. Make sure the fan speed is well controlled by
means of the differential pressure controllers to prevent over pressurization.
c. Use a spring scale to measure and record the force needed to open the door
closest to the fan. With the initial door held in the open position, measure and
record the pressure difference across each remaining closed stair-tower door.
e. Open additional doors (up to the number indicated) one at a time, and
measure and record the pressure difference across each remaining closed
stair-tower door after the opening of each additional door.
e. Open the doors indicated to be open and measure and record the direction and
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 18
Specifications
velocity through each of the open doors by a traverse of every 1 sq. ft. (0.093-
sq. m) grid of door opening.
f. Calculate the average of the door velocity measurements. Compare the average
velocity to the Contract Documents and governing code requirements.
3.4.12.5.5 Repeat the pressurization tests with the smoke-control systems and the HVAC
systems operating.
3.4.12.5.6 Criteria for Acceptance:
a. The opening force on any door shall not exceed 30 lb (133 N).
b. Code requirements.
3.4.12.6 Operational Tests:
3.4.12.6.1 Check the proper activation of the stair-tower pressurization system(s) in response
to all means of activation, both automatic and manual.
3.4.12.6.2 Verify that each initiating occurrence produces the proper system response under
each of the following modes of operation:
a. Normal.
b. Alarm.
c. Manual override of normal mode and alarm.
d. Return to normal.
3.4.12.6.3 Verify that the smoke detector at the stair pressurization fan inlet de-energizes the
fan and closes the damper at the fan.
3.4.12.6.4 If standby power is provided for stair pressurization systems, test to verify that the
stair pressurization systems operate while on both normal and standby power.
3.4.12.6.5 Conduct additional tests required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4.12.6.6 Prepare a complete report of observations, measurements, and deficiencies.
3.4.13 Procedures for Smoke-Control System Testing

3.4.13.1 Before testing smoke-control systems, verify that construction is complete and verify
the integrity of each smoke-control zone boundary. Verify that windows and doors
are closed and that applicable gasket, and sealants are installed. Report deficiencies
and postpone testing until after the reported deficiencies are corrected.
3.4.13.2 Measure and record wind speed and direction, outside-air temperature, and relative
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 19
Specifications
humidity on each test day.
3.4.13.3 Measure, adjust, and record airflow of each smoke-control system with all fans that
are a part of the system operating as intended by the design.
3.4.13.4 Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each fan. For ducted systems, measure the
fan airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse.
3.4.13.5 After air balancing is complete, perform the following pressurization testing for each
smoke control zone in the system:
3.4.13.5.1 Verify the boundaries of each smoke-control zone.
3.4.13.5.2 With the HVAC systems in their normal mode of operation and smoke control not
operating, measure and record the pressure difference across each smoke-control
zone. Make measurements after closing doors that separate the zones. Make one
measurement across each door. Clearly indicate the high and low pressure side of
each door.
3.4.13.5.3 With the system operating in the smoke-control mode and with each zone in the
smoke control system activated, perform the following:
a. Measure and record the pressure difference across each door that separates the
smoke zone from adjacent zones. Make measurements with doors that separate
the smoke zone from the other zones closed. Clearly indicate the high and low
pressure side of the door. Doors that have a tendency to open slightly due to the
pressure difference should have one pressure measurement made while held
closed and another measurement made with the door open.
b. Continue to activate each separate zoned smoke-control system and make

pressure difference measurements.
c. After testing a smoke zone's smoke-control system, deactivate the HVAC

systems involved and return them to their normal operating mode before
activating another zone's smoke-control system.
d. Verify that controls necessary to prevent excessive pressure differences are

functional.
3.4.13.6 Operational Tests:
3.4.13.6.1 Check the proper activation of each zoned smoke-control system in response to all
means of activation, both automatic and manual.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 20
Specifications
3.4.13.6.2 Check automatic activation in response to fire alarm signals received from the
building's fire alarm and detection system. Initiate a separate alarm for each means
of activation to ensure that the proper operation of the correct zoned smoke-control
system occurs.
3.4.13.6.3 Check and record the proper operation of fans, dampers, and related equipment as
outlined below for each separate zone of the smoke-control system.
a. Fire zone in which a smoke-control system automatically activates.
b. Type of signal that activates a smoke-control system, such as pull station,

sprinkler water flow, or smoke detector.
c. Smoke zone(s) where maximum mechanical exhaust to the outside is

implemented and no supply air is provided.
d. Positive pressure smoke-control zone(s) where maximum air supply is

implemented and no exhaust to the outside is provided.
e. Fan(s) "ON" as required to implement the smoke-control system. Multiple- or

variable-speed fans should be further noted as "MAX. VOLUME" to verify that
the intended control configuration is achieved.
f. Fan(s) "OFF" as required to implement the smoke-control system.
g. Damper(s) "OPEN" where maximum airflow must be achieved.
h. Damper(s) "CLOSED" where no airflow should take place.
i. Auxiliary functions to achieve the smoke-control system configuration such as

changes or override of normal operating pressure and temperature-control set
points.
j. If standby power is provided for the smoke-control system, test to verify that the
system functions while operating under both normal and standby power.
3.4.13.6.4 Conduct additional tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. Unless required
by authorities having jurisdiction, perform testing without the use of smoke or
products that simulate smoke.
3.4.13.6.5 Prepare a complete report of observations, measurements, and deficiencies.
3.4.14 Procedures for Indoor-Air Quality Measurements
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 21
Specifications
3.4.14.1 After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated
conditions, perform indoor-air quality testing.
3.4.14.2 Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:
3.4.14.2.1 The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan discharge,
cooling tower, flue termination, or vent termination.
3.4.14.2.2 Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters.
3.4.14.2.3 Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain.
3.4.14.2.4 Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal.
3.4.14.2.5 Evidence of water damage.
3.4.14.2.6 Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean.
3.4.14.3 Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make
measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the
following:
3.4.14.3.1 Most remote area.
3.4.14.3.2 One location per floor.
3.4.14.3.3 One location for every 5000 sq. ft. (500 sq. m).
3.4.14.4 Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at
two-hour intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:
3.4.14.4.1 Temperature.
3.4.14.4.2 Relative humidity.
3.4.14.4.3 Air velocity.
3.4.14.4.4 Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm).
3.4.14.4.5 Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm).
3.4.14.4.6 Nitrogen oxides (ppm).
3.4.14.4.7 Formaldehyde (ppm).
3.4.15 Procedures for Reliability Trial Test
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 22
Specifications
3.4.15.1.1 After finishing the above tests and adjustments, the Contractor shall be responsible
for running a reliability trial test for the whole plant installed.
3.4.15.1.2 The whole of the trial of the Cooling Plant shall take place during the period between
the 15th July and 15th of August. The Ventilation trial shall take place at any
reasonable time subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.4.15.1.3 The trial shall last for a period of 15 consecutive days and nights during which time
the whole of the plant shall operate continuously, without adjustment or repair to the
3.4.15.1.4 During the reliability trial test, performance tests shall be conducted on the
Refrigerating Plant and the air handling equipment.
3.4.15.1.5 The test data shall not deviate by more than three percent (3%) from the guaranteed
capacity data.
3.4.15.1.6 Temperature readings shall be taken for the entering and leaving air of each air
handling unit.
3.4.15.1.7 Should any part of the apparatus or system fail to meet the Contract requirements, it
shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
complete performance test shall then be repeated.
3.4.15.1.8 A `Taking Over Certificate' with or without reservations shall be issued by the
Engineer on the satisfactory completion of all the tests, provided that these
reservations are of minor importance and will not hinder the satisfactory operation of
the Plant.
3.4.16 Procedures for Acceptance Tests

3.4.16.1 As soon as possible after carrying out the Reliability Trial Test, and during the
Maintenance Guarantee Period, the Contractor shall carry out, unless otherwise
agreed, the Acceptance Test Specified in the relevant American or British or
approved equivalent Standard Specifications, as well as much additional tests at Site,
deemed necessary by the Engineer, to determine that the Works comply with the
Specifications and provided that the Works are put into operation.
3.4.16.2 The date of commencement of the above said tests shall be subject to agreement with
the Engineer.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 23
Specifications
3.4.16.3 As soon as all tests prescribed in the section are carried out satisfactorily in the
opinion of the Engineer, an official statement to that effect (herein referred to as
Acceptance Certificate) shall be drawn up in three (3) copies and signed by the
Engineer and the Contractor. One copy of the Acceptance Certificate shall be
delivered to the Contractor.
3.5 Guarantee and Warranted Period
3.5.1 All equipment and accessories supplied by the nominated Sub-Contractor under this
3.5.2 A maintenance manual and schedule based on the instructions for preventative
maintenance or service from the manufacturers or suppliers of equipment or
according to the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1 – 2007 or equivalent as approved by Authority should be
provided.
3.5.3 All guarantee shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor shall
disbursements.
3.5.4 The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or
3.6 Maintenance during Defects Liability Period and Guarantees
3.6.1 Starting from the date of issue of the Substantial/Provisional completion certificate
the contractor shall be responsible, for the duration of one year, to provide the
following services free of charge, at his own cost: -
3.6.2 The training of operators assigned by the client for operation of all major equipment
and controls as decided by the Engineer.
3.6.3 Training should be provided by original suppliers of equipment for a period of at least
one week and or when requested by client through out the liability period.
3.6.4 The replacement of parts or whole equipment that show any manufacturing or
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 24
Specifications
3.6.5 Carry out routine preventive maintenance (fortnightly, monthly, quarterly, half yearly
and yearly as applicable to the approval of the Engineer) including provision of
labour, parts and supply of consumable materials such as Replaceable air filters,
Chemicals for Chilled Water System, Chemicals for Swimming Pool, Lubricants and
Refrigerant Gas, required for the safe operation and guarantee of performance of all
the systems but not limited to;
a) AHUs, FCUs,
b) Fans,
c) BMS,
d) Kitchens equipments
3.6.6 Necessary staff to carry out the above shall be provided to the job site during the said
year.
3.6.7 On call emergency services (24 hours), particularly for elevators, escalators,
travellators and fire alarm system.
3.6.8 Guarantee of every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or installation defects
for a period of one year.
3.6.9 At the end of defects liability period the contractor shall be responsible for final
handing over of all installed systems in a perfect condition to the satisfaction of both
Engineer and client.
3.7 Maintenance and Guarantee
3.7.1 The Contractor shall submit along with his quotation a separate price for the
maintenance of all of the Air Conditioning and plumbing works. The price shall be
good for two consecutive years after the end of the maintenance period.
3.7.2 The price shall cover, but shall not be limited to the following items:
3.7.2.1 Yearly Maintenance
3.7.2.2 At the end of each year all equipment shall be serviced (checked and repaired), i.e.
motors, pumps, heaters, fans, etc.
3.7.3 Weekly Inspection

3.7.3.1 Competent technical representatives of the Contractor shall make weekly inspections
to the plant and record the following readings on special log sheets:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 25
Specifications
3.7.3.2 Discharge and suction pressure and oil pressure of each packaged unit.
3.7.3.3 Power consumption (Amps) of each pump motor, heater, .etc.
3.7.3.4 Any inconsistency in the above readings or non compliance with manufacturers data
shall be looked into by the Contractor; and after the cause is identified, he shall
rectify and report it to the client. In the weekly inspection, the Contractor should
make sure that the (A/C) design conditions inside the spaces are maintained and to
the satisfaction of the occupants and that no machine or equipment is creating
excessive noise.
3.7.4 Monthly Inspection
3.7.4.1 The Contractor's representative shall make the following monthly inspections:
3.7.4.1.1 Check and clean air filters of air handlers, fan coil units, fresh air grilles, etc..
3.7.4.1.2 Check insulation of A/C pipes, ducts and check evidence of any condensation & do the
necessary repairs.
3.7.4.1.3 Clean drain pans and drain pipes of all air handlers and fan coil units.
3.7.4.1.4 Check, adjust, and calibrate control system of air handlers and fan coil units.
3.7.4.1.5 Check and tighten belts of all fans.
3.7.4.2 Spare Parts
3.7.4.2.1 Contractor shall immediately replace any damaged or faulty item; spare parts should be
always available. Parts shall be replaced at the cost of the Contractor.
3.7.4.3 Exclusions
3.7.4.3.1 Contractor shall submit a list of exclusions (if any) to the above, which he thinks are not
part of his responsibilities or duties.
3.7.4.4 Contractor's Attendance
3.7.4.4.1 The Contractor is expected to respond to all requests from owner or owner's representative
or owner's consultant to attend to the faults within 24 hours from the time he is
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 26
Specifications
called upon. He shall carry the necessary service as per the terms of the maintenance
contract.
3.7.4.5 Guarantees
3.7.4.5.1 The contractor shall give the following guarantees for the following equipment whereby
he shall immediately replace the same whenever found defective.
- Compressors 5 years
- Air Handlers motors 5 years
- Air Handler casing against any rust, or corrosion or discoloration 10 years
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 05 93 - 27
SECTION 23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................ 1
1.2 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE............................................................. 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................................... 3
1.7 SCHEDULE OF INSULATION THICKNESS................................................................. 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 3
2.1 DUCT INSULATION ........................................................................................................ 3
2.2 REFRIGERANT AND A/C CONDENSATE PIPE INSULATION ................................. 6
2.3 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT – INSULATION ...................................................... 6
2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION............................................................................................ 6
2.5 VAPOUR BARRIER COATING ...................................................................................... 7
2.6 ALUMINIUM CLADDING .............................................................................................. 8
PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 8
3.1 PROTECTION AND CLEANING .................................................................................... 8
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION.................................................................. 9
3.3 FINISHES ........................................................................................................................ 10
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND DUCT INSULATION ................................ 10
Khatib & Alami HVAC Insulation

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract.
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 Supply and install all insulation and lagging on piping, vessels or ducts as indicated
on the drawings or specified to be insulated. Authority regulations and Sustainability
requirements shall also be considered and more stringent specifications to be adopted
1.1.2 Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall be suitable to HVAC
applications.
1.1.3 All insulation material shall have Zero Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP=0) and less
than Five Global Warming Potential (GWP < 5).
1.1.4 Canvas jacket and all insulating materials shall be non-combustible, or self-
extinguishing non-flame spread grade.
1.1.5 Insulation in exposed areas, i.e. permanently visible, shall be protected with
aluminium cladding as specified herein after.
1.2.1 All items specified in this section are included in each of following divisions, sections
and sub-sections as applicable, as if repeated therein verbatim.

Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping
Section 23 40 00 - Decentralized HVAC equipment

23 07 00 - 1
Specifications
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 product
1.3.1.1 All Technical literature, brochures, specifications,

1.3.1.2 Fire and smoke test certificates , Thermal characteristics
1.3.2 samples
Submit samples of material for approval
1.4 Codes And Standards
1.4.1 Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards
and United States Codes, unless otherwise specified, the performance/manufacturing
standards of items mentioned in this section shall confirm to the applicable portions
of the latest editions of the following codes, standards and regulations.
Applicable
Reference Code Abbreviation Standard Title of Standard
National Fire Protection NFPA NFPA 90A Standard for Air Conditioning and
Association Ventilating Systems.
NFPA 90B Standard for warm Air Heating and Air

Conditioning Systems.
American Society for ASTM ASTM E96 Test method for water vapour
Testing and Material transmission of materials.
1.5.1 ll duct insulation shall be tested in accordance with test methods BS476 pt 6 “Fire
Test on Building Materials and Structures, Method of Test for Fire Propagation for
Products”.
1.5.2 All duct insulation shall be tested in accordance with test methods ISO 5659-Smoke
Density and Toxicity with Additional Gas Analysis. The insulation must comply to
the Standard in terms of smoke density (Dm <200) and combustion gas
concentrations must not exceed those specified in the Standard.
1.5.3 Test certificates form an independent testing authority shall be submitted.
1.5.4 All duct insulation should be accompanied by Manufacturer’s Test Certificate.

23 07 00 - 2
Specifications
1.5.5 Product shall be resistant to attack of algae, bacteria, vermin and the growth of molds
and fungi.
1.6 Delivery, Storage And Handling
1.6.1 deliver, protect and handle products with care to avoid damage.
1.6.2 tore insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.
1.6.3 Prolonged storage of duct insulation should be in a cool dry place and away from
direct sunlight. Store material in original packaging. Follow manufacturer’s
recommended storage instructions.
1.7 Schedule of Insulation Thickness
- Normal Indoor ducts – Conditioned Area: 12 mm

- Normal Indoor ducts – Non-Conditioned Area: 15 mm
- Outdoor ducts: with Aluminium jacketing (0.7 mm thickness) 30 mm
- Indoor Heat Recovery ducts (fresh air and exhaust): 12 mm
Conditioned and Non conditioned areas
- Outdoor Heat Recovery ducts (fresh air and exhaust): 25 mm
With Aluminium jacketing (0.7 mm thickness)
- A/C Condensate Drain pipes : 13 mm
- Dishwasher Exhaust Duct: 25 mm
- Hood Exhaust Duct: 75 mm
- Generator exhaust 75 mm
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Duct Insulation
2.1.1 Codes
2.1.1.1 BS 476 pt 6: Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures , Method of Test for
Fire Propagation for Products ( British Standards)
2.1.1.2 BS 476 pt 7 : Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures , Method of Test
for Fire Propagation for Products
2.1.1.3 AS 1530 pt 3: Simultaneous Determination of Ignitibility, Flame Propagation, Heat
Release and Smoke Release ( Building Code of Australia 1979)
2.1.1.4 ASTM E84-05 ( UL 723, NFPA 255) : Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.

23 07 00 - 3
Specifications
2.1.1.5 ISO5659 (1994): Smoke Density and Toxicity with additional Gas Analysis.
2.1.1.6 ASTM E96: Vapour Permeability of Materials
2.1.1.7 ASTM C518 – Thermal Conductivity of materials
2.1.1.8 UL 723 PIPE- AND EQUIPMENT-COVERING MATERIALS done by the UL
2.1.1.9 FM Approval
2.1.2 Duct Insulation (Indoor)
2.1.2.1 Physically crosslinked, closed cell Polyolefin foam with factory applied, 9um
reinforced aluminium foil and factory applied acrylic adhesive backing.
2.1.2.2 Density: 25 Kg / m3 (foam core only)
2.1.2.3 Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518) : Maximum 0.032 W/mK at mean temperature
23oC
2.1.2.4 Moisture absorption : Non hygroscopic
2.1.2.5 Water Vapour permeability (ASTM E96) : Better than 8.19 X 10-15 Kg/Pa.s.m
2.1.2.6 Minimum Service Temperature : - 80o C
2.1.2.7 Maximum Mean Duct Service Temperature : 90o C
2.1.2.8 Maximum Service Temperature : 1000 C
2.1.2.9 Fire Rating:
•
Class 0 to BS476
•
Complies with ASTM E84 ( 25/50)
•
UL 723 certificate from the UL , Company name must be listed in the UL database
available online.
• FM 4924 Approval for the sheets
• Smoke Density and Toxicity
a) Meets ISO 5659 ( 1994) - Smoke Density and Toxicity
b) Dm <200
c) Combustion gases CO, HCL,HF, NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the maximum
allowable concentrations of the Standard.
2.1.3 Duct Insulation (Outdoor)
2.1.3.1 Physically crosslinked, closed cell Polyolefin foam with factory applied, heavy duty
multilayer composite with a specially developed UV and weather durable coating
2.1.3.2 Density: 25 Kg / m3 (foam core only)
2.1.3.3 Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.032 W/mK at mean temperature
23oC
2.1.3.4 Puncture Resistance >400 N (ASTM D4833)
2.1.3.5 Tear Testing (ASTM D751) > 60 N Machine Direction , > 50 N Cross Direction

23 07 00 - 4
Specifications
2.1.3.6 Tensile Testing (ASTM D751) > 1000 N Machine Direction, > 900 N Cross
Direction
2.1.3.7 UV & Weathering (3000 hr QUV exposure) Excellent No change in performance or
appearance
2.1.3.8 Salt Resistance (Internal test) (2 week immersion in 5 % salt solution: No visible
change in appearance
2.1.3.9 Water Vapour Permeability (ISO 1663) < 4.1 x 10-15 kg/Pa.s.m (25 mm thickness)
(0.015mg.m/N.h)
2.1.3.10 Water Vapour Permeance: < 1.7 x 10-4 g/MN.s
2.1.3.11 Permeability Resistance Factor: µ > 40,000 (basis 25 mm thickness)
2.1.3.12 Water Absorption by Volume: 0.03% (0.00038g/cm²) (JIS K6767)
2.1.3.13 Resistance to Fungi: Zero Growth (ASTM G21)
2.1.3.14 Ozone Resistance : Excellent
2.1.3.15 Minimum Service Temperature : - 80o C
2.1.3.16 Maximum Mean Duct Service Temperature : 90o C
2.1.3.17 Maximum Service Temperature : 1000 C
2.1.3.18 Fire Rating:
• Class 0 to BS476
• Complies with ASTM E84 ( 25/50)
• Smoke Density and Toxicity
a) Meets ISO 5659 ( 1994) - Smoke Density and Toxicity
b) Dm <200
c) Combustion gases CO, HCL,HF, NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the
maximum allowable concentrations of the Standard.
2.1.4 Fittings
2.1.4.1 The same material is to be used for insulating the flanges (150mm width). Refers to
manufacturer’s installation instructions for flanges
2.1.4.2 All joints to be sealed with 75mm wide foil tape.
2.1.4.3 No clad tape to be used for the outdoor duct insulation with 75mm wide foil tape no
clad type.
2.1.4.4 Same material or approved foam gasket to be used on all hangers supporting the
ducts.
2.1.4.5 Refer to manufacturer’s installation instructions.
23 07 00 - 5
Specifications
2.1.5 Adhesive
2.1.5.1 Factory applied acrylic adhesive G60 supplied with the insulation ( factory applied)
2.1.6 Vapour Barrier or Coatings
No additional vapour barriers or coatings are to be used
2.2 Refrigerant and A/C Condensate Pipe insulation
2.2.1 This type of insulation shall apply to refrigerant pipes and A/C condensate drain
pipes. Thickness ½ inch.
2.2.2 Insulation shall be flexible foamed closed cell elastomeric tubular form type.
Insulation may be slipped over pipe or tubing before pipe connections are made, or
may be slit longitudinally and snapped onto the pipe and then sealed with vapour
barrier adhesive.
2.2.3 Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity not greater than 0.27 Btu/hr °F. ft2. per
inch thickness at a mean temperature of 75 ° F.
2.2.4 The surface finish shall be an 8-ounce canvas cloth embedded between 2 coats of
vapour barrier. Aluminium cladding shall be provided as specified.
2.3 Range Hood Exhaust Duct – Insulation
Insulation shall be 75mm thick hydrous calcium silicate sheet, rigid board form, 11
lbs/ft3 (175 Kg/m3) density, 0.38 Btu.in/ft2.hr.°F(0.055 W/m.° K) K-factor at mean
temperature of 100 °F (38 °C) applicable maximum temperature is 1200 °F (650
°C)) secured with metal mechanical surfaces fasteners on 460 mm centers both ways
and metal bands on 460mm centers, surfaces with a coat of hard surface insulating
cement, 13mm thick, and exposed portions finished with 8 ounce glass cloth jacket
neatly pasted on.
2.4 Equipment Insulation
2.4.1 This type of insulation shall apply to pumps, heat exchangers and water expansion
tanks.
2.4.2 Insulation shall be semi-rigid fibrous glass with organic binder up in board form with
a minimum density of 3 lbs/ft3 (50 kg/m3) and a maximum K-factor of 0.42 Btu-
in/ft2.hr.°F (0.06 W/m.° K) at a mean temperature of 200 °F (94 °C). Insulation shall
be applied over pins welded to the vessel on 300 mm centers. All joints shall be
staggered and tightly butted. The insulation shall be covered with gauge 18

23 07 00 - 6
Specifications
aluminium jacket.
2.4.3 This type of insulation shall apply to water chillers and water expansion tanks.
2.4.4 Insulation shall be flexible elastomeric flat sheets furnished with a smooth skin on the
outer side with a maximum K-factor of 0.27 Btu-in/ft2.hr.°F (0.039 W/m.° K) at a
mean temperature of 75°F (24°C). Insulation shall comply with flame spread rate by
ASTM E84 test methods.
2.4.5 Insulation shall be applied over a heavy coating of special adhesive as recommended
by insulation manufacturer.
2.4.6 This type of insulation shall apply to chilled water pumps.
2.4.7 Insulation shall be removable and replaceable covers consisting of No. 18 gauge
aluminium sheet metal jacket lined with rigid fibrous glass with a resin binder of a
minimum density of 6 lbs/ft3 (96 Kg/m3) and a maximum K-factor of 0.25
Btu.in/ft2.hr.°F (0.036 W/m. °K). All voids between insulation and pump housing
shall be filled with blanket type fibreglass insulation of 6 lbs/ft3 (96 Kg/m3) density.
2.4.8 The metal casing shall be tightly sealed.
2.5 Vapour Barrier Coating
2.5.1 The vapour barrier coating shall be tough flexible fire resistive elastomeric finish for
protection of thermal insulation and ultra violet. It shall meet the requirements of
NFPA 90A and 90B and shall be UL classified.
2.5.2 The vapour barrier shall have water vapour permeability not more than 0.02 perms at
0.75 mm dry film thickness when tested to ASTM E96 Method.
2.5.3 When tested for surface burning characteristics (ASTM E84) it shall have a flame
spread rating not exceeding 10 and smoke developed not higher than 15.
2.5.4 The vapour barrier shall be suitable for application by brush or spray. It shall be
applied in 2 coats with heavy duty fire retardant canvas cloth (8 ounce) embedded
between the coats. Canvas overlap at joints shall be at least 50 mm. The wet film
thickness of each coat shall be at least 1.25 mm.
2.5.5 Vapour barrier coating shall be applied above thermal insulation of G.I. Ducts,
chilled water, water supply (hot and cold), refrigeration and condensate drain pipes.

23 07 00 - 7
Specifications
2.6 Aluminium Cladding
2.6.1 Aluminium cladding shall be of 20 gauge it shall be used as protection against

weather and mechanical damage.
2.6.2 Aluminium cladding shall be applied on top of insulation above the canvas jacket and
vapour barrier coating. It shall be held in place by means of self tapping screws and
by using 38 mm wide aluminium straps at 300 mm centers with aluminium or
stainless steel angle rib clips, all joints shall be sealed with grey coloured suitable
sealant. Rivets and screws shall not be used for cladding unless approved by the
Engineer for use on elbows and fittings. Cladding shall be overlapping at joints,
horizontal seams shall be at the bottom. Cladding on ducts shall be formed in such a
way to allow for rain/dew drain off.
2.6.3 Fabricated 20 gauge aluminium covers shall be used for valves and fittings. The
covers shall be in two sections hinged together and held in place by suitable stainless
steel/aluminium clasps.
2.6.4 Aluminium cladding shall be applied to all insulated pipes (chilled water, condensate
drains, etc.,) and ducts (Galvanised and Pre-insulated) running exposed on roof,
outside building, inside parking floors and in plant rooms.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.1 All insulation shall have a smooth, homogenous and lineable finished surface. All
rigid sections shall be concentric and be accurately matched for thickness.
3.1.2 All surface to be insulated shall be dry and clean, free from loose scale, dirt, oil or
water, when insulation is applied. Clean with suitable solvents such as methylated
spirits or alcohol based solvents. ( refer to manufacturer’s instructions)
3.1.3 Insulation shall be applied in such a manner that air circulation within the insulation
or between the insulation and the pipe shall be avoided.
3.1.4 No surface imperfections in the insulation such as damaged edges, or ends, cracks
and small voids or holes shall be accepted.
3.1.5 Insulation materials shall be stored and protected from weather moisture,

23 07 00 - 8
Specifications
accumulations of foreign matter, or possible damage in a dry and clean store.
3.1.6 Surface finishes and lagging adhesives shall not be diluted and shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.7 Apply insulation to permit expansion or contraction of metal without causing damage
to insulation or surface finish.
3.2 Installation of Piping Insulation
3.2.1 Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.(see Information Kit)
3.2.2 Ensure no air pockets are present after installation.
3.2.3 All joints should be butted firmly against each other. No adhesive is required for the
joints (self adhesive system)
3.2.4 Seal all joints with 75mm reinforced aluminium foil.
3.2.5 Finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions.
3.2.6 Any minor surface cuts should be covered with aluminium foil.
3.2.7 All pipe covering 2 ½" (65 mm) or less in thickness shall be applied in single layer
with joints tightly butted together.
3.2.8 All pipe covering 3" (80 mm) and larger in thickness shall be double layer with
lateral and longitudinal joints of the second layer staggered with those of the first
layer. No canvas is to be used between the layers.
3.2.9 All pipe covering shall fit snugly on the pipe to which it is applied. Inside
circumference of pipe covering when applied shall not vary from the outside
circumference of the pipe by more than 3mm. undersize.
3.2.10 Pipe insulation shall have factory applied jackets and secured with plastic bands at
each joint at center of each section and where sections abut upon fittings, except
where otherwise specified.
3.2.11 Insulation shall only be applied to piping after all testing has been accomplished and
after all the coats of paint have been applied.
3.2.12 Pipe covering shall be terminated at a sufficient distance from all flanges to permit
easy removal of bolts.

23 07 00 - 9
Specifications
3.2.13 Where insulated piping is subject to movement and supported on roller hangers, steel
protection saddles shall be provided and welded to the pipe. Saddles shall be filled
with asbestos cement.
3.2.14 All insulated piping not supported on roller hangers and subject to movement, shall
be provided with protection shields at all hanger locations. Shields shall be of 3mm.
galvanized iron extending on each side of the hanger for a distance equal to the
diameter of the insulation and shall extend up the sides of the insulation to the center
of the pipe and shall be provided with cork pad support.
3.2.15 Special care shall be exercised in insulating chilled water lines to prevent sweat leaks
at piping hanger locations.
3.2.16 Where standard insulation shapes are not available, cut, score or meter segmental or
flat block to fit contour of pipe, stagger joints of adjoining segments. Fit insulation
carefully and secure with wire. Smooth with insulating cement.
3.2.17 Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, etc., shall meet LEED NC V3
requirements for Volatile Organic Compounds, (VOCs) content limits.
3.3 Finishes
3.3.1.1 All pipes running in concealed spaces shall have canvas cover, securely fixed,
overlaps firmly pasted down, secured with aluminium bands at intervals and painted
with two coats of fire retardant emulsion paint.
3.3.1.2 All non-cladded pipes running inside building but exposed to view shall have same
treatment as for those in concealed spaces but with one coat of gloss paint, to an
approved colour, in addition.
3.3.1.3 Insulation in exposed areas, i.e. permanently visible, shall be protected with
aluminium cladding as specified.
3.4 Installation of Equipment and Duct Insulation
3.4.1 Curved or cylindrical equipment shall be insulated with blocks or curved segments in
one layer for thicknesses of 65 mm or less and two layers for thicknesses of 76 mm or
more. The insulation shall be applied with joints staggered and tightly butted together
and held in place with bands. Square cornered equipment such as boilers, ducts
casings etc. shall be insulated with block insulation protected at corners by
metal shields and held in place by bands, carried around the unit over the insulation
and fastened tight.
23 07 00 - 10
Specifications
3.4.2 Metal anchoring clips shall be welded to the equipment surface so that the band will
pass over them and may be wired to them after insulation is in place.
3.4.3 Insulation in exposed areas, i.e. permanently visible, shall be protected with
aluminium cladding as specified.
3.4.4 Any part of equipment that is normally removable for service such as heads of heat
exchangers, shall be insulated separately from the equipment.
3.4.5 No insulation shall be applied over nameplates.
3.4.6 Insulated ducts penetrating walls or floors shall be insulated completely thru
penetration. Provide waterproof calcium silicate insert, same thickness and jacketing
as insulation with wall flange for fire wall or floor penetrations, or as detailed on the
Drawings.
3.4.7 Duct insulation or lining or any type of covering together with the applied adhesives
shall have a flame spread rating not over 25 without evidence of continued
progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating no higher than 50, wherever
the duct crosses a fire wall or penetrates a roof slab.
3.4.8 Duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers and fire doors so as not to interfere
with the operation of services.
3.4.9 All duct materials and coverings (insulation, pre-insulated panels, linings, etc.) shall
meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B Standards or equivalent European
Standards.
3.4.10 Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, etc., shall meet the requirements of
NFPA 90A and 90B and shall be UL Classified.
END OF SECTION

23 07 00 - 11
SECTION 23 09 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
FOR HVAC
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................... 1
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK.............................................................................................................................1

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................1
1.3 SHOP DRAWING ..............................................................................................................................2
1.4 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ....................................................................2
PART 2 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................... 2
2.1 CONTROL PANEL AND CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................................................2

2.2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS (WITH REMOTE SENSORS) .................................3
2.3 TEMPERATURE SENSORS ..........................................................................................................3
2.4 ROOM THERMOSTATS ................................................................................................................4
2.5 CONTROL MOTOR (ACTUATOR) ...........................................................................................4
2.6 HUMIDITY SENSORS ....................................................................................................................5
2.7 DATA CONTROL (D/C) AND GRAPHICS SUMMARY ...................................................5
2.8 UNITARY DDC CONTROLLERS ..............................................................................................6
2.9 SOLENOID VALVES .......................................................................................................................6
2.10 SELECTOR SWITCHES AUTO/OFF/ON .................................................................................6
2.11 THERMOMETERS............................................................................................................................6
2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES ......................................................................................................................7
2.13 GAUGE TEST POINTS ...................................................................................................................7
2.14 FILTER CONDITION INDICATORS .........................................................................................8
2.15 FIRE STATS ........................................................................................................................................8
2.16 SMOKE DETECTORS .....................................................................................................................8
2.17 AMMETERS ........................................................................................................................................8
2.18 VOLTMETERS ...................................................................................................................................8
2.19 AIR FLOW SWITCHES’ & DIRTY FILTER SWITCHES ..................................................8
2.20 AIR FLOW SWITCHES’ & DIRTY FILTER SWITCHES ..................................................9
2.21 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................9
2.22 CO2 DETECTION SYSTEM........................................................................................................10
2.23 INSTRUMENTS USED FOR TESTING AND BALANCING .........................................10
PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................... 12
3.1 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................12

3.2 TESTING.............................................................................................................................................12
Khatib & Alami Instrumentation and Control for HVAC

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 09 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 The contractor shall supply and install all the control equipment, auxiliary devices,
instruments, etc. to perform satisfactory operations of all systems described in the
specifications and/or indicated on the Drawings. The Drawings and the specifications
are complemented each to the other.
1.1.2 The sequence of operation of each system or piece of equipment is specified either
under the equipment specification section or detailed on the Drawings.
1.2.1 Control system shall be of the electronic type, (solid state) to provide the required
sequence of operation.
1.2.2 Provide all relays, switches, gauges, sources of electricity and all other auxiliaries,
accessories and connections necessary to make a complete operable system.
1.2.3 Unless stated otherwise temperatures shall be controlled within plus or minus 2 degree
F (1 degree C) and humidity within plus or minus 5 per cent of the set point.
1.2.4 Provide positive positioner devices on all controls operated in sequence and/or where
specified or required to maintain the set point within the required limits without
override.
1.2.5 Basic components shall be standard catalogue products of single reputable
Manufacturer.
1.2.6 Do not duplicate factory furnished controls of unitary equipment like refrigeration
machines, fan coil units, etc. but modify them to conform to these specifications:
1.2.7 Obtain from the manufacturer of unitary equipment, and submit written certification
that proposed control circuit modifications do not conflict with or invalidate
Manufacturer's equipment warranty.
1.2.8 The equipment shall be restarted after a power failure in the same sequence and with
the same time delays as specified for normal start-up.
1.2.9 Select the instrument so that the normal range of operating temperatures and pressures
falls within the middle-third of the instrument range. Use compound gauges when
normal operating pressure is near or below atmospheric.
1.2.10 Where thermometer sensing bulbs are inserted in air ducts or casings, provide
23 09 00 - 1
Specifications
perforated bulb housing with a 3" (80 mm) diameter union flange to permit removal.
Connections for sensing elements are to be brass except where otherwise specified.
Provide all thermometers in piping systems with stainless steel wells and ¾" (20 mm)
separable sockets.
1.2.11 Provide extension necks where thermometers and pressure gauges are located in
insulated piping, vessels, ductwork, casings or equipment.
1.2.12 All thermometers and gauges shall have both English and metric units grading.
1.3 Shop Drawing
1.3.1 Shop Drawings shall be schematic diagrams showing all the components of the
control systems and the interconnection scheme. Each component shall be identified
by name and/or schedule number of equipment item it controls.
1.3.2 Manufacturer's detailed Shop Drawings, specifications, and data sheets for all
equipment to be furnished shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
1.4.1 The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are included
in this Section in each applicable part, as if repeated herein verbatim. However, any
discrepancies between the content of this section and what is shown in Division 25, the
specification in Division 25 shall take precedence.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Control Panel and Control System
2.1.1 Control panels shall be installed where shown and as required on the Drawings. Each
panel shall include start-stop and pilot lights for all major equipment being controlled
together with their starters and necessary heat detector, alarm and other related safety
and fire alarm systems.
2.1.2 The control system shall be complete with all necessary transformers, thermostats,
23 09 00 - 2
Specifications
valves, dampers, damper operators, and associated regulators required to maintain the
conditions desired together with the thermometers, gauges, and other necessary
accessories and the control wiring.
2.2 Temperature Controllers (With Remote Sensors)
2.2.1 Shall be supplied complete with metal cases and manual set point adjusters.
2.2.2 Room type controllers shall be mounted 1800 mm above the floor and in an accessible
location.
2.2.3 Panel-mounted controllers shall be supplied with metal mounting adaptor plate and
mounting assembly.
2.2.4 Controllers shall be designed for a throttling range of 2 °F (1 ° C) for a 3Vdc output
change with a control dial range 55-85 ° F (13-29 °C) and shall be suitable for ambient
operating limits 40-135 °F (4-57 °C).
2.3 Temperature Sensors
2.3.1 Temperature Sensors

2.3.1.1 Passive temperature sensors with NTC 20K ohm, Balco500 and PT1000 elements
shall be available for different applications.
2.3.1.1.1 Outdoor temperature sensors (also combined with humidity sensors) with extra covers
for protection and shielding the sun. Prewired and terminal block versions shall be
available. Their temperature range shall be –40 to +60°C.
2.3.1.1.2 Room temperature sensors (also combined with set point adjustment and fan/presence
switches). These shall be available with NTC 20, PT1000 and Balco500 elements in
an attractive, appealing housing, with terminal blocks for wiring. Models shall also
be available with LEDs. Their temperature range shall be –20 to +50°C.
2.3.1.1.3 Air duct temperature sensors. Prewired and terminal block versions shall be available
to mount in and outside the duct. Their temperature range shall be –40 to +120°C.
2.3.2 Average Temperature Sensor for Air Ducts

2.3.2.1 A single PT 1000 sensor over a length of 3.6m shall be used for sensing the average
temperature in large air ducts with. Sensor holders shall be included for installation.
2.3.3 Stainless Steel Temperature Sensors and Transmitters

2.3.3.1 Stainless steel temperature sensors shall be available with PT 100 and PT 1000
elements and stainless steel temperature transmitters. They shall feature a 2-wire-
23 09 00 - 3
Specifications
system, 4-20 mA output, 12-36 Vdc supply voltage, and shall meet protection class IP
65.
2.3.4 LON Temperature Sensors

2.3.4.1 LON temperature sensors, compliant with temperature profile 1040, shall be
available with the Neuron button accessible and the LED visible from outside. The
following models shall be available:
2.3.4.1.1 Rod temperature sensor, range –20 to + 110 °C, sensor length 135 mm, LonMark®-
compliant, including brass immersion well.
2.3.4.1.2 Rod temperature sensor, range –20 to + 110 °C, sensor length 300 mm, including
brass immersion well.
2.3.4.1.3 Duct sensor, range –30 to +110 °C, sensor length 280 mm.
2.3.4.1.4 Fast temperature sensor, range –20°C to 110°C, length 75 mm, variable sensor
immersion length, for use without immersion well for fast temperature transmission.
2.3.4.1.5 Fast temperature sensor, range –20°C to 110°C, length 75 mm, variable sensor
immersion length, for use without immersion well for fast temperature transmission.
2.4 Room Thermostats
2.4.1 Shall have metal locking covers and shall be provided with concealed adjustment
means, and with thermometers.
2.4.2 Each room thermostat shall be supplied with metal auxiliary mounting bases and
metal sub-base for surface mounting applications; plus a plastic guard to protect
thermostat from damage.
2.4.3 Line voltage on/off thermostats shall be of the bimetal operated snap action switch.
They shall be underwriters' laboratories inc., listed at an electrical rating appropriate to
the application. Thermostat shall operate on 2 °F (1 °C) differential and shall have a
control dial range 55-85 deg F (13-29 deg C).
2.4.4 Low voltage thermostats shall be of the self contained type with a 1000 ohm sensing
element and an amplifier. Thermostat shall have a control dial range 55-85 deg F (13-
29 deg C) and a throttling range of 2 °F (1 °C) for a 3 Vdc output change.
2.5 Control Motor (Actuator)
2.5.1 Electric, reversible, spring-return, proportional type complete with linkage.

23 09 00 - 4
Specifications
2.5.2 Suitable for damper operation.
2.5.3 Shall be sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two-position action as specified.
2.6 Humidity Sensors
2.6.1 Active humidity sensors shall be available in combination with temperature sensing
with NTC 20K ohm, Balco500 and PT1000 elements for different applications. The
operating voltage for the capacitive humidity sensing element shall be 24V. The
following types shall be available:
2.6.1.1 Outdoor humidity sensors with terminal blocks and a temperature range of –30 to
+50°C.
2.6.1.2 Capacitive room humidity sensors with NTC 20, PT1000 and Balco500 temperature
sensors, and with terminal blocks, output for humidity of 0 to 1 or 0 to 10V, and a
temperature range of –0 to .+50°C.
2.6.1.3 Capacitive air duct humidity sensors with NTC 20, PT1000 and Balco500
temperature sensors, and with terminal blocks, output for humidity of 0-1 or 0-10V, a
temperature range of –0 to +50°C, and mountable on the air duct.
2.7 Data Control (D/C) and Graphics Summary
2.7.1 All hardware, custom software, application software, graphics, etc., necessary to
accomplish the control sequences and display the graphics specified shall be provided
as part of this contract. Provide all controllers, inputs, outputs, valves, dampers,
actuators and flow meters required to provide the control and graphic data described.
Provide software set-points required for display in logical groups and graphics.
2.7.2 Each digital output shall have a software-associated monitored input. Any time the
monitored input does not track it’s associated command output within a programmable
time interval, a “command failed” alarm shall be reported. Where calculated points
(such as I/s) are shown, they shall appear in their respective logical groups.
2.7.3 Unless otherwise specified or approved prior to bidding, the primary analog input and
the analog output of each DDC loop shall be resident in a single remote panel
containing the DDC algorithm, and shall function independent of any primary or UC
communication links. Secondary (reset type) analog inputs may be received from the
primary network, but approved default values and /or procedures shall be substituted in
the DDC algorithm for this secondary input if network communications fail or if the
secondary input becomes erroneous or invalid.
2.9.4 In addition to the Unitary DDC Controller data points specified to be presented on
colorgraphic displays, technical data for each zone mechanical apparatus shall be
23 09 00 - 5
Specifications
presented to operators on the OWS in full English menu text displays including the
apparatus name; heating and cooling PID loop P, I and D gains; primary I/s airflow (if
measured); damper position (% open); reheat status/value; cooling set point; heating
dead-band; minimum and maximum I/s set points; reheat I/s set point; unoccupied
temperature set point; temperature sensor calibration offset and bypass push button
time, in minutes. All such points shall be presented in complete and direct read-write
(command) format, unless they are provided in commendable colorgraphic displays.
2.7.4 In addition to Graphics of building systems with dynamic data points shall be
provided for each mechanical and electrical equipment but not limited.
2.8 Unitary DDC Controllers
2.8.1 All FCU’s in lobbies, general stores, mechanical and electrical rooms shall be
provided with DDC based controller with PID control action. The controller shall
have communication capability with the BMS. The BMS shall have the capability of
resetting the temperature set point on the FCU Controller.
2.9 Solenoid Valves
2.9.1 Solenoid valves shall be the piston type suitable fuel oil open closed control
application and other non-aggressive media up to a temperature of 180C. Solenoid
Valves shall be sized for 1600kPa with actuators 240Vac.
2.12 Transducers
2.9.2 Analog output transducers shall be designed for precision closed loop control with
pneumatic repeatability error no greater than 1% or equal approved.
2.10 Selector Switches Auto/Off/On
2.10.1 Manual override switches AUTO/OFF/ON shall be part of DDC panel/controller. The
switches shall be installed in side of DDC panel with necessary auxiliary contacts to
DDC controller to indicate selector position. The manual override function shall be
available even if the DDC/CPU is failed. The BMS contractor shall be responsible to
coordinate proper connection between the selector switches and starters and ensure
that the switches shall provide manual override functions in case that DDC/CPU fails.
2.11 Thermometers
2.11.1 Permanently installed thermometers shall be mercury-in-steel dial type 150mm

diameter having a suitable length of copper covered steel capillary tubing to connect
the dial with The bulb shall be supplied and installed as specified and as approved by
23 09 00 - 6
Specifications
the Engineer. Each thermometer shall be provided with back flange or arranged for
flush mounting.
2.11.2 In-glass type thermometers with metal guard shall be supplied and installed as
specified or as approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, thermometer
bulbs shall be of steel type, screwed ¾" (20mm) British Standard pipe and supplied
with stainless steel separable pockets suitable for screwing, brazing or welding into the
pipe carrying the medium to be measured.
2.11.3 Thermometers shall be tested to read alike on the midscale band, with their bulbs
immersed in water, and the discrepancy between the highest and the lowest
thermometer shall not exceed 0.5 degree C.
2.11.4 A red mark on each thermometer scale shall indicate the working temperature at the
point of measurement.
2.11.5 Thermometers shall be marked in both Degree C and Degree F.
2.12 Pressure Gauges
2.12.1 Bourdon-tube type with 120 mm. diameter cast aluminium case with moisture-proof
and dustproof blowout discs. Panel mounted gauges to have steel or aluminium hinged
rings; direct mounted gauges to have back flange, black numerals on a white
background face.
2.12.2 Pressure gauge shall be furnished with a lever-operated gauge cock, and shall have
snubbers installed between the gauge cock and the gauge to eliminate pulsations.
2.12.3 Bourdon Tube shall be Phosphor bronze, (beryllium copper bellows).
2.12.4 Socket shall be Stainless steel.
2.12.5 Accuracy shall be at least 1% of scale range , range shall be equal to twice the rated
working pressure of the unit ( pumps,....) reading shall be in psi. and Kpa.
2.12.6 Gauges for combined pressure and vacuum service to have compound seal.
2.13 Gauge Test Points
2.13.1 Gauge test points for temperature and pressure of flow shall be installed in all systems
and particularly pairs of valves for regulating mains at flow and return connections to
all plant and at all thermostatic elements and sensors.
2.13.2 Pressure gauge test points shall consist of 6mm. bore bosses in the pipe work fitted
with a test cock and plugged off.
2.13.3 Air flow test points shall be provided in the air ducting at all branches and regulating
dampers adjacent to each plant item and automatic control element at all fan inlets and
discharges and elsewhere as required.

23 09 00 - 7
Specifications
2.13.4 Test points shall consist of a 40mm. diameter hole drilled through the ducting and
covered with a removable spring clip fastened cover.
2.14 Filter Condition Indicators
2.14.1 Indicators shall be provided for all air filter units on air handlers and main fresh air
louvers. The indicators shall be spirit or moving vane type suitably calibrated and
provided with flexible pressure tubes to a test point on each side of all 'roughing' and
'fine' filters.
2.14.2 The position on the gauge dial at which the filters require cleaning or changing shall
be clearly marked.
2.15 Fire stats
2.15.1 Provide manual reset firestat for each fan of 750 cfm (0.35 m3/sec) or larger capacity,
to stop the fan on rise above set point temperature 136 °F (58 ° C).
2.16 Smoke Detectors
2.16.1 Supply and install duct mounted smoke detectors as shown on the drawings and as
required by NFPA code.
2.16.2 Smoke detectors shall be as specified under the Fire Alarm System section of the
specifications.
2.16.3 Smoke detectors shall be supplied complete with the necessary power relays and
control wiring to perform the proper operations and function specified in the A/C units
control diagrams.
2.17 Ammeters
2.17.1 One 100 mm dial ammeter shall be supplied for each motor 10 HP (7.5KW) or larger,
and for all electrical apparatus fed from the control panel. Ammeter shall be red lined
at the normal running load.
2.18 Voltmeters
2.18.1 One 150 mm dial voltmeter shall be supplied to indicate the voltage of the motor
control center in each Plant-Room.
2.18.2 The Voltmeter shall be complete with a seven-position, rotary switch to enable
reading the voltage between all phases and neutral.
2.19 Air Flow Switches’ & Dirty Filter Switches
2.19.1 Differential type pressure switches shall be provided for these applications. The
23 09 00 - 8
Specifications
switch shall be complete with connecting tube and metal bends for connections to the
duct.
2.20 Air Flow Switches’ & Dirty Filter Switches
2.20.1 Differential type pressure switches shall be provided for these applications. The
switch shall be complete with connecting tube and metal bends for connections to the
duct.
2.21 Carbon Monoxide Detection Control System
supply and install a carbon monoxide central detection and control system as specified
herein and as shown on drawings.
2.21.1 The system shall basically consist of but not limited to the required number of remote
carbon monoxide detectors, transmitters and multiple centralized control panels. The
number of centralized control panels shall be dependent on the maximum allowable
distance between sensors, transmitters and panels.
2.21.2 The central panels shall incorporate the required number of modules connected to
remote sensors. Modules shall be fully electronic incorporating solid state circuitry,
microprocessor based control, with decontamination sequence to periodically remove
water vapour and other contaminants from the sensor elements surface.
The panel shall incorporate all the necessary logic circuits to operate the variable
speed exhaust fans as per the control diagram shown on the drawings.
2.21.3 Carbon monoxide detectors or sensors shall be of the semi conductor type, micro-
processor based with multi-stage output levels, sensitive to CO gas. Sensor is to be
housed in a heavy duty enclosure with IP64 protection and of vandal proof
construction. The sensor is to be provided with a filter for protection from
contaminants. Detection range shall be from 0-500ppm.Supply and install a carbon
monoxide central detection and control system as specified herein and as shown on
drawings:
2.21.4 Each module on the central panel shall have the following indications:
- Low level
- High level
- Alarm
- Fault
- Power on
2.21.5 The system shall be compatible with and be linked to the "Building Automation and
Control System" (BACS) and is to be provided with all necessary accessories required
for connection to the BACS.
2.21.6 The switch shall be complete The system shall be provided complete with all wiring,

23 09 00 - 9
Specifications
conduits, contactors, relays, transformers, circuit breakers, etc.... necessary for proper
operation of the system.
2.22 CO2 Detection system
Contractor shall supply and install and test complete CO2 detection system including
central control module and cabinet wall mounted CO2 sensors wherever shown on
plans. The CO2 detection system shall be suitable for demand control ventilation.
2.22.1 All CO2gas detection equipment shall be installed in accordance with the latest EN
standards edition, and all equipment including cables must have full
Authority/Engineer approval..
2.22.2 CO2 Gas detection panel of each served zone shall accept 1 to 4 gas detectors using
pellistor, electrochemical, or thermal conductivity sensors. Each detector input module
shall provide alarm levels, indications for which are provided by LED’s and a common
internal audible alarm.
2.22.3 Alarms shall be triggered at either rising or falling concentrations (programmable),
normally energized or de-energized. Silence alarm button shall be available but it shall
not be possible to cancel the alarm LEDs and relays until the gas concentration has
dropped below the alarm threshold.
2.22.4 Control panel shall include a 4 digit, 7 segments LED display & capable of
performing manual or automatic cycling between channels.
2.22.5 Control panel shall have standard common relays for low alarm, high alarm and fault.
In addition, it shall include channel individual relays for low and high alarms. Outputs
for audible/visual alarms shall also be included. Analog output 4-20ma shall also be
provided for possible connection to BMS.
2.22.6 CO2 Gas detection panel shall operate from 220VAC or 12/24 VDC and shall include
a standard backup battery. Gas control panel shall be able to operate in a temperature
range -10 to 40°C and up to 95% relative humidity, non condensing. Control panel
enclosure shall be IP65. Shall comply to BS / EN 61010-1.
2.22.7 Carbone Dioxide Detector shall be Exd Flameproof using a thermal conductivity
sensor within a galvanised cast iron junction box, which also contains an amplifier to
provide a 3-wire 4-20mA output. Operating temperature +10 to +30°C designed to
detect % vol. levels of gas in binary mixtures.
2.23 Instruments used for testing and balancing
Swinging-vane Anemometer (velometers)

23 09 00 - 10
Specifications
a high quality instrument Shall be provided for HVAC Ventilation and Balancing which
provides accurate air velocity and volume flow measurements in the harshest
environments , shall be able to operate in a temperature range 0 to 50 °C , velocity range
(1.5 to 35 m/s) , humidity range 5.0 to 95.0 %RH
Micro manometer
A high quality instrument shall be provided for HVAC Ventilation and balancing which
Measures pressure, temperature, velocity and flow. differential pressure from -1245 to
3735 P , 16-point velocity matrix for quick averaged readings per square foot , Accurate in
low range conditions
Indoor Air Quality Probe
A high quality instrument shall be provided for HVAC Ventilation and balancing which
Measures Measures CO, CO2, temperature, and humidity .
the following featres shall be provided
Carbon monoxide: range: 0 to 500 ppm; accuracy: greater of ±3% of reading or ±3 ppm
Carbon dioxide: range: 0 to 5000 ppm; accuracy: greater of ±3% of reading or ±50 ppm
Temperature: range: 14° to 140° f; accuracy: ±1° f
Relative humidity: range: 5 to 95% rh; accuracy: ±3% rh
Balometer™ Capture Hood

This tool shall be provided for efficiently taking direct air volume readings at diffusers
and grilles with a measurement range: 25 CFM to 2500 CFM
The detachable digital micro manometer and optional probes makes it suitable for a wide
variety of measurement applications.
Tachometer
This tool shall be provided for measuring rotational speed either by contacting a rotatable
head to the shaft of the object, or using photo sensor to detect the reflections from the
laser. The laser target can record from a distance of up to 20 inches and gives a more
accurate measurement than LED targeting.
Digital AC Clamp-On Ammeter
The alternating current (AC) clamp-on ammeter shall be provided to measure the total AC
current being drawn by a system or by the individual loads in a system, such as the
compressor, fan motors, or heaters. In three-phase systems, current measurements can be
made without disconnecting any of the circuit wiring capable of measuring up to 300
amperes
All the above listed Instruments should have a valid calibration certificate.
23 09 00 - 11
Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Install controls so that adjustments and calibrations can be readily made.
3.1.2 Unless otherwise noted, install all wall mounted thermostats 1400 mm above the floor,
measured to the center line of the instruments.
3.1.3 Install all control valves horizontally with the power unit up.
3.1.4 Instrument wire shall be run in conduits separate from other types of wiring and shall
terminate on identified terminal strips.
3.1.5 The wire terminals on instruments shall not be used as junction points to facilitate
removal of instruments without disturbing others.
3.1.6 Instruments shall have laminated plastic name tags with tag numbers and service
engraved on the tag. Tags shall be securely fastened to the instrument. Tags shall be
black with white lettering
3.1.7 Mount pressure gauges directly at the sensing point unless otherwise indicated.
3.1.8 Locate temperature sensing devices in a portion of the fluid stream where it will
measure the average fluid temperature without obstructing flow. Increase pipes 1 ½"
(40 mm) in diameter and smaller at least one pipe size at the point of insertion.
3.2 Testing
3.2.1 After completion of installation, all automatic controls shall be regulated and adjusted
and placed in complete operating conditions subject to the approval of the Engineer
and a maintenance brochure including all operating instructions, specifications and
sheets for all instruments shall be submitted by the Contractor.
3.2.2 After all controls, valves and motors have been connected, test the systems in the
presence of the Engineer to demonstrate the capability of each automatic control
system to meet contract requirements.
END OF SECTION

23 09 00 - 12
SECTION 23 11 00
FACILITY FUEL PIPING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Part. 1 GENERAL................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 PIPING APPLICATION ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2 PIPE INSTALLATION........................................................................................................ 1
1.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION ................................................................... 1
1.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................... 2
1.5 COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................................. 2
______________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami Facility Fuel Piping
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 11 00
FACILITY FUEL PIPING
Part. 1 GENERAL
1.1 PIPING APPLICATION
1.1.1 Aboveground Piping, Sizes 50 mm and smaller : Steel pipe, malleable-iron fittings,
and threaded joints.
1.1.2 Aboveground Piping, Sizes 65 mm and larger : Steel pipe, steel fittings, and welded
joints.
1.1.3 Under-slab Piping, Sizes 65 mm and larger : Steel pipe, steel fittings, and welded
joints.
1.2 PIPE INSTALLATION
1.1.4 Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with
level side down.
1.1.5 Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure regulating valve,
oil burner connection, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 20 mm pipe nipple and
ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers 50 mm and larger. Use same size
nipple and valve as blow-off connection of strainer.
1.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

1.1.6 Refer to Division 23 Section “ Hangers & Supports “ for hanger and support devices.
1.1.7 Install hangers for horizontal piping with following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes :
Nominal Pipe Size Steel Pipe Max. Min. Rod

( Millimeters) Span (Meters) Diameter
(Millimeters)
15 & smaller 2.1 2.1

20 2.1 2.1
25 2.1 2.1
32 2.1 2.1
40 2.7 2.1
50 3.0 2.1
65 3.4 2.1
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 11 00 - 1
Specifications
- Support vertical steel pipe at each floor and at spacing not greater than 4.6 m.
1.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTIONS
1.1.8 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
1.1.8.1 Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves
with a metal tag attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems
supplied.
1.1.8.2 Install gate valves at each branch connection to supply mains and elsewhere as
indicated.
1.1.8.3 Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as
required for system drainage.
1.1.8.4 Install swing check valves as required to control flow direction.
1.1.9 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
1.1.9.1 Sediment raps : Install a “T” fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as
close to the inlet of the oil burning appliance as practical. Drip leg shall be a
minimum of 3 pipe diameter in length.
1.1.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1.1.10.1 Test fuel oil piping according to NFPA 31 . Remark leaking joints and
connections using new materials.
1.1.10.2 Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
1.1.11 DEMONSTRATION
1.1.11.1 Train Owner’s maintenance personal on procedures and schedules related

to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
1.1.11.2 Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days advance notice
1.5 COMMISSIONING
1.1.12 Before activating system perform these steps:
1- Open valves to full open position and close bypass valves.

2- Remove and clean strainer screens.
3- Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
4- Fill oil storage tank with proper fuel type.
5- Check operating controls of fuel burner units.
6- Check operation at automatic bypass valves.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 11 00 - 2
Specifications
7- Check and set operating temperature controls on oil heaters.
End of Section
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 11 00 - 3
SECTION 23 12 00
FACILITY FUEL PUMPS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1- GENERAL: .............................................................................................................. 1
PART 2 – PRODUCUTS (NOT USED) ................................................................................ 1
PART 3 – EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 1
3.1 SHOP TESTING ......................................................................................................... 1
3.2 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................. 2
3.3 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 2
3.4 TESTING .................................................................................................................... 2
______________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami Facility Fuel Pumps
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 12 00
FACILITY FUEL PUMPS
PART 1- GENERAL:
Supply and install fuel oil transfer pumps wherever shown on the Drawings and of
capacities indicated thereupon.
Each pump shall be rotary gear type and shall be compact and sturdy suitable for fuel oil
pumping.
Pump shall be complete with the following:
- Double helical gears constructed of high alloy iron for maximum wear resistance.
- Close coupled electric motor.
- Close-grained cast iron body mounting brackets and side-plate.
- Carbon steel shaft.
- Cast iron stuffing gland.
- Carbon face, synthetic rubber bellows and steel mechanical seal.
- Cast iron base plate.
- Suction strainer.
- Check valve (fuel type)
- Pressure relief valves
- Electric control panel with circuit breakers, starters, automatic electric alternators,
indicating lights and selector switches. Panel shall be made of sheet steel of dust
and rust proof type with lockable door.
- Level controller and control cables between the level controllers and electric
control panel.
PART 2 – PRODUCUTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 SHOP TESTING
A. Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with Hydraulic Institute

test codes as described in HI E.35.01, E.37.01,and E.39.01. In addition, each pump
shall be tested at five points of operation from shut-off head to run out condition
including the guaranteed pump’s performance point.
B. All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at 1.5 times the design pressure.
There shall be no leakage during the one hour test period.
C. The manufacturer shall submit certificate including test data to show that the pump
meets performance specifications.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 12 00 - 1
Specifications
3.2 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall inspect each pump prior to installation to verify that pumps
are in conformance with these specifications.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Pumps shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturer’s written

instructions.
B. If flexible coupling is used between the pump and its driver, shafts shall be so
supported and aligned as not to produce undesirable stresses and noise during
normal operation.
C. If oil or grease lubricated bearings are supplied with the pump, the oiler shall be
filled with the specified lubricating oil or bearings shall be pre-lubricated with
specified grease prior to start-up.
3.4 TESTING
A. Field testing of the pumps shall be performed at the time of overall system start -up
and testing. Installed pumps shall meet the performance specifications.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 12 00 - 2
SECTION 23 13 00
FACILITY FUEL-STORAGE TANKS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANT
PART - 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................. 1
PART - 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 2
2.01 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANKS ........................................................................................ 2
PART - 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 4
3.01 SPARE PARTS .................................................................................................................. 4
3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ........................................................ 5
3.03 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTED PERIOD ................................................................ 5
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami Facility Fuel-Storage Tanks
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 13 00
FACILITY FUEL-STORAGE TANKS
PART - 1 GENERAL

requirements.
1.01 Introduction
A. The contractor shall be responsible to complete above works based on

CONSULTANT’S approval of submitted samples, documents etc as per specifications
and applicable standards

A. Codes and standards applicable to this section shall confirm to the applicable portions

Standard Standard
American Society of Mechanical ASME - -
Engineers
National Electrical Code NEC - -
Underwriters Laboratory UL UL58/ -
UL142
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 13 00 - 1
Specifications
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Fuel Oil Storage Tanks
2.1.1 General
2.1.1.1 Fuel oil storage tanks shall be provided where located on the drawings with capacities
as indicated.
2.1.1.2 Test fuel oil tanks, piping and accessories shall be fabricated and installed in
accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 31.
2.1.1.3 Fuel oil tank shall be hydraulically tested at factory to pressure of one atmosphere held
for 24 hours. All welds to be proven sound.
2.1.2 Fuel Tank:
2.1.2.1 Tank shall be constructed of not less than 6 mm. thick welded black steel sheet metal
to the capacities indicated on Drawings, and in accordance with UL standard (UL-
142) for steel above ground tanks for flammable and combustible liquids.
2.1.2.2 Tank shall be continually welded on both sides and shall be reinforced internally for
rigid installation as approved by the engineer. All welds shall be proven sound.
2.1.2.3 Tank shall be tested for leaks at factory before installation to pressure of one
atmosphere held for 24 hours. All welds to be proven sound.
2.1.2.4 Tank shall be painted with two coats of red lead oxide or approved equal, and two
coats black bituminous paint, and finished with Silver or White enamel paint.
2.1.2.5 Tank shall be mounted on steel supports and shall be equipped with the following:
Manhole and air tight manhole cover 600 x 600 mm.

Protected oil level indicator fixed to the tank. (Level gauge Cat and Mouse).
Fill and vent pipes.
Two gate valves one in fuel supply line and one in drain line.
Drain and supply lines.
One external ladder.
Earthing connection.
Ultrasonic level sensor giving the fuel volume in tanks in a remote indicator in
the fill cabinet, as specified below and where shown on drawings.
2.1.2.6 Above Ground Storage
Tank shall be cylindrical type constructed of 6 mm. thick welded black steel sheet metal to
the capacities indicated on Drawings.
Tank shall be built in accordance with UL standard for steel above ground tanks for
flammable and combustible liquids .
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 13 00 - 2
Specifications
Tank shall be tested for leaks before installation and shall be painted with two coats of red
lead oxide and two coats of black bituminous paint.
Tank shall be equipped with the following:
• Ultrasinic level controller

• Fill and vent pipes.
• Fuel supply and return lines.
• Earthing connection.
Tank should never be installed in, or covered with cinders to avoid rapid steel corrosion
due to wet sulphur action.
2.1.3 Fuel Oil Strainers:
2.1.3.1 Supply & install fuel oil stainer comply with the followings:
Y-pattern, full size of connecting piping. Include Type 304 stainless steel
screens with 1.2 mm perforations.
Pressure Rating: 860 kPa (125 psig) minimum working pressure.
Size 50 mm and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
Sizes 65 mm and Larger: Cast-iron body, with flanged ends.
Screwed screen retainer with centered blow-down and pipe plug.
2.1.4 Level Switches in Fuel Tank
2.1.4.1 Level switches installed in daily fuel oil tank all on one stem to operate the pumps,
shall be of the type suitable for fuel oil with four level switches. Mounting and stem
material shall be of brass, float shall be of polysulfone or polypropylene. Switches
shall give signal for:
Low level alarm

Low level starts the pump.
High level to stop the pump valve.
High level alarm.
2.1.4.2 Grip rings shall be of copper and collar of brass Stem size shall be 5/16 inches
diameters of the adjustable type with length suitable for day tank height.
2.1.4.3 Level switch shall be UL listed.
2.1.4.4 Low level switch and high level switch in above ground fuel tank shall be as
described above but shall give low level, high level and tank over filled by tanker
signals to the fuel oil level indicator located inside the fuel oil fill cabinet.
2.1.4.5 Low level switch and high level switch in above ground fuel tank shall be as
described above but shall give low level signal to BMS an d high level signal to give
alarm that tank is over filled with fuel oil by tanker and a signal to BMS.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 13 00 - 3
Specifications
2.1.5 Fuel Oil Solenoid Valves:
2.1.5.1 Fuel oil Solenoid valve shall be 2 way, 2 position motorized valve providing open
closed control of Diesel oil flow through operation of motor actuator and valve
linkage in response to signal from an off-on switch.
2.1.5.2 Single seated valve, straight-through pattern; screwed end connections, bronze body
and removable brass seat on 15 to 40 mm sizes; flanged end connections, cast iron
body and removable bronze seat on 50 to 80 mm sizes; stainless steel stem and
composition disc with removable throttling plugs
2.1.5.3 Reversing type motor, with oil-immersed gear train, die- cast aluminum case, dual-
stroke (90 and 160 degrees), double-ended crankshaft and die-cast aluminum cover
with built-in transformer
2.1.5.4 Linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and comprising
roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 160 lb. seal-off
force.
2.1.5.5 Valve rated 240 deg. F maximum fuel oil temperature and 125 psi maximum pressure
for flanged end connections and 150 psi for screwed end connections.
2.1.5.6 Motor rated 125 deg. F maximum ambient temperatures
2.1.6 Digital Level Indicator
2.1.6.1 Level indicator shall be for accurate level indication in percent for cylindrical fuel oil
tanks and in liters for square level oil tanks in a flush panel mounting or wall
mounting package.
2.1.6.2 The level indicator shall be a fully electronic device using a solid-state level
transmitter with a receiver/indicator to display tank level or content.
2.1.6.3 The level transmitter shall be installed in a 50 mm NPT pipe fitting in the tank top
with a level transmitter probe length equal to the inside height of the tank.
2.1.6.4 The receiver/indicator panel shall be enclosed in NEMA 4 X polycarbonate wall

mountable enclosure.
2.1.6.5 The level indicator shall be powered from 24 DC-Level indicator shall be similar to
simplex model TC-2 tank commander digital level indicator or approved equal.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Spare Parts
equipment supplied sufficient for three years of oerpation all in accordance with the
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 13 00 - 4
Specifications
3.2.1 The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in triplicate bound, A4 size,
Instruction Manuals and as required by Authority having the jurisdiction,containing
the following material:-
3.2.1.1 Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features. The
component.
3.2.1.2 Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional components of the
year operation.
3.2.1.3 Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
3.2.1.4 Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
3.2.1.5 List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
3.2.1.6 Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control diagrams and
3.2.1.7 Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
3.2.1.8 The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to the
3.2.1.9 All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion
date.
disbursements.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 13 00 - 5
Specifications
End of Section
_____________________________________________________________________________________
23 13 00 - 6
SECTION 23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Specifications
Table of Contents
PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 Pump Selection & Design Requirements .......................................................................... 3
1.2 Related Works Specified Elsewhere………………………………… ................. ………3
1.3 Pumping Equipment Relating Characteristics ................................................................... 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Horizontal & Vertical Split Case Pumps ........................................................................... 4
2.2 Variable Speed / Variable Frequency Drive...................................................................... 5
2.2 Sealed Type Expansion Tank ………………………………………………….. 5
PART 3 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................. 5
3.1 Installation Of Pumps ........................................................................................................ 5
3.2 Pump Setting……………………………………………………………………………6
3.3 Pump Testing……………………………………………………………………………6
3.4 Spare Parts………………………………………………………………………………7
3.5 Special Tools……………………………………………………………………………7
3.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals…………………………………………………...7
3.7 Guarantee and Warranted Periods……………………… ……………………………8
Khatib & Alami Hydronic Pumps

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Contract Conditions.
1.1 Pump Selection & Design Requirements
1.1.1 The designed pump head indicated on the drawings is only approximate and the
Contractor shall confirm the exact head of the pumps after all the pump selections
and the shop drawings are approved.
1.1.2 The Contractor shall submit for approval and prior to shipment all detailed
construction drawings showing exactly in place all pumps with their concrete
bases, vibration isolators, pipe connection and power connections.
1.1.3 Construct all apparatus of materials and pressure ratings suitable for the conditions
1.1.4 Provide shaft packing or seals compatible with the pump design, and in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.1.5 Pump manufacturers should take particular note of the suction head pressure
required for each pump so as to provide casings, seals, and overall pump
construction to withstand the high pressure required for some pumps.
1.1.6 All pumps shall be designed to operate with non-overloading characteristics at

1.1.7 All pumps shall be as much as possible selected from one pump manufacturer.
1.1.8 All Electrical works and materials supplied and installed under this section shall
confirm, in all repect, to the requirements of Electrical Specifications.
1.1.9 The Contractor shall submit head calculation for Engineer review and approval.

Section 23 05 23 - General Duty Valves for HVAC
Section 23 05 48 Mech. Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control for Piping and
Equipment
Section 23 05 53 - Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 21 23 - 1
Specifications
Section 23 25 00 - HVAC Water Treatment
1.3 Pumping Equipment Operating Characteristics
1.3.1 Pump operating characteristics shall be in such a way when operating at the speed
pumping head.
1.3.2 Pumps must operate without any pulsation, vibration, or internal recirculation.
Pump characteristics shall be such that a variation of 10% in the head will result in
no more than a 15% variation in water pumping rate.
1.3.3 Pump shall be selected so that the operating flow rate is just below, and to the left
of, the flow rate corresponding to the peak horsepower for the pump operating at
design speed.
1.3.4 Performance curve data sheets shall be provided with Shop Drawings for each type
and size of pump submitted for approval.
1.3.5 The closed discharge head for all pumps shall not exceed the working head by
more than 25%.
1.3.6 The pump motor shall be sized so that it operates continuously throughout the
performance range of the pump without exceeding the nameplate rating of the
motor. Motor should be sized to have minimum 20% extra as safety margin on the
total power requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Horizontal / Vertical Split Case Pumps
2.1.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings frame mounted split case
centrifugal pumps of characteristics as shown in the capacity schedule on the
Drawings and as described hereinafter.
2.1.2 Pump and motor shall be mounted on a heavy cast iron drip base, and connected
thru a heavy duty flexible coupling.
2.1.3 Pump casing shall be of high tensile strength gray iron and fitted with bronze wear
ring.
2.1.4 Impeller shall be bronze, enclosed, accurately machined and statically and
dynamically balanced. It shall be fitted with a key and locked in place. Shaft shall
be stainless steel of ample size to carry any axial and radial thrust.
2.1.5 Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal of extra hard carbon and ceramic type.
Pump ball bearings shall be of ample size to withstand all axial and radial thrust.

23 21 23 - 2
Specifications
2.1.6 For chilled water applications, the necessary disconnect switches and motor starters
shall be supplied and installed under the electrical part of the works.
2.2 Variable Speed / Variable Frequency Drive
2.2.1 For Specification of the variable speed / variable frequency drive, refer to
Electrical Specification.
2.3 Sealed Type Expansion Tank
2.3.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings one expansion tank of the
sealed type of capacities as shown on the Drawings.
2.3.2 Each tank shall consist of the following items, all wired, piped and packaged into
an automatic unit.
2.3.2.1 Two pressurizing pumps (one standby), each of centrifugal end suction type.
2.3.2.2 Expansion tank, constructed of welded black steel 3mm. thick, and complying
with ASME recommendation.
2.3.2.3 Suction tank with ball valve, pressure switch for pump control.
2.3.2.4 Non-return valve, pressure regulating valve and gauge.
2.3.2.5 Hand-off-Auto switch.
2.3.2.6 Pumps starters.
2.3.2.7 High and low pressure cut out switches, which operate the pump when the
pressure drops due to loss of water from the system.
2.3.2.8 Necessary expansion vessels and valves.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation of Pumps
3.1.1 Pumps shall be mounted on bases with isolating pads as specified in the
specification.
3.1.2 Pumps and motors shall be aligned and leveled throughout the length and width,
and wherever necessary, suitable shims shall be provided to facilitate pipe
connections and leveling.
3.1.3 Pumps shall be secured to bases with proper size anchor bolts.
3.1.4 Drains for packing glands and base shall be piped to nearest drain outlet.

23 21 23 - 3
Specifications
3.1.5 Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion-resistant materials and assembly
interaction.
3.1.6 Provide casing connections for vents, drains, suction and discharge pressure
gauges.
3.1.7 Balance impellers and all other moving components statically and dynamically.
3.1.8 Grout base plates completely to provide a rigid non-deflecting support.
3.1.9 Install packing rings with alternate layers staggered 90 degrees. Tighten packing
for seal while permitting prescribed amount of leakage.
3.1.10 Install and align mechanical seals in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.11 Each pump shall be provided with pressure gauges at suction and discharge sides.
3.1.12 Coupling guards shall be provided to all pumps.
3.2 Pump Settings
3.2.1 All pumps and motors shall be properly set, leveled, and aligned on bases and
recommended tolerances. This shall be done before any piping or electrical
connections are made.
3.2.2 After all connections have been made, and just prior to putting each pump into
3.2.3 All necessary adjustments shall be made to assure that the thrust is balanced, that
shaft rotates freely when turned by hand and that pump is quiet in operation.
3.3 Pumps Testing
3.3.1 Pumping equipment shall be tested for operating characteristics, and duration of
test shall be set by the Engineer. Apparent defective equipment shall be repaired or
replaced and adjustment made to the equipment as may be necessary, all to the
3.3.2 Before shipment, the manufacturer shall test all components hydraulically at 150%
of rated working pressure for ability to withstand maximum design pressure and
for tightness.
3.3.3 Upon completion of the installation, test all equipment under field operating
conditions to demonstrate capability of the equipment to meet specified
requirements. Compile and certify the following data.

23 21 23 - 4
Specifications
a. Water flow, GPM (l/s) at rated head.
b. Shut-off head.
c. Operating Kilowatts from measured voltage, amperes and power factor.
3.4 Spare Parts
3.4.1 The Contractor shall provide as part of his contract a list of spare parts for all the
equipment supplied sufficient for three years of operation all in accordance with
the recommendations of the manufacturers of the equipment.
3.5 Special Tools
supplied, adequate for 12 months operation shall be supplied by the Contractor at
the completion date of the project.
3.6.1 The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in triplicate bound, A4
size, instruction and maintenance manuals and schedule based on the instructions
for preventative maintenance or service from the manufactures or suppliers of
equipment or according to the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1-2007 or equivalent as approved by
DM/ Authority containing the following material:-
component.
3.6.1.7 Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor
3.6.1.8 The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to
23 21 23 - 5
Specifications
date.
3.7.1 All equipment and accessories supplied by the nominated Sub-Contractor under
this contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year from the date
of final completion certificate.
3.7.2 All guarantee shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor
3.7.3 The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any manufacturing
END OF SECTION

23 21 23 - 6
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................. 1
1.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 COPPER PIPES-CUP-TYPE 3 .......................................................................................... 2
2.2 UPVC PIPES TYPE 1 ........................................................................................................ 3
2.3 JOINTS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS (DIELECTRIC ISOLATORS)................ 3
2.4 PIPING SCHEDULE ......................................................................................................... 3
PART 3 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 ARRANGEMENT AND ALIGNMENT OF PIPES ......................................................... 4
3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING INSTALLATION .................................... 5
3.3 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL VALVES ..................................... 5
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNIONS AND FLANGES ............................................................ 6
3.5 PIPE SLEEVES.................................................................................................................. 6
3.6 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS ................................................................................ 7
______________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami Refrigerant Piping
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Works of this Section shall be governed by Contract Conditions.
1.1.2 This section describes basics materials and requirements for refrigerant piping work
services installations for building.
Section 23 05 00 - Common Works Results for HVAC.
Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping.
Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation.
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC.
Section 23 81 00 - Decentralized HVAC Equipment.
1.3 Pipe Identification
1.3.1 All pipes shall be indelibly marked at intervals of not greater than 3m. The marking
shall show the manufacturer's identification, the standard name and number, and the
nominal size and class. Adhesive labels alone shall not suffice. All pipes complying
with British Standards shall be kite marked.
1.4.1 Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards
and United States Codes, unless otherwise specified, the performance/manufacturing
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 23 00 - 1
Specifications
standards of items mentioned in this section shall confirm to the applicable portions
Reference Code Abbreviation

1. American Water Works Association AWWA
2. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM
3. American Standard Association ASA
4. British Standards BS
5. American Society for Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning ASHRAE
Engineers
6. Deutsches Institute for Normung DIN
7. American National Standards Institute ANSI
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Copper Pipes-Cup-Type 3
2.1.1 Copper pipes shall be of the seamless hard drawn tubing type K or L to ASTM B
280-88. Tubing, to be used, shall have been cleaned by the manufacturer and the open
ends capped to preserve cleanliness.
2.1.2 Cup shall be designed, constructed and installed in compliance with ASA B9.1 and
ASA B35.5 (safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration).
2.1.3 CuP shall be suitable for solder jointing with forged or wrought copper fittings.
2.1.4 Cast fittings should not be used because they might be porous and allow the
refrigerant to leak.
2.1.5 Surfaces to be soldered shall be cleaned bright. The joints shall be given a thin
coating of approved soldering flux and the tubing end inserted into the fitting as far as
possible.
2.1.6 Heating and finishing of the joint shall be done in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the fittings. During the heating, the pipe and
fittings must be kept full of an inert gas N or CO2 to prevent formation of scale.
2.1.7 The solder metal to be used shall be a non-ferrous metal or alloy having a melting
point below 800 °F (427 °C) and below that of the metal being joined, an accepted
solder is Sil-Fos to make copper to copper joints.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 23 00 - 2
Specifications
2.1.8 When solenoid valves are being installed, the coil should be removed, and no heat
shall be applied near the bulb of the expansion valve.
2.1.9 Cup type 3 are allowed to be used to carry refrigerants and/or as specifically
mentioned in the schedule of pipe materials.
2.2 UPVC Pipes Type 1
2.2.2 UPVC Pipes - Type 1 shall comply with BS EN 1329-1 : 2000 specification for pipes,
2.2.3 UPVC Pipes - Type 1 piping systems shall be used in the field of A/C condensate
drain.
2.2.4 UPVC Pipes Type 1 piping systems sockets and spigots shall be either for solvent
2.3 Joints Between Dissimilar Metals (Dielectric isolators)
2.3.1 Make joints between ferrous and non-ferrous screwed piping and equipment by using
Teflon or nylon isolating materials in the form of screwed unions.
2.3.2 Make joints between ferrous and non-ferrous flanged piping and equipment with
insulating gaskets and "Teflon sleeves and washers between flanges, bolts and nuts.
2.3.3 The entire insulating joint including the dielectric material shall be suitable to
withstand the temperature, pressure and other operating characteristics for the service
for which they are used.
2.4 Piping Schedule
2.4.1 General
2.4.2 Piping classes are specified for each service in the following schedule. The
designations indicated refer to detailed specifications for piping in this section of the
specifications:
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 23 00 - 3
Specifications
2.4.3 Piping Classes
Service Piping Class
- A/C Condensate drains UPVC Type 1
- A/C Condensate drain above false ceiling. UPVC Type 1
- Refrigerant Pipes CUP; Type - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Arrangement and Alignment of Pipes
3.1.1 Install piping in a neat, workmanlike manner and the various lines shall be parallel to
3.1.2 Install refrigerant pipe groups in parallel with each other.
3.1.3 Support, anchor all piping to preclude failure or deformation. Construct and install
hangers, supports and accessories to the approval of the Engineer. Do not use wire,
tape or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to support weight of pipe, weight of
fluid and weight of pipe insulation.
3.1.4 Fasten piping securely to the structure without overstressing any portion of the
supports or the structure itself. Secure pipe supports, anchors and guides to concrete
by means of inserts or if greater load carrying capacity is required by means of steel
fishplates embedded in the concrete.
3.1.5 Uninsulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers
or supports.
freely expand and contract. For copper or brass pipe, use plastic sheathed hangers.
Pipe hangers shall fit over insulated piping.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 23 00 - 4
Specifications
level. Trapeze shall be of steel channel sized to support load and drilled for rod
hanger at each end. Provision should be made to keep the lines in their relative
position to each other by the use of either clamps or clips.
3.2 General Requirements for Piping Installation
3.2.1 Make all changes in size and direction of piping with standard fittings.
3.2.2 Make all branch connections with tees.
3.2.3 Use eccentric reducing fittings or eccentric reducing couplings where required by the
contract documents or where required to prevent pocketing of liquid or non-
condensable.
3.2.4 Pipes and fittings shall both be manufactured according to one single standard unit of
measurement, either both English and both metric.
3.2.5 Wall supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from wall with steel J-Hook
for pipe located close to wall.
3.2.6 Vertical piping supports – support pipes at every floor unless shown otherwise.
3.2.7 Provide penetration shields to encase insulated pipes penetrating fire walls or floors in
a 360 °, 24-gauge minimum sheet metal hanger shields. Spacing between sleeve and
3.2.8 Maximum horizontal spacing for hangers are as follows:
- Up to 1 ¼" (32 mm) copper pipe----------2.0 meter
- 1 ½" (40 mm) and over copper pipe-------2.5 meter
3.3 Connection to Equipment and Control Valves
3.3.1 Provide connections to equipment and control valves to facilitate dismantling.

Arrange connections so that the equipment being served may be removed without
disturbing the piping.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 23 00 - 5
Specifications
3.4 Installation of Unions and Flanges
3.4.1 Unions and flanges shall be installed at all equipment inlets and outlets,
3.5 Pipe Sleeves
3.5.1 Provide all pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs with sleeves having an
internal diameter at least 50mm larger than the diameter of the pipe for un-insulated
lines or of the insulation for insulated pipes.
3.5.2 Install sleeves through interior walls and partitions flush with finished surfaces;
sleeves through outside walls to project 15mm. on each side of the finished wall; and
floor sleeves to project 25mm. above finished floors.
3.5.3 Set sleeves in place before pouring concrete or securely fasten and grout in with
cement.
3.5.4 Sleeve construction:
. Interior Partitions - galvanized sheet iron.
. Interior & Exterior Masonry Walls and Floors-galvanized steel pipe.
3.5.5 Fill the space between outside of pipe or insulation and the inside of the sleeve or
framed opening with fibrous asbestos in interior walls and floors and pack with
oakum, seal with watertight mastic or asphalt in exterior walls.
3.6 Method of statement
3.6.1 Contractor is responsible for preparing method of statement to describes the method
of which the installation of equipment & Services Installation is carried out for this
project
3.6.2 Purpose of this method of statement is to ensure that correct material and
equipment and agreed Procedure are implemented during fabrication, installation &
testing,
3.6.3 This method of statement specify sequence and methodology to be followed for the
installation and Testing to achieve to quality of workmanship for installation of work.
3.6.4 Method of statement to be reviewed by the commissioning engineer and approved
by the consultant.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 23 00 - 6
Specifications
3.7.1 Plug all opening ends of piping, valves and equipment except when actual work is
being performed to minimize accumulation of dirt and debris.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 23 00 - 7
SECTION 23 25 00
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................... 1
1.2 CHILLED WATER PIPING TREATMENT SYSTEM ....................................................... 2
PART 2 – PRODUCUTS (NOT USED) ........................................................................................ 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) ........................................................................................ 3
Khatib & Alami HVAC Water Treatment
TOC- 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 25 00
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1.1 The works covered under this Section shall include all the supply, installation, testing
and delivery in good operating conditions of a complete HVAC water treatment
system as described, shown detailed or implied in the tender documents of the project.
1.1.2 The contractor shall employ a specialized and approved water treatment company to
carry out the works as per the following requirements.
1.1.3 The Contractor shall provide all the necessary components and accessories as well as
manpower, scaffolding, testing facilities, etc... at his own expense to execute a
complete operable system.
1.1.4 The contractor shall be responsible for flushing and cleaning the piping system and
for the supply and installation of water treatment chemicals and chemical feeding
equipment for the control of scale, corrosion and algae in the system.
1.1.5 The Contractor shall supply with each system an estimate of one year's supply of
water treatment chemical as specified.
1.1.6 A complete water analysis shall be conducted at the job site by the water treatment
chemical equipment supplier and a written report shall be submitted.
1.1.7 The Contractor shall include the services of a water treatment company every thirty
(30) days during the first full year after system is placed in operation. The company
shall make complete water analysis at the time of each service call and a written report
of the findings shall be left with the Owner's operating personnel. The Company shall
also be present for the initial charging of each system with chemical and shall fully
instruct Owner's operating personnel to insure continuation of proper water treatment.
1.1.8 The chemical feeding equipment shall be automatic as shown on Drawings.
1.1.9 Related Works Specified Elsewhere
1.1.9.1 The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are included

Section 23 05 48 Mech. Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control for Piping and
Equipment
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation And Controls for HVAC

23 25 00 - 1
Specifications
1.1.10 The Contractor shall program his work such that it will not interfere with other trades
and to suit site requirements.
1.2 CHILLED WATER PIPING TREATMENT SYSTEM
1.2.1 Automatic Chemical Feeding Unit
1.2.1.1 An automatic dosing system based on measuring conductivity shall be installed as

shown on drawings and consist of conductivity controller, conductivity sensor,
metering pump and plastic chemical tank of suitable capacity for dissolving required
chemicals.
1.2.2 Initial Treatment Procedures
1.2.2.1 The chilled water system cleaning shall be carried out for removing rust, millscale,
debris and other foreign bodies by:
1.2.2.1.1 Initially fill the system with fresh water and circulate water by operating existing
system circulating pumps for 30 minutes.
1.2.2.1.2 At the end of this period the system shall be partially drained from the lowest drain
points.
1.2.2.1.3 Dismantle the strainers and refix after removing all impurities
1.2.2.1.4 Refill the system and operate the circulating pumps
1.2.2.1.5 Fill the system with sufficient dose of non acidic pre operational cleaner
1.2.2.1.6 Once it is established that the chemical is completely mixed after being circulated for
at least 16 hrs. The system shall be completely drained from the lowest drain point.
1.2.2.1.7 Refill the system with fresh water and re-circulate for a minimum period of 2 Hours
and then drain the whole water.
1.2.2.1.8 Continue flushing procedure with fresh water only until tests indicate that the water is
of an acceptable quality within the following parameters, before continuing the
process:
Total dissolved solids - Equivalent to incoming main
pH - Equivalent to incoming main
Iron in solution - Maximum of 10 ppm above that of the incoming mains.
Appearance - Visually clear of bright water, free from suspended solids.
These readings shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer prior to

commencing the next stage.
23 25 00 - 2
Specifications
1.2.3 Final Chemical Treatment
1.2.3.1 The final water treatment program shall be carried out by providing sufficient
molybdate type corrosion inhibitor to maintain a molybdate level of 150 – 200 ppm as
Mo in system water. Corrosion inhibitor should be effective for steel, copper, copper -
alloy and mixed metallurgy systems. The product shall contain a unique blend of scale
inhibitors to enhance performance of equipment by maintaining clean metal surfaces.
1.2.3.2 Finally the water shall be analyzed to confirm the correct condition and concentration
of chemicals, these results shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be recorded on
a Completion Certificate within the following control parameters.
Control Limits-Chilled Water System
PARAMETER CONTROL LIMITS

pH 9.0 – 10.5
MOLYBDATES LEVEL Mo04 (PPM) 200 - 400
NITRITE, NO2 (PPM ) 600 - 900
IRON, Fe (PPM) < 3.0
TSS, (PPM) < 2.0
CORROSION RATE MPY (Mils/YR) < 3.0
STEEL
CORROSION RATE MPY (Mils/YR) < 1.0
COPPER
LEGIONELLA BACTERIA, NIL
QUARTERLY TEST
• CULLIGAN ( USA )
• BURNER ( USA )
• THE PERMUTIT CO. ( USA )
• EBD ( USA )
• FILTRINE ( USA )
• AQUAFINE Filters ( USA )
• CALGON CORP. ( USA )
PART 2 – PRODUCUTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

23 25 00 - 3
SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCTS AND CASING
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Related Works Specified Elsewhere .................................................................................. 1
1.4 Reference Standards ........................................................................................................... 1
1.5 Ductwork Design Criteria .................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 3
2.1 Ductwork ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.2 Duct Hangers and Support ................................................................................................. 3
2.3 Flexible Ducts .................................................................................................................... 3
2.4 Fire Rated Ductwork .......................................................................................................... 4
PART 3 EXECUTIONS .............................................................................................................. 5
3.1 Duct Construction .............................................................................................................. 5
3.2 Protection and Cleaning ..................................................................................................... 6
3.3 Access Openings in Insulated Ducts .................................................................................. 7
3.4 Method of statement ........................................................................................................... 7
Khatib & Alami HVAC Ducts and Casings

TOC -1
Specifications
SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCTS AND CASING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This section includes the design, supply, installation testing and commissioning of
complete ductwork system for air conditioning fresh air, exhaust and ventilation
systems.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The contractor shall be responsible for submitting complete above works based on
design consultant’s approval of submitted samples, documents etc as per
specifications and applicable standards.

Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories
HVAC DW Sheet Metal Ductwork

144
NFPA 90A Standard for the installation of air conditioning and ventilating systems
SMACNA Sheet Metal and air conditioning contractors national association
ASHRAE American society of heating, refrigeration and air
conditioning.
23 31 00 -1
Specifications
UL 181 Underwriters laboratories
ASTM A653- Specification for steel sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
99 process.
1.5 Ductwork Design Criteria
1.5.1 All rectangular ducts shall be of the low or medium pressure rating, as specified, and
all circular round ducts shall be of the high pressure rating.
1.5.2 Galvanized sheet steel shall be fabricated, erected and installed in accordance with
NFPA 90A and “SMACNA” sheet metal manuals.
1.5.3 All rectangular metal ducts shall be sealed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 90
and SMACNA duct construction standards. All high pressure ducts shall be air tight.
1.5.4 Kitchen exhaust ducts shall be constructed and installed in conformance with NFPA
96 and must: Be constructed from carbon steel (for concealed ducts) with a minimum
thickness of 1.4 mm and from stainless steel (for exposed ducts) with a minimum
thickness of 1.1 mm.
1.5.5 Stair case or lift well pressurization duct shall be fire rated.
1.5.6 Ducts that meant to be used for smoke exhaust shall be fire rated unless:
1.5.6.1 It doesn’t cross any other fire / smoke zones, i.e. its route within the same fire /
smoke zone which it serves.
1.5.6.2 It is contained solely in a fire rated shaft and no other services included in the same
shaft.
1.5.7 If the HVAC system is used during construction, temporary return air filters must be
installed with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2012 or an equivalent standard.
1.5.8 Adhesives, sealants, vapor barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
Regulations & Specifications” for Volatile Organic Compounds, (VOCs) content
limits.
1.5.9 Duct work with equipment connected to it, having external static pressure exceeding
250 Pascal, exposed ductwork to external ambient conditions, or within un air-
conditioned spaces must be pressure tested prior to occupancy in accordance with a

23 31 00 -2
Specifications
method approved by the municipality and compliant amount of air leakage.
1.5.10 Duct leakage testing must be carried by a specialist approved by the Authority for
commissioning of buildings.
1.5.11 All return air ducts inlets shall be fitted with stainless steel wire mesh.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Ductwork
2.1.1 Galvanized sheet steel ducts shall be of G90 coating designation within ASTM A653-
99, standard specification for ‘steel sheet zinc coated by the hot dip process’. The
weight of coating on both sides of duct shall be 0.9 oz/ft2 (275g/m2) as a minimum
check limit triple spot test.
2.1.2 The ducts’ gauges, thickness, type and method or jointing shall be as detailed and
tabulated on the Drawings and/or in compliance with ASHRAE Standards and
Handbooks.
2.1.3 Stainless steel ducts shall be of 316 for all Toxic exhaust air in accordance with
ASTM Standards and Specifications.
2.2 Duct Hangers and Support
2.2.1 Supply and install steel work necessary for the support of the ductwork. Hangers shall
be spaced not more than 3000 mm. apart, and at changes of direction. Types and
construction of hangers shall be as detailed on the Drawings and in compliance with
SMACNA recommendations.
2.3 Flexible Ducts
2.3.1 Ducts shall be all metal constructed of heavy gauge corrugated aluminium with water
tight continuous lock seams.

23 31 00 -3
Specifications
2.3.2 Ducts shall be UL 181 Class O non-combustible and complying to NFPA 90A &
90B, or tested to BS 476 (parts 6, 7 & 20) class 1 flame spread and meets the
requirements of CP 413 section A2.2.3.
2.3.3 For air conditioning flexible ducts shall have 25mm thick fiber glass insulation and
sheathed in durable polymer vapor barrier.
2.4 Fire Rated Ductwork
2.4.1 2 hours fire resisting ductwork shall be installed where indicated on the drawings or
mentioned in Specifications or required by Local Authorities.
2.4.2 Provide complete 2 hours fire rated fire resistive enclosures for smoke and
pressurization systems where ductwork is located outside fire rated shaft.
2.4.3 Fire resisting duct and smoke duct shall be manufactured erected and tested in
accordance to BS 476 Part 24 ISO 6944.
2.4.4 Fire resisting duct shall prove by test that its cross section area is maintained above
75% when subject to full fire temperature.
2.4.5 Fire resisting duct shall be constructed and protected to insure maintaining the
stability, integrity insulation supports, fixing throughout the required period.
2.4.6 Fire resistance filling (fire stopping material) shall seal the clearances between fire
resisting duct and wall to insure the stability and integrity of the system.
2.4.7 Fire resisting duct shall be connected to fans by fire rated flexible connectors.
Flexible connectors shall be made of glass fabric coated on both sides with flame
retardant silver grey polyurethane rubber tested to BS476 Part 20.
2.4.8 All drop rods and exposed bearers shall be insulated in accordance to manufacturers
instructions to assure its fire resistance.

23 31 00 -4
Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 Duct Construction
3.1.1 All ducts shall be constructed and erected so as to be rigid and free from sway,
drumming and movement. Duct work shall be true to sizes indicated on Drawings,
straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. Whenever internal
acoustic lining is indicated on the Drawings, the duct sizes have to be increased to
accommodate the lining.
3.1.2 Ductwork joints shall be square with all sharp edges removed.
3.1.3 The ducts shall be routed with a minimum of directional changes and abrupt
transitions.
3.1.4 Adequate space shall be provided around ducts to assure proper support and to allow
the installation of the specified insulation.
3.1.5 All connections between ductwork, including flexible connections, fittings and
equipment, shall be made with gradually tapered transition fittings.
3.1.6 Whenever a flexible duct is used to correct misalignment between the supply duct and
the diffuser ceiling location, the misalignment (or offset) shall not exceed one-eighth
(1/8) the length of the collar (or diffuser diameter). Flexible duct length shall not
exceed 30 cm.
3.1.7 Changes in section of ductwork shall be effected by tempering in ducts with as long a
taper as possible. All branches shall be taken off at not more than 45 degree angle
from the axis of the main duct unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3.1.8 The ducts shall be securely anchored to the building in an approved manner.
3.1.9 The ducts shall be installed as to be completely free from vibration under all
conditions of operation.
3.1.10 The ducts and hangers shall be installed straight, plumb and level.
3.1.11 Wherever ducts pass thru walls or floors, a sleeve of galvanized mild steel sheet shall
be provided and the space between the pre-insulated duct and the sleeve shall be
caulked with lead wool and finished on each face with a mastic fill.
23 31 00 -5
Specifications
3.1.12 Flexible ducts should be kept as short as possible (maximum 30 cm) and fully
extended.
3.1.13 All slip joints shall be made in the direction of flow.
3.1.14 All elbows shall have a center line radius equal to at least 1.5 times the width of
the duct, otherwise turning vanes shall be installed in the elbows.
3.1.15 Adjustable splitters and hinged volume dampers shall be provided at every duct
junction on both supply and exhaust ductwork for adjusting air volumes.
3.1.16 Where splitters and dampers are installed above suspended ceiling, flush-mounted
controlling devices shall be used.
3.1.17 Connection to diffusers, grilles and registers shall be made absolutely airtight.
3.1.18 Equalizing grids or turning vanes shall be installed ahead of an air outlet whenever
poor approach conditions, from the main duct to the outlet, exist.
3.1.19 In critical low noise level projects, poor approach conditions are not allowed.
3.1.20 Where the duct is pierced for any reason, sealing compound shall be used.
3.1.21 All joints and fittings concealed in vertical duct shafts shall be welded.
3.1.22 For duct work balancing and testing refer to Section 23 05 93 Subsections 1.3 and
3.2.1 Unless it is required to provide ventilation during construction, the supply and return
heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) system openings must be closed
and protected from contamination. All ducts and other related air distribution
component openings must be covered with tape, plastic, sheet metal or other methods
to prevent dust or debris from collecting in the system.
3.2.2 During Construction, building occupant and systems must be protected from airborne
contaminants which are generated or spread during construction inside the buildings.
Including toxic substances or substances harmful to the human body, such as asbestos,
lead, pesticides, heavy metals, mold, dust, fumes, paint... etc.
3.2.3 Remove all foreign materials and clean the duct inside and outside.
3.2.4 Clean ducts before operating fans and filters. Never operate fans unless filters are
installed.

23 31 00 -6
Specifications
3.2.5 Immediately prior to occupancy, the temporary return air filters must be removed and
replaced with permanent filters having Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value
(MERV) in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2012 or an equivalent standard.
3.2.4 Operate the fans and thoroughly blow out the interior surfaces of the duct work.
3.2.5 After tests, wash cleanable filters and replace renewable media.
3.3 Access Openings in Insulated Ducts
3.3.1 Where ducts require to be thermally insulated the door frame shall be extended
beyond the face of the duct by a measurement equal to the thickness of the insulation
and as arranged so that the insulation can be 'dressed' into the frame. Doors or covers
shall be suitably insulated and provisions made to ensure that the seal is continuous
across the whole opening. The extent of the opening shall be clearly visible or
otherwise indicated. Where it is impossible to vapour seal an access opening,
provision shall be made for collecting and draining condensation.
3.4.1 Contractor is responsible for preparing method of statement to describes the method of
which the installation of equipment & Services Installation is carried out for this project .
3.4.2 Purpose of this method of statement is to ensure that correct material and equipment
and agreed Procedure are implemented during fabrication, installation & testing,
3.4.4 Method of statement to be reviewed by the commissioning engineer and approved by

the consultant.
END OF SECTION

23 31 00 -7
SECTION 23 33 00
AIR DUCTS ACCESSORIES
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Introduction……………… ...................................................................................... 1
1.2 Scope of Work……………………. .......................................................................... 1
1.3 Related Works Specified Elsewhere………………….. ............................................... 1
1.4 Reference Standards……………….. ......................................................................... 1
1.5 Fire Dampers – General Requirements……………………… ...................................... 2
1.6 Noise Attenuation……………………. ...................................................................... 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS…………….. ...................................................................................... 2
2.1 Volume Control Dampers………………….. ............................................................. 2
2.2 Gravity Dampers………………. .............................................................................. 3
2.3 Fire Dampers (Curtain Type)………………….. ......................................................... 3
2.4 Smoke Dampers………………… ............................................................................. 3
2.5 Motorized Dampers………………. .......................................................................... 4
2.6 Damper Actuators with Spring Return………………… .............................................. 5
2.7 Flexible Connections……………………….. ............................................................. 5
2.8 Belt Guards……………………. ............................................................................... 5
PART 3 EXECUTION……………… .................................................................................. 6
3.1 Access Openings………………….. .......................................................................... 6
Khatib & Alami Air Ducts Accessories

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 33 00
AIR DUCTS ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This section includes the design, supply, installation testing and commissioning of all
materials for the complete installation of air distribution specialties and duct
accessories for the air distribution system..
1.2 Scope of Work
design consultant’s approval of submitted samples, documents etc as per specifications
and applicable standards.

UL 555 Standard for fire Dampers and ceiling dampers

NFPA 90A Standard for the installation of air conditioning and ventilating
systems.

23 33 00 - 1
Specifications
ASTM – A525 Specification for general requirements for steel sheet, zinc-coated
(galvanized), by the Hot-dip process.
BS 5588-Part 9 Code of Practice for air-conditioning and ventilation duct work
1.5 Fire Dampers – General Requirements
1.5.1 Fire dampers shall be provided on all duct branches which pierce fireproof floors,
walls, shafts, ceilings and as required in accordance with NFPA SECTION NO. 90A.
1.5.2 Assemblies shall be complete with damper blades, fusible links, linkage and stops.
1.5.3 Dampers shall be proportioned and weighed to close at once if released from a link
with spring catches and shall stay closed until manually reset.
1.5.4 Dampers and frames shall have suitable peep holes.
1.5.5 Fire damper installation shall guarantee the fire wall integrity.
1.6.1 The Contractor shall supply and fix acoustic insulation and noise attenuator units
where necessary and as shown on drawings and/or required by the Specialist study to
reduce the air borne noise transmission through the distribution duct system, so that
the specified noise criteria levels are satisfied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Volume Control Dampers
2.1.1 Volume control dampers shall be complete with locking levers and quadrants,
indicating their position.
2.1.2 Volume dampers shall be provided whether shown/or not on drawings in main ducts,
in all branch ducts supplying three (3) or more air outlets, in all fresh air intakes etc to
achieve proper system balancing.
2.1.3 Volume control dampers shall be of the butterfly type for ducts 15" (380 mm) in depth
and lower, and multiple opposed blade type for ducts above 15" (380 mm) in depth.
Maximum blade size shall be 48" x 10" (1200 x 250 mm). For ducts larger than
48"(1200 mm), multiple frame sections shall be used. Blades shall not be less than 18
gauge. Duct shall be stiffened at damper location. Volume dampers for circular ducts
shall be of the multiple opposed blade type fitted in a square section.

23 33 00 - 2
Specifications
2.1.4 Upon completion of the ductwork, dampers shall be adjusted and set to deliver the
amounts of air indicated on the Drawings.
2.2 Gravity Dampers
2.2.1 Gravity dampers shall consist of:
a- Galvanized sheet steel frame.

b- Aluminum blades.
c- Stainless steel bearing shafts and brass bearings.
d- Neoprene seal to withstand 120 °C. air temperature.
e- Aluminum blade travel stop.
2.2.2 All blades shall be coupled together by means of an aluminum bar.
2.3 Fire Dampers (Curtain Type)
2.3.1 Each fire damper shall have a 2 hour fire protection rating and a 165 °F (73.9 °C)
fusible link. Fire damper frame shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel
channel. Blades shall be curtain type of 24 gauge galvanized steel and finish shall be
mill galvanized to ASTM A525 g-60.
2.3.2 Each fire damper shall be constructed and tested in accordance with UL Safety
Standard 555.
2.3.3 Fire dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation. Horizontal
mounted dampers shall be spring loaded.
2.3.4 All necessary accessories such as sleeves, angles etc. shall be provided for proper
installation of fire damper as per manufacturer instructions and it shall finally
guarantee the integrity of the fire wall.
2.4 Smoke Dampers
2.4.1 Furnish and install at all locations shown on plans, motorized dampers of the
following specifications. Frame shall be minimum of 16 gage galvanized steel formed
into a structural hat channel shape with tabbed comers for reinforcement. The blades
shall be single skin 16 gage minimum galvanized with three longitudinal grooves for
reinforcement. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve turning in an extruded hole in
the frame. Jamb seal shall be stainless steel flexible metal compression type.
2.4.2 Each damper shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Leakage Rated

Damper for use in smoke control systems. The leakage rating under UL555S shall be

23 33 00 - 3
Specifications
leakage Class III (40 cfm/ft.at 1" w.g.).
2.4.3 As part of the UL qualification, dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to operate
(to open and close) under HVAC system operating conditions with pressure of at least
4" w.g. in the closed position and 2000 fpm air velocity in the open position.
2.4.4 In addition to the leakage ratings already specified herein, the dampers and their
actuators shall be rated for the elevated temperature anticipated by the smoke but not
less than 572°F (300°C). Appropriate electric actuators shall be installed by the
damper manufacturer at time of damper fabrication. Damper and actuator shall be
supplied as a single entity which meets all applicable UL 555S qualifications for both
dampers and actuators. Factory supplied caulked sleeve shall be 20 gage for dampers
through 84" wide and 18 gage above 64" wide. Damper and actuator assembly shall
be factory tested to assure operation. All wiring or piping material required to
interconnect the actuator with detection and/or alarm or BMS system shall be
furnished under fire alarm on BMS installation as applicable.
2.4.5 Blade Position Indicator:- Each smoke damper shall be equipped with two position
indicator switches linked directly to the damper blade to provide the capability of
remotely indicating damper blade position.
2.4.6 For Damper actuator, refer to item 2.6.
2.5 Motorized Dampers
2.5.1 Motorized automatic dampers shall be of the louver type with not less than 13 gauge
welded steel frames and galvanized finish. Blades shall have interlocking edges,
stainless steel side springs (or vinyl or neoprene gaskets), and teflon-coated stainless
steel thrust washers. Blades shall be edged with neoprene if the damper is to operate in
outside air service either as an intake or discharge damper. Damper blades shall have
steel trunnions mounted in nylon or oilite bearings.
2.5.2 Dampers shall be not more than 1200mm. in length between bearings. Modulating
dampers shall be of the opposed blade type unless specified otherwise. Blades shall be
not over 200mm. in width and shall not be less than 16 gauge galvanized steel.
Hardware shall be zinc plated. One damper actuator shall be provided for each 1.5 sq.
meter of damper area.
2.5.3 Provide parallel blade dampers arranged for maximum turbulence and mixing of
outside air with return air. Arrange dampers as necessary to prevent stratification or
provide baffles necessary to correct stratification problems.

23 33 00 - 4
Specifications
2.5.4 Provide dampers of low leakage construction, so designed that the maximum leakage
shall be 10 cfm/ft2 (0.005 m3/s/m2) of damper with 4" WG. (1 Kpa) pressure
differential applied.
2.5.5 For Damper actuator, refer to item 2.6.
2.6 Damper Actuators with Spring Return
2.6.1 The spring return actuators shall combine safety and control functionality and provide
on/off, floating, and modulating control interfaces with a wide range of available
accessories. These actuators shall have a bidirectional fail safe functionality and a
self-centering shaft adapter or exchangeable hub insert to fit on all dampers quickly
and securely. Quick start-up and service shall be ensured by a manual override, a
highly-visible position indicator, dual-point mounting options and auxiliary switches.
These products shall be used for ventilation and air-conditioning systems for
ventilation flaps and air handlers where the fail safe functionality is required.
2.7 Flexible Connections
2.7.1 Flexible connections of approved flame retardant fabric to prevent the transmission of
vibration through the ducts shall be installed on both the supply and return sides of all
fans and ventilating units for a maximum length of 250mm. and a minimum of
100mm. in the direction of the flow. The fabric shall have a flame spread rating of not
over 25 and a smoke developed rating of not higher than 50.
2.7.2 Flexible connections shall connect ducts across structural expansion joints.
2.7.3 Cloth used for flexible connections shall be of proper weight and strength for the
service required, and shall be properly fitted to render it relatively tight.
2.7.4 Neoprene laminated fabric, with neoprene facing on interior surface, shall be used for
ducts handling other than clean dry air.
2.7.5 Flexible duct connection used for air conditioning, air handling units shall have vinyle
coated fabric insulated with 1" (25 mm) fiberglass insulation of 0.75 lbs/ft3 (12
Kg/m3) minimum density, designed to NFPA-90 or BS 5588 part 9 Standards. The
connector should be pre-assembled metal to fabric.
2.7.6 The connector shall be 24 gauge galvanized zinc to ASTM-A525 G 60.
2.8 Belt Guards
2.8.1 Guards shall be provided for all belt-driven units.

2.8.2 Guards shall be made to enclose both pulleys and belts on exposed sides and shall be
constructed of galvanized steel top and bottom with perforated or expanded metal front
Pittsburgh-locked into the rim.
23 33 00 - 5
Specifications
2.8.3 The entire assembly shall be rigidly supported.
2.8.4 Provision shall be made for accessibility of all points drilled to receive tachometer.
2.8.5 Provide coupling guards on direct-connected units.
2.8.6 Guards shall be designed for easy removal for service and shall comply with
Underwriters' Safety Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Access Openings
3.1.1 General
3.1.1.1 Access doors shall be provided for volume damper quadrants installed in concealed
spaces, for control valves, for fire dampers or as specified hereinafter.
3.1.1.2 All access openings shall be rigidly framed and made air-tight. Covers shall be
simply and speedily removed and re-fixed. Multiple set screws or self-tapping screws
will not be acceptable as a method of fixing. Access doors and other openings in
ductwork shall be provided for the purposes given below. The number, size and
locations shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as necessary to ensure adequate
access to equipment and plant.
3.1.2 Access for Personnel
3.1.2.1 Access doors shall not be larger than 1350mm. high by 500mm. wide, unless
essential for equipment handling. Doors shall open against the air pressure. Duct
openings and the access doors shall be adequately reinforced to prevent distortion.
Suitable sealing gaskets shall be provided together with sufficient clamping type
latches to ensure air-tight and water-tight sealing between the door and the duct. All
personnel access openings shall have latch handles on both the inside and outside of
the door.
3.1.3 Access for Maintenance, Cleaning and Inspection
3.1.3.1 Inspection openings shall generally not be larger than 300mm high by 400mm. wide
unless essential for access to equipment, in which case the size shall be agreed before
manufacture. The opening in the duct shall be adequately stiffened and the door
cover sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion. Approved sealing gaskets and suitable
fastenings shall be provided to ensure air-tight sealing.

23 33 00 - 6
Specifications
3.1.4 Test Holes for Test Equipment and Instruments
3.1.4.1 Test holes shall be provided wherever instructed by the engineer, and in all main
ducts and branch ducts to correctly establish design air flows and to check the
performance of fans and regulating dampers. All holes shall be 25mm. dia. and
suitably strengthened. Cover plates shall be screw-fixed to the duct and sealed.
3.1.5 Access Openings in Insulated Ducts
3.1.5.1 beyond the face of the duct by a measurement equal to the thickness of the insulation
and as arranged so that the insulation can be 'dressed' into the frame. Doors or covers
shall be suitably insulated and provisions made to ensure that the seal is continuous
across the whole opening. The extent of the opening shall be clearly visible or
otherwise indicated. Where it is impossible to vapour seal an access opening,
provision shall be made for collecting and draining condensation.
END OF SECTION

23 33 00 - 7
SECTION 23 34 00
HVAC FANS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART - 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................... 1
1.03 Codes and Standards .......................................................................................................... 1
1.04 General Requirements for Ventilating Fans ....................................................................... 2
PART - 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 3
2.01 Staircase / Lift Well Pressurization Fans ........................................................................... 3
2.02 Vane Axial Fans ................................................................................................................. 4
2.03 Centrifugal In-Line Fans .................................................................................................... 4
2.04 Roof Ventilators ................................................................................................................. 5
2.05 Fresh Air Fans .................................................................................................................... 5
2.06 Spare Parts .......................................................................................................................... 6
2.07 Special Tools ...................................................................................................................... 6
2.08 Operation and Maintenance Manuals ................................................................................. 6
2.09 Guarantee and Warranted Period ....................................................................................... 6
2.10 Method of statement ........................................................................................................... 7
Khatib & Alami HVAC Fans

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 34 00
HVAC FANS
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope of Work
A. The works covered under this Section shall include all the supply, installation, testing
and delivery in good operating conditions of a complete Ventilating system as
described, shown detailed or implied in the tender documents of the project.
The Contractor shall supply and install fans of capacities indicated on the Drawings.
Authority regulations and Sustainability requirements shall also be considered and
more stringent specifications to be adopted. Manufacturing of all fans should be in
accordance with ASHRAE 62.1-2016, section 5.
B. The Contractor shall provide all the necessary components and accessories as well as
manpower, scaffolding, painting, testing facilities, etc... at his own expense to execute
a complete operable system.
C. The Contractor shall program his work such that it will not interfere with other trades
and to suit site requirements.

Section 23 05 48 - Mech. Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control for Piping and
Equipment
A. Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards and
23 34 00-1
Specifications
Standard
American Society ASHRAE - -
of Heating
Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning
Engineers.
National Electrical NEMA - -
Manufacturers
Association
National Electrical NEC Section 424 -
Code
Air Moving and AMCA - -
Conditioning
Associations
National Fire NFPA NFPA 90A Standard for Air Conditioning
Protection and Ventilation Systems
Association
Underwriters UL UL181 -
Laboratories
American ASTM ATSM A525-75 Specification for general
Standards for requirements for steel sheet,
testing and zinc-coated (galvanized) by the
Materials hot-dip process.
1.04 General Requirements for Ventilating Fans
A. The fan motors and starters shall be in accordance with the Electrical division of these
specifications.
B. Test and rate all fans in accordance with the standards of the AMCA. All fans must
bear the AMCA certified rating seal.
C. Make appropriate allowance for the effects on fan performance of all installation
conditions including plenum enclosures and inlet and discharge arrangements so that
actual installed fan performance equals that specified.
D. Balance all fan wheels and all other moving components statically and dynamically.
Where coating is specified and it affects the balance of the fan wheel, perform
balancing after the coating has been applied.
E. Drill all fan shafts on the center line to receive a tachometer.
F. Belt driven fans shall be connected to the driving motor by means of an approved V-
belt drive, with adjustable sheaves, unless otherwise designated. V-belt drives shall be
designed for 50% overload capacity and the motors for such drives shall be equipped
with adjustable bases or slide rails.
G. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball-bearing type, and shall be
23 34 00-2
Specifications
complete with grease fittings, extended for easy access where necessary.
H. Weather proof hoods should be provided for all motors and drives exposed to weather
to the approval of the Engineer.
I. Back draft dampers, gravity type, shall be installed on the fan discharge of all fans
discharging directly to the atmosphere except the kitchen hood fan.
J. Fans scheduled for the exhaust of kitchen equipment hoods and high temperature
exhaust systems shall include an up blast arrangement on the discharge with complete
grease drainage and insulated heat shield to protect motor and drive, all designed for
high temperature services.
K. Fans are to operate steadily without pulsation at design conditions. Centrifugal fan
characteristic curves must be such that the fan operating point falls below the point of
no flow static pressure, to the right of the point corresponding to that of maximum
mechanical efficiency, and a 15% increase in static pressure over that specified results
in not more than a 15% reduction in cfm and does not affect the stability of fan
operation. If necessary, accomplish the foregoing by modifying the width of the wheel
and/or by providing inlet vanes to change the characteristic curve.
L. Performance curves shall be submitted for each fan for approval.
M. Fans power shall not exceed 2.8 Watt/Lit/Sec. or as requested by LEED/GREEN
requirements.
N. All parts of fans used for smoke exhaust shall be rated not less than 572 0F (3000C)
for 2 hours.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Staircase / Lift Well Pressurization Fans
A. Pressurization fan shall be of the type specified on drawings. Average life of fan
bearing shall not be less than 200,000 hours. Fan shall be complete with:
a. Electric motor mounted on one chassis with the fan.

b. Reinforced heavy gauge fan casing.
c. Metallic fixing frame and supports.
d. Dust proof, non-fused disconnect switch.
e. Pulleys, belt drive and belt guard.
f. Spring vibration isolators.
g. Heavy flanges on both sections of housing for assembly. Flanged joints shall be
gasketed for air tightness.
h. Galvanized steel mesh screen.
i. Non-return damper
j. Fans shall be supplied complete with minimum IP55 sheet steel Control Panel
(CP) as indicated in Electrical Drawings. The panel shall include but shall not be
limited to the following:-
• Door interlocked diconnect switch

• Duty alternator (where needed)
• Cricuit breaker
• Motor starters

23 34 00-3
Specifications
• On/Off/Auto with pilot light
• Control power transformer
• Control wiring
• Volt free contacts for connection to BMS
• Single phasing protection.
B. Fans shall be coated at the factory with anti-corrosion coating as recommended by the
manufacturer, for outdoor use in high temperature and humid atmosphere.
C. Fans shall be interlocked with fire alarm panel to be activated in case of fire in any
particular zone.
D. Fans should be constant flow system ,Relief damper shall be installed inside staircase
to ensure a maiximum postive pressure 25 pascal.
2.02 Vane Axial Fans
A. Each fan shall be of the axial type with belt driven aero foil impeller. Casing shall be
fabricated from mild steel hot dipped galvanized after manufacture.
B. Each fan shall be complete with:
• Electric motor mounted on fan casing.

• Sealed ball bearings
• V-belth with pullies keyed to the shaft.
• Belt tunner and screen.
• Intergral guide vanes.
• Protection ground.
• All parts of Fan used for smoke exhaust shall be rated for the high temperature
anticipated by the smoke, but not less than 572 0F (3000C) for 2 hours.
parking fans should be equiped with VFD ,carbon-monoxide (co) detectors located within the
space shall control the speed of the exhaust fan and fresh air fans according to the co
concentrations (contractor to verify the quantity of detectors to be installed according to the
detection range and the manufacturer recommendations).
The contractor has to coordinate with both the fire alarm system integration and the bas specialist
to ensure the fire alarm system shall have the full control and operation in case of smoke and fire
detection.
2.03 Centrifugal In-Line Fans
A. Fan shall be of the centrifugal in-line type all aluminum construction and shall be
complete with:
1. Electric motor mounted outside the air stream, when air temperature inside the
duct is above 200 °F (93 °C), otherwise inside air stream.
2. Metallic fixing frame and supports.
3. Dust proof, non-fused disconnect switch under motor casing.

23 34 00-4
Specifications
4. Belt drive and belt guard or as stated in Capacity Schedule.
5. Vibration isolators.
6. Aluminium air foil blades impeller with non-overloading horse power
characteristic.
7. Flexible duct connection at each end.
2.04 Roof Ventilators
A. Each roof ventilator shall be of the centrifugal vertical discharge type coupled through
a belt drive to its electric drive motor suitable for roof mounting and outdoor
operation.
B. Each roof ventilator shall be complete with:
1. Electric motor suitable for outdoor operation.
2. Aluminium protective cowl and body.
3. Metallic fixing and supporting frame.
4. Weather proof non fused disconnect switch under fan cowl.
5. Galvanized steel bird screen.
6. Automatic shutter
C. All parts of fans used for smoke exhaust shall be rated not less than 572 0F (3000C)
for 2 hours.
D. Kitchen hood exhaust fan shall be up blast type and should withstand 300°C for one
hour.
2.05 Fresh Air Fans
A. Fan shall be of the centrifugal double inlet width, backward curved blades type with
non-overloading design wheel diameters and outlets areas shall be in accordance with
the standard sizes adopted by the AMCA for non-overloading fans. Inlets shall be
fully stream lined and housing shall be suitably braced to prevent vibration or
pulsation.
B. Fan shall be supplied complete with:
1. Electric motor mounted on one chassis with the fan.
2. Reinforced heavy gauge fan casing.
3. Metallic fixing frame and supports.
4. Pulleys, belt drive and belt guard (of expanded metal with tachometer hole).
5. Vibration isolators.
6. Fan wheels with die formed backward curved blades designed for maximum
efficiency and quiet operations. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically
balanced.
7. Heavy flanges on both sides of housing. Flanged joints shall be gasketed for air
tightness.
8. Fan inertia should be checked against motor capability. If fan inertia is found
larger, then a centrifugal or plate clutching service should be used to enable the
23 34 00-5
Specifications
fan to be brought up to speed without damaging the motor.
9. Motorized damper at fan outlet to open and close with fan on/off operation.
2.06 Spare Parts
2.07 Special Tools
A. A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipment
preventative maintenance or service from the manufactures or suppliers of equipment
or according to the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1-2010 or equivalent as approved by Authority containing
the following material: -
1. Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features. The
component
2. Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional components of
the systems listed on the Drawings, control diagrams and wiring diagrams of
3. Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
4. Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
5. List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
6. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control diagrams
and wiring diagrams of controllers.
7. Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor

8. The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to
9. All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion
date.
23 34 00-6
Specifications
B. All guarantee shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor shall
disbursements.
A. Contractor is responsible for preparing method of statement to describes the method

of which the installation of equipment & Services Installation is carried out for this
project
B. Purpose of this method of statement is to ensure that correct material and equipment
C. This method of statement specify sequence and methodology to be followed for the
D. Method of statement to be reviewed by the commissioning engineer and approved by
the consultant.
END OF SCTION

23 34 00-7
SECTION 23 36 00
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 1
2.1 Variable Air Volume Units (Pressure Independent Type) ................................................. 1
2.2 Spare Parts .......................................................................................................................... 2
2.3 Special Tools ...................................................................................................................... 2
2.4 Operation and Maintenance Manuals ................................................................................. 2
2.5 Guarantee and Warrantee Period........................................................................................ 3
Khatib & Alami Section 23 34 00 - Air Terminal Units

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 36 00
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 Works of this section shall be governed by Contract Conditions requirements.
1.1.2 Variable Air Volume (VAV) Units shall be as per the capacities shown on drawings
and/or indicated in Bill of Quantities. Special attention should be made for the upper
& downstream pressure when selecting the VAV.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Variable Air Volume Units (Pressure Independent Type)
2.1.1 Casing shall be rectangular type welded 22-gauge galvanized steel with only two
longitudinal seams, one-piece construction. Unit shall have one round air inlet, one
rectangular discharge outlet to the room.
2.1.2 Insulation-Interior surface of unit casing shall be acoustically and thermally lined
with 1 inch (25 mm) 1.9 lb/cu.ft. (30 kg/m3) density glass fiber with high density
facing. insulation shall be UL listed and meets NFPA 90A and UL 181.
2.1.3 Air terminal shall be fitted with control damper to regulate the supply air flow
between the scheduled inlet minimum and maximum. The damper shaft shall be solid
Khatib & Alami Air Terminal Units
23 36 00 - 1
Specifications
aluminum rotating in self-lubricating, permanently impregnated nylon bearings. The
damper shall permit proper operation of the terminal over a range of 20 to 100% of
maximum flow. All VAV terminals shall be factory calibrated to meet the system
design requirements in close co-ordination with controls supplier. The VAV terminals
shall be factory equipped with averaging air flow sensor. The sensor shall be installed
at the air inlet. The sensor shall provide a velocity pressure amplification of at least
20 over the inlet velocity pressure. The sensor shall contain multiple air sensing
points. These points shall be arranged in two perpendicular axis of sensing. The holes
shall be arranged such that each four points in a ring sense the air pressure across
concentric circles of equal area in a round duct. As a result, the air velocity pressure
shall be sensed with an accuracy of not less than 12.5% over the range of operation
from minimum to maximum.
2.1.4 Electronic actuators shall be supplied by the Building Management System specialist
(if exists) and the actuator shall be factory installed. Control boards shall be provided
with ventilated cover.
2.1.5 The VAV terminal shall work properly without any condensation on the inside of the
box or downstream ductwork even at low supply air temperature as low as 9 oC (48.2
o
F).
2.2 Spare Parts
2.3 Special Tools
supplied, adequate for 12 months’ operation shall be supplied by the Contractor at the
Instruction Manuals as per ASHRAE 62.1-2016, Part 8 containing the following
material: -
2.4.1.1 Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation
features. The manual shall be developed, updated as necessary, and
maintained on site or in centrally accessible location for the working life
of the system equipment and component.
2.4.1.2 Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional

components of the systems listed on the Drawings, control diagrams and

23 36 00 - 2
Specifications
wiring diagrams of controllers. List shall give system No., unit no.,
Manufacturer's Model No., and Manufacture's Drawing no. Parts list
shall include manufacturer's recommended spare parts for one year
operation.
2.4.1.5 Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control

diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers.
2.4.1.6 Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical

motor controller connections and interlock connections of other
2.4.1.7 The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his
review as to the fulfilment of the specified requirements.
2.4.1.8 All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial
completion date.
disbursements.
2.5.4 The Contractor shall issue a letter of guarantee for every compressor installed under
his contract for a period of five years, starting from the date of issue of the substantial
completion certificate. Contractor shall replace the defective compressor by a new
one and shall submit a report to the Engineer explaining the reason of damage and
methods to cure it.
END OF SCTION
23 36 00 - 3
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Introduction……………… .................................................................................... 1
1.2 Scope of Work………………................................................................................. 1
1.3 Related Works Specified Elsewhere………………. .................................................. 1
1.4 Reference Standards…………… ............................................................................ 1
1.5 Air Distribution Outlets General Requirements……………. ...................................... 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS………….. ........................................................................................ 2
2.1 Square - Air Diffusers………….. ............................................................................ 2
2.2 Linear Diffusers………… ...................................................................................... 3
2.3 Linear Bar Grilles…………… ............................................................................... .3
2.4 Grilles and Registers……………… ........................................................................ 3
2.5 Fresh Air and Discharge Louvers…………… .......................................................... 4
2.6 Sand Trap Louvers……………. ............................................................................. 4
2.7 Door Louvers…………….. .................................................................................... 4
PART 3 EXECUTION…………. ............................................................. ………………….4
3.1 Installation…………… .......................................................................................... 4
3.2 Fixing……………. ............................................................................................... 5
3.3 Rejected…………….. ........................................................................................... 5
Khatib & Alami Air Outlets and Inlets

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This section of specification includes the design, supply, installation testing and
commissioning of the Air inlets and outlets for the complete air conditioning and
ventilating system including fresh air intakes, louvers, grilles, diffusers etc.
1.2 Scope of Work
design consultant’s approval of samples, submitted documents etc as per specifications

DW 142 British Heating & Ventilating Contractors association Code of

Practice
NFPA Standard for the installation of air conditioning and ventilating
90A systems
ADC Air diffusion council

23 37 00 - 1
Specifications
1.5 Air Distribution Outlets General Requirements
1.5.1 All air outlets shall be of, at least the sizes indicated on the Drawings. Irrespective of
the sizes indicated on drawings, diffusers/grillers shall be sized such that the noise
spectrum of the supply outlets not higher than NC-30, and not exceeding a velocity of
3 m/sec but in all cases outlet selected shall perform within the noise level requirement
of the space it is supplying. Outlets shall be supplied with foam rubber gaskets to
prevent air leakage.
1.5.2 Where supply or return outlets are installed in continuous line, omit intermediate
frames and margins. Provide guides for each element to keep adjoining lengths aligned
and butted without breaks. All outlets shall be constructed of aluminum of the color
specified or as selected by the Engineer.
1.5.3 Outlets causing excessive air movement, drafts or objectionable noise shall be
replaced at no cost to the owner.
1.5.4 All outlets shall be powder coated, samples showing finish and color shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to supplying the outlets to Site.
1.5.5 The Contractor shall provide in his Tender for delaying the fixing of loose grilles until
all other trades have completed their work, returning to the Site to fit the grilles as and
when required to do so.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Square - Air Diffusers
2.1.1 Air diffusers shall be of the diffusion and air mixing type and shall be made of
anodized aluminum.
2.1.2 Supplied air shall be diffused with no air velocities in excess of 50 fpm. (0.25 m/s) at
1800 mm height or less above the floor line. Room air shall be mixed with the primary
air by induction to effect subsequent uniformity of the room temperature without
stratification.
2.1.3 Each diffuser shall be provided with an aluminum opposed blade damper.
2.1.4 Diffuser shall not project appreciably below ceiling or duct.
2.1.5 The inner assembly of the diffusers shall be attached to the outer assembly by means
of a lock permitting assembly and disassembly without the use of tools.
2.1.6 The noise level shall be measured at a point one meter below the diffuser.

23 37 00 - 2
Specifications
2.2 Linear Diffusers
2.2.1 Continuous slim line diffusers shall have extruded white anodized aluminum vanes
and frames, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, and shall be designed for
surface mounting on wall, ceiling or sill.
2.2.2 Diffusers shall be capable of diffusing air in a horizontal or vertical plane, combining
discharge air diffusion, 20% aspiration and secondary air motion causing the discharge
air to be diffused in such a manner that the air is delivered in a multiplicity of high and
low pressure air currents causing turbulent air motion and insuring complete coverage
and temperature uniformity within the space served.
2.2.3 The diffuser shall be provided with equalizing deflector and damper to accomplish
uniform distribution throughout the length of the outlet.
2.2.4 The noise level shall be measured at a point 1800 mm below on either side of the
diffuser.
2.3 Linear Bar Grilles
2.3.1 Linear grille shall have extruded polyester powder coated aluminum fixed bar and
frames, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings and shall be designed for surface
mounting.
2.3.2 Grilles shall be capable of diffusing air in a horizontal or vertical plane with 0° to 15°
or 30° deflection. Air shall be diffused in such a manner that the air is delivered in a
multiplicity of high and low pressure air currents causing turbulent air motion and
insuring complete coverage and temperature uniformity within the space served.
2.3.3 The grille shall be provided with directional blades and damper to accomplish uniform
distribution throughout the length of the outlet. All deflection bars shall be securely
fixed and shall be parallel to the long dimension.
2.3.4 The noise level shall be measured at a point 1800 mm below on either side of the
diffuser.
2.4 Grilles and Registers
2.4.1 All grilles shall be mounted upon substantial frames connected to the duct work, and
shall be provided with soft plastic mounting rings inserted under the frame, so as to
obviate leaks behind the grille.
2.4.2 All supply grilles and high level return grilles shall be double deflection, with
horizontal face blade in the front, with airfoil blade construction, with minimum of 19
mm flange with gasket.
2.4.3 Supply registers shall be double deflection, horizontal face bars, airfoil blade
construction, with aluminum opposed blade, key operated volume dampers, and 19

23 37 00 - 3
Specifications
mm minimum gasket flange.
2.4.4 Return grille at low levels and fresh air grilles shall be single deflection fixed blade
type with 19mm. flange with gasket where the sheet metal is visible behind the grille,
paint the interior surface of the sheet metal flat black.
2.5 Fresh Air and Discharge Louvers
2.5.1 Louvers for fresh air intake, and for exhaust. They shall be white anodized aluminum.
2.5.2 Louvers shall be weatherproof, with fixed blades set at 30 degree and shall have a free
area of 85%.
2.5.3 Louvers shall be furnished with ½" (13mm) mesh-bird screen secured in removable
extruded Aluminum frames.
2.6 Sand Trap Louvers
2.6.1 Sand trap louver shall have a high degree of separation of sand and large dust
particles, even in cases of high dust concentrations. The vertically arranged sections
and holes for sand drainage shall ensure the sand trap louver is self-cleaning and
maintenance free. The sand trap louver shall be designed to separate large particles at
low air velocities, thus avoiding excessive dust loading.
2.6.2 The sand trap louver shall be constructed in polyester powder coated aluminum, and
shall be complete with transom, sand chute and galvanized bird screen. Color shall be
to Engineer’s approval.
2.7 Door Louvers
2.7.1 The door louvers shall be sized so that the face velocity does not exceed 250 fpm (1.3
m/s) unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2.7.2 The louver shall be extruded aluminum completely lightproof V-Section with double
frame.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 All outlets shall be erected, leveled and accurately set in position, to ensure symmetry
with other grilles, light fittings, etc. It has been arranged that final minor adjustments
to suspension levels to obtain final accurate alignment between the ceiling and light
fittings, diffusers, etc., shall be executed by those responsible for erecting the false
ceilings.
23 37 00 - 4
Specifications
3.2 Fixing
3.2.1 All outlets shall be concealed fixing type with no screws.
3.3 Rejected
3.3.1 Any imperfect outlet scratched or damaged surfaces of fixing screws having damaged
heads, or scratched plating, will be rejected and shall be replaced satisfactorily before
the Contract Works will be taken over as complete.
END OF SECTION

23 37 00 - 5
SECTION 23 38 00
VENTILATION HOOD
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
VENTILATION HOOD.............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 KITCHEN HOODS ( DOUBLE SKIN).................................................................. 1
______________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami Ventilation Hood
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 38 00
VENTILATION HOOD
1.1 KITCHEN HOODS (DOUBLE SKIN)
1.1.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings double skin Hoods of shape
shown on the drawings and shall overhang the cooking equipment approximately 300
mm. on all sides with approximately 600mm. high inside clear dimensions. Hood shall
be fabricated of # 18 ga. stainless steel with all seamless welded construction, all
inside corners rounded to 25mm.radius.
1.1.2 Hood shall be formed back on approximately 30-degree angle and arranged to accept
lighting fixtures herein specified. The hood shall be furnished with a full length filter
bank set at approximately 60-degree angle and be provided with a full length plenum
chamber constructed of gauge material as the hood. Plenum chamber shall be provided
with g dampers to suit the duct sizes shown on the ventilation drawings. The lower
edge of the hood shall be welded to a # 14 ga. stn. stl. one piece watertight
condensation trim member approximately 50 x 100 x 25mm. for the full perimeter of
the hood. The hood body shall be reinforced with 40 x 40 x 4mm. steel angles at
approximately 600mm. O.C. formed to the contour of the hood section, concealed
fastenings or welding shall be used, and the ends of the hood flat. A 1/2"(13mm) ips
stainless steel threaded coupling together with a length of drip pipe, to spill to floor
drain shall be provided.
1.1.3 Hood and gutter shall be hung from structural members above.
Grease filters measuring approximately 500 x 250 x 50mm. shall be provided for the
full length of the hood, with lift handles set into permanent stainless steel snug air
tight frame and easily removable without the use of tools.
1.1.4 Hood shall be fabricated in a minimum number of sections with hair line butt field
joints.
1.1.5 Hood shall be provided with lighting fixtures, as herein described, equally spaced,
wired with Type A.V.A. wire in rigid galvanized conduit. Fixtures shall be
commercial vapor-tight square surface mounted units with square prismatic glass panel
for a 150-watt lamp. Fixtures shall consist of a square metal housing with provisions
for mounting in stainless steel hood together with horizontally mounted lamp with
dome shaped aluminum reflectors. Square face plate shall be formed of # 18 ga.
stainless steel with satin finished hinged panel, and shall contain 215mm. square
diffusers. Diffusers shall be jacketed to frames and frames jacketed to housing forming
completely vapor tight units.
1.1.6 The face of all exposed sides of the hood below ceiling shall be enclosed with vertical
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 38 00 - 1
Specifications
facing of # 18 ga. stainless steel panels shall measure not more than 900mm. in width,
with each second panel removable and provided with a stainless steel recessed finger
grip. Where panels meet at vertical joints, they shall be flanged inward 250 mm to
form a hairline joint. Provide a # 14 ga. stainless steel trim member at ceiling and at
joints against walls.
1.1.7 Hood shall be fitted with built in automatic total flooding fire protection system
utilizing dry powder designed and installed in accordance with NFPA. Fire protection
System shall be UL listed. Contractor to submit all necessary calculations and system
components for approval.
1.1.8 Installation of Kitchen Hood Dishwasher Ductwork

Ductwork for the kitchen hoods and dishwasher shall be fabricated and installed in
accordance with the Uniform Mechanical Code, Chapter 20. Exposed ducts shall be of
stainless steel. Hidden ducts shall be of black steel painted and insulated as specified.
All duct connections shall be flange type with fire rated gasket. Access doors shall be
provided at each change of direction.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 38 00 - 2
SECTION 23 40 00
AIR CLEANING DEVICES
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Introduction…………… ................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Scope of Work……………… ........................................................................................... 1
1.3 Related Works Specified Elsewhere……………….. ....................................................... 1
1.4 Reference Standards……………… .................................................................................. 1
1.5 General Requirements………………. .............................................................................. 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS…………….. ............................................................................................... 2
2.1 FILTER ELEMENTS……………….. ............................................................................. 2
Khatib & Alami Air Cleaning Devices

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 40 00
AIR CLEANING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This section includes the design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
complete air cleaning devices for air conditioning systems.
1.2 Scope of Work
design consultant’s approval of submitted samples, documents etc as per specifications
1.3.1 he works specified in the following sections are included in this Section in each
applicable part, as if repeated herein verbatim.

Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and control for HVAC
Section 25 00 00 - Building Automation system
ASHRA American society of heating, refrigeration and air

E conditioning.
UL Underwriters laboratories
NBS Atmospheric Dust Spot Method
1.5.1 Provide temporary filter elements in the filter banks of supply systems used during
construction prior to using the system.

23 40 00 - 1
Specifications
1.5.2 MERV values shown below should be as per ASHRAE Standards 52.2- 2012.
1.5.3 Temporary filter elements shall be throw-away type with frames taped air-tight.
1.5.4 Immediately prior to test and balance operations, replace temporary filters with a new
set of specified filter elements.
1.5.5 After final acceptance, a new set of filter elements shall either be delivered to owner
or installed to replace "Test" filters, as directed by Owner.
1.5.6 Provide throw-away filters of thickness to fit frames of unitary equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILTER ELEMENTS
2.1.1 Throw-away Filter
2.1.1.1 Throw-away filters - 2" (50 mm) thick fiberglass media contained in rigid frame with
a supporting maze across both entering and leaving faces of media, with minimum
MERV of 7 with maximum initial resistance of 0.17" WG. (42 pa) at 500 FPM (2.5
m/s) face velocity.
2.1.1.2 Provide throw-away filters of thickness to fit frames of unitary equipment.
2.1.2 Bag Filter
2.1.2.1 Bag type filters shall be supported on substantial wire mesh frames fixed in a housing
assembly containing the filter bags. The housing frames shall be drilled for assembly
into a multiple battery suitable for mounting directly onto the downstream side of the
outdoor louvers or grilles.
2.1.2.2 Each bag is made up from three distinct layers of filter media. The first layer should
provide dust holding capacity for long life, the second fine filtration of smaller
particles and the third prevent fiber migration.
2.1.2.3 Filters shall be bag type, of high performance rating with performed, and deep
pleated construction. The media shall be micro fine fiberglass, reinforced by a
laminated synthetic backing, the filter shall have minimum MERV of 13 Filters shall
be 24" x 24" x 12" (600x600x300)deep with an effective filter media area of not less
than 41 sq.ft.(3.8 m2).
2.1.2.4 Bag filters shall have an initial clean filter resistance to air-flow not exceeding 0.28"
WG. (70 pa) and a final resistance (dirty) not exceeding 0.5" WG. (125 pa). The first
layer shall be of graduated density continuous filament glass, the second layer shall
consist of the fiberglass or synthetic media, while the third layer shall consist of spun
nylon backing.

23 40 00 - 2
Specifications
2.1.3 Grease Filters
2.1.3.1 Grease filters- 2"(50mm) thick, constructed of cross-pleated layers of fine mesh
aluminum media with aluminum frame. Filter shall be the high capacity, low
resistance type which can be cleaned in hot water with a household detergent
maximum initial resistance shall be 0.1"wg (25pa) at a rated face velocity of 500
FPM (2.5 m/s).
2.1.4 Cleanable Filter

2.1.4.1 Cleanable filter: 2" (50mm) thick aluminum media, contained in aluminum frame.
Filter shall have minimum MERV of 13 and it shall be capable of being completely
cleaned by flushing with tap water. Holding frames shall be provided with
polyurethane seals and stainless steel spring latches.
2.1.5 High Efficiency Filters

2.1.5.1 Pre-Filter
2.1.5.1.1 Filters shall be permanent, impingement, washable, all metal panel type. Media shall
be 2" thick aluminum mesh screen arranged in alternate layers of flat and herring-
bone crimp screen, a layer of each per inch, so that at no point is air flow restricted to
flow through the screen, 1/8" rod reinforced, and enclosed in a frame of 16 gauge
galvanized steel (T-Section), with flush mitered corners, felt air seal, and filter locking
device. Resistance to air flow of clean filter shall not exceed 0.12" WG. at 3.6 cfm per
square inch of net face area. Filter shall have minimum MERV of 13 and it shall be
capable of being completely cleaned by flushing with tap water.
2.1.5.1.2 Filter shall be panel type size 24 " x 24" and provided with bail type handles for easy
removal. Panels shall be arranged as a built-up filters banks suitable for upstream
removal.
2.1.5.2 Final Filter:
2.1.5.2.1 Filters shall be bag type, of high performance rating with performed, deep pleated
construction. The media shall be micro fine fiberglass, reinforced by a laminated
synthetic backing; the filter shall have a minimum MERV of 13. Filters shall be 24"
x 24" x 12" (600x600x300) deep with an effective filter media area of not less than 41
sq.ft.(3.8 m2)
2.1.5.2.2 Media retainer shall be of welded steel construction and shall be designed in such a

23 40 00 - 3
Specifications
manner that it supports the multiple pleats of the filter element against the direction of
air flow. Holding frame shall be of 16 gauge galvanized steel and shall be equipped
with gaskets and four spring type positive sealing fasteners which can be removed
without the use of tools. Sealer frame shall be fabricated of 20 gauge galvanized steel
with gaskets on the rear flange.
2.1.5.3 Framing System:
2.1.5.3.1 The filter bank framing shall be made from extruded aluminium framing members
having a minimum thickness of 0.09". All members shall be cut to size and pre-
punched for easy assembly into modules of the size and capacity required.
2.1.5.3.2 The framing member shall be permanently jacketed to prevent the bypass of
unfiltered air. Vertical support members shall be provided if required to prevent
deflection of horizontal member, and shall not interfere with the installation or the
operation of the filter. The extruded members shall incorporate a separate track for
pre-filters. All filters shall be held in place with necessary fasteners which can be
installed without the use of tools. A factory installed positive sealing device for each
row of filters shall be incorporated in the framing system. Framing system modules
shall be supplied complete with all necessary accessories for field assembly.
END OF SECTION

23 40 00 - 4
SECTION 23 51 00
BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS

Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART - 1 GENERAL …………………………………………………………………...1
1.01 Scope of Work ..........................................................................................1
1.02 General Requirement .................................................................................1
1.03 Submittals.................................................................................................1
1.04 Related Works Specified Elsewhere ............................................................1
1.05 Quality Assurance .....................................................................................1
1.06 Maintenance Contract ................................................................................2
PART - 2 – PRODUCTS………………………………………………………………………...2
2.01 Prefabricated Metal Breechings ...................................................................2
2.02 Approved manufacturers: ...........................................................................4
PART - 3 EXECUTION…………………………………………………………………………4
3.01 Deisel Engine Particulate (Soot) Filter .........................................................4
3.02 Installation of connectors, breechings, and chimneys. ....................................5
3.03 Installation Of Fabricated Breechings ..........................................................5
3.04 Installation of dampers. ..............................................................................6
3.05 Cleaning. ..................................................................................................6
Khatib & Alami Breeching, Chimneys And Stacks

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 51 00
BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 Scope of Work
The Chimney Work shall consist of supplying, installing, testing and putting in operation
of a flue gas system including all accessories, as hereinafter specified and as shown on the
Drawings.
1.02 General Requirement
The whole assembly shall be designed, constructed and preferably installed by a reputable
chimney construction company with proven specialist experience and knowledge in this
type of construction.
1.03 Submittals
General: Submit each item in this article according to the conditions of the Contract and
Specifications.
Product data for each type of product specified. Include materials, dimensions, weights,
and accessories.
Shop drawings detailing installation and assembly of breechings and stacks, including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other construction
elements. Detail connections to equipment.
Thermal expansion to be absorbed in each element to avoid the need of installation of
traditional expansion bellows.
Engineering report certifying that stacks meet the load bearing requirements.
Maintenance data for all equipment.
The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are included in


Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing breechings, chimneys,
and stacks similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful
in-service performance and having a certificate test under BS 476 or equivalent European
standard certification.
Khatib & Alami Breeching, Chimneys and Stacks

23 51 00 - 1
Specifications
Comply with European standard EN 1856-1, rigid metallic chimneys, single or multiple
walls.
CE marking of the chimney granted by a certified body (TUV or similar)
Certification of factory production control (FPC) by a notified body (TUV or similar).
Certification of supplier software for calculation of chimneys sizing by TUV or similar.
Listing and labeling according to EN 1856-1; (Supplier brand to be on each element of the
chimney).
Single source responsibility: Obtain all system components from 1 source and by a single
manufacturer.
If fire resistance is required, chimney must comply to norm UNE-EN 13501-4:2007 and
can be used as a control conduit for fire smoke.
1.06 Maintenance Contract
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months full

maintenance service by, competent employees of the breeching installer. Include
preventive maintenance, and adjusting dampers as required for proper operation. Use parts
and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. Perform
maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.
Continuing Maintenance Service: provide a continuing maintenance proposal from
installer to the subcontractor, in the form of a standard yearly maintenance agreement, for
at least five consecutive years, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded.
State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future
renewal options.
PART - 2 – PRODUCTS.
2.01 Prefabricated Metal Breechings
A- General: The breeching and chimney shall be a complete system of the prefabricated
preinsulated double wall chimney manufactured under factory quality control
conditions with all components and accessories. The vertical seam of the inner wall
shall be continuously welded, with automated welding. The metal sheets of both the
inner liner and the outer shell of each element must have a safety-end, that is, they
must be bent at their extremes to avoid any personal injury while handling it.
B- Joining shall be made by locking bands with the application of manufacturer supplied
sealant.
C- Materials: Chimneys of low thermal inertia, manufactured in minimum thickness, light

material, high grade stainless steel classified as V2 according to EN 1856-1 for
corrosion resistance of the liner.
- Inner shell: For the Stainless steel 316L, the wall thicknesses are as follows:

23 51 00 - 2
Specifications
For Generators:
1- Ø ≤600 mm : 0.5 mm thick
2- Ø > 600 mm : 0.6 mm thick
For Boilers:
1- Ø ≤300 mm : 0.4 mm thick
2- Ø > 300 mm : 0.5 mm thick
- Outer shell
Ferritic Steel 430 or 444/ SS304 for generator flues of indoor installations and SS304 for
exterior installations; Galvanized Steel exterior jacket/ SS304 for boilers flues of indoor
installations and SS304 for exterior installations.
For standard Generators with the following fire rating: 4 hours stability and
integrity and 23 minutes of insulation ( BS 476, Part 24)
Minimum wall thicknesses, for Stainless steel 316L or 304, are as follows:
1- Ø ≤250 mm : 0.4 mm thick
2- 300 ≤ Ø≤550 mm : 0.5 mm thick
3- 600 ≤Ø ≤ 800 mm : 0.6 mm thick
Minimum wall thicknesses, for ferretic steel 430 or 444, are as follows:
1- Ø ≤250 mm : 0.4 mm thick
2- 300 ≤ Ø ≤800 mm : 0.6 mm thick
For Boilers:
Minimum wall thicknesses, for Stainless steel 316L or 304, are as follows:
1- Ø ≤300 mm : 0.4 mm thick
2- 300 < Ø ≤ 600 mm : 0.5 mm thick
3- 600 < Ø ≤ 1000 mm : 0.6 mm thick
Minimum wall thicknesses, for Aluminized steel (Aluzinc), are as follows:

1- Ø ≤300 mm : 0.4 mm thick
2- 300 < Ø ≤ 600 mm : 0.5 mm thick
- Insulation : Continuity of rock wool insulation in each element of density

100 Kg/m³ and ceramic fiber insulation at the joints of thicknesses mentioned below, for
generators and boilers, depending on the diameter and the application for optimized heat
loss and external wall temperature:
For Generators : 600ºC

The insulation thickness is 100 mm.
For Boilers: 450ºC

1- Ø ≤ 1000 mm : 50 mm
The specification for the insulation required for a particular application shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer.

23 51 00 - 3
Specifications
D- The system shall comprise a full range of starting components, Lengths, Tees and elbows,
load bearing components, flashings and terminals, necessary to provide a complete
system. Components shall be packaged at the factory to provide protection during
transit. The manufacturers catalogue number shall be clearly printed on all packaging.
E- All components including supports shall be supplied by the flue manufacturer,

components manufactured by the contractor shall not be allowed.
F- The flues shall discharge using preferably an open terminal.
G- Barometric Dampers: Adjustable, self-actuating draft regulators, or draft Stabilizers,

where required.
H- Working Pressure:
H1 =Application with high positive pressure u to 5000 Pa for generators.
N1= Application with negative pressure for boilers.
I- Temperature: continuous 600 deg. C for generators (450ºC for boilers), intermittently 1000
deg. C for generators.
J- Fire Rating: The system shall either have a 4-hrs fire rating (4 hours stability, 4 hours
integrity and 23 minutes of insulation BS 476, Part 24). The manufacturer shall submit
to the engineer test reports in support of the above.
K- For the standard generator range ( 4 hours stability, 4 hours integrity and 23 minutes of
insulation): individual expansion absorption at joints by having The inner and outer
walls working together on the male end of straight sections, while on the female end the
inner wall expansions freely with the effects of temperature. The outer wall on the
straight elements includes a bellow on the male end, which ensures correct absorption of
the expansions in the outer wall
2.02 Approved manufacturers:

- Dinak (Spain) / Silkerk (UK) / Expo Inox (Italy) or approved equal.
PART - 3 EXECUTION.
3.01 Deisel Engine Particulate (Soot) Filter

Contractor shall supply and install Diesel Engine Particulate Filters (Soot Filters) for all
of the standby generators (new and existing) to completely remove soot from exhaust
effluents.
The soot filter should be designed to oxidize carbon monoxide (CO), Hydrocarbons
(CxHy), partially oxidized hydrocarbons (CxHyO) into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water
(H2O) and to remove effluent particulates.
The performance of the soot filter should be as follows:

CO reduction 90%

23 51 00 - 4
Specifications
Hydrocarbon reduction 99%
Diesel particulate matter reduction 95%
The soot filter shall consist of catalytically-coated ceramic monolith containing long
narrow channels open at one end and blocked at the other. Particulate shall be trapped
and at high temperature the soot particles shall burn away and regenerate the filter for
maximum performance.
The soot filter should be installed in series with the generator muffler (silencer).
Soot filter shall be similar to MINE-X Soot Filter (LT) as manufactured by DCL or
approved equal.
3.02 Installation of connectors, breechings, and chimneys.

A- Install gas chimneys as indicated, according to manufacturer’s written installation
instructions. Locate to comply with stipulated minimum clearances from combustibles.
B- Seal between sections of positive-pressure chimneys according to manufacturer’s

installation instructions, using only sealants recommended by manufacturer.
C- Support chimneys at intervals recommended by the manufacturer to support the weight

of the chimney and all accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances.
3.03 Installation Of Fabricated Breechings

A- Install concrete inserts in formwork to support breeching independently of its appliance
connection.
B- Each change of direction shall be made by means of an “casy sweep” bend using a
combination of max. 45deg elbows and 135 deg tees.
C- Use the manufacturer load bearing support, lateral support, and extension brackets.
D- Provide adequate access throughout the chimney for maintenance and cleaning without
dismantling the chimney.
E- Provide a Condensate Collector throughout the system, firted with a screwed boss and
install necessary drain pipes.
F- Align breechings at connections, with smooth internal surface and 3-mm misalignment
tolerance.
G- Slope breechings down to appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point
piped to nearest drain.
H- Install accessories, dampers, fans, equipment, controls, and other supports.
I- Install the appropriate fire stops to ensure the 4 hrs fire rating.
J- Anchor breechings to building structure with bolts, concrete inserts, steel expansion
anchors, welded stods, C-clamps, or special beam clamps.

23 51 00 - 5
Specifications
3.04 Installation of dampers.
A- Install barometric and thermostatically operated dampers if needed according to
manufacturer’s instructions. Locate as close to draft hood collar as possible.
3.05 Cleaning.
A- After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burns, dirt, and repair damaged finish, including chips, soratches,
and abrasions.
B- Clean breechings internally during installation to remove dust and debris. Clean
external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth.
End of Section

23 51 00 - 6
SECTION 23 56 00
SOLAR ENERGY HEATING EQUIPMENT
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART - 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 SCOPE OF WORKS ............................................................................................................. 1
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................... 1
1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS .............................................................................................. 1
1.04 DESIGN ATTRIBUTES ....................................................................................................... 1
1.05 STATUTORY UNDERTAKINGS ....................................................................................... 2
1.06 DISCREPANCIES ................................................................................................................ 2
1.07 COORDINATION OF SERVICES ...................................................................................... 2
1.08 WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................. 2
1.09 SAMPLES OF WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................................ 2
1.10 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT................................................... 3
1.11 REDUNDANT MATERIALS .............................................................................................. 3
1.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................... 3
PART - 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 3
2.01 SOLAR PANEL .................................................................................................................... 3
2.02 SOLAR EXPANSION TANK .............................................................................................. 4
2.03 SOLAR STATION ................................................................................................................ 4
2.04 Solar Controller ..................................................................................................................... 4
2.05 Manufacturers:....................................................................................................................... 4
PART - 3 EXECUTION NOT USED ........................................................................................ 4
Khatib & Alami Solar Energy Heating Equipment

23 56 00 - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 56 00
SOLAR ENERGY HEATING EQUIPMENT
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORKS
A. Solar Panels
B. Expansion tanks
C. Control
A. The general requirements apply to the work of this Section.

B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which may affect the
work of this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with all other trades affecting or affected by the activities of this section.
Co-operate with such other trades to assure the steady progress of all operations under the
Contract.
1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. All of the foregoing works shall comply with the requirements of the following National
plumbing Code, Uniform Codes, BOCA, and Codes of Practice and the prevailing
Statutory Regulations applicable to these works.
1.04 DESIGN ATTRIBUTES
A. The Solar System installations are designed to achieve a standard of installation which
provides the following:
1. Domestic water heating
2. Durable materials of first class quality and installed for the purpose for which they
were intended in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Systems which maintain their integrity during their operational lives.
4. Fully accommodates the constraints of the establishment and its intended use.
5. The whole installation shall conform to the highest standard of Solar Engineering and
shall be safe and hygienic in operation.
B. The design requirements described above are detailed on the drawings and embodied in
this specification. The Contractor will be expected to provide a neat and workmanlike
installation which is efficient in operation.

23 56 00 - 1
Specifications
C. The Contractor shall, in the execution of these works, ensure that all pipework is routed in
a manner which conforms to the design requirements.
1.05 STATUTORY UNDERTAKINGS
A. Notice of any requisition or complaint or any communication whatsoever affecting the

works shown or specified which is made to the contractor by any Statutory or other
competent Authority, via the Architect/Engineer shall be immediately confirmed in
writing. The Architect/Engineer's written instructions shall be awaited before proceeding
further with any portion of such works referred to.
B. The contractor shall be liable for any loss or cost of any subsequent other work found to be
necessary by reason of his neglect to notify the Architect/Engineer at the time and in the
manner herein prescribed.
1.06 DISCREPANCIES
A. The Tendered shall identify any discrepancies between drawings, details, specification or
schedules and shall inform the Architect/Engineer immediately and request formal
instructions on the course of action to be taken.
1.07 COORDINATION OF SERVICES
A. The Contractor will be required to co-ordinate to ensure a planned approach to the

installation of the Works. All Works shall be installed so as to cause no hindrance or delay
to other trades.
1.08 WORKMANSHIP
A. The work is to carried out by fully trained and qualified personnel.

B. The Contractor is required to ensure that the whole of the installation complies with
Mechanical Engineering drawings and details, with full account being taken of any co-
ordination drawings that may be issued.
C. The respective services shall be installed to true alignment and to the levels indicated on
the drawings.
D. All services shall be supported in the manner described in the Specification, unless
particular manufacturer's requirements for support are more stringent than this
Specification, in which case the manufacturer's instructions shall be complied with.
1.09 SAMPLES OF WORKMANSHIP

A. The Contractor may be required to provide, free of charge, a sample of any of the specified
materials. Elements of workmanship having been approved shall form the basis of the
standard by which all other materials or workmanship are judged.
B. Should the installation fail to comply with the standard or quality previously approved,
then such work shall be rejected.
C. In the absence of specified samples being required, then the accepted standards of material

23 56 00 - 2
Specifications
and workmanship laid down in the relevant British Standards or Codes of Practice, or
equal approved shall apply.
1.10 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Substitution of specified materials or plant shall not be permitted without the written
consent of the Architect/Engineer.
B. In the event of non-availability of the specified material or plant, the Contractor shall
formally notify the Architect/Engineer and shall at the same time submit proposals for
alternative materials for the consideration of the Architect/Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall give notice in good time to avoid any disruption to the regular
progress of the Contract Works, and shall provide full details in justification of any
substitution which may be proposed. All alternative materials and plant shall conform with
the requirements of this Specification.
1.11 REDUNDANT MATERIALS
A. The Contractor will be required to remove all obstructions and redundant materials to
facilitate the installation of the Contract Works.
A. All products shall comply with and achieve third party certification where schemes exist
for particular products or methods of manufacture. Reference to specific manufacturers,
suppliers and specialist firms is made in this specification as an indication of required
standards and quality. Equal other products shall be acceptable subject to the approval of
the Architect/Engineer.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOLAR PANEL

Solar Panels shall be of the high quality Material. High efficiency flat glass panels
mounted horizontally in series. The panel should have an aluminum profile casing with
fixing groove on each edge and back sheet in aluminum treated against corrosion. A safety
glass window must be translucide with translucidity > 92%. With flat copper absorber
with selective coating & single pipe soldered drainable exchanger in sinusoid.
A. The total net area of the collector absorber is 2.5 m2. Max pressure drop 75 mbar. Service
temperature is 120 deg C. Stagnation temperature is 210 deg C. Max working pressure 6
bars. Test pressure to be 20 bars. Absorption factor to be 95%. Optical efficiency to be
80%. Max coefficient of transmission to be 3.5 W/m2K.
B. Panels to be complete with hydraulic connections, expansion compensators, with
galvanized metallic supports and weights. The system shall be filled with Ethelene Glycol
of 20% by volume.

23 56 00 - 3
Specifications
2.02 SOLAR EXPANSION TANK
A. Solar Expansion tanks shall be membrane type specific for solar installation, with
membrane that can withstand Glycol. Working temperature of 180 deg C at 10 bars
working pressure.
2.03 SOLAR STATION
A. Solar station shall be complete with all necessary equipment for a good functioning of a
solar system. The solar station is insulated with a rigid compact insulation. It shall be
complete with its supports, valves, pump, anti-thermo siphon check valve, pressure safety
valve, Air stop, fill in system, drain, and thermometers.
2.04 Solar Controller
A. Solar controller to control solar system with differential temperature control, with
complete interface to BMS.
2.05 Manufacturers:
A. De Dietrich
B. Buderus
C. Viessmann
D. Solahart
Or Equivalent
PART - 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION

23 56 00 - 4
SECTION 23 64 26
ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLER
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................... 1
1.1.3 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 3
2.1.1 SCREW TYPE CHILLERS (COOLING ONLY) ...................................................... 3
2.2 AIR COOLED CHILLER FOR AUDITORIUM (HEAT PUMP) ................................ 9
2.2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 9
2.2.2 CABINET ................................................................................................................. 10
2.2.3 COMPRESSORS ...................................................................................................... 10
2.2.4 EVAPORATOR ........................................................................................................ 10
2.2.5 CONDENSER........................................................................................................... 10
2.2.6 CONDENSER FANS ............................................................................................... 10
2.2.7 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT ...................................................................................... 10
2.2.8 ELECTRICAL BOARD ........................................................................................... 11
2.2.9 SAFETY AND CONTROL DEVICES .................................................................... 11
2.2.10 WITH HYDRO KITS ........................................................................................... 11
2.2.11 FACTORY INSTALLED REQUIRMENTS:....................................................... 12
2.2.12 FIELD INSTALLED ACCESSORIES ................................................................. 12
PART 3 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................. 12
3.1.1 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................... 12
3.1.2 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK................................................................ 13
3.1.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL................................................................................. 13
3.1.4 CHILLER START-UP.............................................................................................. 13
3.1.5 TESTING .................................................................................................................. 13
______________________________________________________________________________________________
Khatib & Alami Rotary-Screw Water Chillers
TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 64 26
ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLER
Part 1GENERAL
1.1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of Work: The extent of air-cooled chiller work is indicated by drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section. Each unit is defined to include (but not by
way of limitation), hermetic screw compressor, evaporator, air-cooled condenser, controls
and panel including gages and indicating lights, auxiliary components, accessories and
interconnecting piping. Required work also includes additional requirements as
compressor and fan, motor starters, vibration isolators and seismic (earthquake)
restrainers, evaporator insulation, anchor bolts and all required accessories by the
manufacturer.
1.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: A firm regularly engaged in manufacture of air-cooled chillers, of

types, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been successfully used in
similar service for not less than five years.
B. Certification: Certify performance of chiller at full-load scheduled values for

capacity, power load, chilled water leaving temperature and flow and fouling
factors. Include a report of expected performance at part-load conditions, for 80%,
60%, 40% and 20% of scheduled full-load capacity. Show data in terms of load
versus actual capacity.
For certified and expected performance capacities, include: Total heat rejection
values (including effects of transmission for purge and refrigerant transfer systems)
total power-input requirements, evaporator tube velocities.
C. Typical Performance Data: Prepare data for (ANSI/ARI 590) schedules full-load
capacity using "standard rating conditions" , part-load at 80%, 60% 40%, and 20%
of scheduled full-load capacity using "application rating conditions".
D. Certify that sound pressure level will not exceed scheduled values when tested in
accordance with ARI 575. Include report of expected sound pressure level with
chiller operating at scheduled capacity, and include also report of expected sound
pressure level for each schedule capacity including part-load capacities.
E. Ratings: Rate chiller in accordance with ARI 590.
F. Safety: Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, safety code for Mechanical

Refrigeration.
G. UL Labels: Provide chiller electrical components which have been listed and
labeled by Underwriters laboratories.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 1
Specifications
H. NEMA compliance: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical
Manufacturers Association standards pertaining to chiller motors and motor energy
management.
I. Standards for Design, Fabrication and Installation: Except as otherwise indicated,

comply with following:
1. ASME boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 8.

Provide ASME stamp on chiller showing compliance with ASME Code.
2. National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70).
3. ANSI B31.1 Power Piping code.
4. ASHRAE Standard 90-75, as applicable to air-cooled type water chillers.
Show compliance with, but not by way of limitation, minimum energy
efficiency ratio (EER).
1.1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit manufacturer's data on air-cooled chillers, including certified drawings showing

overall dimensions of complete assembly, operating weights, foundation requirements,
sizes, and locations of connection, accessories, auxiliary support requirements, and parts
lists. Include the following information:
1. Performance certifications and reports.
2. Wiring diagrams showing electric service for chiller electrical components, safety
devices and indicator lights.
3. Written instructions for installation and assembly.
4. Written listing of limiting conditions for chiller operation.
5. Written operating instructions including start-up, routine and normal operations,

regulations and controls and shut-down for emergency.
6. Written service instructions including manufacturer's recommendation on stocking

of spare parts, including gaskets and O-rings.
7. Report signed-by chiller manufacturer's representative, indicating that work has

been properly installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
8. Tool kit, including manufacturer's special tools and non-standard wrenches

required for servicing chiller.
9. Provide written warranty on air-cooled chiller work, agreeing to replace/repair

inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage,
improper assembly and failure to performs required. Include separate product
warranties as indicated (if any) for specific parts or products in the work. Provide
warranty signed by the Contractor.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 2
Specifications
10. Include manufacturer's standard product warranty, covering chiller operation under
normal conditions and use, where installed, operated and maintained in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. Provide product warranty period terminating 12
months after start-up of the chiller installation.
11. Special warranty period is one year after the date upon which the chiller is first
placed in sustained operation to fulfill a cooling-of-the-building requirement.
12. Special warranty period is 2 years after date of substantial completion.
Part 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 SCREW TYPE CHILLERS (cooling Only)
A) General
- The Contractor shall supply and install factory assembled ultra low noise air-
cooled packaged cooling only chiller. The number and capacity of which shall be
as indicated in the capacity schedule shown on the drawings.
- Each machine shall consist of at least two accessible hermetic fully modulating
screw compressors air-cooled condenser, evaporator, interconnecting refrigerant
piping, controls, safety devices, accessories, and control power transformer as
applicable to limit control voltage to 240 volts maximum. No phase to neutral
voltage shall be required. Each compressor shall have its independent circuit,
evaporator, condenser, microprocessor-based controls and a unit mounted motor
starter.
- The machine shall be completely charged at the factory with Refrigerant R410a or
R 134a. All factory wiring and piping shall be contained within the machine
enclosure. All electrical components shall be protected from the weather.
- The refrigerant circuit components shall include hot gas muffler, high side pressure
relief valve, liquid line shut off valve filter drier, liquid line sight glass, liquid line
solenoid valve and electronic expansion valve.
- Equipment supplied shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1 2016
- Each machine shall be enclosed in a sound attenuating, galvanized steel casing,

zinc phosphatized, with corrosion resistant finish, and shall be mounted on spring
type vibration isolators. Unit shall have primary coating and an acrylic weather
proof paint.
- Each machine shall be capable of operating satisfactorily at low outdoor air

temperatures.
- Chiller manufacturer shall provide for each chiller a certified factory run test
report.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 3
Specifications
- The manufacturer shall perform all field testing, balancing and final adjustment of
the refrigeration machines in accordance with the applicable provisions of the
relevant ASHRAE Standards.
- The following data shall be compiled and certified:
• Temperature of chilled water "In and Out".

• Chilled Water flow (gpm).
• Pressure drop in chiller (Feet of Water).
• Operating power consumption from measured voltage, amperes and power
factor.
• Chiller noise level (must be 55 dBa at 13 m).
- Any part of the machines or system failing to meet the contract requirements shall
be adjusted, repaired or replaced.
- Each chiller shall have protection grills & mounted on earthquake restrainers to
suit building classification.
- Chiller casing shall be capable of withstanding 500 hrs salt spray test in
accordance with ASTM B117 standard.
- Each packaged unit shall be factory equipped to connect to one electrical power
feeders with the necessary built-in circuit breakers, and one main disconnect
switch. Disconnect switch shall be accessible from outside the chiller without
opening the panel door.
- Each packaged unit shall be supplied with spring type vibration isolators flexible
enough to dampen any vibrations supplied by chiller manufacturer.
- Each chiller shall have sound proof enclosure on compressor, condenser fan air
intake to maintain noise level of 55 dBA, 13m away from chiller. Condenser fan
shall be of the low RPM type. Sound proof enclosure shall be factory assembled
and designed. Contractor shall provide additional sound treatment around chiller to
attain a maximum noise level of 30 NC in the nearest room and 45 dBA on Terrace
included in the unit rate of the chiller.
- Each packaged unit shall have a microprocessor control unit to provide all the
control and safety functions of the chiller with main circuit breaker for each
chiller.
- Chillers shall have complete BMS stand alone control station to perform complete
controls for chillers, pumps, valves, etc. Controller shall be connected to building
management system with pumps and all other equipment as indicated in electrical
drawings. Chiller shall have all the necessary interface to connect to the selected
BMS during execution.
- A computer interface shall be provided for all the chiller including all control and
electrical works. The remote PC interface shall be connected to all chillers at the
same time and shall display all the data available at each chiller microprocessor.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 4
Specifications
This interface shall support the logging of alarms and all operating parameters.
This item is provisional in case chillers interface with the selected BMS is not
possible.
- The chiller supplier shall train the project maintenance staff on the installed chiller
and the end of the training the attendees shall receive a certificate from
manufacturer for the operation and maintenance of chiller.
- Incase chiller was dismantled for lifting up to roof, the contractor shall execute all
works in the presence of the manufacturer who has to perform field tests to
guarantee that chillers are installed as originally fabricated and his warrantee is
valid for the chiller with no reservation.
B) Compressor
- The compressor shall be of the accessible hermetic (or semi hermetic) screw
compressor 3600 RPM and 60 Hz with sound proof enclosure.
- The compressor shall have separately housed pressure lubricated rolling element
bearing groups at each end of both rotors. (magnetic bearings are accepted)
- The compressor shall be of variable speed (or standard type) and shall have fully
modulating capacity control by use of a slide valve in the rotor section of the
compressors positioned by hydraulic action.
- The compressor shall have squirrel cage two pole induction motor, suction gas
cooled
- Compressor shall be provided with oil separator and filtration devices.
- The compressor shall have sound attenuating enclosure.
- Motor and starter shall be in accordance with the requirements of these

specifications regarding Electrical Equipment.
- Compressor motor shall be protected by internal overload thermisters.
- Each compressor shall be equipped with the following controls and instruments
and their respective connections:
• Variable frequency speed drive starters( or Part winding starters).

• Built-in automatic unloading capacity control unloaded starting.
• High and low pressure cutout with manual reset for the high pressure cut out
and automatic reset for the low-pressure cutout.
• Internal discharge check valve to prevent reverse rotation at shut down.
• Oil pressure failure cut out with manual reset.
• Suction and discharge refrigerant pressure gauges.
• Suction and discharge shut off valves.
• Oil Heater
• Oil pressure gauge.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 5
Specifications
• Oil drain valves.
- The gauges shall comply with these specifications regarding instruments.
- The compressor shall have hot gas discharge muffler and liquid line sight glass and
filter drier all as recommended by supplier.
C) Evaporator
- The evaporator shall be of the direct expansion shell-and-tube type, with

removable heads.
- The shell shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ASME Code for
Unfired Pressure Vessels.
- The tubes shall be made of seamless copper tubes of the individually replaceable
type. Support sheets shall be provided to prevent sagging of the tubes.
- The shell shall be completely insulated with 2"(50mm) thick urethane foam
insulation covered with a sheet steel jacket.
- The shell shall be provided with an electric heater cable under the insulation.
- The evaporator shall be supplied with the following controls and instruments and
their respective connections:
• Liquid line solenoid shut-off valve(s) and strainer(s).

• Electronic expansion valve(s).
• Control thermostat.
• Low limit thermostat (Freeze protection).
• Thermometer to measure the refrigerant gas temperature.
• Thermometers (well type) at the chilled water inlet and outlet.
• Pressure gauge to measure the refrigerant pressure.
D) Air-Cooled Condenser
- The Condenser shall be air-cooled, upward air discharge type.
- Each condenser fan shall be in its own compartment to eliminate cross flow of
condenser air during fan cycling.
- The condenser coil shall be made of seamless copper or aluminum tubes, with anti
corrosion to withstand salty sea water side atmosphere and fumes from generators
and boilers with a guarantee of 5 years from the date of substantial handover.
- The condenser shall have an integral sub cooler.
- The condenser fans shall be of the low noise propeller type, constructed of
corrosion resistant blades such as heavy gauge aluminum. The fan and drive shall
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 6
Specifications
be held in proper alignment. Fan assemblies shall be provided with heavy gauge,
close mesh, electro- galvanized fan guards.
- Fan motors shall be drip-proof type, with built-in over load protection, and starting
contactors. Motors shall be mounted on vibration isolators, and provided with
lubricated ball bearings.
E) Starter Panel
Chiller shall include a starter panel containing motor starter, disconnect switches with
fuses, 3 phase current transforment for motor overload protection.
F) Control Panel
a) Control panel shall be a microprocessor unit control module that provides all the
control and safety functions including startup and shut down, leaving chilled
water control, compressor and electronic expansion valve modulation, fans
sequencing, anti-recycle logic, automatic lead/lag compressor starting and load
limiting. Unit protective functions shall include loss of chilled water flow,
evaporator freezing, loss of refrigerant, low and high refrigerant pressure,
reverse rotation, compressor starting and running over current, phase loss, phase
unbalance, phase reversal and loss of oil flow. The unit shall include a menu
driven digital display that indicate the chilled water setpoint, current limit
setpoint, leaving chilled water temperature, evaporator and condenser
refrigerant pressures and temperatures.
b) the microprocessor shall have an LCD type display with a minimum of 32 characters
with all messages in English. Coded messages and LED displays are not acceptable.
LCD display to be with light-emitting diode back light for outdoor viewing of data.
The control panel section shall include high and low pressure gauges.
Microprocessor shall be able to equalize the number of starts and the operatings of each
compressor in the chiller and to alternative between compressors to have equal running
hours and start ups.
The microprocessor shall be able to display the following readings.
- Entering and leaving chilled water temperature.

- Ambient air température.
- Evaporator and condensing refrigerant temperatures and pressures.
- Compressor suction temperature.
- Present RLA for each compressor.
- Present line voltage.
- Compressor starts and running hours.
- Active set points :
Chilled water set point.
Current limit set point.
Low ambient lockout set point.
- Part failure diagnostics:
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 7
Specifications
Water temperature sensors
Refrigerant temperature sensors
Compressor contactors.
- Over 90 diagnostic and operating conditions.
1. Microprocessor to support the following functions:
• Password protection for critical parameters.

• Automatic control of compressor start/stop and load/unload.
• Automatic pump down at start-up and shut-down.
• Automatic control of anti-coincidence and anti-recycle timers.
• Automatic control of condenser fans, and evaporator pump.
• Water temperature control by monitoring the leaving and entering water
temperatures.
• Soft load function to prevent the system from operating at full load during the
chilled water pull-down period.
• Auto restart after a power failure.
• Safety shutdowns shall be date and time stamped with system temperatures and
pressures recorded. At least six previous occurrences shall be kept in memory.
• Discharge pressure control through intelligent cycling of condenser fans.
• Pro-active compressor unloading in response to high discharge pressure or low
evaporator pressure.
• Operating data or system fault shutdown history printout from a printer via an
RS-232 port.
• System safeties shall cause individual compressor systems to perform auto-reset
shut-down. Manual reset required after the third trip in 90 minutes. Safeties to
include : high discharge pressure, low suction pressure, high/low motor current,
high/low differential oil pressure, high oil temperature, and compressor motor
protector, compressor motor protector shall protect against damage due to : low
or high input current, phase reversal (reverse rotation), current unbalance, phase
loss, thermal overload of windings, and low voltage.
• Automatic control of alarm contacts for: low leaving chilled water temperature,
low voltage, and per compressor circuit: high discharge pressure, low suction
pressure, low or high motor current, low or high differential oil pressure, and
high oil pressure.
2. Microprocessor to include the following for connection to the BMS:
• On/off status contacts.

• Run signal contacts for each compressor.
• Demand load limit set point to be adjustable through the BMS using a0-10vDC
or 4-20mA signal.
• General fault contact.
• Shall receive remote Start/Stop dry contact signal.
3. The microprocessor shall display the following:
• Each circuit suction, discharge, and oil pressures and temperatures.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 8
Specifications
• Each compressor capacity control valve position.

• Fan operation.
• Last six faults-shutdown data.
• Cutout status and set-points for: supply water temperature, low suction pressure,
high discharge pressure, high oil temperature, low and high ambient temperature,
phase rotation safety, and low leaving chilled water temperature, compressor
motor current percent limit, fan control discharge pressure set point.
G) Training for chillers:
Provide training for Project Maintenance personnel. Training to include but not
limited to:
i. Unit operation and maintenance.

ii. Unit theory of operation and trouble shooting methods for all components.
iii. Service of all components down to compressor service and microprocessor
boards replaced.
iv. Checking unit for correct refrigerant and oil charge.
v. Unit refrigerant and oil charging and refrigerant recovery.
2.2 AIR COOLED CHILLER FOR AUDITORIUM (HEAT PUMP)
Air cooled water chiller, heat pump and condensing unit, multi-scroll compressors
2.2.1 General description
chiller have been designed to operate with R410A refrigerant and scroll compressors
ant to reach very high level of full load efficiency (EER up to 3,2 and
COP up to 3,3) and seasonal performances (ESEER up to 4,3), in line with
Ecodesign requirements.
All units are equipped with two separated refrigerant circuits, each one
equipped with 2 compressors (tandem installation)
chiller to be supplied with acoustic kit:
• Super Low Noise : the units are equipped with star connected fans,
fitted with a speed controller which allows the units to operate with a
very low rotation speed. Besides very low fan deck sound emission, the
chillers are supplied with compressors box and soundproof jackets on
compressors.
• condenser fans fitted with brushless EC fan motors to ensure low energy
consumption and low sound level
• Total Heat Recover (TR version): double circuit plate type heat exchanger
to recover the total heat rejected to the condensers. 4-way valves and
field installed control sensor are also provided to ensure the cooling/heat
recovery mode changeover
The general operation status of the unit is steadily managed by a
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 9
Specifications
microprocessor implementing a dedicated developed software, ensuring a total
protection of compressor inside its operating envelope and including parameter
customization according application field
2.2.2 Cabinet
The cabinet is made of heavy gauge galvanized steel.

All galvanized steel components are individually painted by a special painting
process before the assembly of the unit. This painting system performs a
homogeneous protection to the corrosion.
The painting is a polyester powder based type, colored in RAL 7040. The units
are suitable for outdoor installation, directly on the building roof or at the
ground level
2.2.3 Compressors
Compressors are of hermetic scroll type and fitted with an electronic control
system ensuring protection against high temperature and excessive load.
All compressors have direct-on-line starting and are mounted on rubber
vibration isolators in order to minimize noise and vibration transmission
2.2.4 Evaporator
Indoor heat exchangers are brazed stainless steel plate type. They are insulated
with a 19 [mm] thick closed cell polyethylene foam material and provided with
Victaulic connections.
They are protected by a antifreeze electric heater to ensure a good protection
against freezing at low ambient temperature when the unit is switched off.
Maximum working pressure is 10 [bar] water side and 45 [bar] refrigerant side
2.2.5 Condenser
Condenser coils are made of seamless copper tubes, arranged in staggered
rows, mechanically expanded into corrugated aluminum fins.
In Cooling only version (CO) condenser coils are microchannel type, made of
100% aluminium (fins, tubes and headers) with the exception of copper pipe
couplings. E-coating to be provided to further improve resistance to corrosion.
2.2.6 Condenser fans

Basic units (in all different sound versions) are equipped with axial fans, direct
drive with asynchronous three-phase motors.
Special fan with electronic brushless type motors are used in EC versions.
Fans are equipped with externally mounted nozzle profile housing generating
low sound levels
2.2.7 Refrigerant circuit

All the units are equipped with two independent and separate refrigerant
circuits.
Each refrigerant circuit is equipped with liquid line and discharge line shut-off valves,
filter-drier with solid core, sight glass and electronic expansion valve.
Heat pump units (HP) are additionally provided with 4-way reversing valves,
suction accumulators and liquid receivers.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 10
Specifications
Total heat recovery units (TR) are additionally provided with 4-way reversing
valves and liquid receivers.
2.2.8 ELECTRICAL BOARD

The electrical board is located in a metal case externally arranged at one end of the unit.
Case for the board with IP44 protection
rating, complete with grille for natural air ventilation of the box
2.2.9 Safety and control devices

Each unit is complete with the following safety and control devices
Safety
• Power disconnect switch with an emergency stop function
• Phase sequence control
• High pressure switches
• Low pressure switches
• Evaporator antifreeze electric heater
• Crankcase oil electric heater
• Water differential pressure switch
• Safety valve on discharge lines
Control
• High pressure transducers
• Low pressure transducers
• Discharge gas temperature probes
• Return water temperature sensor
• Leaving water temperature sensor (with an antifreeze function)
• Suction temperature sensor (for EEV control)
• Outdoor ambient temperature sensor
• Coil temperature sensors (HP only)
• Heat recovery temperature sensor (TR only)
2.2.10 WITH hydro kits

On board hydro kits to be supplied with buffer tank while remote
hydro kits are always provided with internal tank.
On board hydro kit without buffer tank are provided with following
components:
• double pump
• Expansion tank
• Check valves Tender Specification
• Safety valve
• Automatic air vent valve
• Thermal insulation for pipes and water pump(s)
• Safety valve
• Automatic air vent valve
• Thermal insulation for pipes and water pump(s)
• Antifreeze electric heater inside buffer tank
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 11
Specifications
2.2.11 Factory installed REQUIRMENTS:
• Lonwork protocol kit for BMS
• Bacnet protocol kit for BMS
• Compressors soft-starter
• Fan speed control for low ambient operation in cooling mode
• Compressor overload protection
• HP & LP gauges
• E-coating for Microchannel and Al/Cu coils
• Chiller grilles
• Compressor jackets
• On board hydro kits 2P with tank
2.2.12 Field installed accessories

• Remote ON/OFF control
• Remote keyboard panel
• Sequencer, up to max four units
• Master and slave control, up to max four units
• Anti-vibration spring
• Water flow switch
• Water pressure switch
• Water filter
• Remote hydro kits with buffer tank, 2 high pressure pump(s),
relevant accessories and with or without antifreeze heater
Part 3EXECUTION
3.1.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, install air-cooled chiller work, including

components and controls required for chiller operation, in accordance with chiller
manufacturer's instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that chiller
equipment complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.
B. Locate chillers in general position indicated in relation to other work. Position chillers
with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, including clearance for
cleaning and replacement of tubes and clearance for component replacement.
C. Install chiller on vibration isolation mounts and earthquake restrainers as herein before
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated.
D. Charge chiller with refrigerant in quantity recommended by chiller manufacturer.

Bleed-out non-condensable gases. Test chiller refrigerant system for leakage in manner
recommended by manufacturer.
E. Install pressure relief system in compliance with governing regulations, to vent

refrigerant in manner indicated.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 12
Specifications
F. Install auxiliary piping, solenoid valves, shut-off valves, protective devices, water
strainers and controls within chiller work, and for ancillary systems. Comply with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
G. Interlock flow switches with chiller controls in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, except as otherwise indicated.
H. Paint damaged and abraded factory finish with touch-up paint matching factory finish.
I. Install gages in positions where machine vibrations will not interfere with taking
readings.
J. Grounding: Provide positive, equipment ground for chiller equipment and components.
3.1.2 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK
Observe installation of other work (related and connected to chiller work) and after
completion check for inadequacies and protect operation and performance of chiller
work to suit chiller manufacturer's requirements and to the Engineer satisfaction and
approval, do not start chiller work until inadequacies have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer.
3.1.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer's Supervision: Chiller manufacturer shall supervise field assembly (if any)
and installation of chiller work, with a factory-trained technical service representative,
for a minimum of 2 working days, plus one additional day for each chiller unit in excess
of one. Prepare manufacturer's written report of installation. Include leak testing,
evacuation, dehydration, vacuum pumping, and charging in scope of supervision by
manufacturer's representative.
3.1.4 CHILLER START-UP
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, start-up chiller in accordance with chiller

manufacturer's instructions.
B. Sustained Operation: Do not place chiller in sustained operation prior to initial

balancing of mechanical systems affected by chiller operation. Refer to requirements of
Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing.
C. Cooperate with other trades of other work during the testing, adjusting, balancing and
start-up of mechanical systems.
3.1.5 TESTING
General: Except as otherwise indicated, test chiller in accordance with ANSI/ARI Standard
590.
• Carrier Corp. (USA, France )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 13
Specifications
• Trane Co. (USA, France )

• York Corp. (USA, England )
• Lennox. (USA, Euorope )
• Mcquay / Daiken (USA, Euorope)
• Smardt Chiller Group Inc. (Germany)
• SytemAir (Europe)
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________________
23 64 26 - 14
SECTION 23 72 00
AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL ..... ………………………………….…………………………………1
1.1 Scope of Work…………………………………………………………………………..1
1.2 Related Works Specified Elsewhere…………………………………………….....1
1.3 Codes and Standards…………………………………………………………………2
PART 2 PRODUCTS…………………………………………………………………………..2
2.1 Heat Recovery Wheel…………………………………………… ................................2
PART 3EXECUTION………………………………………………………………………..4
3.1 General Requirements……………………………………………………………….. .4
3.2 Spare Parts…………………………………………………………………………… .5
3.3 Special Tools…………………………………………………………………………….5
3.4 Guarantee and Warranteed Period………………………………………………… ..5
3.5 Operation and Maintenance Manuals……………………………………………… .5
3.6 Method of statement …………………………………………………… .....................5
Khatib & Alami Air to Air Energy Recovery Equipment

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 72 00
AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 The works covered under this Section shall include all the supply, installation,
testing and delivery in good operating conditions of a complete Air Recovery
System as described, shown detailed or implied in the tender documents of the
project.
more stringent specifications to be adopted.
1.1.2 The Contractor shall provide all the necessary components and accessories as well
as manpower, scaffolding, painting, testing facilities, etc... at his own expense to
execute a complete operable system.
1.1.3 The Contractor shall program his work such that it will not interfere with other
trades and to suit site requirements.


23 72 00 - 1
Specifications
1.3.1 Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards and
standards of items mentioned in this section shall conform to the applicable portions

Standard
American Society ASHRAE - -
of Heating
Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning
Engineers.
National Electrical NEMA - -
Manufacturers
Association
National Electrical NEC Section 424 -
Code
Air Moving and
Conditioning
Associations
AMCA - -
National Fire NFPA NFPA 90A Standard for Air Conditioning

Protection and Ventilation Systems
Association
American ARI -
Refrigeration
Institute
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Heat Recovery Wheel
2.1.1.1 Unless it is specified elsewhere, minimum sensible load recovery efficiency should
be seventy percent (70%)
2.1.1.2 The heat wheel shall consist of a casing, wheel media, drive unit, fresh air fan and
exhaust fan. An inspection cover for the drive unit should be provided on one end of
the heat wheel for inspection.
2.1.1.3 Casing shall have double skin panels, utilising fixed sectionalised modular sandwich

23 72 00 - 2
Specifications
panels of 30 mm thickness in air conditioned spaces or 50 mm in non-air conditioned
spaces, with not less than 70 kg./m3 density with mineral wool rigid insulation.
Panels shall be provided with integral profiled frames incorporating double hollow
rolled rubber seals to ensure optimal even sealing efficiency pressure & depression
sides, and shall be made of galvanized steel with painted finish.
2.1.1.4 Panels shall be internally impact and corrosion resistant, access doors shall be
provided with rubber seals and special fasteners, with service and inspection doors
on air inlet and air outlet side.
2.1.1.5 To prevent the wheel media from transferring exhaust air to the supply air duct, the
heat wheel shall be fitted with an adjustable purging sector, the sector is adjustable
from 0 to 6 degree. The rotor passages are blown clean in the purging sector. On
delivery, the sector is set at 0 degree.
2.1.1.6 Wheel media shall be made of alternating layers of flat and corrugated aluminium foil
and shall contain a desiccant material which eliminates carryover of bacteria and
airborne contaminants i.e. selective absorption. Desiccant shall allow only water
molecules to pass through it, rejecting all other pollutants of exhaust air. (Level
cross contamination shouldn’t be more than 0.04%).
2.1.1.7 Dust particles up to 800 micron shall pass through media without causing choking of
pores.
2.1.1.8 The centre of the wheel media shall consist of a hub with a shaft and bearings with
efficient seal provided in the clearance between the rotor and the casing to minimize
leakage between the supply air and exhaust air ducts.
2.1.1.9 Heat wheel section to be provided with drain pan under the heat wheel.
2.1.1.10 Enthalpy heat wheel shall be vertically positioned for vertical installed fresh air and
exhaust air unit combination, unless indicated otherwise.
2.1.1.11 Heat wheel consists of corrosion protected housing with double chamber divided with
brush gasket and inspection door for drive inspection maintenance.
2.1.1.12 The drive unit shall consist of an electric motor having constant speed of not more
than 20 – 25 rpm.
2.1.1.13 The face velocity shall not exceed 700 FPM (3.5 m/s.)
2.1.1.14 Leakage of exhaust air into the supply air and across the seals should be eliminated.
2.1.1.15 Pressure adjusting dampers can be used to balance the unit pressure difference if
required.
2.1.1.16 Purging sector should be correctly adjusted to suit the prevailing pressure conditions
so that complete purging of the wheel media will take place without any supply air
being lost. On the other hand, a certain proportion of the supply air will be
transferred to the exhaust air by carry over. This will take place at the point where
the wheel media moves over from the supply air duct into the exhaust air duct.
23 72 00 - 3
Specifications
2.1.1.17 The heat wheel shall be designed for operation at temperatures up to + 50 degree C.
2.1.2 Heat Wheel Exhaust and Fresh Air Fan Sections
2.1.2.1 The fan section shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel properly reinforced
and braced with steel angle framework. It shall be provided with suitable angle
flanges for connecting it to the coil section.
2.1.2.2 Fan shall be centrifugal type with multi-blade forward curved or air foil type,
mounted on a common shaft with enclosed housing. The fan motor shall be statically
and dynamically balanced to eliminate noise and vibration.
2.1.2.3 Fan bearings shall be grease lubricated ball type with grease lines extending to the
outside surface of the casing. Average life of bearing shall not be less than 200000
hours.
2.1.2.4 Fan shall conform to the design fabrication of the AMCA.
2.1.2.5 Fan shall be mastic coated and have galvanized steel wheel and high grade steel shaft.
2.1.2.6 Fan shall be driven by V-belt of variable pitch type. Belt guards of removable type
shall be provided on the fan and motor shafts.
2.1.2.7 The electric motor starter and controllers shall be in accordance with Electrical
section of these Specifications.
2.1.2.8 Cleanable Filter shall be provided on the fresh air intake side of the wheel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.1 he Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in triplicate bound, A4 size,
Instruction Manuals containing the following material:-
3.1.2 Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features.
year operation.

23 72 00 - 4
Specifications
3.1.8 Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor
3.2 Spare Parts
3.3 Special Tools
3.4.2 All guarantee shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor
preventative maintenance or service from the manufactures or suppliers of
equipment or according to the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1-2007 or equivalent as approved by DM/
Authority containing the following material:-
component

23 72 00 - 5
Specifications
year operation.
3.5.1.7 Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
3.5.1.8 The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to the
date.
which the installation of equipment & Services Installation is carried out for this
project
3.6.2 Purpose of this method of statement is to ensure that correct material and equipment
3.6.4 Method of statement to be reviewed by the commissioning engineer and approved by

the consultant.
END OF SECTION

23 72 00 - 6
SECTION 23 73 10
AIR HANDLING UNITS
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Scope of Work...........................................................................................................1
1.2 Related Works Specified Elsewhere......................................................................... 1
1.3 Codes and Standards ................................................................................................ 2
1.4 Design Conditions .................................................................................................. 2
1.5 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................... 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Air Handling Units .................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Variable Frequency Drive ....................................................................................... 8
2.3 Spare Parts...............................................................................................................9
2.4 Operation and Maintenance Manuals ...................................................................... 9
2.5 Guarantee and Warranted Period ........................................................................... 10
2.6 Method of statement ............................................................................................. 10
Khatib & Alami Air Handling Units

TOC -1
Specifications
SECTION 23 73 10
AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 The works covered under this Section shall include all the supply, installation,
testing and delivery in good operating conditions of a complete Air Handling Units
as described, shown detailed or implied in the tender documents of the project.
more stringent specifications to be adopted. Manufacturing of AHU’s should be in
accordance with ASHRAE 62.1-2016, section 5.
1.1.2 TheContractor shall provide all the necessary components and accessories as well
as manpower, scaffolding, painting, testing facilities, etc... at his own expense to
execute a complete operable system.
1.1.3 The Contractor shall program his work such that it will not interfere with other
trades and to suit site requirements.
1.1.4 The Contractor shall submit the total and external static head calculation
verification for Engineer approval.
1.1.5 A name plate shall be permanently affixed to every unit listing air volume, fan
static pressure, coil duties and heat recovery equipments ratings.
1.1.6 Lifting rings shall be provided on all individual components of 35 kg mass and
above for maintenance removal.

Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and control for HVAC

23 73 10 - 1
Specifications
1.3.1 Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards/
European Norms and United States Codes, unless otherwise specified, the
performance/manufacturing standards of items mentioned in this section shall
confirm to the applicable portions of the latest editions of the following codes,
standards and regulations.

Standard Standard
American Society of Heating ASHRAE -- --
Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers.
National Electrical Manufacturers NEMA -- --
Association
National Electrical Code NEC Section 424 --
Air Moving and Conditioning AMCA -- --
Associations
National Fire Protection Association NFPA NFPA 90A Standard for Air
Conditioning and
Ventilation
Systems
American Refrigeration Institute. ARI -- --
European standards/ EN -- --
Norms
1.4 Design Conditions
1.4.1 The air conditioning system is based on the following design conditions.
1.4.2 Outside summer conditions:
43.9 ˚C Dry Bulb.

18.9 ˚C Mean Coincident Wet Bulb.
13.9 ˚C Daily range.
5.9 ˚C Dry Bulb Winter condition

23 73 10 - 2
Specifications
1.4.3 The inside summer conditions are indicated on the Drawings in the units capacity
schedules.
1.5.1 Manufacturers of air handling units shall have ISO 9002 Certification.
1.5.2 The Air Handling Unit and all internal components such as “Coils, Fans and Filters
etc” should be manufactured to ISO 9002 (BS 5750 part 1) Quality Assurance
standards and ISO 14001 Environmental Standards.
1.5.3 The Air Handling supplier should supply the first line product, which should be
Eurovent Certified. The Eurovent certificate should show the product model,
range, factory name and Country of origin.
1.5.4 Electrical components required as part of air handling units, shall be listed and
labeled by UL and comply with IEE Standards.
1.5.5 Air handling unit fan performance, sound rating, coil performance and lubrication
should be as per EN 13053/ARI 430.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Air Handling Units
2.1.1.1 Each unit shall consist of fans, motors, V-belt drives, cooling-coil, heating coil
(when specified), drain pan, filters and necessary controls.
2.1.1.2 The unit shall be mounted on a suitable base. In all cases approved vibration
eliminators shall be provided. The Contractor shall submit details of bases,
mountings and connections to the Engineer for approval.
2.1.1.3 The unit(s) shall be of the draw thru Low/medium pressure type.
2.1.1.4 If not shown elsewhere in Acoustic Specialist Report the measured sound
transmission loss of the air handling units casing shall not be less than:
63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K HZ
24 22 26 37 44 53 55 dB

23 73 10 - 3
Specifications
2.1.1.5 The listed sound transmission loss is the minimum required sound reduction from
the fan chamber to the plant room for an air handling unit that has supply and
return ducted systems.
2.1.1.6 The contractor shall confirm to the Engineer the total static pressure of the fan
after the Engineer's approval on the air handler and after preparing the shop
Drawings.
2.1.1.7 Units shall be suitable for variable air volume application where specified in
capacity schedule.
2.1.2 Construction
2.1.2.1 Air handling unit shall be constructed of a heavy gauge galvanized steel with
removable panels for accessibility to all internal parts.
2.1.2.2 The unit panels skin thickness should be not less than 0.7 mm for outer and inner
skin. The panels shall be fabricated of aluminum sheet. (or pre plasticized or paint
finish).
2.1.2.3 All access doors shall be insulated to the same standard as the unit casing open
towards the high pressure side.
2.1.2.4 Full size hinged access doors with cam-locks and fixed handles should be
provided for inspection section, filters section, electric heaters section & fans
section.
2.1.2.5 Walk in units should have internal door handles and reinforced floors.
2.1.2.6 Air handling unit intake and discharge openings should be fitted with a flanged
duct connection frame.
2.1.2.7 All panels should be removable from outside the casing with quick release
fasteners and sturdy handles. the inspection doors should be hung on adjustable
hinges and equipped with mechanical secured sealing strips against the
framework and view window. The sealing strips should be of cellular rubber with
closed pores. The panel shall be mounted flush with the frame members to create
a smooth surface inside and outside.
2.1.2.8 Unit(s) installed indoor shall be factory insulated internally with fibreglass 40mm.
thick or approved equivalent and finished with oven dried gray finishing coat.
2.1.2.9 Outdoor exposed units shall be of the double skin type factory insulated with
fibreglass 50 mm. thick or approved equivalent and finished with oven dried
marine gray finishing coat suitable for outdoor application with anti corrosion
coating.
2.1.2.10 Outdoor exposed unit shall have additional sheet roof steel with epoxy coated
finish with a minimum of 150mm air space above the top panel and angled at a
minimum slope of 1:50. The roof shall overhang all sides by a minimum of
150mm.

23 73 10 - 4
Specifications
2.1.2.11 Outdoor exposed unit shall have the inner and outer panel skin should be coated
with minimum of 7 micro primer + 20 micro polyester + 10 micro epoxy paint or
reverse side. The walls from inside and outside should be completely smooth.
2.1.2.12 The installer shall provide the flexible duct connection and ensure that the duct is
suitably supported to ensure no deformation.
2.1.3 Fan Section (Plug fans)
2.1.3.1 The fan shall be single width, single inlet, multi blade type, plenum fan. The
blades shall be backward inclined airfoil. Airfoil blades shall be double thickness
design constructed of heavy gauge, high strength steel continuously welded to the
back plate and the spun inlet flange. Entire fan assembly cleaned, primed and
painted with alkyd enamel. They shall be designed for continuous operation at the
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fans shall have an AMCA class
rating corresponding to the static pressure at which the fan is designed to operate
(Class I, II, or III). Completed fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced to
minimum grade of G 6.3 per ANSI/AMCA 204-96 at design operating speed
using contract drive and motor if ordered
2.1.3.2 Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be designed for continuous
operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheels and
shafts shall be selected with a maximum operating speed 25% below the first
critical.
2.1.3.3 Fan shafts shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and coated with a rust
inhibitor
2.1.3.4 Fan motor shall be Premium efficiency type mounted within the fan section casing
on slide rails equipped with adjusting screws. Motor shall be high efficiency,
totally enclosed fan cooled NEMA Design B with size and electrical
characteristics as shown on the equipment schedule. Motor shall be mounted on a
horizontal flat surface and shall not be supported by the fan or its structural
members. All 3 phase motors shall have a ±10% voltage utilization range and a
1.15 minimum service factor. Motor shall be compliant with EPACT where
applicable.
2.1.3.5 Fan performance shall be rated and certified in accordance with ARI Standard
430.
2.1.3.6 Manufacturer shall publish first through eighth octave sound power for fan
discharge and casing radiated sound.
2.1.3.7 Fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, drives, and motor shall be mounted on a
common base assembly. The base assembly shall be isolated from the outer
casing with factory-installed spring isolators and vibration absorbent fan
discharge seal.
2.1.3.8 Fan bearings shall be Heavy-duty pillow block type, self-aligning, antifriction,
23 73 10 - 5
Specifications
regreasable roller type selected for a minimum average life (L50) of 200,000
hours.
2.1.3.9 V-Belt drives shall be designed for a minimum 1.5 service factor. Drives shall be
variable pitch, factory set for specified speed. All drives shall be factory mounted,
with sheaves aligned.
2.1.4 Cooling Coil
2.1.4.1 The coil shall be suitable for chilled water application.

2.1.4.2 For indoor units The coil shall be of seamless copper tubing, having aluminium
fins mechanically bonded to the tubes.
2.1.4.3 For outdoor exposed units:
2.1.4.3.1 The coil frame shall be galvanized steel. The thickness of the steel should be
suitable to carry the load of the cooling coil and not less than 1.2 mm. The coil
body shall be mounted on rails so that it can be withdrawn from the unit casing.
2.1.4.3.2 All coils should have failing circuit for complete draining for the coil and shall be
fitted with a sloping stainless steel drip tray double skinned and insulated with a
connection the outside of the unit. The drip tray shall be designed to prevent
water carry-over. The installer shall ensure that a suitable sealed trap is fitted to
the condensate outlet.
2.1.4.4 Capacities shown in documents should be net capacities after applying the
protective coil coating.
2.1.4.5 The fins should be in corrugated form to give good turbulent airflow. The fins
should be de-grease after punching and ultrasonic cleaned for solder joints. The
whole fin should be without any slots or holes for easy clean.
2.1.4.6 The tubes up to 3.2 m length should bent as a “hairpin” so no soldering has to be
made on the backside that results less risk for leaking. The return bends and the
above bent tubes should have the risk of erosion and to reduce the pressure drop.
The return bends shall be die formed.
2.1.4.7 The coil frame shall be galvanized steel. The thickness of the steel should be
suitable to carry the load of the cooling coil and not less than 1.2 mm. The coil
body shall be mounted on rails so that it can be withdrawn from the unit casing.
2.1.4.8 Drain pan shall extend 3” (75 mm) from the entering side face, 6” (150 mm) from
air leaving side face and 4” (100 mm) from face to drift eliminator, if exist.

23 73 10 - 6
Specifications
2.1.4.9 Cleanout plugs of copper construction shall be provided on return bends to
facilitate of internal surface of tubes.
2.1.4.10 The headers shall be of seamless copper with supply and return connections. Each
header shall be provided with drains and vents placed at the highest point of the
coil.
2.1.4.11 The coil shall be tested at not less than 350 psig.(2415 Kpa).
2.1.4.12 The coil shall be accessible for service and shall be removable without
dismantling the entire unit.
2.1.4.13 The face velocity shall not exceed 500 FPM. (2.55 m/s).
2.1.5 Heating Coil
2.1.5.1 Tubes: ASTM B 743 seamless copper, minimum 0.024 inch thick, 5/8" O.D..
2.1.5.2 Fins: Aluminium, minimum 0.006 inch thick. Maximum allowable fin spacing
shall be 10 fins per inch.
2.1.5.2.1 Rows: Maximum number of rows deep to be 8.
2.1.5.2.2 Casings: Minimum 16 gage, galvanized steel, with galvanized steel end supports
top and bottom.
2.1.5.3 Filter Section
2.1.5.3.1 The air filter section shall consist of a rough filter (Flat Filter) 50 mm thick
aluminium mesh and a fine filter (Bag Type) as specified on capacity schedule.
Pressure drop in the filter when dirty shall not exceed ½"WG (125 pa). Filters
shall be easily removable for cleaning and replacement.
2.1.5.3.2 The rough filter shall be part of the mixing box section.
2.1.5.3.3 Filters shall be provided with rigid self-supporting corrosion resistant steel frames
and clamps, jacketed and sealed to prevent air bypass.
2.1.6 Mixing Box and Dampers
2.1.6.1 The mixing box shall be of a mild steel, heavy gauge cabinet. The mixing box
shall include steel damper blades and rough filter section.
2.1.6.2 Fresh and return air dampers shall be so designed that complete mixing of the two
air streams is achieved in the mixing box. They shall be of the parallel acting type
and shall be mechanically interlocked.
2.1.6.3 The dampers shall have approved non-corrosion type bushings.
23 73 10 - 7
Specifications
2.1.6.4 Mixing box openings shall be provided with duct flanges.
2.1.7 Drain Pan
2.1.7.1 An insulated drain pan shall be provided in each unit under both the fan and the
coil section.
2.1.7.2 Drain pan shall be suitably connected to the drainage system. A minimum air
break of twenty five (25) mm must be provided between the condensate piping
and the waste water pipe. If the condensate is not be reused, it must be discharged
to the waste water system through a properly sized water trap.
2.1.7.3 Drain pan shall be suitably connected to the drainage system.
2.1.8 Controls
2.1.8.1 Each air handling unit shall be equipped with a control panel.
2.1.8.2 The panel shall include but shall not be limited to the following: circuit breakers,
motor starters, pilot lights, on/off push button, temperature controller, control
power transformer, as applicable, to limit control voltage to 240 volts maximum,
and all control wiring, no phase to neutral voltage shall be required.
2.1.8.3 PICV-Pressure Independent control valve , isolating valves, strainer and all
accessories as detailed on drawings.
2.1.9 Vibration Isolation
2.1.9.1.1 The air handling unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting
fan, motor and drive assembly on 25 mm deflection spring type anti-vibration
mountings. The fan discharge shall be connected to the air handling unit casing
through canvas connection to prevent vibration transfer.
2.1.9.2 Air Control Dampers
2.1.9.2.1 Dampers supplied along with AHUs, shall be opposed blade type. Dampers shall
be of aerodynamic construction fabricated from aluminium extrusions with
regulations ABS plastic gear wheel. Damper motor and fittings, including a
position indicator, shall be supplied loose for fitting on site by the installer.
Dampers shall be in accordance with CEN 3 (T4).
2.2 Variable Frequency Drive
(Refer to Electrical Specifications)

23 73 10 - 8
Specifications
2.3 Spare Parts
equipment supplied sufficient for three years of operation all in accordance with
the recommendations of the manufacturers of the equipment.
2.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in triplicate bound, A4
size, instruction and maintenance manuals and schedule based on the instructions
for preventative maintenance or service from the manufactures or suppliers of
equipment or according to the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1-2016 or equivalent as approved by DM/
Authority containing the following material: -
2.4.2 Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features. The
component.
2.4.8 Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor
2.4.9 The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to

23 73 10 - 9
Specifications
2.4.10 All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion
date.
2.5.1 All equipment and accessories supplied by the nominated Sub-Contractor under
this contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year and ten years
for the coil and casing against corrosion and deterioration from the date of final
2.5.2 All guarantees shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor
2.5.3 The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any manufacturing
2.6.1 Contractor is responsible for preparing method of statement to describes the

method of which the installation of equipment & Services Installation is carried out
for this project
2.6.2 Purpose of this method of statement is to ensure that correct material and
equipment and agreed Procedure are implemented during fabrication, installation
& testing,
installation and Testing to achieve to quality of workmanship for installation of
work.
2.6.4 Method of statement to be reviewed by the commissioning engineer and approved

by the consultant.
END OF SECTION

23 73 10 - 10
SECTION 23 81 00
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Scope of Work ................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Related Works Specified Elsewhere................................................................................ 1
1.3 Codes and Standards ........................................................................................................ 2
1.4 Design Conditions ........................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Quality Assurance............................................................................................................ 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 SPLIT SYSTEMS............................................................................................................ 3
2.2 AIR COOLED VRF HIGH AMBIENT SYSTEM ......................................................... 6
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................... 11
3.1 Spare Parts ..................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 Special Tools ................................................................................................................. 11
3.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals ............................................................................ 11
3.4 Guarantee and Warranted Period ................................................................................... 12
3.5 Method of Statement ..................................................................................................... 12
Khatib & Alami Decentralized HVAC Equipment

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 81 00
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 Units shall be completely packaged, factory assembled and factory charged, designed
for such Applications. Authority regulations and Sustainability requirements shall also
be considered and more stringent specifications to be adopted.
1.1.2 Each Unit shall have multiple refrigeration systems for efficient full and part load
operation as shown in the capacity schedules.
1.1.3 DX-Air conditioning unit shall have a minimum seasonal average COP of 3.4.
1.1.4 Air Conditioning Packaged units.

Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping

23 81 00 - 1
Specifications
1.3.1 Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards and
Reference Code Abbreviati Applicable Title of Standard

on Standard
American Society of Heating Refrigerating ASHRAE - -
and Air Conditioning Engineers.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA - -
National Electrical Code NEC Section 424 -
Air Moving and Conditioning Associations AMCA - -
National Fire Protection Association NFPA NFPA 90A Standard for Air
Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems
Amertican Refrigeration Institute ARI - -
1.4 Design Conditions
1.4.1 The air conditioning system is based on the following design conditions.
1.4.1.1 Outside summer conditions
43.9 ˚C Dry Bulb.

18.9 ˚C Mean Coincident Wet Bulb.
13.9 ˚C Daily range.
1.4.1.2 The inside summer conditions are indicated on the Drawings in the unit’s capacity
schedules.
1.4.1.3 Outdoor units to be selected at 115°F (46 °C) Dry Bulb

23 81 00 - 2
Specifications
1.5.1 Manufacturers shall have ISO 9002 Certification.
1.5.2 The Unit and all internal components such as “Coils, Fans and Filters etc” should be
manufactured to ISO 9002 (BS 5750 part 1) Quality Assurance standards and ISO
14001 Environmental Standards.
1.5.3 The Units supplier should supply the first line product, which should be Eurovent
Certified. The Eurovent certificate should show the product model, range, factory name
and Country of origin.
1.5.4 Electrical components required as part of air handling units, shall be listed and labeled
by UL and comply with IEE Standards.
1.5.5 The Unit performance, sound rating, coil performance and fabrication should be as per
EN 13053/ARI 430.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SPLIT SYSTEMS
2.1.1 Each split system shall consist of two major components, one condensing unit installed
out door and one blower coil unit installed indoor. Both units are interconnected with
copper pipes.
Each system shall be supplied complete with all necessary control wiring for its proper
operation.
Split units shall have a COP of 3.8 at AHRI testing conditions. The compressor shall be inverter
type.
Split unit shall meet the Following:
- HFC-410a shall be used which has ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential) ≈ 0 and GWP
(Global Warming Potential) of 1890
- The Lr (Refrigerant Leakage Rate) for the units shall not exceed 2%
- The unit Life shall not be less than 15 years
- The Mr (End-of-life Refrigerant Loss) for the unit shall not exceed 10%
- The Rc (Refrigerant Charge) for the unit shall not exceed 1.98 lbs of refrigerant per ton of
gross ARI rated cooling capacity

23 81 00 - 3
Specifications
2.1.2 CONDENSING UNITS
2.1.3 General
2.1.3.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings condensing units of the direct
expansion air-cooled type. Unit shall be factory-assembled into a compact, weather-
proof cabinet with common base size. Each condensing unit shall be complete with
casing, compressor, condenser, control panel, one main disconnect switch, vibration
isolators and all electrical power and control wiring necessary for proper operation.
2.1.3.2 Casing
Casing shall be at least 18 gauge, zinc-coated steel, phosphatized and painted externally
with epoxy resin primer and finished with an approved top coat. Casing shall have a
removable end panel, to allow for access to all components and connections, and die
formed mounting rails integrated with unit base. Casing shall be provided with drainage
holes in the base pan.
2.1.3.3 Compressor
Compressor shall be of the hermetic, reciprocating direct drive type with crank case
heater, discharge line sound muffler and suction and discharge valves. Compressor
shall have internal protection devices to provide protection for motor overload, locked
rotor, and excessive winding temperatures.
2.1.3.4 Condenser Coil and Fans
Coil shall be of the seamless copper tubes with heavy aluminium fins mechanically
bonded to the tubes, coil shall be factory pressure and leak tested at not less than 400
psig ( 2756 Kpa ) air pressure. Condenser coil shall be protected by heavy-duty grille.
Condenser fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced of aerodynamic design,

heavy duty motors.Each motor shall have built-in current and thermal overload
protection and permanently lubricated ball bearings . Fan motor shall be provided with
short circuit protective device(s).
Propeller Type Fans:shall be of the direct drive type with fan motor support mounted to
cabinet top. Fan shall have rugged steel guards for protection.
Centrifugal Type Fan: shall be of the double inlet forward- curved blades, belt driven
23 81 00 - 4
Specifications
with adjustable pulleys. Fan motor shall be capable to overcome specified static
pressure.
2.1.4 Control panel
Condensing unit shall be equipped with a factory wired built-in control panel
comprising : 24-volts control power transformer, magnetic contactors for compressor
and condenser fan motors, high and low pressure cutouts , non-recycling pump down
and reset relay, and all necessary timers, and control relays and protective devices.
2.1.5 BLOWER COIL UNITS
2.1.5.1 General
Supply, install, and connect ( refrigerent piping, power and electrical wiring ) wherever
shown on the Drawings factory assembled blower coil units consisting of casing, direct
expansion evaporator coil, fan, motor, insulated drain pan and throw away filters. Each
unit shall be supplied complete with expansion valve, drier, liquid sight glass, electrical
wiring and vibration isolators.
2.1.5.2 Casings
Casing shall be not less than 20 gauge steel with baked on enamel finish, lined with not
less than 13 mm thick, neoprene coated insulation. Casing shall be provided with
removable access panel for full access to all components , and shall be provided with
mounting holes for suspended mounting.
2.1.5.3 Coils
Cooling coils shall be seamless copper tubes with heavy aluminium fins mechanically
bonded to the tubes. Coil shall be complete with male couplers, and factory operating
charge of refrigerent and shall be factory pressure and leak tested at not less than 200
psig (1380 Kpa).
2.1.5.4 Fan Motors
Fan shall be of the double inlet centrifugal type with forward-curved blades , belt driven
,with an electric 3 speed motor having permanent split capacitor (for single phase
motors only),and built-in thermal over load protection. Fan and motor bearings shall be
of the permanently lubricated type.
2.1.5.5 Remote Control Station
Supply and install a remote control station wherever shown on Drawings complete with
thermostats, on/off switches, controllers and all components indicated on the Drawings
23 81 00 - 5
Specifications
together with all the control wiring and its connections to the blower & condensing
unit.
2.2 AIR COOLED VRF HIGH AMBIENT SYSTEM
2.2.1 General
Furnish and install variable refrigerant system, inverter driven heat pump air
conditioner for application with R410a refrigerants and consisting of outdoor
unit and matching multi indoor evaporator blowers. Each unit shall provide the
total & sensible cooling capacity shown on the drawings. Indoor units shall be
of the type shown on drawings. Units to be certified for capacity rating by an
approved international institute. VRV system shall be suitable for the existing
static height and pipe length between the condensing units located on balconies
and the indoor units located in attic of each apartment. Units shall be provided
with gas leak detector.
The split system shall be complete with a distribution refrigeration cycle,

electrical controls, wiring and enclosing cabinets. Split system shall be selected
to be used on 43.9°C ambient temperature (Operation range up to 46 °C).
The equipment shall be tested & certified according to Eurovent.

The system will have ability to perform capacity control from 3% up to 100%
of the nominal capacity. The capacity delivered by the system should always be
just enough to meet the buildings load.
Weather dependent variation function related to the refrigerant temperature is
required.
2.2.2 Outdoor Unit
2.2.2.1 the outdoor unit- and consequently the whole system- will keep operating even if one
compressor is turned off (emergency operation). In case of a multi-outdoor unit system
it will be possible to isolate one module, while the rest of the system will continue to
operate even if delivering reduced capacity. This way continuous air conditioning of the
premises is ensured, until the cause seizes to exist.
All refrigerant piping connections should be soldered. Mechanical connections

such as flanges, couplings or gaskets will not be accepted.
The outdoor units will incorporate a “soft start” technology, to achieve a very
low current in order to lower consumption, reduce power requirements of the
electrical board and minimize the stress of individual parts of the outdoor unit
(e.g. compressor’s motor).
The oil recovery from the piping network and the indoor units has to be
achieved by the use of a microprocessor. The oil will be recovered at least once
23 81 00 - 6
Specifications
every eight hours, via special oil recovery function, ensuring smooth operation
of compressors constantly.
All outdoor units should have an auto-charge function for adding the necessary
amount of refrigerant.
The condensing unit shall have night operation sound control which should
reduce noise level by 8 to 9 dbA.
2.2.3 Cabinet
The cabinet shall be constructed of enameled galvanized steel sheet with

polyester thermal powder coating (min 70 µ), the service panel shall be easily
removable for service access to the electrical components and the compressor
section. The bottom of the unit should have a sheet of galvanized steel for
protection against oxidation.
2.2.4 Refrigeration Cycle
Each refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with minimum of 2 scroll

compressors, solenoid valves, heat exchangers, accumulators, 4-way valves,
electronic expansion valves, oil separator, liquid and gas stop valves..
2.2.5 Compressor Protection
The compressor shall be protected against breakdown by a quick response over

current relay, a high pressure switch, a wrap-around type oil heater and a
discharge gas thermistor. Compressors shall be installed on vibration isolators to
be isolated from the cabinet floor.
2.2.6 Outdoor Fan and Fan Motor
The outdoor fan shall be the plastic propeller type, dynamically balanced, and
the fan shall be directly driven by a suitable Inverter DC motor for vertical-flow
air discharge. The fan motor shall be permanently lubricated and be protected
from ingress of water.
2.2.7 Outdoor Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned tube type,

equipped with highly-efficient aluminum fins with appropriate treatment
for protection and long life efficient operation against atmospheric
corrosion in order to provide minimum 5 times greater resistance to acid
rain & salt corrosion, mechanically bonded to oxygen-free copper tubes.
The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the
factory.

23 81 00 - 7
Specifications
2.2.8 Compressor
Compressors will have to be hermetically closed scroll type for greater

reliability over time, with integrated motor and sound absorbing jacket.
All of them will have to have a DC inverter driven motors will have the
possibility to continuous change the frequency, resulting in changing the
volumetric refrigerant flow from the compressor, in order to accurately
and fast respond to the change of delivered capacity can be approximated
as linear. The minimum number of capacity steps will have to be no less
than 100.
The motor windings will have to be specially constructed, in order to
achieve the safe and smooth operation to avoid hazards due to the
continuously changing of frequency and voltage. The compressors will
be protected by an electrical crankcase heater to prevent oil condensation
at low ambient temperatures.
2.2.9 Indoor Unit
2.2.9.1 Cabinet
The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet or finished

steel sheet, baked with synthetic resin-paint, with panel assembly
constructed of galvanized steel sheet for the ceiling duct type unit.
Type of cabinet shall be as indicated on drawings.
2.2.9.2 Refrigeration Cycle
The refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with a heat exchanger, an

electronic expansion valve, solenoid valves and flare connections.
2.2.9.3 Indoor Fan and Fan Motor
The indoor fan shall be the multi-blade centrifugal type, statically and
dynamically balanced, and directly driven by suitable Inverter DC
motor. The fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated. Three
operating positions Hi, Medium and low can be selected according to
the required conditions. Fan capacity and motor ratings shall be as
indicated on drawings and recommended by manufacturer.
2.2.9.4 Indoor Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned tube type,

equipped with highly efficient aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to
seamless, oxygen-free copper tubes. The fins shall be spaced at no
more than 12 fins per 25.4 mm. The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated
and tested for leakage at the factory.

23 81 00 - 8
Specifications
2.2.9.5 Air Filters
Air filters shall be cellular resin net type and shall have a minimum
efficiency of 60%.
2.2.10 Control
All electrical control devices shall be enclosed in the indoor and outdoor units.
Mains power wiring shall be provided by 3-phase 400v main isolators mounted
on the VRV condensing units and a 1-phase 230v fused spur located within 1m
of fan coil units.
Control wiring shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Separation between control cable & power shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.2.11 Thermostat
Local control will be provided via LCD intelligent & user friendly remote
controllers mounted within the occupied space, providing individual start/stop,
run/fail indication, set point adjustment and fault code diagnosis the controller
shall contain an internal temperature sensor, which can be used for system
control.
Controller Display
On/off selection
Set point adjustment (Range 16-32°c)
Fan speed adjustment
Heat/cool/auto changeover mode selection
Frost protection set point
Timer settings
Holiday period settings
Priority settings for restriction of local access for start/stop, heat/cool mode and
set point adjustment range limitation
Reset ability for malfunction codes and filter maintenance warnings
Indoor Units Monitoring Display

Room set Point
Room temperature display
Operation mode; Heating and Cooling (Where needed)
Display of number of devices operation within system

23 81 00 - 9
Specifications
a. Start/Stop operation, set point control, cool/heat mode selection, air volume
setting, air flow direction setting and enabling/disabling operation of the
remote controllers by group, zone or collectively.
b. Monitoring of operation status of the indoor units, filter change indication

and error code of the group or the zone.
c. Comprehensive schedule set up to start/stop the air conditioning systems.

This can be set for year, month, weekday, hour and minute. This will
enable normal day-to-day time clock functions as well as yearly holiday set
up. Up to 8 settings can be configured up to 13 months in advance and
allocated to various groups/zones.
d. Volt free forced stop input possible such as fire shut down.
2.2.11.1 Refrigeration Cycle
The refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with multi kit on all pipes branching as
recommended by A/C unit’s manufacturer.
The interconnecting refrigerant piping shall be manufactured from seamless

quality phosphorous dioxide soft/medium drawn copper to BS2781 Part II
ASTM, DIN 1754/8905, fully tested by the eddy current method, dehydrated and
capped.
The copper tubing shall be of a suitable thickness to be capable of withstanding
pressure test as detailed in the current revision of BS/EN378.
The copper tubing shall be suitably selected with a wall thickness capable of
withstanding the system operating pressures of refrigerant 410A, all as described
within the outdoor unit’s installation manual.
Pipework shall be supported and not secured at regular intervals not exceeding
1.5m.
Preferably to create a method of adequate support and containment, piping
should be laid on suitably supported galvanized cable tray, insulated and held in
position with plastic coated steel banding. Due care and attention shall be taken
at alla times to allow pipework to freely expand and contract naturally.
Insulation
All refrigerant pipework to be insulated with slip-on close cell elastomeric pipe
insulation, with a fire performance rating class “O” of the 16985 Building
Regulations, having a wall thickness of not less that 13mm. After
commissioning, all joints to be properly sealed to provide an adequate seal and
clearly marked for ease of identification.
Where required external insulation shall be protected with a suitable enclosure to

encase the piping, as to reduce the effects of Bird, Vermin and Environmental
attack.

23 81 00 - 10
Specifications
Refrigerant Pipework installation
Pipe work shall be installed by a VRF supplier approved installer in accordance

with the current revision of BS/EN378 and in accordance with VRF suplier
Design and installation and unit’s installation manual.
Brazing shall be carried out by skilled operatives, in accordance with the HVCA
Code of Practice-Brazing and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipe and sheet.
During brazing, oxygen free nitrogen shall be passed through the pipework to
display oxygen and ensure that oxidization does not occur.
Longest possible lengths of copper pipes shall be utilized to minimize joints on

site.
Appropriate refrigerant tools shall be utilized at all times. The use of hacksaw or
any tool that creates fillings is prohibited.
Pipework shall remain capped at all times other than when actually being
installed to prevent the ingress of moisture and contaminants.
Condensate Pipework
Condensate pipework shall be installed by approved installer in accordance with

supplier Design and Installation instruction and the unit’s installation manual.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Spare Parts
3.2 Special Tools
3.2.1 A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipment supplied,
adequate for 12 months’ operation shall be supplied by the Contractor at the completion
date of the project.
23 81 00 - 11
Specifications
preventative maintenance or service from the manufactures or suppliers of equipment
or according to the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1-2007 or equivalent as approved by DM/ Authority
containing the following material: -
3.3.2 Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features. The
manual shall be developed, updated as necessary, and maintained on site or in centrally
accessible location for the working life of the system equipment and component.
year operation.
3.3.8 Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
3.3.10 All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion date.
contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year and five years for
compressors from the date of final completion certificate.

23 81 00 - 12
Specifications
DX-Air conditioning unit shall have a minimum seasonal avarage COP of 3.4.
3.5 Method of Statement
which the installation of equipment & Services Installation is carried out for this project
Purpose of this method of statement is to ensure that correct material and equipment
and agreed Procedure are implemented during fabrication, installation & testing, This
method of statement specify sequence and methodology to be followed for the
Method of statement to be reviewed by the commissioning engineer and approved by
the consultant
END OF SECTION

23 81 00 - 13
SECTION 23 81 11
PRECISION A/C UNIT
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.01 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................... 1
PART - 2 PRODUCT ............................................................................................................... 1
2.01 CABINET AND FRAME CONSTRUCTION ................................................................ 1
2.02 FILTER CHAMBER ........................................................................................................ 1
2.03 FAN SECTION ................................................................................................................ 1
2.04 INFRARED HUMIDIFIER ............................................................................................. 2
2.05 ELECTRIC REHEAT ...................................................................................................... 2
2.06 ADVANCED CONTROL PROCESSOR ........................................................................ 2
PART - 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 6
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRECISION AIR CONDITIONING UNITS .............................. 6
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ........................................................................................ 6
Khatib & Alami Precision A/C Unit

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 23 81 11
PRECISION A/C UNIT
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
These specifications describe requirements for a precision environmental control
system. The system shall be designed to maintain temperature and humidity
conditions in the rooms containing electronic equipment.
The manufacturer shall design and furnish all equipment to be fully compatible with
heat dissipation requirements of the room.
A. Design Requirements
The precision environmental control system shall be a self-contained factory
assembled unit with down-flow air delivery. The unit cooling capacity shall be as
shown on the capacity schedules
B. Submittals
Submittals shall be provided with the proposal and shall include: Single-Line
Diagrams; Dimensional, Electrical, and Capacity Data; Piping and Electrical
Connection Drawings.
PART - 2 PRODUCT
2.01 CABINET AND FRAME CONSTRUCTION

The frame shall be constructed of welded tubular steel. It shall be painted using
coating process for maximum corrosion protection. The exterior panels shall be
insulated with a minimum 1 in. (25.4mm), 1.5 lbs. (.68 kg) density fiber insulation.
The main front panel shall have captive 1/4 turn fasteners.
2.02 FILTER CHAMBER

The filter chambers shall be an integral part of the system, located within the cabinet
serviceable from either end of the unit. The filters shall be serviceable from the front
of the unit.
2.03 FAN SECTION

The fan shall be the centrifugal type, double width double inlet, and shall be
dynamically balanced as a completed assembly. The shaft shall be heavy duty steel
with self-aligning ball bearings with a minimum life span of 100,000 hours. The fan
motor shall be mounted on an adjustable slide base. The drive package shall be two-
belt, variable speed, sized for 200% of the fan motor horsepower. The fans shall be
located to draw air over the A-frame coil to ensure even air distribution and
maximum coil performance.

23 81 00 - 1
Specifications
2.04 INFRARED HUMIDIFIER
The humidifier shall be of the infrared type consisting of high intensity quartz lamps
mounted above and out of the water supply. The evaporator pan shall be stainless
steel and arranged to be serviceable without disconnecting high voltage electrical
connections. The complete humidifier section shall be pre-piped ready for final
connection. The infrared humidification system shall use bypass air to prevent over
humidification of the computer room. The humidifier capacity shall be as shown in
the capacity schedules. The humidifier shall be equipped with an automatic water
supply system. The system shall have an adjustable water-over-feed to prevent
mineral precipitation.
2.05 ELECTRIC REHEAT

The electric reheat coils shall be low watt density, 304/304 stainless steel fin tubular
construction, protected by thermal safety switches, with capacity shown in the
capacity schedules and shall be , controlled in three stages.
2.06 ADVANCED CONTROL PROCESSOR

The Advanced control processor shall be microprocessor based with a front monitor
LCD display panel and control keys for user inputs. The controls shall be menu
driven with on screen prompts for easy user operation. The system shall allow user
review and programming of temperature and humidity set points, alarm parameters,
and setup selections including choice of control type. A password shall be required
to make system changes. For all user selections, the range of acceptable input
temperature, humidity, or time delay shall be displayed on the monitor screen. The
system shall provide monitoring of room conditions, operational status in % of each
function, component run times, date and time, and four analog inputs from sensors.
1. Control
The control system shall allow programming of the following room conditions:
a. Temperature Set point 65-85°F (18-29°C)
b. Temperature Sensitivity ±1° to 9.9°F (0.6 to 5.6°C) in 0.1°F (0.1°C) increments
c. Humidity Set point 20-80% R.H.
d. Humidity Sensitivity +1% to +30% R.H.
All set points shall be adjustable from the individual unit front monitor panel.
Temperature and Humidity Sensors shall be capable of being calibrated using
the front monitor panel controls to coordinate with other temperature and
humidity sensors in the room.
e. Predictive Humidity Control
The microprocessor shall calculate the moisture content in the room and prevent
unnecessary humidification and dehumidification cycles by responding to
changes in dew point temperature. In addition the system shall provide the
following internal controls:
f. System Auto-Restart
For startup after power failure, the system shall provide automatic restart with a
programmable (up to 9.9 minutes in 6-second increments) time delay.

23 81 00 - 2
Specifications
Programming can be performed either at the unit or from the central site
monitoring system.
g. Sequential Load Activation
During start-up, or after power failure, the microprocessor shall sequence
operational load activation to minimize inrush current.
h. Front Monitor Display Panel
The microprocessor shall provide a front monitor LCD backlit display panel
with 4 rows of 20 characters with adjustable contrast. This display shall be the
only operator interface required to obtain all available system information such
as room conditions, operational status, alarms, control and alarm set points, and
all user selections including alarm delays, sensor calibration, DIP switch
selections, and
Diagnostics. All indicators shall be in language form. No symbols or codes shall be
acceptable.
i. Alarms
The microprocessor shall activate an audible and visual alarm in event of any of
the following conditions:
• High Temperature
• Low Temperature
• High Humidity
• Low Humidity
• Main Fan Overload (opt)
• Humidifier Problem
• Change Filters
• Loss of Air Flow
• Loss of Power
• Custom Alarm (#1 to #4)
Custom alarms are four customer accessible alarm inputs to be indicated on the front
panel. Custom alarms can be identified with prepared (programmed) labels for the
following frequently used inputs:
• Leak Under Floor
• Smoke Detected
• Loss of Water Flow
• Standby Unit on User customized text can be entered for two of the four custom
alarms.
Each alarm can be separately enabled or disabled, selected to activate the common
alarm, and programmed for a time delay of 0 to 255 seconds.
j. Audible Alarm
The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm that is enabled by the operator.

23 81 00 - 3
Specifications
k. Common Alarm
A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface user selected
alarms with a remote alarm device.
l. Remote Monitoring
All alarms shall be communicated to the monitoring system with the following
information: date and time of occurrence, unit number, and present temperature
and humidity.
m. Control Type
The user shall be able to select the type of control the advanced microprocessor
will use. Selections available shall be intelligent, proportional, and tunable PID
(proportional, integral, and derivative gains). The intelligent control shall
incorporate control logic that uses Artificial Intelligence techniques including
“fuzzy logic” and “expert systems” methods to maintain precise, stable control.
If tunable PID is selected, the user shall be able to program each of the three
gains.
n. Analog Inputs
The system shall include four customer-accessible analog inputs for sensors
provided by others. The analog inputs shall accept a 4 to 20 mA signal. The user
shall be able to change the input to 0 to 5 vdc or 0 to 10 vdc if desired.
The gains for each analog input shall be programmable from the front panel.
The analog inputs shall be able to be monitored from the front panel.
o. Diagnostics
The control system and electronic circuitry shall be provided with self-
diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting.
The microcontroller board shall be diagnosed and reported as pass/not pass.
Control inputs shall be indicated as on or off at the front monitor panel. Control
outputs shall be able to be turned On or Off from the front monitor panel
without using jumpers or a service terminal.
p. Data Collection
The control system shall maintain accumulative Operating hours of
compressors, reheats, humidifier, fan motor and coil. The ten most recent alarms
shall be retained.
q. Communications
The microprocessor shall be compatible with all remote monitoring and control
devices.
2. Chilled Water System
a. Dual Cooling Source System
The dual cooling source system shall consist of an air or water cooled
compressor zed system with the additional of a chilled water coil, a modulating
control valve, and comparative temperature sensor. The system shall be able to
function either as a modulating chilled water system or as a compressorized
system, or a combination of both. The primary mode of cooling shall be chilled

23 81 00 - 4
Specifications
water. Switchover between the two cooling modes shall be performed
automatically by the microprocessor control.
b. Dual Cooling Source Three-Way Control Valve
The water circuit shall include a 3-way modulating valve. The microprocessor
positions the valve in response to room conditions. Cooling capacity will be
controlled by bypassing chilled water around the coil. The modulating valve
travel for dehumidification shall be proportional.
c. Dual Cooling Source Coil
The dual cooling source coil shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum
fins. It shall be located in the return air, before the A-Frame evaporator coil.
d. Flow Switch
The flow switch shall activate the alarm system should the chilled water supply
be interrupted. The switch shall be factory mounted and wired.
3. Miscellaneous Items
The computer room environmental control system shall be equipped with the
following components:
a. Disconnect Switch
The manual disconnect switch shall be mounted in the high voltage section of
the electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible from the outside of the unit
with the door closed, and prevent access to the high voltage electrical
components until switched to the “OFF” position.
b. Firestat
The firestat shall immediately shut down the environmental control system
when activated. The firestat shall be mounted in the electrical panel with the
sensing element in the return air.
c. Condensate Pump
The condensate pump shall have a minimum capacity of 100 GPH at 20 ft. head.
It shall be complete with integral float switch, pump and motor assembly, and
reservoir.
d. Liqui-tect Sensors
Provide two solid state water sensors under the raised floor.
e. Floor Stand
The floor stand shall be constructed of welded tubular steel frame. The floor
stand shall have adjustable legs with vibration isolation pads.
f. Floor Stand Turning Vane
A factory supplied, field-mounted turning vane shall be provided.
g. Temperature and Humidity Recorder
Provide a 7-day/24 hour temperature and humidity recorder of the full scope,
two pen, surface mounted type with 100 recording charts, one red and one blue
bottle of recording ink.

23 81 00 - 5
Specifications
h. Smoke Detector
The smoke detector shall immediately shut down the environmental control
system and activate the alarm system when activated. The smoke detector shall
be mounted iÇn the electrical panel with the sensing element in the return air
compartment.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRECISION AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

A. General
Install precision environmental air conditioning units in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations
indicated, and maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances.
B. Electrical Wiring
Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s electrical connection diagram
submittal to electrical contractor.
C. Piping Connections
Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory
mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s piping connection diagram submittal to piping
contractor.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Startup mainframe coolant units in accordance with manufacturer’s start up instructions.
Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION

23 81 00 - 6
SECTION 25 00 00
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Specifications
TABLE OF CONTANTS
PART - 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
1.01 SCOPE.............................................................................................................................. 1
1.02 RELATED WORK........................................................................................................... 3
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................ 3
1.04 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................. 4
PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 5
2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................ 5
2.02 NETWORKING / COMMUNICATIONS....................................................................... 5
2.03 STANDALONE DDC PANELS ..................................................................................... 6
2.04 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES GENERAL: ......................................................... 7
2.05 OPERATION INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 10
2.06 LABELING .................................................................................................................... 16
PART - 3 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................ 16
3.01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ...................................................................................... 16
3.02 ON-SITE TESTING ....................................................................................................... 16
3.03 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE .................................................................................... 17
3.04 TRAINING ..................................................................................................................... 17
3.05 SURGE PROTECTION ................................................................................................. 18
3.06 CONTROL POWER SOURCE AND SUPPLY............................................................ 18
Khatib & Alami Building Management System

TOC - 1
Specifications
SECTION 25 00 00
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install a complete Building Management System (BMS) to manage,
monitor, and control the operation of the entire Mechanical and Electrical Systems of
the project as required on Drawings and in Point Schedule. Failure to mention any
specific item or device on the drawings or in the point schedule does not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing and installing such items or devices in
order to comply with the intent of the Drawings and/or this Specification.
B. To obtain approval to use unspecified products as 'approved equals', Bidders shall
submit written requests to the Owner at least ten (10) working days before the bid date.
Requests received after this time will not be considered. Requests shall clearly
describe the system for which approval is asked, including all data necessary to
demonstrate that it meets all performance requirements of the specifications. Submitted
data shall be organized, tabulated, and annotated as follows:
1. Overall table of contents
2. Individual table of contents for each section
3. Tabulated list of included hardware and
4. Tabulated list of conformance to each paragraph of this specification, listing any
exceptions thereto
5. Specific description of hardware, firmware, and software as proposed
6. System Architecture applicable to this project
7. Detailed description of graphic and display software characteristics
8. Detailed description of DDC control software characteristics
C. Building Management System (BMS) Contractor shall provide:
1. A fully integrated Building Management System (BMS) UL listed and/or CE
approved, incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management,
equipment monitoring and control, as manufactured by:
a. Siemens
b. Johnson Controls
c. Honeywell
d. Kieback & Peter
Only North American and west European product are approved
2. Necessary enclosures and panels for all BMS control equipment and devices.
Installation shall comply with applicable local and national codes.
3. All components and control devices necessary to provide a complete and
operable Building Management System as specified herein.
4. All final terminations and connections to each stand-alone DDC Controller

25 00 00 - 1
Specifications
5. All 24V power (or any voltage less than 220V) required for the operation of the
BMS.
(All 230V and low voltage electrical control wiring exposed throughout the building
shall be run in conduit in accordance with the Electrical requirements as specified in
Division 26, the National Electric Code, and all applicable local codes.)
6. All programming modifications necessary to fine tune sequences during
commissioning and through warranty period of systems at no additional cost to the
owner.
D. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDES
1. All provisions and openings for water and air monitoring devices,
temperature sensors, flow switches and alarms furnished by BMS Contractor.
2. Installation of dampers and adjacent access doors for smoke; outdoor air, return
air, exhaust air, and ventilation dampers.
3. All package unit control panels.
4. Installation of all Valves and Actuators related to Building Management System
E. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDES
1. Electrical Contractor shall provide dedicated 230 volt, 20 amp circuits and circuit
breakers from normal and/or emergency power panel fed from UPS for each DDC
Controller (including ASC controllers of VRF IU’s, VAV’s, etc…). Run power
circuit within 1.5 meters of equipment installed and connected by BMS Contractor.
2. Necessary conduit and wiring for all BMS control equipment and devices.
Installation shall comply with applicable local and national codes.
3. All electrical work associated with the BMS control system and as called for on
the Drawings. This BMS control wiring shall be furnished and installed in
accordance with the Electrical requirements as specified in Division 26, the National
Electric Code, and all applicable local codes.
4. Surge transient protection incorporated in design of system to protect electrical
components in all DDC Controllers, Application Specific Controllers (ASC) and
Operator's Workstations (OWS). (Provide an external protection device listed
under UL 1449 with minimum clamping voltage of 400 Volts and surge current
capability of 26,000 Amps)
F. General Product Description
1. The BMS shall integrate multiple building functions including equipment
supervision and control, alarm management, energy management and historical data
collection.
2. The building management system shall consist of the following:
a. Stand-alone peer-to-peer DDC controllers.
b. Expansion I/O Modules
c. Stand-alone Application Specific Controllers (ASC's)
d. Portable operator's terminal(s) or local monitoring features
e. Operator Workstation(s) and/or Server(s) if required with customized graphical
display
f. Personal Computer Operator Workstation (32” LED screen)
g. Field devices including sensors and actuators
3. The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity
and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, DDC Controllers,

25 00 00 - 2
Specifications
Application Specific Controllers and operator devices.
4. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for
alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC Controller shall operate
independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management,
operator I/O and data collection. The failure of any single component of network
connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other
operational devices.
5. DDC Controllers shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands
and alarm reports directly to, any other DDC Controller or combination of
controllers on the network without dependence upon a central processing device.
DDC Controllers shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator
workstations without dependence upon a central processing device.
6. The BMS shall be open in nature and shall natively support at least the BACnet
communication protocol (Standard 135-2016 -- BACnet®--A Data Communication
Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks), and shall be able to
interface directly or using gateways to other industry standard protocols like
MODBUS, Lonworks, etc...
1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Specified elsewhere:
a. Sequence of Operation.
b. Variable Speed Control.
c. Basic Mechanical Requirements
d. Fans and motors
e. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
f. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
g. Equipment Wiring.
B. Materials furnished by the BMS contractor, but installed by others:
1. BMS Contractor to furnish the following to the Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning Contractor for installation by the HVAC contractor:
a. Control valves and temperature sensor wells for wet systems,
b. Location of openings for temperature, pressure, and flow sensors for water
systems
c. Damper Actuators for air systems
d. Location of all ducts and openings for temperature, pressure, flow, and
humidity sensors for air systems

A. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in production and installation of Building Management Systems and
shall be manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification
requirements.
B. System shall be installed using competent workmen who are fully trained in the
installation of BMS equipment.
C. Single source responsibility of supplier shall be the complete installation and
proper operation of the BMS and control system and shall include debugging and
proper calibration of each component in the entire system. The BMS must be

25 00 00 - 3
Specifications
supplied and installed by the same control contractor. Only Factory Authorized
Distributors will be considered for installation. The letting of separate contracts by the
prime HVAC Contractor for the Control System and a separate contract for its
installation by a third party installer is strictly prohibited.
D. Supplier shall have an in-place technical support facility within 80 Km of the site
E. All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulations, Part
15, Subpart B, Class A, governing radio frequency electromagnetic interference, and be
so labeled.
F. BMS controllers shall comply with,
UL 916 for Energy Management Equipment, a n d / o r E N - 6 0 7 3 0 - 1
G. Product shall be ISO 9002 Registered at the time of bid.
H. Design and build all system components to be fault-tolerant.
1. Satisfactory operation without damage at 110% and 85% of rated voltage and at
plus 3 Hertz variation in line frequency.
2. Static, transient and short-circuit protection on all inputs and outputs.
3. Protect communication lines against incorrect wiring, static transients and
induced magnetic interference.
4. Network-connected devices to be AC-coupled or equivalent so that any
single device failure will not disrupt or halt network communication.
5. All real time clocks and data file RAM to be battery-backed for a minimum 72
hours and include local and system low battery indication.
6. All programs shall retain their memory for a minimum of 7 days upon loss of
power.
I. The BMS Installer shall have a competent Project Manager who is able to answer
field questions, is aware of all schedules and schedule changes, and is responsible for
the BMS Installer's work and the coordination of their work with all other trades.
This Project Manager shall be available on site and shall respond to design,
programming, and equipment related questions. Failure to provide the above
services shall be considered a substantial breach of Contract Documents.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit 3 complete sets of documents/drawings to include the following sections.
These documents/drawings shall be submitted for approval to the Owner.
1. Company Profiles: To include the company profiles of the installer and the
manufacturer
2. Company Pre-qualifications: To include Resume’s of all personnel that will be
working on the project and the organizational chart of the company
3. System Description: To include a detailed summary of the proposed system
4. Data Points Schedule: To include the data point schedule specific to the project
with totals and spares
5. Sequence of Operations: To include the proposed sequence of operation of all the
equipment connected to the BMS
6. System Architecture: To include a detailed riser diagram of the proposed system
representing clearly the system architecture including the Server(s)/
25 00 00 - 4
Specifications
Workstation(s), Network, BMS panels, and the equipment connected to each panel
7. Compliance Statement: To include a Clause by clause compliance statement with
reference of compliance to manufacturer’s datasheets/manuals where applicable
8. List of Materials: To include the list of materials proposed for the project
9. Products’ Datasheets: To include all datasheets of materials included in section (8),
List of Materials
10. Products Manuals: To include manuals (or extracts from manuals) for sections
referred to in Compliance Statement
11. Quality Assurance: To include certifications, norms, approvals, and related quality
assurance documents
12. Project Reference List: To include the installer’s reference projects
B. Submit 3 complete sets of additional Shop Drawings to include:
a. System wiring diagrams including BMS panels internal layout
b. Floor layouts with Server(s)/ Workstation(s), Network, BMS panels’ locations and
connections to equipment including quantity and type of cables
C. Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accord with
the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed
copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Client prior to installation.
Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are
received.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 General Description

The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity
and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, standalone DDC panels,
and operator devices.
2.02 Networking / Communications

The design of the BMS shall network operator workstations and Standalone
DDC Panels. Inherent in the system’s design shall be the ability to expand or modify
the network.
A. Local Area Network
Workstation/DDC Panel Support: Operator workstations and DDC panels shall directly
reside on a single shared high speed Local Area Network such that communications
may be executed directly between controllers, directly between workstations, and
between controllers and workstations on a peer-to-peer basis.
Dynamic Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected
r e m o t e l y via WAN (Wide Area Network) or other forms of connections, shall have
the ability to access all point status and application report data, or execute control
functions for any and all other devices via the Local Area Network. Access to data
shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment.
General Network Design: Network design shall include the following
provisions:
High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from
multiple controllers, and upload/download efficiency between network devices. The

25 00 00 - 5
Specifications
minimum baud rate shall be 76 KBAUD.
Support of any combination of controllers and Operator Workstations directly
connected to the local area network.
Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either workstations,
DDC panels or the network media. The network shall include provisions for
automatically re- configuring itself to allow all operational equipment to perform
their designated functions as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple
failures.
Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being
lost.
Error detection, correction, and re-transmission to guarantee data
integrity.
Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data, and ensure alarms
are reported as quickly as possible in the event an operators device does not respond.
BMS Network shall be able to coexist on the same IP network with other networking
applications
Automatic synchronization of the real-time clocks in all DDC panels shall be

provided.
2.03 Standalone Ddc Panels

General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-
user, real-time digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of
modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power
supplies, and input/output modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be
supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the point list.
Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating
system and databases including:
Control processes
Energy Management Applications
Alarm Management
Historical / Trend Data for all points.
Maintenance Support Applications
Custom Processes
Operator I/O
Dial-Up Communications
Manual Override Monitoring
A. Point types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and
outputs:
a. Digital Inputs for status/alarm
contacts.
b. Digital Outputs for Start/Stop equipment
control.
c. nalog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, position measurements,
etc...
d. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, capacity control of
primary equipment, etc...
e. ulse Inputs for pulsed contact
monitoring.
Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion

25 00 00 - 6
Specifications
through the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, field controllers,
sensors, and actuators.
The system architecture shall support 10 % expansion capacity of all types of
DDC
panels, and all points types included in the initial
installation.
Communication Ports: Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two data
communication ports for c o n n e c t i o n t o o t h e r p a n e l s , a n d f o r simultaneous
operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, laptop
workstations, and panel mounted or portable DDC panel Operator’s Terminals.
Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without
interrupting the normal operation of the permanently connected devices.
Local Status Indication: The DDC panel shall provide a permanent local status
indication for each binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all
point conditions.
Integrated On Line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously perform
self- diagnostics, communication diagnostics and diagnosis of subsidiary
equipment. The DDC panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any
detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication
the diagnostic results shall be provided at each DDC panel.
Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminals, as
well as all field point terminals to suppress induced voltage transients with
IEEE Standard 587-1980.
Power fail Restart: In the event of the loss of UPS power, there shall be an orderly
shutdown of all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating
system software. Non Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller
configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock
and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
Upon restoration of UPS power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full
operation without manual intervention.
Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability
of reloading the DDC panel via the Local Area Network.
2.04 System Software Features General:

All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this
specification shall be provided.
The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part
of the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer
for execution.
Control Software
Description:
Pre-Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the
following pre-tested control algorithms:
Two Position
Control
Proportional
Control
Proportional plus Integral Control
Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative
Control Automatic Control Loop Tuning

25 00 00 - 7
Specifications
Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for
limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-
hour period.
Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive
demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays
between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
Power fail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall
analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy
scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.
Energy Management Applications:
DDC Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy
management routines:
Time of Day Scheduling Calendar Based Scheduling Holiday Scheduling
Temporary Schedule Overrides
Optimal Start
Optimal Stop
NIGHT SETBACK CONTROL
Peak Demand Limiting
Temperature Compensated Load Rolling
Fan Speed/CFM Control
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator
intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow operator customization. Programs
shall be applied to building equipment as described in the Execution portion of this
specification.
Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom,
job-specific processes defined by the operator, to automatically perform calculations
and special control routines.
Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a
custom process:
- Any system-measured point data or status.
- Any calculated data
- Any results from other processes.
- User Defined Constants.
- Arithmetic functions (+, -, /, square root, exponential, etc.)
- Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.)
- On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers
Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the
following:
- Time interval.
- Time of day.
- Date
- Other processes.
- Time programming
- Events (e.g., point alarms)
Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured
or calculated data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network.
In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and
all other DDC panels on the network.
Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator
messages and advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly

25 00 00 - 8
Specifications
send a message to a specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or
cause the execution of a connection to a remote device.
Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be
self- documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be
documented via graphical flowcharts and English language descriptors.
Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer and
direct alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall
perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator
interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms
from being lost. At no time shall the DDC panel’s ability to report alarms be affected
by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device, or communications
with other panels on the network.
Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the
point’s English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.
Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for
each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed
operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be
provided. Each DDC panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms
during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit
alarm reporting for each point.
The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point changes need to be
acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis
at a later date.
Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user-defined
list of operator devices or storage devices used for archiving alarm information.
Alarms shall also be automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary
device is found to be off-line.
Alarm Messages: In addition to the point’s descriptor and the time and date, the
user shall be able to print, display or store a 65-character alarm message to more
fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response.
Each standalone DDC panel shall be capable of storing a library of at least 250
Alarm
Messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the
panel.
Transactions Logging: Operator commands and system events shall be automatically
logged to disk in an industry standard database format. Operator commands initiated
from Direct-connected workstations, remote workstations, and local DDC panels shall
all be logged to this transaction file. This data shall be available at the Operator
Workstation. A utility shall be provided to allow the user to search the transaction
file using standard database query techniques, including searching by dates,
operator name, data point name, etc. In addition, this transaction file shall be
accessible with standard third party database and spreadsheet packages.
Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical data collection utilities
shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all
of the following ways:
Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DDC panels shall store Point History Files
for all analog and binary inputs and outputs.
The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all
analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored for the past
24
hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all
25 00 00 - 9
Specifications
problem- related events for the past day. Point History Files for binary or output points
and analog
points shall include a continuous record of the last ten status changes or commands for
each point.
Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone DDC panels shall also provide
high resolution sampling capability in one-second increments for verification of
control loop performance.
Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data
shall be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-
specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute
to 2 hours shall be provided. Each standalone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer
for trend data, and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 5000 data samples.
Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone DDC panels,
and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based
upon either user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become
full. All trend data shall be available in disk file format compatible with Third Party
personal computer applications.
Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically accumulate and
store runtime hours for binary input and output points as specified in the Execution
portion of this specification.
The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or
less.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime
Totalization. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is
reached.
Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically sample,
calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for
user-selected analog and binary pulse input-type points.
Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9
units (e.g. KWH, Gallons, BTU, Tons. etc.)
The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or
less.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
Event Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such
as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization
shall be performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a
minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2.05 Operation Interface

A. Basic Interface Description:
Graphical and Text-Based Displays: At the option of the user, Operator Workstations
shall provide consistent graphical or text-based displays of all system point and
application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units,
status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all operator
devices.
A minimum of five levels of access shall be

25 00 00 - 10
Specifications
supported.
A minimum of 50 passwords shall be supported at the central
station.
Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective
passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device, including portable or
panel mounted devices, shall be limited to only those items defined for the access
level of the password used to log-on.
User-definable, automatic log-off timers shall be provided to prevent operators from
inadvertently leaving devices on-line.
Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform
commands including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Start-up or shutdown selected
equipment Adjust set points
b. Add/Modify/Delete time schedules
c. Enable/Disable process execution
d. Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point
e. Enable/Disable Totalization for each point g. Enable/Disable Trending for
each point
f. Override PID Loop set points

g. Enter temporary override schedules
h. Define Holiday Schedules
i. Change time/date
j. Enter/Modify Analog alarm limits
k. Enter/Modify Analog warning limits
l. View limits
m. Enable/Disable Demand Limiting for each meter
n. Enable/Disable Duty Cycle for each load
Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated automatically or manually. As a

minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of
reports:
a. general listing of all points in the network
b. List all points currently in alarm
c. List of all off-points
d. List all points currently in override status

25 00 00 - 11
Specifications
e. List of all disabled points
f. List all points currently offline

g. ist of all points of the same type (e.g. Analog input, analog
output, etc…).
h. List all Weekly Schedules
i. List all Holiday Programming
j. List of Limits and Dead bands
k. List of all points with same engineering unit (e.g Amp deg. C, etc..).
Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user-
selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the
hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions shall
the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system
information.
Third Party Interface System data, including transactions, alarms, totalization files,
etc., shall be stored in an industry standard database format such that it is
compatible with off the shelf party database and spreadsheet programs.
Live BMS Data
Exchange
The Building Management System shall have the ability to interface to off-the-shelf
computer software programs (e.g., Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, etc.).The user
shall have the ability to “link” the computer programs directly to live, real-time
Building Management System data values. Systems that offer data exchange using
only historical, disk resident information will not be acceptable. BMS data value
“reads” and “writes” shall both be permissible.
Dynamic Graphic Displays: 1. Floor plan displays, and 2. system schematics (for
each piece of mechanical equipment; including air handling units, chilled water
systems, and hot boiler systems,) shall be provided as a part of this contract.
System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the
various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu
selection, or text-based commands.
Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow
values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations,
and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator
intervention.
Windowing: The windowing environment of the PC Workstation shall allow the user
to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze total
building operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be
viewed without interrupting work in progress.
Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow
the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.
The BMS contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols
depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters,
dampers, etc.,) complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal
reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.
System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control

25 00 00 - 12
Specifications
strategies and energy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System
definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system
operation and control.
The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation
necessary to allow an operator to independently perform the following functions:
a. Add/Delete/Modify Standalone DDC Panels
b. Add/Delete/Modify Operator Workstations
c. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers
d. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning
constants.
e. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point.
f. Add/Delete/Modify control loops
g. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications
h. Add/Delete/Modify time- (and calendar-) based programming. i.
Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point
i. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point k. Add/Delete/Modify
custom control panel
j. dd/Delete/Modify any and all graphic displays, symbols, and cross-references to point
data.
k. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords.
l. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages
Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, DDC

panels, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed
through configuration templates and graphical programming approach.
Graphical programming shall allow the user to define the software configuration of
DDC control logic for HVAC system control sequences, fan interlocks, pump
interlocks, PID control loops, and other control relationships through the creation of
graphical logic flow diagrams.
m. Graphical Programming
- Control sequences are created by using a user friendly graphical user interface. As
a minimum, graphic symbols shall be used to represent:
- Process Inputs, such as temperature, humidity, or pressure values, status, time,
date, or any other measured or calculated system data.
- Mathematical Process Operators, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, or
greater than, equal to, less than, etc.
25 00 00 - 13
Specifications
- Logical Process Operators such as AND, OR, Exclusive OR, NOT, etc.
- Time delays.
- Process Control Outputs such as command points, analog adjust points, etc.
- Process Calculation Outputs
Network-Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be
restricted to a single DDC panel, but shall be able to include data from any and all
other DDC panels to allow the development of network-wide control strategies.
Processes shall also allow the operator to use the results of one process as the input to
any number of other processes.
Sequence Testing and Simulation: A software tool shall be provided, which allows
a User shall be able to simulate control sequence execution and test strategies before
they are actually applied to mechanical systems. Users shall be able to enter
hypothetical input data, and verify desired control response and calculation results via
graphical displays and hard copy printouts.
System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system
definition shall be self-documenting to provide hard copy printouts of all configuration
and application data. Control process and DDC control loop documentation shall be
provided in logical, graphical flow diagram format to allow control sequences to
be easily interpreted and modified at any time in the future.
Database Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all standalone DDC panel
databases shall be stored in at least one Operator Workstation.
Continuous supervision of the integrity of all DDC panel bases shall be provided in
the event that any DDC panel on the network experiences a loss of its data for any
reason. Users shall have the ability to manually execute downloads of any or all
portions of a DDC panels data base.
Operator Workstation Description:
Operation Workstation shall be provided for command entry, information
management, network alarm management, and database management functions. All
real-time control functions shall be resident in the Standalone DDC panels to
facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability.
B. Workstations shall be general purpose, commercially available, personal
computers with sufficient memory and processor capacity to perform all functions
described in this specification.
C. Sufficient storage shall be provided to accommodate all fully configured point data
bases, all application databases, all graphics data bases, all user-defined reports, and all
historical data archival as described in this specification.
D. The display provided for system operation shall have a diagonal screen
measurement of no less than 15”.
Standalone DDC panel Local or Portable Operator’s Terminals: Each DDC shall be
capable of supporting an operator’s terminal for local command entry, instantaneous
and historical data display, and program additions and modifications.
There shall be a provision for both permanently mounting the standalone DDC
panel
Operator Terminal, or using it as a portable hand-held
unit.
The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall simultaneously display a minimum of 6
points with full English identification to allow an operator to view single screen
dynamic displays depicting entire mechanical systems.

25 00 00 - 14
Specifications
The operator functions provided by the DDC Operator Terminal shall include, but
not be limited to, the following:
Start and Stop Points
Modify Set points
Modify PID Loop Set points.
Override PID Control.
Change Time/Date.
Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling.
Add/Modify Set point Weekly Scheduling.
Enter Temporary Override Schedules.
Define Holiday Schedules
View Analog limits.
Enter/Modify Analog Warning Limits.
Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits
Enter/Modify Analog Differentials
View Point History File
E. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to all real or calculated points
in the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the network. This
capability shall no be restricted to a set of predefined “global points”, but shall
provide totally open exchange of data between the operator terminal and any DDC
panel in the network.
F. Operator access at all DDC panel Operator Terminals shall be identical to each
other.
G. The DDC panel operator terminal shall provide English language prompting to
eliminate the need for the user to remember command formats or point names.
Prompting shall be provided consistent with a user’s password clearance and the types
of points being displayed, to eliminate the possibility of operator error.
H. A multi-function touch pad shall be provided for point and command selection, as
well as parameter entry. To minimize the possibility of operator error, the DDC panel
Operator Terminal shall change and limit touch pad functions based upon an operator’s
password clearance, the function being performed, and types of points being displayed.
Screen displays shall clearly indicate only valid touch pad functions.
I. Context-Sensitive Help: On-line, interactive user’s “Help” manuals and tutorials shall
be provided. Based upon operator request, the “help” function shall provide general
system operating instructions, and specific descriptions of commands available in the
currently displayed menus.
J. Identification for all real or calculated points shall be consistent for all network
devices. The same English language names used at the operator workstations shall be
used to access points at the DDC panel Operator’s Terminal to eliminate cross-
reference or look-up tables.
K. In addition to instantaneous summaries, the DDC panel Operator’s Terminal shall
allow a user to view a Point History file for system points. Point History files shall
provide a record of value of analog points over the last 24 hours, at 30-minute
intervals, or a record of the last ten status changes for binary type points.

25 00 00 - 15
Specifications
2.06 Labeling
A. Provide labels for all field devices including sensors, transducers, thermostats,
and relays. Exception: Room temperature and/or humidity sensors shall not be labeled.
B. Labels shall be black laminated plastic with white letters and adhesive backing or
screw fasteners. Labels shall be located adjacent to device and permanently affixed to
device
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Sequence Of Operation
3.02 On-Site Testing

A. Provide the Owner's Representative with approved operation and acceptance testing
of the complete system. The Owner's Representative will witness all tests.
B. Field Test: When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify
transmission media operation before the system is placed on-line. The installer shall
complete all testing, calibrating, adjusting and final field tests. Provide a cross-check
of each control point within the system by making a comparison between the
control command and the field-controlled device. Verify that all systems are
operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of
power. Submit the results of functional and diagnostic tests and calibrations to the
Owner's Representative for final system acceptance.
C. Compliance Inspection Checklist: Submit in the form requested, the following items of
information to the Owner's Representative for verification of compliance to the project
specifications. Failure to comply with the specified information shall constitute non-
performance of the contract. The contractor shall submit written justification for each
item in the checklist that he is unable to comply with. The Owner's Representative will
initial and date the checklist to signify contractor's compliance before acceptance of
system.
D. Verify to the Owner's Representative in letter form that supplier has in-place support
facility. Letter shall show location of support facility, name and titles of technical
staff, engineers, supervisors, fitters, electricians, managers and all other personnel
responsible for the completion of the work on this project.
E. Submit in data sheet form.
F. Manually generate an alarm at a remote DDC Controller as selected by the
Owner's Representative to demonstrate the capability of the workstation to receiver
alarms within 5 seconds.
G. Disconnect one DDC Controller form the network to demonstrate that a single
device failure shall not disrupt or halt peer-to-peer communication. Panel to be
disconnected shall be selected by the Owner's Representative.
H. At a DDC controller of the Owner's Representative choice, display l o c a l l y o r on
the portable operator's terminal:
a. At least one temperature set point and at least one status condition, i.e., on or
off for a system or piece of equipment attached to that panel as well as for
points at another DDC/Controller on the network.

25 00 00 - 16
Specifications
b. The diagnostic results specified for a system or piece of equipment attached
to that panel as well as for a system or piece of equipment attached to
another DDC Controller.
c. The ability to add a new point to the DDC Controller locally or with the
POT and have it automatically uploaded to the workstation to modify
that panel's stored database without having to power down or take the DDC
panel off-line.
I. At an ASC of the Owner's Representative choice, disconnect the network connection
to demonstrate its lack of reliance on a DDC Controller to maintain full control
functionality.
3.03 Service And Guarantee

A. General Requirements: Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for
the successful operation of the entire BMS system for a period of one year after
completion of successful performance test. Provide necessary material required for the
work.
Minimize impacts on facility operations when performing scheduled adjustments and
non-
scheduled work.
B. Description of Work: The adjustment and repair of the system includes all
computer equipment, software updates, transmission equipment and all sensors and
control devices. Provide the manufacturer's required adjustments and all other work
necessary.
C. Personnel: Provide qualified personnel to accomplish all work promptly and
satisfactorily Owner shall be advised in writing of the name of the
designated service representative, and of any changes in personnel.
D. Systems Modifications: Provide any recommendations for system modification in
writing to Owner. Do not make any system modifications, including operating
parameters and control settings, without prior approval of Owner. Any modifications
made to the system shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance
manuals, and other documentation affected
E. Software: Provide all software updates and verify operation in the system. These
updates shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with the system
operators, and shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals,
and software documentation.
3.04 Training
A. The Contractor shall provide competent instructors to give full instruction to
designated personnel in the adjustment, operation and maintenance of the system
installed rather than a general training course. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar
with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. All training shall be held
during normal work hours of 8:00a.m to 4:30p.m weekdays as follows:
B. Provide a minimum of 8 hours of training for Owner’s operating personnel. Training
shall include:
1. Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals
2. Walk-thru of the job to locate control components

25 00 00 - 17
Specifications
3. Operator workstation and peripherals
4. DDC Controller and ASC operation/function
5. Operator control functions including graphic generation
6. Operation of local or portable operator's terminal
7. Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures
C. Provide a minimum of 8 hours of additional training quarterly for a period of one
year from final completion of the project.
D. Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of
the hardware and software, additional training must be available from the Contractor. If
the Owner requires such training, it will be contracted at a later date. Provide
description of available local and factory customer training.
3.05 Surge Protection

A. Contractor shall furnish and install any power supply surge protection, filters, etc. as
necessary for proper operation and protection of all DDC panels, ASC.s operator
interfaces, printers, routers, gateways and other hardware and interface devices. All
equipment shall be capable of handling voltage variations 10 percent above or below
measured nominal value, with no effect on hardware, software, communications, and
data storage.
3.06 Control Power Source And Supply

A. Contractor shall extend all power source wiring required for operation of all
equipment and devices provided under Division 21, 22, 23 and the Drawings if not
specified under Division 25.
B. General requirements for obtaining power include the following:
1. All control power for a given stand alone controller and all associated controls for
this stand alone controller shall originate from the same circuit.
2. All mechanical equipment which is supplied with emergency power shall have the
DDC controller supplied with emergency power.
3. Provide an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for all the system including
ASC’s. UPS shall protect against blackouts, brownouts, surges and noise.
a. UPS shall include LAN port line surge protection.
b. UPS shall be sized for a minimum of 7-minute full load runtime, 23-minute 1/2
load runtime, with a typical runtime of up to 60 minutes. Transfer time shall
be 2-4 milliseconds.
d. Provide a Maintenance Bypass Switch that allows input voltage to bypass the
UPS and directly power the connected equipment if an abnormal condition
prevents the UPS from supporting the load, or if the UPS is required to be
taken out of service.
C. Contractor shall provide controllers as required, in sufficient quantity to meet the
requirements of this Schedule of points with 20% spare capacity. Furthermore,
Contractor is responsible for ensuring adequate locations for the Direct Digital
Controllers panels so that they do not interfere with other requirements of the Project
and maintain adequate clearance for maintenance access. When Controllers are not
installed in Individual Enclosure and are integrated within the Motor Centers (indicated

25 00 00 - 18
Specifications
as MCC or CP) Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the adequate installation
spacing within the Electrical Panels even if this is not indicated on drawings.
D. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide enough controllers to ensure a
completely functioning system, according to the point list and sequence of operations.
END OF SECTION

25 00 00 - 19

Final Mechanical Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final Mechanical Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Smart Square Real Estate Company

SMART SQUARE PROJECT

SMART SQUARE PROJECT

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS…………………………………………………………... 1

PART - 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 2

2.01 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS……………………………………………… ... 2

PART - 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 2

3.01 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES……………………………………………………..... 2

Khatib & alami FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES

1.03 Codes and Standards

Reference Code Abbreviation Applicable Title of Standard

Khatib & alami Fire Protection Specialities

2.01 Portable Fire Extinguishers

3.01 Maintenance Schedules

Khatib & alami Fire Protection Specialities

PART - 1GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 1

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 1

1.02 APPLICATION ................................................................................................................ 1

1.03 SCOPE OF WORKS ........................................................................................................ 1

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................... 2

1.05 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ........................................................... 2

1.06 APPROVALS ................................................................................................................... 2

1.07 ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 2

1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL ................ 2

1.09 APPROVED MATERIALS ............................................................................................. 3

1.10 ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................... 3

1.11 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................ 3

PART - 2EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 3

2.01 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ..................................................................................... 3

2.02 TESTS .............................................................................................................................. 3

2.03 COORDINATION OF TRADES..................................................................................... 4

2.04 PERMITS ......................................................................................................................... 4

Khatib & Alami Common Work Results For Fire Supression

1.01 General Requirements

1.03 Scope of Works

Khatib & Alami Common Work Results For Fire Supression

1.05 Related Works Specified Elsewhere

1.07 Engineer's Drawings

1.08 Shop Drawings and Data to be submitted for Approval

Khatib & Alami Common Work Results For Fire Supression

2.01 Cleaning and Adjusting

Khatib & Alami Common Work Results For Fire Supression

2.03 Coordination of Trades

Khatib & Alami Common Work Results For Fire Supression

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 1

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ............................................................. 1

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 1

PART - 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 2

2.01 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ............................................................................................ 2

1.01 General Requirements

1.02 Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1.03 Codes and Standards

3. National Fire NFPA 14 Standard for the installation of

4. National Fire NFPA 101 Life safety code

5. American Water AWWA - -

2.01 Pipe Expansion Joints

1.01 APPROVALS ................................................................................................................... 1

1.02 REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................... 1

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ............................................................. 1

1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 1

2.01 PRESSURE GAUGES ..................................................................................................... 2

2.02 FLOW METERS .............................................................................................................. 2

PART - 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) ..................................................................................... 2